Data Flex_V2_Jul1984 Flex V2 Jul1984
DataFlex_V2_Jul1984 DataFlex_V2_Jul1984
User Manual: DataFlex_V2_Jul1984
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 366
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
D a
a F I
t
Version
1983.
Copyright ,c)
2.0
Software
Development
Appllcatfon
DATA
8525
Miamb
1984
ACCESS
e X
Data
Access
System
Corporation
CORPORATION
SW 129
1"ermce
33156
Florida
USA
Manual
Revision
Date;
07/18/84
COPYRIGHT
NOTICE
is copyrighted (C) 1981. l982p and 1983 by Data Access
worldwide.
Corporation.
All rights under this copyright are reserved
which
DataF1ex,
is an integral part of
including this manuañ
DataFlex, may not be reproduced,
transmjttedg stored in any manner in
form
in any
system
a retrieval
or through any means, e1ectrica17
mechanica'L
written
opticab manual or otherwise without the express
MiamL
FL
permission of Data Access Corporatiom 8525 SW 129 Terraceg
DataF1ex
33156,
USA.
DISCLAIMER
Corporation makes no representations or warrantiesn
or any Data
or implied, With respect to DataFlex, this manuab
including but not limited to warranties of
Corporation productg
purpose.
merchantability or fitness for a particular
Data
Access
express
Access
Access
Corporation reserves unto itself the right to make
enhancements,
revisions and alteration of any kind
periodic changes,
and/or its manual without obligation to notify any person,
to DataFlex
enhancements,
revisions
or organization
institution
of such changes,
and alterations
to the product.
Data
TRADEMARKS
DataFlex
and
Flex-keys
are
trademarks
of
Data
Access
Corporation.
trademarks
and registered
trademarks
are
of other companies
annotated
referred to at various points throughout this manual,
The owners
an asterfsk
(*).
of the trademarks are listed below:
The
MBASIC
CBASIC
CP/M
MP/M
WordStar
MailMerge
Pasca1/MT+
dBASE
PC-DOS
IBM
MS-DOS
II
Microsoft
Digital Research
Digital Research
Digital Research
MicroPro International
MicroPro International
Digital Research
Ashton-Tate, Inc.
Business
International
Business
International
Microsoft
Machines
Machines
with
A COMPLETE,
If
to
we use
us.
a
correction
UPDATED
or
WILL
MANUAL
Improvement
BE YOURS
to this
manual
.
.
which
.
you
submit
continually improving our manual to make the power of DataF1ex
is the chief source
easier to get to for the new user. User feedback
The Disclaimer on the
to the manual.
of corrections and improvements
preceding page says that we aren't obligated to provide you with
but
updates
to DataF1ex
or its manual.
if we use a correction or
send
improvement
you
us,
we'll send you a copy of the edition of the
(a)
which
manual
contains your update(sL subject to the following:
only the first
If we receive the same suggestion from several sources.
and
person
submitting the correction/improvement gets a new manual;
(b) If we use two or more of your suggestions in one new edition of
manual,
you still
(multiple suggestions still
our
only get one manual
of being first on at least one of the suggesincrease your chances
Access
Data
Corporation's decision in these matters is final.
tions).
does
A new manual
not include a new binder (the old one is re-usable).
We're
Herds
How:
out the form on the opposite side of this page indicating
have
multiple suggestions. please
suggestion is.
If you make
and phone
Please
make copies of the form.
your namep address,
Send
you win
a new manuaK
clear so that we can get back to you
the suggestion(s) to:
Just
what
fill
your
if
DOCUMENTATION
Data
Access
8525
Corporation
Terrace
Florida 33156
SW 129
Miami,
...and we'll
for helping
yours
is a winner!
get back to you
help others to get more of the power
us
if
Either wayy thanks
of DataFlex.
SUGGESTION
For
Improvement
of
the
Dataf1ex
2.0
Version
User's
Manual
From:
Submitted:
Name
Date
(A/C)
Phone
Address
Address
Zip
State/Prov.
City
Page
Country
Revision
Date
of
Height:
Page
Manual:
TYPE
OF SUGGESTION:
_
Correction of wrong information
Addition of missing information
C1aFification/Improvement of existing
Addition of new example
in.
x
Width:
inches
Number(s):
example
DETAILS:
the above suggestion to Data Access Corporation with full
I submit
tO9 wIth the
may wish
understanding
permission to make any use of
that compensation
to me for ito if any9 will be completely at the
I assume no liability for its
discretion of Data Acce9s Corporation.
completeness
or accuracy.
it
Signature
DataF1ex
Serial
Number
—
——
"=""""""'""""
—————
TABLE
====
~ ...
=,..'===
OF CONTENTS
———-— —
======———"="="—="====="""""""""""
'u'"
ORGANIZATION
Sequence
SECTION
ORIENTATION
Installation.
. . . .
System.
. . .
Development
Application
Runtime
System
Diagram.
Facilities
OPERATOR'S
. . .
DataFlex
of
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
Diagram.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
GUIDE.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
m'*
.
.
of Presentation.
Notational Conventions.
OPERATIONAL
AND ORIENTATION
OPERATION
A:
MANUAL
OF THIS
.
.
.
.
Definition of Terms - Operator.
How to Begin.
, . . . . . . . .
Flex-key Summary.
. . . . . . .
Command Explanations
Keyboard
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Sequence
Choosing
an Output
. .
QUERY to Generate
Using
a Report
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INSTALLING
OPERATING
QUERYING
DATAFLEX
TUTORIAL.
THE
DATABASE
Start-ljp.
Operation
Selections
Program
Program
Making
***
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION
B:
II
Creation
and
Maintenance
.
Configuration.
STARTING
PROGRAMMING TUTORÍAL.
. . . . . .
WITH IMAGES.
FORMATTING
. . . . .
"Pages"
Image
. . , . . . . . .
Images
Configuration
in DataFlex
DATABASES
DESIGNING
. . . . . . .
Organization of Data.
. . . . .
Data
Types.
. . . . . . . . . .
Indexing in Applications.
. . .
AUTODEF Program
. . . . . . . .
HOW TO WRITE A CONFIGURATION.
. .
Creating the Source File. . . .
How to Compile
a Configuration.
How to Run a Configuration.
. .
DATAFLEX
UTILITIES.
. . . . . . .
Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reindex
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Free
List (FREL).
. . . . . . .
Read.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
dBASE
How to Convert
Files to
1.6X to 2.0
Conversion
DataFlex
Menu
.
—
~ ~
.
.
.
.
.
.
WITH
.
.
.
DATAFLEX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
DataFlex
. . . .
(MENUDEF)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A-2
A-5
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-lO
A-13
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-25
A-33
A-41
A-41
A-43
A-44
A-44
A-45
'h'*
.
.
.
Files.
A-l
A-l
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-l
B-15
B-15
B-19
B-21
B-21
B-22
B-23
B-25
B-29
B-29
B-31
B-33
B-35
B-35
B-39
B-43
B-44
B-44
B-51
B-53
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
SECTION
*H
Indicators.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Q .
. .
.
.
.
. .
e .
. .
.
.
.
. .
« .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. O .
Q . .
Q e .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
q . .
. P .
. O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 . 0 .
ELEMENTS
,
*
Command
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O .
. .
. $ 0 .
. . . .
e ¢ O .
.
.
. O . O O Q .
P . Q . . . .
O O . O 0 . .
. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
,
.
O .
. .
.
.
Structure of an
Images
in ENTER
. . . .
ELEMENTS.
.
J
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O g .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 0 .
a . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O . . .
e , , U .
P . H . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
,
O .
. .
.
.
ENTER
.
.
.
.
Configuration
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
Q .
.
.
.
. . . . ,, . .
P 9 e . g U .
of ENTER. . .
.
.
Procedures
Command.
.
.
.
. . .
3 D .
.
O .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 . .
O O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
0 e 3 . . . .
, , O O @ . .
REPORT Macro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
U .
. .
.
.
Q .
. .
.
.
REPORTING
AND OUTPUT.
. .
The REPORT Command Macro.
.
.
.
.
Sections of REPORT. . . . 0
Subtota11ing and Tota11ing.
Selective Reporting . . . O
Page Control.
. , . . . . Q
Things
to Remember About the
1984
Data
,~
Access
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
of Operation
Indicator.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
3 .
.
.
Format
Options.
and AUTOPAGE.
Copyright (c)
.
.
. .
Q .
DATA ENTRY.
. . . . .
ENTER Command Macro
ENTER Sequence
ENT$PERMISSIVE
.
.
.
.
Command
ENTDISPLAY
.
.
.
.
Command
User-Oefined
.
.
.
MANIPULATING
DATA
MOVE Command.
. .
INCREMENT
Comnand
ENTRY
.
.
.
.
DATE Command,
.
INTEGER
Command
CALCULATE
.
.
.
.
Command.
STRING
NUMBER Command.
INDICATOR
.
.
.
.
DATA
DECLARING
.
.
.
Variables
Expressions . . .
Date
Variables. .
Date
Constants. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
Numeric
Filenames
.
.
.
Constants
Numeric
.
.
.
.
.
.
O .
. .
Q O .
Corporation
.
Manual
***
.
.
.
String Constants.
String Variables.
User's
2.0
FACILITIES
PRE-PROGRAMMED
C:
OF CONFIGURATIONS.
ELEMENTS
ENTRY
ENTRY
DataF1ex
OF CONTENTS
TABLE
ii
C-l
C-2
C-2
C"3
C-3
C~4
C~5
C-6
C~6
C—7
C-9
C-9
C-lO
C-lO
C-ll
C-12
C-13
C-13
C-14
C-14
C-15
C-15
C-17
C-18
C-19
C-19
C-21
C-24
C-26
C-27
C-28
C-31
C-31
C-31
C-34
C"38
C"41
C-45
05/16/84
2.0
DataF1ex
———
SECTION
-
Create
Related Fields.
Two
List the Fields.
to
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
the Files
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . .
Overlapping Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step
Three
Determine
the Key Fields . . . . .
Step
Four
Use FILEDEF
to Put It Ali Together.
Creating/Edlting
Fields . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indexes. . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating/Edlting
Print File Definition
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set
Fi7e Parameters/Names
. . . . . . . . . . .
Data
Erase
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set
File Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image.
Create
File Definition from Screen
. . .
Create
File Definition from .DEF File . . . . .
FILEDEF.
Save Definition/Exit
. . . . . . . . .
Abort FILEDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLE
APPLICATIONS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iii
(continued)
C
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
FILE
. . . . . . . .
Plan
Step
One
the Relationships Among
How
Step
OF CONTENTS
TABLE
Manual
User's
————————————————————
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C-47
C-48
C-50
C-53
C-54
C-55
C-56
C-60
C-63
C-65
C-66
C-66
C-66
C-66
C-67
C-67
C-67
C-69
P
SECTION
***
DIRECT
PAGE
CONTROL
Command.
OF DATA
.
.
.
.
ACCEPT Command.
.
DISPLAY
Command
.
AUTOPAGE Command.
ENTRY.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OUTCLOSE Command.
OUTPUT Command.
NAME Command.
.
FORMAT Command.
PRINT
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Command
. . .
ENTERGROUP.
. . . .
MANIPULATING
STRINGS.
LEFT Command.
RIGHT Command
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
Commands.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
Command
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CHARACTER
POS Command
. .
Command.
PAD Command
. .
TRIM Comnand.
.
APPEND Command.
UPPERCASE Command
CMDLINE
Command
.'.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
String Operations
CONDITIONAL
.
.
'H'*
.
MID Command
.
ASCII
Command
LENGTH
.
.
.
DATAFLEX
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
BLANKFORM
CLEARFORM and
OUTFILE
Command
PROGRAMMING
D:
EXEQ/TION
Setting Indicator Status.
Predefined Indicators . .
IF Test
. . . . . . . . .
.
D-l
D-l
D-l
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-4
D-5
D-5
D-6
D-7
D-8
D-ll
D-ll
D-12
D-13
D-13
D-14
D-14
D-15
D-15
D-16
D-16
D-17
D-17
D-18
D-19
D-20
D-24
D-24
—-————-————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
TABLE
iv
DataFlex
OF CONTENTS
SECTION
CONTROLLING
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
S. D .
. .
O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O Q e .
9 . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q P . .
. . D .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
P .
.
.
.
Q .
. . .
g . .
. Q .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
0 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
Q Q .
.
.
.
.
. .
P .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
D .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O O .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
U .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G .
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
END Command
. .
UNTIL
Command.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ABORT Command
.
BLOCKS AND LOOPS.
-
.
.
.
.
.
.
ON GOSUB Command.
.
RETURN Command.
. .
CHAIN Command
. . .
CMDLIME
Command
. .
DEBUG Command
. . .
ERROR Command
. . .
Command.
CLEARWARNING
-
.
.
0 .
.
ON GOTO Comand
GOSUB Command
BEGIN
REPEAT
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LOOP Command
REPEAT
. . Q .
WHILE ~ END Command
0 . . V P
FOR
FROM
TO
LOOP Command.
- CONTROL- OF THE
CONSOLE
DIRECT
.
SHOW Command.
. . . . . . . .
SHOWLN Command.
. . . . . . .
INPUT
Command
. . . . . . . .
GOTOXY Command.
. . . . . . .
CLEARXY Command
. . . . . . .
CLEARSCREEN
CQmmand
. . U . 0
KEYCHECK Cownand.
. . . . . .
INKEY
Command
. . . . . Q . .
SCREENMODE Conmand.
. . . . 3
MANIPULATING
RECORDS.
. . . . .
and FILEDEF
Database
Commands
Buffers.
File Definition
Record
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
D .
.
.
.
0
.
.
. . .
e & .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 . .
D 8 0
.
.
. .
G .
.
e
. .
U .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D .
. .
.
.
. . .
e P ,
. . .
0 3 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
q
.
.
.
.
. .
0 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
O .
. .
. .
SAVERECORD Comand.
CLEAR Command
. .
DELETE Comiand.
.
RELATE Command.
.
Command.
ATTAM
.
ZEROFILE
Command.
System
Files. . .
MANIPULATING
FILES.
.
.
.
,
.
0 .
.
.
.
.
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e
.
. . .
P 0 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
U .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Y .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
0 .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OPEN Command.
FIND
Command.
SAVE
Corrmand.
.
ERASEFILE
Command
RENAME Command.
COPYFILE
Cormand.
DIRECTORY
FILELIST
SYSTEM
.
.
.
.
Command
.
Cormand.
Command.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RUNPROGRAM Command.
.
REGISTRATION
Command.
SYSDATE
Command
.
.
——————-—————————-—
Copyright (c) 1984 Data
.
.
.
a Q .
Q O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
O .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
e .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G D .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
D .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Access
Manual
(continued)
D
SEQUENCE.
EXECUTION
GOTO Command.
User's
2.0
Corporation
D-29
D-29
D-30
D-30
D-31
D-31
D-32
D-32
D-33
D-33
D-34
D-34
D-35
D-35
D-35
D-36
D-37
D-37
D-39
D-39
D-40
D-40
D-41
D-41
0~42
D-42
D-43
D-43
D-45
D-45
D-45
D-46
D-47
D-48
D-51
D-51
D-52
D-52
D-52
D-53
D-54
0~54
D-55
D-55
D-55
D-56
D-56
D-56
0~57
D-58
D-58
D-58
05/16/84
Manual
2.0 User's
DataFlex
OF CONTENTS
TABLE
—————————————————————————————————————
SECTION
DIRECT
INPUT
DIRECT_INPUT
AND OUTPUT
Command.
DIRECT_0UTPUT
CL0SE_INPUT
READ
.
.
.
.
and SEQEOL
WRITE Command
. .
WRITELN
Command
.
Command.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Key
ENTAGAIN
ENTERMODE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
Commands
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ADVANCED
E:
.
.
Indicators
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
Under
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
ENTER Macro.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . .
AND WINDOWINDEX.
. . .
AND EXTENDING
DATAFLEX.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cand.
Command
.
.
Operation
.
.
Command
Command
.
.
.
,
.
.
CHECK Macro
Symbol-Checking
Internal
Cmmand
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Characters.
of Symbols.
Typing
***
.
the
SECTION
RESERVED WORDS OF DATAFLEX.
.
FILES,
ARGUMENTS AND COMMANDS
APPENDIX
F:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Arguments.
. . . .
Format
and Entry Options
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
List
Command
Syntax
SPECIFICATIONS.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
COMPILER
ERROR NESSAGES
. .
RUNTIME
ERRORS AND DIAGNOSIS.
GLOSSARY.
. .
OF ASCII
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
CODES.
.
.
.
D-62
D-62
D-62
D-64
D-65
D-66
D-67
D-67
E-l
E-2
E-2
E-4
E-4
E-4
E-5
E-7
E-8
E-9
E-9
E-9
E-9
E-lO
E-lO
E-ll
E-13
E-14
E-14
E-16
E-16
E~l7
E-18
E-19
E-20
***
.
.
Predefined
D-61
D-61
*'H'
.
Definition.
. .
Include Files . . . . .
Compile
Time
Variables.
Conditionals.
. . . . .
.
CONFIGURATION
.
Command
'-lfjEX
.
.
.
Replacement
TP'3LE
.
.
.
,
REREAD Command.
.
IFMANGE
Command.
Window
.
.
.
SECTION
LOCK Command.
.
UNLOCK Command.
DESPOOL
.
.
.
Procedures.
Multi-User
FIELDINDEX
MODIFYING
.
.
.
.
.
.
BACKFIELD
Command
.
HELP Command.
. . .
MULTI-USER
FUNCTIONS.
SETOANGE
.
.
.
.
Predefined Indicators
USING FUNCTION
KEYS
.
Using
the Flex-key
Using
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reporting Without Report.
***
.
.
.
.
Command
. .
& CL0SE_OUTPUT
Command.
READLN
SEQEOF
.
.
(continued)
U
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F-l
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-9
F-13
F-19
F-35
F-41
F-43
==========""
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
v
vi
TABLE
DataF1ex
OF CONTENTS
Menu.
Master
Screen
Screen
Screen
A-l A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
B-6
Sample
Screen
B-7
Configuration
Configuration.
Sample
Screen
B-8
"PERSON'4
Sample
Sample
Screen
Screen
B-9
Menu
Menu
Sample
Sample
Sample
Screen
Screen
Screen
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Screen
Sample
Sample
Screen
Screen
Sample
Screen
Sample
Screen
Sample
Sample
Screen
Screen
Vendor
Demo
Master
List-Demo
Record,
Personnel
File
-
B-lO B-ll C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-16
D-17
-
Configuration
Configuration
Conflguration
Sample
Configuration
C-13
-
Sample
C-14
C-15
Sample
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
-
Sample
Configuration
E-21
C-8
C-16
C-17
D-18
D-19
E-20
.
.
1984
Data
B-5
in
Select to Run
. . .
Sample
.
.
.
.
. . .
Data.
.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
.
.
B-9
B-17
.
.
B-53
B-54
. . . . .
. . . . .
and Editing
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O e
C-59
C-60
C-70
C-81
C-86
0
Initial Entry . .
File, After AUTODEF . . .
Personnel
File, After Customization
"PERSON"
Entry Screen
. . . . , , .
"PERSON"
Plus "JOB" . . . O . . . .
Date
Systtm
Dfsp1ay/Entry O . Q . .
Simple
ENTER Configuration.
. . O .
Using
ENTER Configuration
Procedures
User-Oefined
. . . 0 . .
Using
ENTER Configuration
entdisplay.
. . . . . . . . . . Q .
Simple
Report Using REPORT Macro .
Record,
Personnel
-
-
-
Complex
Report
Access
Using
REPORT
Macro.
REPORT With
Operator Selections
and Page Control
. . . . . . . .
Image
Screen
for FILEDEF to
Work
From.
Inventory
Inventory
Inventory
Inventory
.
.
.
.
.
.
Customer
Report. . .
Master
File . .
File Data Entry
File
File, Using ENTERGROUP
Illustration
of FIND Command . .
Update
Routine in Multi-User
Environment. . . . . . . . . . .
Use of WINDOWINDEX
Predefined
Variable . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporation
.
.
.
.
Vendor
Master
. . .
Master
.
. . .
Customer
Personnel
__—"—
Copyright (c)
A-42
A-42
. . .
. . .
AUTODEF
.
configurations
Personnel
Sample
C-7
C .
.
sample
of
C-id
C-ll -C-12
-
Sample
Sample
A-34
A-35
A-36
.
.
.
0"68
0
C-9
Sample
Samp7e
.
.
.
.
Macro
Configuration
Sample
.
.
.
.
B-56
Sample
Sample
Sample
Showing
.
.
.
Question
System
Entry
File Definition Menu. . . . . . . . .
File Definition Field Edit Option Menu
Master
File. . . .
Inventory Customer
File. . . . . .
Inventory Item Master
Inventory Invoice Entry . . . . . . .
Report
Configuration Not Using REPORT
Sample
Sample
Sample
Sample
Prompting
Mentn
Menu
B-l B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
Sample
Sample
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
System
Menu
. .
Inventory System.
.
.
.
Edit Selection.
Configuration.
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Sample
. . .
menu
.
Record
Inventory
list
Sample
.
Configuration
Manual
screens
sample
of
list
User's
2.0
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-2
B-7
B-13
B-15
B-17
B-30
C-23
C-25
c-26
C-33
C-37
C-42
C-53
C-74
C-77
C-80
C-84
D-9
D-50
E-IX)
E-12
——
05/16/84
_——
__"
————
—"~——"
=:
:::::
ORGANIZATION
OF THIS
MANUAL
—————=====
_
SEQUENCE
===""=="""
====
==========
"",
OF PRESENTATION
is the
material is presented in this manual
for the undertaking of tasks in learning DataFlex
and in using
Your
learning experience with DataFlex will rapidly
become
you
a productive experiencep
in that within a couple of hours,
will be able to create database
structures and control them with
configurations.
Configurations is the word used in this manual for a
data
processing procedure, or program written in DataFlex. Your
straightforward applications which
early exercises will yield simp1eg
will have more than enough power to
despite their simplicity
perform
any number
efficiently
of cormon data processing tasks, such
as mailing
lists.
in
The
sequence
recommended
which
sequence
it.
very likely acquired DataFlex because
its Aspower and
management.
mere
you continue
go far beyond
list
reading this manuá1» and testing the facilities described in each
section, possibi7ities
for greater scope and sophistication will
multiply rapidly until you reach the point at which you have the means
The simpler
needs.
of satisfying all of your data management
fac1l1ties of DataF1ex
are so powerful that you may reach this point
features of Datañex
well" before you explore the more advanced
described in later sections.
If this happens, there is no need to
study
further except to generally acquaint yourself with the
capabilities
features.
of the more advanced
But
you
flexibility
————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
r
A-2
ORGANIZATION
NOTATIONAL
OF THIS
CONVENTIONS
IN
DataF7ex
MANUAL
THIS
2.0
User's
Manual
MANUAL
with
the formats
made up of screen
and
are
(always
images
lines, the two
at the beginning) and then comand
by the distinctive
combination
character
sections being separated
"l*"
made up
DataF1ex
commands
by
are
like sentences
line.
itself on onecormand)
and
(usually) one or more objects (referred to
of a verb (the
as argumentsL sometimes
followed by one or more options, and
by
Commands
sometimes
may be preceded
further followed by a comment.
Lastly. some command lines begin
conditional terms called indicators.
with "labels". distinguished by a terminating colon (LABEL: L, whose
purpose
a spot in a configuration
of
for purposes
is to "mark"
Here
is the
future references (such as a RETURN or GOTO connand).
typical format
of a command line:
Certain notational
which
conventions
are
throughout this
to understand
used
manual
become
you should
acquainted in order
examples
shown.
DataFlex configurations
it
[indicator]
command
{options}
argument
//comment
brackets [] surrounding the indicator are required to identify
The braces
{} surrounding the options are not to be typed
indicators.
except
fbr format options for the ENTRY and FORMAT
in most commands,
The braces
used
commands,
where
are
in format
they are required.
howeverj
i11ustrationm
to signify an optional command element.
Again.
except
in the cases
they are not to be typeci in the comand
the comment are, like
noted. The "//" twin diagonals which precede
and
the indicator bracketsp
part of DataFlexG syntax,p
tell DataFlex
the
material following the dlagonalm which leaves them
not to compile
free for any materia] you may wish to include in the source version of
(as
distinguished from the
your configuration for reading by persons
computer). Twin diagonals at the beginning of a line will cause the
Here
entire line to be a comment.
is a typical command line:
The
[FOUNDI
ENTRY
mai1.name
{CAPSLOCÍO
// first
try
This line starts with a (DataF1ex-supp1ied) indicator» FOUND, which is
enclosed
in the required brackets, followed by the comand, ENTRY.
then
the
which
image
window
named
argument,
(in the
is a screen
ccmfiguration) MAIL.NAME,
followed by a formatting option (this one
does
require the braces). CAPSLOCK.
It meansp "If the desired record
is successfully FOUND in the databaseg
put the cursor into the next
window
and accept
element
image
screen
for ENTRY into the database
MAIL.NAME
the characters keyed into the windoWg but as though
the
CAPSLOCK key were
on (lower case
characters converted to uppercase)."
The coment
(first try) is not interpreted by DataFlex and hence has
would
have
meaning
no meaning
only for a person
for execution;
reading the configuration.
it
The
example
above
Copyright (c)
1984
illustrates
Data
Access
the
use
of
upper
Corporation
and
lower
case
in
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
ORGANIZATION
OF THIS
MANUAL
A-3
——
—
ENTRY,
and CAPSLOCK are
FOUND,
all
throughout this manual.
This is
in capital 1etters9 while mail.name
is in lower case.
intended to signify that FOUND, ENTRY, and CAPSLOCK are iñteral
strings which match» respectíve1y9 an indicator. a command and an
option which are inherently part of DataFlex. In any configuration
have
which
e1«nents,
you would
you wrote using these
to 1itera11y use
these
strings then. also. Mail.name, on the other hand. is peculiar
and would
to the example or configuration which is being discus5edp
be some other string
typically
in any configuration written by you
You
you chose
to).
(although you could use
will find this use
in this
of upper and lower case throughout the formats and examples
manuab
except
for the full sample configuratioñs» which follow the
normal
configuration convention of being written in solid capital
and messages
prompts
letters except
for textual material in screen
which
need
and lower
upper
case.
examples
it if
Throughout
enclosed
material
or outPutg
in the systw as well as in this
(") quotation
single (') or double
which
passes
through configurations as such
rather than executed.
DataF1ex,
in either
material
is literal
is displayed
manual,
marks
and
itself has manywhichsyntactical conventions in addition to the
are
peculiar to presentations in this
described above,
DataFlex's own syntactical conventions are described
separately at the appropriate places in this manual.
DataFlex
ones
manual.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-4
ORGANIZATION
OF THIS
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
DataFlex
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
___ ______
——————
"""===""""
A—5
————————————————————————__=========
~~~
OPERATIONAL
————"
ORIENTATION
"""""
—————
This section describes the steps involved in developing
that come
in DataFlex and the various files and programs
both
in creating and in running it.
application
into play
an
range
of facilities for applications
of this, there is frequently more than one way
to achieve a particular goal. Since one or another of the alternative
methods
is normally preferable under certain circumstancem care
should
be taken
to avoid thinking that the first way conceived
or
Any method
implemented
for doing a task is the only, or bésto way.
be reviewed
developed
against the possibility
for doing a task should
approach
might be easier or more efficient.
that an alternative
DataFlex
offers
development.
a wide
Because
Systm and ApplicaRuntime
Thjs section is divided into two parts:
The runtime system
required
is the part of DataF1ex
tion Development.
The person(s) who run the applica(run) the application.
to execute
tion is(are) referred to as the "operator" (as distinguished from the
The
the application).
configuratom who is the person who develops
which
DataF1ex
development
the
of
section
describes
parts
application
Although
the configurator and
of applications.
support development
the
the
activities
operator may in some instances be the same persom
of configuring on the one hand and operating on the other are differis useful to distinguish between these functions.
ent, so that
it
INSTALLATION
the necessary
installation
consists mainly of copying
of DataFlex
master
disks or hard
disks onto your working
files from your DataFlex
SETSCREEn
program
to initialize
disk drive and then using the DataFlex
the system for your serial number and terminal type. The SETSCREEn
and writes the terminal
reads
the
informaprogram
file TERMLIST.CFG FILELIST.CFG
by
user
to be used by the
the
input
the
to
tion
file
See the
installation
runtime system and the configuration systm.
DataFlex
for more informainstructions and the section on Installing
tion on insta11ation.
The
===ma==: _——————————————~—~~~—————~_~_____"____""_
Access
(C)
1984
Data
Corporation
Copyright
05/16/84
A-6
OPERATIONAL
ORIENTATION
DataFlex
"==========~
RUNTIkE
2.0
User's
Manual
"""""
SYSTEM
is the
runtime system
systems). FLEX.COM and its
are
functional all the time any DataFlex
overlay file "RUN.OVF"
configuration is running. The DataFlex configuration contains the
DataF1ex
do a
intelligence which enables
to make the computer
works
through the BASIC
particular task. just as a BASIC program
(.Fl-X)
configuration
Without a compiled
interpreter.
file, the
runtime system can do nothing.
The
basic operating
nucleus
of the
(FLEX.CMD
"FLEX.COM"
program
on
DataF1ex
CP/M-86
the DataFlex runtime system can
control of a configuratiom
databases9
and manipulate one or more
interact with the
read
and write
standard ASCII files. and
operator, drive the printer,
function found in microcomputer
otherwise activate just about every
These
systems.
activities
are controlled by configurations
(files
by the developer.
with the ".FLX" extension) created and compiled
from
the
When FLEX is run
operating system the name of the
configuration which is to be run must be given with it.
Under
access
initialized,
When
called
files
the
FILELIST.CFG
are
generate
terminal.
available,
control
the
DataFiex runtime system first reads a file
contains information about what database
which
enables
and information
DataFlex to
which
codes
will operate your particular
which
actually refers to
file name appearing in FILELIST.CFG
a cormon
rootof related files on your disk. all having
The data
but
namep
(".DAT" extension)
different extensions.
files
was entered, and the
contain the raw data in the sequence
in which
basic information on the structure of the data file. The key files
(".Kx" extension where x is the number of the index) contain index
which
data
established by the
provides access to the data by indexes
The tag
configurator during the process
of defining the database.
file (".TAG" extension) contains the names of the fields which make up
the database.
Each
a
data
base
"family"
it
consists of:
required to run DataF1ex
at least one .Fl-X (configuration)
and all
database
previously created by the configurator,
files
file
(.DAT)
.TAG)
.Kx and
for any database(s) declared in (used by) the
QUERY
QUERY.COM
and
To
use the
configuration(s).
facility the
QUERY.OVF
program
files must also be present.
Thus
the
minimum
FLEX.COÑL
RUN.OVK
Copyright
(C)
1984
comp1©ent
file
FILELIST.CFG,
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
Manual
OPERATIONAL
A-7
ORIENTATION
———————
===""4"""
+ ~
h
Other
Menu
user
when
programs
may be required occasionally
at run time.
and rebuilds
a data
the keys (.Kx files) in case
Reindex
by a power,
medía
damaged
are
failure.
is
or system
and create "ad hoc"
used
indexes. The
to maintain BATCH indexes
supplied
REINDEX
they
also
System
DataFlex
that greets the
is
DataFlex
The name of the menu
initialized
is Itself a DataFlex configuration.
The menu
configuration is MENU.FLX.
facility keeps the menus in a
MENU.DAT
data
base
is MENU.DAT.
is
standard DataF1ex
file whose name databases
in FILELIST.CFG
installed as file 49 in the list of active
Thus
as supplied.
to use the menu facility you must have MENU.FLX and
MENU.DAT
on your system.
The
file
reads
through
reads
a data
((Fre)e (L)iSt) program
file and verifies
rebuilds if necessary)
the list of deleted records in a data
that appear damaged
file, and also deletes or extracts any records
as a consequence
(typically
of a power, media or system failure).
Both
may be kept off-line
until needed.
of these programs
FREÍ(and
APPLICATION
base
DEVELOPMENT
process
involves
of developing specific applications in DataFlex
with the .FLX extension) and database
creating configurations
(files
files to store and manipulate data in the desired fashion. These
with
files are created by use of a group of utility programs supplied
COMPILER
DataFlex. The .Fl-X files are created by running the DataFlex
Source
program
on "source" files.
files can be created by any of
supplied
including the EDITOR.COM program
several different means,
which
is capable
with DataF1ex9
or any text editor or word processor
to producing plain ASCII text files you might happen to favor. The
source
files contain all the various comands in DataFlex which cause
the systw to carry out the desired processes.
The
produce
your first configuration using the AUTODEF
and
for a new databaseg
also creates the definition
for its data. To use it. the first
the data and key files necessary
step is to "draw" an image of the input and query screen that you will
(see
use on your
new database
the section Qñ "Formatting With
EDITOR
Images"). The DataFlex
or your favorite text editor will serve
AUTODEF reads
both
a file
this file and produces
for this purpose.
SOURCE
(.FO)
and
code
a
(with a
configuration
definition
file
file
by
.FRM extension),
ready
to be compiled. The configuration produced
maintenance
AUTODEF can
perform
on the database
file
full file
creates.
will
probably
utility.
AUTODEF
You
it
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-8
OPERATIONAL
=""="===~—
DataFlex
ORIENTATION
——
2.0
User's
Manual
""
————+———————————""""
is to create, display and mod'ky
function of the EDITOR program
DataFlex configuration SOURCE and IMAGE files. The source
files can
be created from
scratch with the EDITOR, or can come from one of the
auto-definition
utilities like AUTODEF, QUERY or READ. The source
word
files produced with EDITOR beare standard ASCII files, so mostEDITOR
used
instead of the DataFlex
processors or editors can
if
are
more
you
comfortable with one of them.
The
The
DataFlex
information
QUERY
little
QUERY
provides the user easy access to the
The
any database
existing on the disk drive.
be used
as an ad hoc
report generator that requires
QUERY is entirely
use.
prompt-drivem making
has been
a query
use by operators9 but once
program
stored in
facility
can
it
trafning to
quite practical for
in a
successfully perforTned»
permits storing the query criteria
The source
code
source
for a report configuration.
file can
file as compiled
QLJERY requires all
then
be
of
report.
to become a permanent
the standard
runtime database
files to be present.
it
The
DataFlex READ conffguration generates a
standard ASCII data files. READ is primarily
from
are
converting to DataFlex
other systems.
source
program
intended for
to import
those
who
and CVTRPT programs
read
DataFlex configurations written
DataFlex 2.00
(1.6x) and produce
earlier versions of DataFlex
source
written
in
configurations.
Configurations
Versions l.6x of
DataFjex
are
fully convertible to configurations which run under
Natura11y7
configurations
Version 2.OX by use of these utilities.
produced
in this fashion will not take advantage
of features of
Version 2.Ox which were not present in the version of DataFlex under
which
but
the
original configuration was producecb
the converted
be edited to do so
source
can
desired.
file
if
The
CVTFRM
under
'
B-bit systems--COMP.OVF)
three files to be
requires
files
files
present on the logged-in disk drive in order to do its job: the
(.FO
extension) file for
configuration source
fi1eg a file definition
each
database
and FLEX.CFG
declared by (used in) the configuration,
both
command
The .FO
and FLEX.CFL
must
macro
the DataFlex
file.
files A
reside on the logged-in (defau)t) disk drive.
successful
a runnable DataFlex configuration
compilation will produce
with the
.FLX
as the source
extension and the same rootname
file. As the
compiler runs,
will display on the screen
the original source
commands
together with line numbers assigned
to them by the compiler
and any
which
arise during compi7e
time. This output
error messages
can be directed to any of three devicmm
the consolm the printem or
a printab7e (.PRN)
file.
The
which
compiler
produces
(COMP.COM
.FLX
or
COMP.CMD,
from
and--for
source
it
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0 User's
OPERATIONAL
Manual
ORIENTATION
A-9
configuration that does not use any database(s) would not
but the typical Datarequire any .FO files in order to be compl1éd»
The .FO
Flex configuration wIll access one or more databases.
files
used
are
only at compile tim; they are not required at run time. On
the other hand, the other runtime database
files (.DAT, .Kxp .TAG) are
not
required by compile. This difference in file requirements can be
taken
advantage
of when operating within restricted disk space.
A DataFlex
utility,
The
FILEDEF
and
configuration
like
source
AUTODEF,
files.
Is
Multi-file relationships can
requires more extensive knowledge
The FILEDEF
control over the database.
(.DEF)
files
write database
definition
files are useful for reference, database
applications to other environments.
AUTODEF.
FILEDEF
for creating database
files
is more versatile than
FILEDEF.
be created with
of DataFlex, but gives more
program
can
also read and
Definition
in standard ASCII.
and transfer'
documentation
of
used
FILEDEF
is for use by users who want to create their own new
The PACK program
to the DataFlex language.
reads
the file FMAC and creates the file FLEX.CFL which is used by the
added
New command
macros
are
compiler.
to FMAC with a text editor or
by running PACK on the
word
new version
processor and then made usable
(overwriting the old one).
of FMAC, creating a new version of FLEX.CFL
The
PACK
commands
program
and add
them
P
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
Y
iÁ
um
¢aMFhgURATjaA/
\
S
runt/he
!
I
J
),
l
query
a
\
)
read
\
t
I
\
editor
[i
I
a
C
b
wage
i
'
FjLEDEF)AU}aDEF
i
'
\
I
t
I
I
l
"FLEX"
runtihe
a
A A
PRINTER'
I
p
\
b
source
""
ccwpiler
-:
'
)
'Ej
I
)
pa0gaaá(
DATAFLEX
systehdiagrah
I
'Li
1//
'tj:
file
q:i'
set
screen
\
Dataflex
2.0
User's
OPERATIONAL
Manual
ORIENTATION
A-ll
————
——————————————————————————————————
.
After running SETSCREEn and "informing" DataFlex of the codes which
operate your terminab there are three basic levels of using DataFlex
proceed
in order for the easiest» most
through which you should
thorough
learning experience. The content of this manual
is itself
They
presented
in the order which will best facilitate this approach.
are
described below:
Your
DataFlex system was supplied with more
with sample datap all on
working configurations complete
diskp
and ready
to run. They are intended as learning aids
You
and are
find most of them
in this manual.
not documented
will
which
from
you may choose
listed in the "DataFlex demo files" submenu,
From this
submenu,
any of the
you may actually
run
the master menu.
by electing
the last
configurations,
and/or query their databases,
You should
free1yg
choice, "QUERY Data Files."
tour these samples
and running reports
to
entering additional test data where you choosep
the screen
and/or your printer from them at will. The Operator's
need
Guide
you will
in
provide all the guidance
in this manual should
Eventua]lyp you may even wish to modify the
this activity.
(Sane
of the
configurations themselves
to make them run differently.
you
configurations may happen to be already very close to something
"code"
(which
could actually use for your own purposes.) The source
is what must be modified and recompiled to change the configuration)
is supplied for every configuration on the C: disk.
QUERYING
than
AND REPORTING
a dozen
compiled
DataFlex
provides
for creating and maintaining databases
creating the configurations you will need for entering data
While
databases.
from
those
and reporting
data
to»
the "shortcut"
methods
and typically
promptecb
more
are
narrowly structured than the
they
"programming"
methods
should
of writing DataFlex configurations,
not be underestimated. In actua1ity7 they are highly flexible and
Roughly
two out of four DataFlex
very powerful in their own right.
have
use any DataFlex
users
no regular occasion
to
facility other
will
MENUDEF (for creating and
than
EDITOR
(for writing configurations),
AUTODEF (for creating
databases
and entry configuraediting menus).
tions) and QUERY (for creating reports and doing interactive
Of the remaining
two
inquiries).
out of four typical DataFlex
users,
be fu1fi17ed by the
only one will have requirements which cannot
aforementioned facilities plus the ENTER macro and the REPORT macro.
The
facilities mentioned above should be explored thoroughly. You
should
proceed
stage
only in the event that you have
on to the next
unusual
requirementm or a driving curiosity as to the virtually
limitless possibí7itíes offered by the most extensiveg flexible
medium
applications development
available 'in today's market.
PROMPTED
DATABASE
numerous
and for
"automated"
CREATION
AND CONFIGURATION
methods
——————
Copyright
————-——
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
———
————-
05/16/84
A-12
OPERATIONAL
DataFlex
ORIENTATION
==""""==="""=—""""""""""""""""""""""
—===""_".==_""====""""""""""""
"
2.0
=
User's
""""""""""""""""
""""
Manual
"' =====
programming
PROGRANING
AND EXTENSION
OF THE LANGUAGE
In line-by-line
of app1icatiorm DataFlex offers facilities for the creation of
The more
by its creators.
applications not even yet imagined
fundamental
sequential
functions provided in function key commandsg
input/output9 console inputloutput and multi-user functions allow the
which
any processing structure
could be
construction of virtually
whole
configurations can be made up of such
desired. Although
these
commands
commandm
more
are
likely to be used intermingled with
by
pre-programmed
the
structures created
facilities such as the REPORT
and ENTER macros.
While exclusive use of these facilities for writing
way of creating
configurations is likely to be a less efficient
configuratiorm
occasional use of them to alter the way standard
In the Advanced
section
structures function Is very much encouraged.
you will even
find procedures
for modifying DataF7ex
of this manuab
themselves,
commands
as well as procedures
for creating entirely new
commands
for your individual use.
next page offers a graphic depiction of the
sophistlcatíon
to which each of the facilities
The chart should
primarily applies.
not be interpreted
of DataF1ex
Whyg for examp1ep
the
too literally. There is no reason whatsoever
"basic" facility of QUERY should
not be used in an otherwise
"advanced"
application to create one or more reports if QUERY can
function.
satisfy the applicatioMs
requirvments for that particular
Furthem a common way of creating highly complex
applications involves
the use of "basic" or "intermediate" facilities such as QUERY or
AUTODEF to create the "nucleus" of the app1icatiom
and then
subsequent
editing of the nucleus
to incorporate the more "advanced"
features required by the application.
The
schematic
ranges
of
on the
programming
P
——
=""
""
Copyright (c)
. ——,
.,,
1984
Data
Access
.
_
,,,—,
___~___,
Corporation
———————————
_===__~—___~
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
OPERATIONAL
Manual
User's
A-13
ORIENTATION
-------------THE
FACILITIES
—------LEVELS
SOPHISTICATION-------
OF CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
INTERMEDIATE
BASIC
OPERATOR
OF DATAFLEX
llllExISTINGllllll
llCCNFIGURATIONSll
llllll
llllll
llllll
llllll
llllll
lllC0MpILERllll;;l}|lllllll:l:lllllllll:lllllll llllll
ll::lllllllll:|llllllllllllll:llllll;ll
;llllMENUlllll|lllll: lllllllllllllllll|:ll:llllll;lllllllllll:lll:
lll|AUT0DEFllllllll;:
lllll;lll|lll|l:llllllll|llll:lllllllllllllll
llllEDITORlllllllll|: lll:llllll:ll:l:lllll:l::ll
IMAGES|llllllllllllllllllll:
ll|llllll:
llllllWERYlll|lllllllllll:
lllSCREEN
:
llllANUDEFl:
ICONTROL
ll}llll|l::lllllll:llllllllllllllll|lllll
|lllllll:lllllllll}llllllllllllll
C0MMANDSlll:
llllll
ll: lINDICAT0RS:lllllllllll:lll llllll
MACROlllllllllllllll llllll
llllENTER MACR0llllllllllllXl llllll
lmost
comandsllllllllllllllll
lllREPoRT
IENTERGROUP
MACROllllllll:
llllllllll
llll: FILEDEFlllllllllllllllll|l:llll
llKEY
pROCEDURESll
llllFIELDINDExllll
MACRO
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
OPERATIONSI
05/16/84
A-14
OPERATIONAL
ORIENTATION
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
——————
—
THIS
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
05/16/84
===""===————————————~———
"",
ÉÉÉÉFáááEE
--------- ——
—
A-15
~—_""""""
GUIDE
OPERATOR'S
==========
,",
—~~———
—————
objective of this section is to provide a clear, non-technical
The
summary
for data entry.
of use of the system
firstdatapart of the
entry and
for
to use DataF1ex
chapter will define the procedure
Second1y7
maintenance.
the features and facilities that may be
file
used
in any given application will be discussed.
The
to execute
DataFlex uses a set of command keys, called "F1ex-Keys%
of the regularly used functions In an application software
Example
Flex-keys are FINDo used to locate a record in the
SAVEJ used
base;
data
to store a new record in the data basep etc.
is used on such a wide variety of systemsg
DataFlex
Furthem since
by
functions of the program
especially terminals, we will address
of our discussion, rather than by
their Flex-key name in the course
the
particular key on your terminal which has been established, since
the location of that command key may vary from system to system.
many
system.
Flex-key commands
the DataFlex
is used to assign
keyboard.
keys
on
Part of its
to
set of control or function
your
operation is to print a list of the commands and the keys to which
on your terminal.
they are currently assigned
If you do not have a
one
ñOWx and print
for
copy
of that list. go to the SETSCREEn Program
use with this chapter.
The
SETSCREEn
Utility
a
FUNCTIONAL
OVERVIEW
DataFlex application that involves data entry has the capacity to
check
from
data
is the
to make sure that
the keyboard,
and then
on the computer's floppy or
of
data.
store
type
proper
hard
can be made
disk storage device. Once data is stored, DataFlex
to retrieve (FIND) the data and display it on the CRT, and allow the
operator to change or delete it.
A
accept
it
it
All of the capabilities
of DataFlex may or may not be used in every
For
examp1é»
application.
the option exists within a configuration to
lock an operator out of a particular data window on the screen or to
of
automatically make calculations that are routine in the process
Our point is that although all
of
certain data entry situations.
hereg
DataF1ex's
you may not see all of
will be discussed
capabilities
used
them
in every application which you run on your computer.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-16
OPERATOR'S
DataF1ex
2.0
User's
Manual
+
?
OF TERMS
DEFINITION
Control
GUIDE
Key:
A key
board
entry that Is made while the "control"
is held down.
Variously represented as "A or
CTRL A to indicate
that the control key is being
held while the "A" is also pressed. Flex-key
functions can be assigned
to control keys with
key
SETSCREEn.
Data
Entry:
The process
of putting new information
computer
through the terminal keyboard.
Ffle
Maintenance:
The
mation
Fill
Character:
into the
examination, changing, or deletion of inforthat is already stored in the computer.
A
below)
(see
character displayed in a "window"
defines the length of the data field which
be entered
can
or displayed at that particular
Genera1]yg
position.
the underline character
(
) is used
for this purpose.
which
Function
Key:
A special key on the terminal
keyboard
that is
outside of the normal typing array.
generates
It
coded
signal that can be "trapped" by DataFlex to
execute
one of the DataFlex Flex-key functions
Terminal
(e.g.. FIND, DELETEg SAVE, etc.).
function keys generate characters that do not
display on the screen.
a
Index:
organized list of keys which is linked to the
records in a file. The index fs maintained in
order automatically by DataFlex so that records can
be accessed
sequentially even though
the data is
entered and stored randomly
in the data base.
Key:
in a record by which the record
E.g.8
or "found" in the data base.
the "ACCOUNT NUMBER" and/or "ACCOUNT NAME" could be
defined as keys for an accounts
receivable record;
the "ITEM ID" and/or "DESCRIPTION"
could be keys
for an inventory record.
An
An
element
be
fie1d(s)
Key
Field:
The
Key
List:
Same
Window:
data
accessed
as
in
a
data
record
which
contains
a
key.
Index.
An
area
of the CRT display defined to accept
or
display data. Windows can be defined to accept
only certain types of data... e.g. numbers only.
————————
——— —
Copyright
of
can
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
~
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
OPERATOR'S
Manual
GUIDE
A-17
—-——————-——————
HOW TO BEGIN
Data
entry and file maintenance
option from the system menu.
number
of the menu item for
to execute.
are begun by selecting the proper
All that you need to do is select the
the
data
entry configuration that you wish
commands
which
you
(or
DataFlex screens
are operated by the Flex-key
The
commands
from
the
keyboard.
are
assigned
issue(s)
the operator)
to certain keys (e.g. TÁÉJ9 LINE FEED, DELETE, RUB-OUT, etc.). function
("Áp
"Bp etc.)
keys
for your
(FL F2, etc.k and/or control sequences
configparticular system.
This assignment
is done with the DataFlex
Once the assignment
of the commands
uration utility called SETSCREE.
is made to the various keys on your terminal, all DataFlex
screens
will operate exactly the same regardless of the fi1e(s) being processed
or the format of the screen.
promotes
the
This feature of DataF7ex
operator efficiency and reduces
opportunity for errors since there is a procedural continuity throughout the systan. The execution of the commands soon becomes second
no
is added to the system,
nature so that when a new or altered module
is required.
additional training or familiarization
displays are "active", which
DataFlex screen
data
or
functions at
entry
file maintenance
command
is issued.
they can execute
time that a Flex-key
means
any
screen
a particular
contains twenty display
of data are to be
but only the first five elements
then
SAVE
command
be issued
can
a
after the
entered initially,
item
unnecessary
is entered. This makes
to
fifth data RETURN
key after
each
of the blank fields just to
strfke the
data
entry effiexit the screen. This feature can improve
reducing the number of keystrokes
ciency by substantially
required.
For
example,
windows,
if
it
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-18
FLEX-KEY
OPERATOR'S
Manual
User's
—————
DataF1ex
GUIDE
2.0
———
SUMMARY
cnMMANp
ESCAPE
Terminate the
CLEAR
Clear all
RETURN
Terminate entry in the window where the cursor
is currently located and move cursor to the
first position of the next window.
.
BACK
ENTER
Program return to
menu.
windows
screen
the cursor from the current window back
to the previous display window on the screen.
FIELD
Move
FIND
Find
& display the record which
is associated
with the key in the window where the cursor is
currently positioned.
If there is no data in
the WindOWg find and display the record which
is first key in the index for the field associated with the current window.
SUPERFINO
On a screen
display which contains data from
multiple files, this command will find a
record by whichever key window the cursor is
currently positioned in. Them the related
records to the keyed record will be found and
on the CRT.
all data windows
displayed to
SAVE
information to the
Stores the displayed screen
data
base.
the screen contains data from
If
than
more
one fi1ep data
will be written to
whatever
files are part of the configuration.
DELETE
Removes
key
fill
its
found
PREVIOUS
RECORD
the dfsplayed record from the file
from
the key list. A record must
be deleted.
can
before
and
be
it
the record whose key immediately
the key in the window where the
cursor is currently positioned.
Finds
precedes
NEXT
Find
the record whose
the key in the window
currently positioned.
RECORD
key
where
immediately follows
the cursor is
CALCULATE
Performs
the calculation indicated by the
expression entered. Calculations can be per~
formed
as well as on the
in a data window9
prompt
line of the CRT.
HELP
Display
Window
Move
Edit
HELP
screen.
cursor or
change
data
in
an
image
window.
—————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
——
————————————
— ——————
—
—
OPERATOR'S
Manual
User's
2.0
KFYF'QFf'P
coMMRNn
fxf'l
GUIDE
————
A-19
— ———
—
ANpTTnN.s
ESCAPE
immediDataFlex
is issued from the keyboard,
All open data
of "shutting down operations".
control is returned to the menu.
It is
files are c1osed7 and the
is madep any data which
important to note that when the ESCAPE connand
is currently displayed is not acted upon in any way unless the program
executes
Specifica11y9 if a new record
a set of commands.
internally
ESCAPE
has been
entered, but not SAVEd to disk(ettek
will not execute
the SAVE command as part of its shut down. This also applies in the
and edited
a record is found
case
of a changed or edited record:
no change
but not re-SAVEd,
will be made in the data base.
the
When
ately
ESCAPE
begins
command
the
process
if
CLEAR
function of the CLEAR command is very simple... to erase any data
the
(only) and place the
character in all
display windows
CLEAR has no effect
window
data
on data
stored in the data
positions.
CLEAR
be used
whatsoever;
base
can
screen
a
operation.
is solely
procedure
called
as a "bailout"
during ed¶ting.
If a record has beenCLEAR
(found), and an edit made that is not correctp
to the screen
will erase the screen and preclude the bad edit from being written to
the data base.
The
fill
from
it
RETURN
The
command
terminates data entry in one display window and
always
This command is almost
the cursor to the next window.
to the RETURN or ENTER key of your terminal.
RETURN
moves
assigned
command
is issued at the end
If you are entering datag and the RETURN
the
displayed information will be
of the last window on the screerg
automatically SAVEd in the data base.
and not enter
a window
prior to entering any
alphanumeric
data
the
field will be given
data. If the window accepts
the value of a string of spaces that is the length of the window.
If
numeric
datá»
the field will be set to zero.
the window accepts
If,
any
during
datag
data
entryg
simply
execute
you wish
to
the
RETURN
skip over
command
"auto-return" at the end of a data
entered data completely fills a windowp
the
will be executed automatically. If "auto-return"
window
the
iS "OÑ"p
to
cursor will jump from the end of the current
the beginning of the next window as soon as the current window is
is up to the user and
filled with data. The use of this feature
SETSCREE
"ON" with the
turned
is
configurator.
Utility program.
It
DataF1ex
can
be
Copyright
(C)
to
that
do an
when
Data
Access
made
This means
field.
RETURN command
1984
Corporation
05/16/84
0PERATOR°S
A-20
GUIDE
'
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
*
°
FIND
where
you can
will display a series of data windows
fnformation or recall existing information for display.
"key
Some of the display windows
are
fields" (as defined above). That
is, they can be used to FIND records in the data base that are assoGenera11y7
ciated with data entered in the windows
of the display.
this is not
the first window in an image is defined as a key, however
always
the case.
image
A screen
enter
new
a particular
record. place the cursor in the window for the
below), enter the "value" of the
field (DESCRIPTION
in the example
key
a FIND command.
for the record you wish to FIND, and execute
DataF1ex
then
you entered in
with
the
value
the
record
will
retrieve
its key field and display it on the screen. If a key with the value
which
not
you entered does
exist, then DataFlex will FIND and display
the first record whose key sequentially follows the position which the
value you entered would occupy
in the Index.
To
FIND
key
illustrate
records in itg
To
key
field),
it
examp1ey
t.he
way
FIND
operates9
suppose
fields,
of
and VENDOR (which
could also be
will not be). This is the data:
which
each
has
DESCRIPTION
VENDOR
ARMATURE
General
DISKETTE
3M
two
ESCALATOR
Electric
Corporation
Otis Elevator
FRISBEE
Wham-O
KEYBOARD
Televideo
with 5
is the
but in this
we had a database
DESCRIPTION
(this
a key
field,
they were entered
is what the following entries would find
command
windowg
and the FIND
executed:
into the DESCRIPTION
if
Here
DataF1ex
YOUR ENTRY
would
FIND
DESCRIPTION
VENDOR
ESCALATOR
Electric
Electric
3M Corporation
3M Corporation
3M Corporation
Otis Elevator
F
FRISBEE
Wham-O
G
KEYBOARD
H
KEYBOARD
J
KEYBOARD
A
ARMATURE
General
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
General
B
DISKETTE
C
DISKEIJE
DISK
DISKEIIE
E
K
L
KEYBOARD
-Error
-
Find
Past
End
Televideo
Televideo
Televideo
Televideo
of File
———-——..,-,———
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
OPERATOR'S
Manual
A-21
GUIDE
———————
SUPERFINO
that displays data from only
identical to the use of the FIND
which
screen
displays data from multiple
ful tool to find and display information
On
a screen
one
base
fi]ep
command.
tionally
files,
from
SUPERFINO
However,
SUPERFINO
multiple,
is funcon
a
is a powerrelated data
files.
action of SUPERFINO is to use DataFlex's data base manager to
place
retrieve all related data on a given screen. To use SUPERFINO,
The
the cursor in the window by which you wish to start the FIND.
be a key
window
must
field.
Enter the key value to find and execute
you want
from
to start viewing the records
the SUPERFINO command.
If
just execute
the beginning of tt!e file in which the cursor is 1ocatech
SUPERFINO
and DataF1ex
related to
will automatically FIND the recordsfound,
all
is
the first key in the key list. Then, when the record
from
other files will also be found and displayed.
related windows
When SUPERFINO
display is filled with data.
is used, the entire screen
The
Once
is complete, you can use the NEXT RECORD
through the related data.
to sequence
screen
display
RECORD commands
the
PREVIOUS
the following example:
an inventory order entry system...
Consider
We have
PARTS
Key
=
BUYERS
Key
= Buyer
TRANSACTIONS
Key
=
Part
the
files
and
are:
#
ID
#
Transaction
to enter all data into the
and.maintained and
through
items
can be ordered
the creation of TRANSACTIONS.
TRANSACTIONs
contain the Buyer ID, the Part #, the quantity of
the PART sold and a total sale amount.
entry configurations
Data
system.
PARTS
and
BUYERS
are
used
can
be
added
the transaction screem
wjndow7
enter a Buyer ID
SUPERFINO,
and press
all fields will be filled. Starting with
the entered Buyerg we can now issue the NEXT RECORD command
and
the
displayed buyer has more transactions, the next
In other
transaction will be found and displayed on the CRT.
words
now FINDing
transactions by Buyer.
we are
The
stage
is set...
place the cursor over
if
we now load
ID
Buyer
the
if
fun
has just
a CLEAR command,
place
begun... If we execute
the cursor in the PART # window and enter a PARTÍ SUPERFINO
NEXT (or
will now ¶ND the PART and its related transactions.
PREVIOUS)
RECORD will
sequence
up and down the transaction
When we
that PART.
hit the end of the transactions
list for requested
PART,
the
next PART in the index will be
for the
displayed with its transactions.
The
""____",
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
OPERATOR'S
A-22
GUIDE
DataF1ex
2.0 User's
Manual
SAVE
data
displayed on the
This
in the data base.
can occur
one or more
associated with the display. SAVE is a simple yet powerful command.
If a configuration datais
changes
to the
not carefully conceived, SAVE can allow unwanted
base
from
from
data
a display containing
several files.
action of
The
and
screen
SAVE
the
save
whether
is to take
command
to the correct
it there
is
data
the
files
files
with
"edit" command in DataFlex. Editing is accomplished
First the record to be edited
of the FIND and SAVE commands.
Then
the necessary
is
to the screen with the FIND command.
When the data
made on the
are
is correctp a
edits or changes
screen.
SAVE command
is executed
to place the altered record back in the data
base.
As mentioned
above,
if the edit is incorrect or needs to be
aborted for any reason.
the CLEAR command will remove the "found"
record from the screen without altering any data.
There
the
is
no
use
brought
DELETE
ProcedUra11yy
the
data
base.
removes
a record from
only operate following the execution of the FIND command
you must
enter the key of the record to be DELETEd, FIND itg
(i.e.,execute
The record
then
the DELETE command).
itself and its key(s)
will be removed from the files.
The
DELETE
DELETE
NEXT
comand
can
RECORD
This command allows you to sequence
through a fi1e9 displaying records
in key order. When the cursor is placed
in a key window2 the NEXT
RECORD command
will FIND the record whose key is next in the fndex for
data
and display
that window's
it. If multiple keykeys are used on the
the
window
be located in any
can
valid
for the
screen,
cursor
operation of the NEXT RECORD command.
PREVIOUS
Same
key
RECORD
as the
precedes
NEXT
RECORD
that of the
command
one
except
currently
FINDs
that
displayed.
it
the record
whose
——————————————
Copyrfght
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
OPERATOR'S
Manual
User's
GUIDE
A-23
~
————
CALCULATE
CALCULATE
comnand
allows the operator Interactive access to the
locations
arithmetic capab17íties of DataF1ex.
It can be used in two bottom
on the screen:
or on the command
line at the
of
in a windowp
the CRT. The fomat for the calculation is the same regardless of the
location where
takes place on the screen. Four symbols
are used
for arithmetic operation:
The
it
+
=
-
=
*
=
/
=
The
arithmetic expression
3*50, or 24/6. Parentheses
valid expressions for use
(2+2)*(5/6)
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
simply
can
are
by
the
be
supportedg
typed ifb e.g., 2+2, l0-79
so any of the following
CALCULATE
(2*(2*(2*(2))))
are
Command:
100/34+l2*(365/12)
numeric
datap
an
If the cursor is located in a window which contains
When a RETURN command
directly.
arithmetic expression can be entered
is executed,
according to the
the arithmetic will be performed
expression that was entered. No command need be used in this case.
bottom
If the CALCULATE command is issued, the cursor bewill go to the
where
entered. When the
line of the disp1ay9
the expression can
and the arithmetic
execute
a RETURN command
expression is comP]eteg
window
where
be performed
the
the
result
displayed
in
the
with
will
cursor was located when the CALCULATE command was issued. This
the
located in a numeric
applies whether
or
cursor was originally
alphanumeric
window.
HELP
application-dependent "help" screen
to
created as part of an application and
covered
are
in the section of this manual on "Formatting with Images".
Syntax
for using the HELP command within an application to call the
HELP screen
Function Keys".
is described in the section on "Using
The
be
HELP
command
displayed.
will
The
cause
screens
an
are
=========——_—————.,,.-_————.,._—_———.,.,--,,——————_
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
Copyright (c)
Q¿'16/84
OPERATOR'S
A-24
DataFlex 2.0 User's
GUIDE
Manual
—-—-—
USER-DEFINED
some
additional key on your termina] may have been assigned
additional function in your DataFlex app1ication(s).
If so, this was
done
in your particular program and your supervisor or programmer
will tell you which key it is, if any9 and what'it does9 or you will
app1ication(s) you are
find
in the manua7 for the particular
running.
An
it
RIGHT
& LEFT
These
keys
screen
Arrow
Window
Editing
Keys
move the CRT cursor within
hon-destructively
display window during data entry or editing.
BACKSPACE
WIndow
Editing
the cursor one space to the left in
the character under the cursoM as well as
in the window to the right of the cursor.
INSERT
WIndow
Editing
a
screen
any
DELETE
WIndow
Editing
in
a screen
moved
one
1984
Data
Access
deleting
which
may
be
window.
space
to the
Key
Deletes the character under the cursor in a DataFlex
window.
Characters to the right of the cursor will
to the left.
Copyright (c)
window?
characters
Key
Inserts a space at the current cursor position
Characters to the right of the cursor will be
right.
CHARACTER
DataFlex
Key
Moves
CMRACTER
a
Corporation
screen
moved
be
display
one
space
05/16/84
::::Z:Z[TZ
A"25
—————————
—
~~~—~———~~———————————— ——
INSTALLING
=====
DATAFLEX
——
——
""""""""_——""""""""_
~~~~~~~
allows you to configure DataDataFlex SETSCREEn utility program
adapt
certain
Flex to run on your CRT terminaK and to specifically
operations of the software to your specific requirements.
The
we will
use the word
"terminal"
In this chapter of the User's Manual,
and vídeo display of a syst«m
to refer generally to the keyboard
whether
the device is separate from the computer
itself om as in
and video display
Canputer,
cases
the keyboard
like the IBM Personal
and integrated
are
with the computer.
directly connected
be entered directly
from
can
the operating systan
name:
typing the first eight letters of the program
SETSCREEn
level
by
command
A>SETSCREE
entry to SETSCREEn, a list of pre-defined terminal and system
below.
You have
configurations will be displayed as in the example
the option of selecting a predefined terminal which is on the }ist»
adding
the data for a terminal which is not on the list, or editing
the data for a terminal which is already on the list.
Upon
l
SUPERBRAIN
2
ADM 31
3
V.C.
4
TELEVIDEO
5
HAZELTINE
6
ADM 3A
7
TRS-80
8
MICROTERM
9
ADDS
II
IBM
404
(
I5XX
P&T
CP/M
)
VIEWPOINT
PC Wl
PCTERM
13
XEROX
15
NEC A.P.C.
17
HEATH
19
IBM
20
MY TERMINAL
(dos
820
H19/ZENITH
PC Wl
l.l)
Zl9
IS
NOT ON THIS
ACT
5
125
10
HP
12
DEC VT-52
14
ZENITH
16
ANSI
18
T.
ANSI.SYS
(950/925)
lOó
TERMINAL
I.
(DEC)
PEGASUS
LIST
on the list disp7ayedy
simply enter the
your terminal appears
by the name of your
This will select the proper
terminal.
and function
codes
and keys
screen
as preconfigured for your terminal
The predefined Flex-key assignments
keys
will act upon.
that DataFlex
provided for the terminals may be changed
at any time by use of Option
Two in the
function menu shown below.
If you have selected a
displayed terminah the following menu will be displayed:
If
number'
— —————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-26
INSTALLING
DATAFLEX
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
Manual
————————
EDIT:
(I)
(2)
(3)
ASSIGN
(4)
DISPLAY
(5)
PRINT
(6)
END
(7)
ABORT
SET
SYSTEM
SET
OPTIONS
FUNCTION
KEYS
CONTROL
TERMINAL
PRESENT
CODES
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
/
CHANGES
SETSCREEN
-
DO NOT WRITE
MANGES
wish
to use Option 4 to display the configuration to check
and/or print the configuration to paper for future off-line
is necessary
for any reason to edit terminal control
reference.
If
these
by use of options
codes
may be done
or function key assignments,
3 and 2 respectively.
Option 6, (END / SAVE (>U\NGES) will write the
configuration to disk for future automatic use by DataFlex.
You
it
may
over
it
There
is a "standard" for terminals that is being used more and
called the ANSI terminal standard. If you cannot
find terminal
may be compatible with the ANSI
information in your manual,
standard. Many of the new "integrated" systws use the ANSI standard.
Systems
known
to use the ANSI standard are: Teievideo 97Cb DEC
Rainbow,
Texas
Instruments Professional, Wang PCg and IBM-PC with DOS
Choice
number
16 above
will provide the ANSI configuration.
2.0.
NOTE:
more,
it
terminal which your terminal emulates) is not
for you to get out your terminal or
manual
system
and manually configure DataFlex using the "MY TERMINAL
LIST"
IS NOT ON THIS
option.
If you need to end SETSCREEn whenat this
and
the menu
point, select any predefined terminal option number,
shown
above
is dfsp1ayed,
enter an option 7 to abort and return to the
operating system.
If
terminal
will
your
it
listecb
"
If
(or
be
a
necessary
IS NOT ON THIS
LIST". and you have
The next prompt
will
is time to proceed.
the
name of your terminal.
This will identffy the entries
make
for future reference from the list of terminals
initially displayed when SETSCREEN is loaded.
you
have
selected
manual
terminal
ask for
that you
ENTER
here,
SETSCREEn
shown
above
PART
ONE:
SYSTEM
a
it
NAME
(UP
TO 20
CARS)
:
will step through the first three options of
with the following series of questions:
From
first
TERMINAL
YOUR TERMINAL
menu
The
"MY
readyg
the
OPTIONS
systw option is:
DO YOU WANT AUTO
This question is
Copyright (c)
answered
RETURN
"Y"
if,
ON FULL
during
FIELD
data
(Y
OR N)
entry.
you
N
want
DataFlex
——————————
———
—————————————————————————————————————————————————
Access
1984 Data
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
~
User's
2.0
INSTALLING
Manual
DATAFLEX
A-27
———————
—
~~
to the next automatically
with data. For examp1m
a window
is formatted for date entries (8 characters including the
in
slashes " / / 'i), and you put in l/1/8Zh the cursor would remain
;
however,
the window until you pressed
if you entered
01/01/83»
the cursor would automatifilling the window comp1ete1yp
image.
in the screen
cally move to the next window
"window"
image
one
move the cursor from
has been
when the window
completely
to
filled
if
___
Answer
window
(and
The
to this question if you want the cursor to
until is pressedp
at which time DataFlex
only then) move the cursor to the next window.
"N"
THIS
IS
A MULTIUSER
SYSTEM
(Y
OR N)
license is a ntl]t1(lser
your DataFlex
to this question to use your system
respond
with "N".
user systms always
If
"Y"
If
you
in a
then
will
option is:
system
next
remain
N
you
MUST
respond
in multiuser
mode.
On
Yersionp
with
single
option
"Y" to the multiuser question, the next system
question will not display for single-user systems):
responded
is (this
MUST THE
DISK
DATA
(Y
BE PRE-ALLOCATED?
OR N)
answer
this question "Y"es, a file will be created each time
which
(see
is large
Designing Databases)
establish a database
enough
can hold with the
to contain all the data your database
full
which
number
you
will later specify in establishing your
of records
"N"o
be answered
databases.
unless: (I) your
This question should
(some multi-user
systems
do--if yours
requires
operating system
notes
does,
the
for your network);
fact is noted on the installation
or (2) you require for some other reason for the maximum disk space
could
database
occupy
Pre-a11ocation of disk
your
to be pre-reserved.
performance
improve
space
can
with
slightly
in large databases
complex
indexes.
multiple files and numerous
If
you
you
it
When
three questions
these
IS
If
you
have
THIS
DATA
made
a
the questions.
~~~~~~~
Copyright
(C)
If
1984
have
CORRECT
mistake in
the entries
Data
Access
answered,
been
(YIN)
an
are
you
will
be
prompted:
Y
entryy a
correct
Corporation
of
response
Éñtér
"Y"
"N"
to
will
repeat
proceed.
05/
16/84
INSTALLING
A-28
PART
NO:
SET
DataFlex
DATAFLEX
FUNCTION
KEYS
-
2.0
User's
Manual
FLEX-KEYS
be asked
to press certain keys on your keythe Flex-key
throughout DataFlex to execute
DataFlex
will read
etc.).
functions (FIND a record, SAVE a recorch
keyboard
make
them
and retain the
from
as
you
entries
the
your
as the proper response
for the particular
internal codes generated
Flex-key function.
In this
board
section
will
will
used
you
be
which
keys
selected as Flex-keys must not be ones that are used to gendata
1etterm periods,
entry (numbers,
erate characters during normal
You can use taM line feedg
commam
delete, arrows, here-is,
etc.).
by pressing the CONTROL key and a
and any control
character (formed
7etter at the same time), or any "function key" (usually an extra row
keys
keyboard).
on the top row or on the left side of your
of numbered
The
to be used to execute
the
If you have function keys, they do not haveSETSCREEn
will figure out
Flex-key comands; that is your option.
what
kind of function keys your terminal has by asking you to press
The function
keys
you
as Flex-keys must
press
one
(or tWO) of them.
Some terminals
have
"grouped"
all have the same "lead-in" code.
function keys with different lead-in COde5y in which case you can only
You
use one group.
will be prompted:
DOES
If
haveg
you
and
press
After
you
have
keysg
you
wi11
particular
to
want
make
to
KEY
lead off
Copyright
OR N)
a
use7
function keys? answer
default entry of "N".
"Y".
HAVE
established whether
be asked
to press
Flex-key function.
PRESS
...will
(Y
YOUR TERMINAL
(C)
the
1984
CORRESPONDING
following
Data
Access
FUNCTION
a
KEYS?
or not your system
series of keys to
has
assign
N
Otherwise
function
keys
to
a
TO FUNCTION
list:
Corporation
05/16/84
"
DataFlex
RETURN
ESC
User's
2.0
OR ENTER
( EXIT
PREVIOUS
FIELD
WINDOW
FIND
A RECORD
)
(BACK
OR
FIELD)
(E.G.
(13)
ESCAPE
(27)
LINE
)
'L"
RETURN
FEED
"J'
(95)
TAB
(9)
(must
CTRL
F
SAVE
CTRL
S (19)
CTRL
D
CTRL
P
(16)
(SEQUENTIAL)
CTRL
N
(j¿j)
KEY
CTRL
C
(3)
ON SCREEN
CTRL
A
CTRL
Q (17)
(l)
CTRL
U (21)
A RECORD
A RECORD
PREVIOUS
NEXT
RECORD
CALCULATE
FUNCTION
DATA
CLEAR
HELP
(SEQUENTIAL)
RECORD
WINDOWS
KEY
USER
DEFINED
BACK
SPACE(
DESTRUCTIVE
LEFT
ARR0W(
NON DESTRUCTIVE
FUNCTION
)
CTRL
L
(12)
CTRL
K
CTRL
(li)
DOWN ARROW
V (22)
INSERT
CMRACTER
CTRL
Z
(26)
DELETE
mARAcTER
CTRL
X
(24)
THIS
DATA
CORRECT
(YIN)
printable
char.)
(127)
H (8)
CTRL
ARROW
be
(4)
UP ARROW
RIGHT
A-29
(6)
DEL/RUBOUT
)
DATAFLEX
(ID)
SUPERFINO
DELETE
IS
KEY
PROGRAM
DATA
INSTALLING
Manual
Y
of Flex-keys that can be
is the "standard" assignment
on any system
uses
exclusively universal keys for
sInce
each
You may set up the Flex-keys any way you want
on your
function.
Then
system.
all DataFlex programs
running on your system will use
for the meaning
your assignments. Refer to the operator documentation
of each of these Flex-key functions.
This
list
it
implemented
Some
for a Flex-key.
not have duplicate assignments
back
generate the same code from two keysp typically
and back
computer,
case
your
you
may
space
this
is
the
with
arrow. If
NOT use both
The two
forms
provided by
of backspacing
of these keys.
DataFlex are: destructive (deletes data) and non-destructive (moves
They
MUST
the cursor back without deleting data previously entered).
be assigned
internal codes.
to keys that generate different
NOTE:
You
terminals
may
will
Except
for the data window
non-printable characters.
PART
THREE:
SET
SPECIAL
charactem all
SCREEN
of the
above
must
be
ASCII
FUNCTIONS
In this
section you will configure DataFlex
set
to clear the screen,
and other screen
Ail data in this section
highlighting,
attributes.
with spaces separating entries that
will be entered as decimal numbers
require multiple values (e.g. ESC "=" are two values that might be
———————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A-30
27
entered as
function.
section of
DataF1ex
DATAFLEX
INSTALLING
61).
It will
Up
to four
be
necessary
terminal manual
your
2.0 User's
Manual
values can be entered for each
control
for you to turn to the screen
this part of
in order to complete
(4)
SETSCREEn.
NOTE:
DOES
A FUNCTION
IF
NOT EXIST
ON YOUR TERMINAL,
ENTER
!
a
& EXAMPLE
FUNCTION
EXPLANATION
CLEAR
Enter the code(s) that clears the
than
more
(separated by spaces
number
is to be entered).
SCREEN
if
EXAMPLE:
REQUIRED
CLEAR
27
EXAMPLE:
OPTIONAL
HIGHLIGHTED
27
OPTIONAL
OPTIONAL
27
27
41
8 32
8
FUNCTION
EXAMPLE:
HOW MANY (MARACTERS
WIDE
HOW MANY LINES
LONG
IS
USE 7 OR 8 BIT
ASCII
Data
40
This code is provided to set your terminal
to the proper mode (if required) when
DataFlex
is loaded.
INITIALIZATION
1984
l
This code will move the cursor one space
to the left, replacing the character with
SPACE
REQUIRED
(C)
cursor
FUNCTION
a space.
EXAMPLE:
Copyright
the
FUNCTION
EXAMP,LE:
TERMINAL
from
Enter the code(s) to restore your terminal
mode.
(low intensity)
to the normal
SCREEN
BACK
34
FUNCTION
EXAMPLE:
DESTRUCTIVE
42
If your terminal supports highlighting (or
another display attribute that you prehighferL enter the value that begins
Then
data
in the windows
lighted display.
in high1ighteci mode.
will appear
SCREEN
NON-HIGHLIGHTED
one
FUNCTION
Enter the code that clears
to the end of the screen.
TO END OF SCREEN
screen
IS
27
40
YOUR TERMINAL?
YOUR TERMINAL?
CJIARACTERS?
Access
Corporation
(79
(24
(
7
is standard)
is standard)
is standard)
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
INSTALLING
Manual
A-31
DATAFLEX
"—_—_—"""
PART
CURSOR
FOUR:
POSITIONING
CODES
Part Four of SETSCREEn Involves entering the codes that actually
position the cursor on the screen. They are entered in the same way
separated
by spaces.
numbers
as the screen
functions above,, as decimal
The
a
string
value
that will
function
will
generate
positioning
cursor
how
The following
be sent to the terminal.
questions will determine
that string is constructed.
POSITION
LINE
COLUMN
BEFORE
TO PRECEDE
CODES
(Y
OR N)
COORDINATE:
LINE
Y
64
27
the columm
the line co-ordinate to precede
terminal expects
respond
otherwise
with
"N". Next,
question
with
"Y";
the
to
enter the character string (in decimdb separated by spaces)
preceed
the line and column coordinates.
If your terminal does not
require a character string before one of these coordfnatés» just enter
If
your
then
answer
.
POSITION
LINE
CODES
POSITION
CURSOR
POSITIONING
offset
at zero.
codes
COLUMN
(BIAS)
TERMINATION
will
O
is
code
32)
32
(column
O
Is
code
32)
CODE:
to the actual cursor position
ADDED
be
(line
32
COORDINATE:
CODE OFFSET
COLUMN
The
(BIAS)
CODE OFFSET
TO PRECEDE
starting
require the positioning codes as a one byte binary
these, answer the question below with a "B". Some
(mostly ANSI terminals) require the code as an ASCII number.
terminals
Most
For
number.
terminals
SEND CURSOR
POSITIONING
NUMBER OF NULLS
CODES
TO SEND AFTER
IN
BINARY
CLEAR
OR ASCII
SCREEN
(B/A):
B
POSITIONING:
AND CURSOR
O
(mostly older) terminals require a delay after a screen
operaFor
characters that should
these. enter the number of null
tion.
be sent.
Some
fill
IS
your
THIS
DATA
entries
CORRECT
(YIN)
or repeat this
A "N"o
Y
response
section in
case
"""" ""===============Corporation
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
will allow
of errors.
you
to verify
=====
05/16/84
A-32
INSTALLING
DATAFLEX
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
Manual
————————
THE
SETSCREEN
MENU
codes.
screen
This ends the initial setup of DataF1ex
If you enter an
incorrect code9 or want to change a function key, you may re-select
any of the options from
the menu below.
If you re-enter the SETSCREEn
programg
the initial screen
display will list your manually-defined
you established
'terminal on the pre-defined list under the identifier
for it.
EDIT:
From
(I)
SET
(2)
ASSIGN
(3)
(4)
SET
DISPLAY
(5)
PRINT
(6)
END
(7)
ABORT
this
menu
SYSTEM
OPTIONS
FUNCTION
TERMINAL
KEYS
CCNTROL
PRESENT
CODES
CCNFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
/
you
SAVE
CMNGES
SETSCREEN
may
-
DO NOT WRITE
select the function
QIANGES
which
you
want
to
change.
B
will generally
the configuration
It
When
changes
be
as
useful to select option (5) to print
a reference for the FLEXKEYs.
your configuration is comp1etey
and return to the DataFlex
use
option
(6)
to
save
a copy
of
your
Menu.
~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
A—33
_ ""_""
————————
——
==""_"
" " " " " " "" " " " " "" " " " "
________—_—————_——__~~~~~_——==
~
__—————
m
——
: m:z====
OPERATING
TUTORIAL
_———
::::F:E:::
—————————
—
————
———
-— —————
—- ———————————————
———————
you with DataFlex.
This tutorial
is designed
to familiarize
concepts
is
objective
to introduce you to several necessary
tions of the systE%n without going into depth about how the
are
carried out within DataFlex.
Its
and
func-
processes
It is intended that you use this section of the user's manual in a
learning "session". or series of "sessions"» actively exploring DataFlex on your system with the manual as your guide.
The
Programming
you through
DataF1ex
SYSTEM
the
Tutorial in the next section of this
steps
involved in creating your own
will
with
manual
database
guide
álECKOUT.
..
certain prerequisites must first
proceeding with the tutoriab
make
sure
that DataFlex is properly operational on
confirmed to
We dorót want
an improper
to
or incomplete installation
your system.
introduction
to DataFlex.
with
interfere
your
Before
be
have
instructions packaged
followed the installation
First» you should
Master
diskettes for your particular version of the
with your DataFlex
executed
have
the SETSCREEn Program
to conproduct. Next. you should
for your particular system's CRT control codes and
figure DataFlex
have
command
key setup.
printed out a list of your
Also, you should
system's command key set up using option 5 on the SETSCREEn Menu to
give you a guide to follow during the familiarization.
If you have
do
not run SETSCREEm or have not printed your Flex-key configuratiom
those
steps
before proceeding further here.
With
items
these
accomplished,
FOR FLOPPY
DISK
BASED
you
should
COWUTERS,
of the operating system
drive "A: ", and the sample
and
copy
ON HARD DISK
BASED
data
COKPUTERS,
to the drive or work area where
master
diskettes.
the DataFlex
turn
on
your
system
load a diskette containi ng a
the DataFlex programs
into
diskette into drive "B: "; OR
"boot" the systa
DataFlex
has
and
been
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
"log in"
loaded
be able to determine
should
then
that specific DataFlex
available on your "logged in device" (see glossary) by having
system
display a directory.
You
Copyright
and:
files
from
are
the
05/
16/84
A-34
OPERATING
TUTORIAL
DataFlex 2.0 User's
Manual
that you are logged
in to the "A:
drive (and you may not
should
be able to
on a hard
you
particularly
disk
systemL
then
-enter the DIR command indicated below (shown in boldface) and have a
display containing the listed file names (quite possibly in a different order than displayed here) shown on your CRT screen
along with
the
names
of other ".COM" files that may be on the same diskette or
hard
drive partition
(replace ".COM" with ".CMD" on CP/M-86 systms):
If
be
we
"
assume
A>DIR
*.COM
A: FLEX
.COM
(or
COMP
DIR
.COM
*.CMD
on
QUERY
CP/M-86)
.COM
If
these file names are displayed, then you have the necessary
compoin place to proceed
with this section.
If all of these are not
present in the displayed d1rectoryg try the comnand again. If the
above
flies are still not showñ» refer back to the installation instructions to make sure that they were completed.
nents
O.K., LET'S GET STARTED.
..
We
DataFlex can be run in a completely menu-controlled envirorment.
will use the sample menu that is delivered with DataFlex
as our
guide.
To get to that menu and begin, type the word
FLEX at the command
level
of your operating systan and press .
A>FLEX
In
a
few
seconds,
the
YOUR REGISTERED
DataFlex
Menu
should
display...
NAME
Serial
0" " " " " "
l l
DataFlex Ver. 2.0 -—-MASTER MENU
----
li
n
}
"
l
DataFlex
demo
l
l
2
3
DataFlex
System
Configuration
l
4
Set
Run
}
5
6
DataF1ex
Enter System
l
7
Exit
#
:
ii
li
0
l
files
Utilities
Date
l
Systan
To
l
Configuration
Command
Operation
l
System
l
I
"
i
,
i
l
Please
i
select one of the above o¶¶tions
or
to go back one menu >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
l
press
l
—
——————
***
DataFlex
Menu
Systw
—————————
Copyright
(C)
***
————————
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
Manual
OPERATING
TUTORIAL
A-35
that stores the
configuration (named MENU.FLX)
is a DataF1ex
option "data" in a data base file. You will learn how to modify
later
the existing menus and put your own configurations on the screen
For
on.
now we will use the
standard menu to begin our tour through
DataFlex.
The
Menu
menu
SELECTING
A MENU OPTION...
To select an option from
the meñi-b just
AND .
Let's start by selecting
number
press a
display:
YOUR
(I)
one
on
your
Serial
NAME
REGISTERED
DataFlex
li
li
O
l
keyboard,
press the corresponding number
the DataFlex Demo Menu...
and another menu will
Demo
l
2
Data
l
l
3
l
4
l
l
5
6
Report
Customer
Report
Vendor
l
7
(N-LINE
l
l
8
QUERY
:
li
li
2.00
Files
Enter Vendors
Enter Inventory Items
Enter Customers
Inventory Movement Report
#
e
" l
l
l
l
l
I
l
Invoice
Files
l
'
Data
f
"
Please
select one of the above options or press
to go back
one menu >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
l
l
***
DataFlex
Menu
System
l
l
_
***
displays a list of predefined options that you can use to
Enter a number one (l) to select.
applications work.
option. DataFlex will now load and display
the VENDOR File Maintenance
"image"
used
a screen
for the entry, recall and editing of data in the
This
see
menu
how
sample
DataFlex
VENDOR
Copyright
(C)
data
base
file.
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
OPERATING
A-36
TUTORIAL
DataFlex
2.0
Manual
User's
======——————————————————
—————————————————————
— ———————
DATA
ACCESS
VENDOR
VENDOR
CORPORATION
NUMBER:
<
COMPANY:
ADDRESS:
<
>
ST:
(DAYS):
TERMS
_
()
"
CREDIT
LIMIT:
OUTSTANDING
CREDIT:
REMAINING
TOTAL
WIndows
in
FLEX-KEY
$
PURMASES:
LAST
> can
CREDIT:
ZIP:
$
$
$
._
._
._
._
_/_/_
PURMASE:
<
FILE
>
CITY:
PHONE :
MASTER
be
to
used
FIND
vendors
OPERATION...
uses
"Flex-keys" to accomplish
various actions on a screen
These
are
display.
in lieu of a menu which would list the options
available to a system operator at any given point in an application.
the
The Flex-key concept
works
used
same keys
are
for the
well because
same function throughout all DataFlex
applications on a given system
Foe examp1ep
the
same key
is used on all screens
to FIND a record in
the data basep or to CLEAR displayed infomation from the screen
image.
As noted
above,
Flex-keys are specified in the DataFlex
SETSCREEn
Program.
Specific detailed infomation on the use of the
in the chapter on Operator Procedures.
Flex-keys is in this manual
DataFlex
"FINDING"
A RECORD
IN
THE
DATA
BASE...
NUMBER "window"
on the screen.
Enter a number one (IK and press the FIND Flex-key on your keyboard
The screen
(as
defined in the Flex-key list printed with SETSCREEn).
should
You have just
display information for Data Access Corporation.
executed
your first DataFlex Commandl
Your
cursor will
CLEARING
To
remove
mand Key.
was
INFORMATION
this
The
originally
Copyright
wait in the
(C)
FROM THE
information
displayed
Data
DISPLAY
SCREEN...
the screem press
be restored to the
the menu.
from
should
screen
1984
VENDOR
from
Access
Corporation
the
same
CLEAR
status
ALL
as
Comwhen
it
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
A RECORD
"FINDING"
OPERATING
Manual
——
BY AN ALTERNATE
TUTORIAL
A-37
"KEY"
configured to allow VENDORs to be found by either the
you found
a record by VENDOR
or the VENDOR NAME. Above.
NUMBER.
Now,
we can
find the same record by VENDOR NAME. While the
cursor is positioned in the VENDOR NUMBER W1ndOWg press » and
(The
should
move to the VENDOR NAME window.
in
zero which appears
the VENDOR NUMBER wIndow signifies null input, and may be ignored
whenever
appears.) With the cursor in the VENDOR NAME WindOwy type
and press
the FIND Flex-key.
the word "DATA" (in capital letters),
Again, the information for Data Access Corporation should be
displayed.
This
screen
is
VENDOR NUMBER
it
it
MOVING
THE
CURSOR
AROUND THE
SCREEN...
Pressing the command key will move the cursor sequentially
To move backwards
image.
on
through the entry wIndows of the screen
VENDOR NAME window
example
from
back
screen
(for
to VENDOR
the
the
Each strike
NUMBERL
press
of or
the BACK WINDOW Flex-key.
One
BACK WINDOW will
one window.
move the cursor forward or backward
from
or a
a BACK WINDOW from
the
the first window,
caution:
to c1earg and possibly a
last window will cause all the windows
"record" to be saved which you didn't intend to. The safe way to
and to
is to strike the CLEAR ALL F1ex-Key»
clear all the windows
screen
altogether,
is to strike the ESCape Flex-key.
leave the
"SCANNING"
THE
DATA
BASE...
provides a means for you to scan the records in the data base
key
by any pre-deflned
index. You can enter the index at any point
and move
the records
forward or in reverse through
in the data base
(as
above)
and the
image
With
screen
a
described
clear
cursor
file.
NEXT
RECORD
Vendor
VENDOR
NUMBER
window,
press
the
Flex-key.
in the
NEXT RECORD again...
should
NOWg press
number
be displayed.
"l"
be used
be displayed.
number
vendor
can
This same process
"2" should
window
image.
Indexed
on a DataFlex screen
on any
will not
It
data.
function on a window that has un-indexed
DataFlex
information can begin at any place in an index.
with a VENDOR NAME that
to scan all records
started with the letter "G", you would move the cursor to the VENDOR
Then
NAME window
and enter a "G".
press the NEXT RECORD Flex-key and
the first record in the data base which has a VENDOR NAME alphabetlcally following the letter "G" wIll be displayed, possibly "GARNER
To scan
SYSTEMS"
following the
to the record
or "GENERAL ELECTRIC".
To move
in
NEXT RECORD agaim and agaim etc.
press
one disp1ayedD
PREVIOUS
RECORD Flex-key.
the
use
reverse,
A scan
of data
example
For
if
base
you
wanted
==",~==
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
——————
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
OPERATING
A-38
A NEW RECORD
ENTERING
DataF]ex
TUTORIAL
INTO
THE
DATA
User's
2.0
Manual
BASE...
far everything that we have done has used data already stored in
Clear the
the data base.
It's time for some of your own information!
screen
using the CLEAR ALL Flex-key.
Next. press the Key and
when
be displayed on the screen
temporarily;
a zero (O) will
your new
to your
data is saved a VENDOR NUMBER will automatically be assigned
new entry.
So
The
should
now
MANUFACTURING"
cursor
"MICRO
address, city.
credit limit.
be
in the
and
press
ZIP,
state,
VENDOR
code
area
window.
NAME
Then
.
and
phone
Type
fill
in
number,
the
a
name
fictitious
terms
and
entered, your data for
the credit limit
MICRO MANUFACTURING
will be saved In the data base automatica11y. The
on the screen
contain calculated data that is upremaining windows
be made to
No operator entry can
dated
by other parts of the system.
those windows.
has
When
been
base.
To FIND
new record is now stored in the data
itg place the
type MICRO MANUFACTURING and press
cursor in the VENDOR NAME window,
be displayed
record should
the FIND Flex-key. MICRO MANUFACTURING'S
image,
You can CLEAR the screen
or use NEXT or
on the screen.
PREVIOUS
RECORD Flex-keys to scan
other records in the data base.
The
MANGING
INFORMATION
IN
THE
BASE...
DATA
important functions of any information system
is to
on-going updates
to stored data. This would include
examples
changes
such
as address
in
in a mailing list. price changes
an inventory system,
in
of making these changes
etc. The process
DataFlex
or updatech
is easy... you FIND the record to be changed
imageg
and then
changes
on the displayed screen
enter the necessary
SAVE the record back
Let's try
to the data base.
One
of the
provide for
most
the
it...
Move the
the data base record for MICRO MANUFACTURING.
cursor
and change
the existing data to
to the phone number windows
something
else (e.g. (414)354-6868
to (939)456-9876). Now press the
be stored back
SAVE Flex-key,
and the record will
in the data base
again
FIND MICRO MANUFACTURING
with the changed phone number.
to
verify that your change has been recorded.
FIND
down
can be executed
at any time that a record is disThe displayed information
image.
wIll be SAVEd
the screen
This allows
regardless of the position of the cursor in the image.
you to save
keystrokes by moving the cursor as far Into an image as
necessary
the SAVE without
to change information, and then execute
moving
end
the
the
to
of
screen.
SAVE
The
played
Command
on
HOW TO EXIT
To
leave
THE
any
SCREEN
DataF1ex
& RETURN
screen
TO THE
image
and
MENU...
return control
to the
Menu,,
—————————————————————————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
OPERATING
Manual
TUTORIAL
A-39
___—————_———=———
The screen
image
simply press the ESCAPE Flex-key.
will clear
the DataFlex Menu will re-display ready for another
selection.
and
in
a moment
CHECKPOINT...
SO FAM
have
we
---
explored:
DataFlex
Loading
Making
selection
a
--
Displaying
--
FINDing
--
CLEARing
--
Moving
--
Scanning
--
SAVEing
--
Changing
--
Exiting
a
screen
information
a
the cursor
new
base
a
the DataFlex
Menu
"image"
in the
around
base
data
the
screen
image
information
fnformation
existing
from
from
system
"image"
screen
data
the operating
from
in the
information
display
screen
data
base
in the
data
to the
menu.
base
comfortable with the operation of the system at this point,
Phase
II to build your own sample application file.
there are areas of this section which are unclean or if you just want
more
with the various operations, you can
of a familiarity
to develop
review
you feel comfortable
any of the preceding operations until
enough
to move on to the next phase.
If
you
proceed
are
If
to
====—===—————~—————————~~~—~~———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
~~~~+
Corporation
————
05/16/84
A-40
OPERATING
TUTORIAL
Dataf1ex
2.0
================================"===="====_——~~~———~~———
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporati
LEFT
on
User's
Manual
—
BLANK
05/]6/84
A~41
——_""""_—"~______"_____—————~——====Z=Z====
=====
==========
EE2á2Es
QUERYING
THE
====
""~"~"""""
DATABASE
="=="=====
—————————————
OVERVIEW
enables
user
any level of system
to quickly
DataFlex QUERY Program
QLJERY can
easily extract information from a DataFlex database.
automatica11y
displays, or
format the file data for reportm screen
disk files. The information can be output by any index, and can be
entered at run time.
selectively extracted according to specifications
and non-technical.
The operation of QUERY is completely interactive
The
and
include optional tota11ing of
Additional features of the QUERY Program
numeric
fieldm and a full range of logical selections (less tham
Up to ten selections
less than or equal tOp etc.) can be used.
per
session are allowed.
meaning
QUERY is device-independent,
from
can be
that
directed to the screen, printer or a disk file. If QUERY'S output is
directed to a disk file,, the data is stored in ASCII format so that
QUERY also offers
read
by other programs.
be edited or
the
can
QUERY has
been
comp1etedp
once
successful
to save
to disk
a
optiom
and run
which
be compiled
as
source
can
as a report configuration
file
QUERY as many times thereafter
as
the
repeating
a DataFlex
program
A1ternat1ve]y, the QUERY-produced
may be desired.
file may be further
modified to become any other kind of report that may be desired.
it
Output
it
it
only one DataF1ex
inquiries can
multifile
configurations by use of the REPORT command
another section of this manual.
Although
QUERY
can
file at a timep
created as DataF1ex
macro.
described in
database
handle
data
prompted
base
be
PROGRAM START-UP
QUERY
menu
is generally
selection or
If the DataFlex
enter the number
Cíu-y"ight
(C)
started from
operating
the
one
of
system
is installed
corresponding to QUERY
MENU system
1984
Data
Access
two
levels of the
command
system:
a
mode.
and
on
Corporation
active on your system
the Data Flex Demo File
05/16/84
-
A-42
THE
QUERYING
Menu
or
examp1e7
which
other menus on
choice number
8
it
in the
may be included
Demo menu below:
Demo
DataFlex
l
2
3
4
5
6
-->
on
User's
2.0
DataFlex
DATABASE
Manual
For
system.
your
Files
Enter Vendors
Enter Inventory Items
Enter Customers
Report
Inventory Movement
Customer
Report
Vendor
Report
ON-LINE
Invoice
7
8 Query
files
data
QUERY
the menu systw is not in USév
operating system by simply typing the
If
may
program
be
invoked
from
the
name:
A>QL)ERY
If
the
file
assigned
number
be
number
given that
step of displaying
skipped. E.g.:
can
A>QUERY
If
no
file
display a
selection.
list
a
to the DataFlex data
on the operating system
of files available for
file
is
command
query
QUERY
knowm
line
will be
and
the
21
accompanies
the entry to QUERY, the program
of files available on the system and prompt
Enter the number of the file to be queried.
will
for
number
list
File
File
Number
Namé
21:
ENTER
a
VENDOR
22:
INVENTORY
25:
CUSTOMER
29:
LINE
FILE
you
NUMBER.
FILE
FILE
ITEMS
OR RETURN
====""=="""""~~"""~""""""""""""""""""""""""""
Copyright (c) 1984 Data Access Corporation
""",————"
FOR MORE FILES:
""
21
"""""""""
"""""" 05/16/84
QUERYING
Manual
DataFlex 2.0 User's
DATABASE
THE
A-43
——————
—————
——————
PROGRAM OPERATION
When
a
file
the fields
has been
selected,
in the selected data
QLJERY
file.
will
display the
names
all
of
example:
For
ADDRESS
O:
RECORD
I:
VENDOR
2:
3:
CITY
4:
STATE
5:
ZIP
6:
PH0NE_AC
7:
PHONE_EX(MG
8:
PHONE_NUMBER
9:
TERMS
10:
CREDIT_LIMIT
PURMASES
13:
LAST_PURQ1ASE
II:
12:
SELECT
DATA
#
ITEMS
THE
FILE
YOU WANT TO BE QUERIED
SELECTIONS
ON TO THE
TO CONTINUE
COLUMNS
CREDIT_USED
FROM
Á'21
WHEN YOUR FIELD
TOTAL
THAT
of
=
10
NEXT
ARE CONF'LETED,
SECTION
FIELD
ENTER
PRESS
OF QUERY.
# TO PRINT:
2
FIELD
# TO PRINT:
with the number of the
is where you respond
field from the displayed list in the order you wish the information to
be:
be displayed
field #, ,
or output. Your entries should
in a report format7
field #, , etc. If you output your query
headers
column
columns
and
in your display or printout will be
the
the
the field names which you select here.
ENTER
ALLOCATED
prompt
the number of horizontal
will accumulate
(characters) used as you select fields for formatted output.
The number
are
calculated by taking the larger of: the
of columns
size of the field you entered from the ]ist» or the size of the data
appeared
on the list plus a space
separator.
field name as
The
COLUMNS
columns
it
many fields
to be included in the QUERY as you want.
the standard video display
the following in mind:
80 columns
(some
and some printers
can only accomnodate
screen
80
COLUMNS
ALLOCATED
exceeds
accomnodate
only 79). If the
actually
which
may make the line of
(or 79), the screen will "wrap around"
unformatted data unreadable.
You
may
However,
enter
as
keep
132 columns
printers will accommodate
of printing at 12 characters per
create up to 255 characters of output per
or
Many
capable
inch
more
or
(e.g. printers
more).
QUERY can
line.
——— ———
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
QUERYING
A-44
DataFlex
DATABASE
THE
to the prompt
placing an asterisk
change
you
your mind about a
cancel
the last selection by
As
respond
you
tions
the
desired fields have
the next section.
fields.
all
When
move
by
The
next
ENTER
than
a
if
ITEM
SELECTIONS
MAKING
These
will
prompt
been
chosem
will
QUERY
PRINTED
Manual
if
THE
AT
the key to
totals are wanted on
press
ask
QUERY?
END OF THE
be:
TO SELECT
IN
User's
line, QUERY will mark your field selecShould
in front of the field tag name.
field that has been selected for outpUt9
key.
using the BACK WINDOW comand
on to
numeric
DO YOU WANT TOTALS
2.0
BY OR PRESS
TO CONTINUE:
QJJERY
the logical operators available in QUERY (less than, less
of data from
or equal to, etc.)c that are used to define a subset
are
file.
the
<:
LESS
>:
GREATER
{:
};
THAN
THAN
selected is
field
numeric
LESS
will
you
THAN
GREATER
OR EQUAL
THAN
TO
OR EQUAL
TO
see:
NUMBER:
EQUAL
=:
if
the
field
TO
X:
selected is alphanumeric
NOT
you
EQUAL
will
TO
see:
STRING:
S:
As
STRING
@: STRING
COMPARE
line
to the prompt
will change by translating your
into the appropriate words. QIJERY will also mark the field
names
list on the upper portion of the screen with the selected
symbol.
If a greater than and a less than are specifiedbe for the same
selected.
fielch a range of records between
the two values will
allowed
The maximum
number
fs 10.
of selection criteria
you
respond
INCLUDES
it
responses
QÍOOSING
AN OUTPUT
SEQJJENCE FOR QJJERY
will display the available indexes
for the file. Select the
or order of the QUERY
index that you want to determine
the sequence
and
do
you
press
the
not enter an index number,
output. If
according to the record number of the data.
output will be ordered
QUERY
—————
———————.,————-————————-—
Cnpyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
QUERYING
Manual
User's
2.0
DataF1ex
THE
DATABASE
A-45
—— —————————
—
*
l
2
--->
--->
OF THIS
OUTPUT
wiR
then
will
QUERY
ask
ENTER
THE
each
of
BE LISTED
SHOULD
TITLE
the
for
top
at the
appear
QUERY
OF THE
page
of
BY:
REPORT.
This information
report format QUERY.
a
HEADER:
REPORT
At this point you
for the output destination.
Next, QUERY wi71 prompt
also have the option of using QUERY to create a configuration file for
The default
is to output a report
a DataFlex report.
for this prompt
formatted query to the screen.
AT THIS
SHOULD
POINT
A REPORT
OUTPUT
YOU MAY SELECT
BE DIRECTED.
IMAGE
QUERY
WHERE THE
YOU MAY ALSO
OUTPUT
SELECT
THE
QUERY
OF THIS
FORMAT
FOR
FILE.
TO:
(F)i1ey (R)eport
(S)creen, (P)rinter,
or (A)bort:
imagep
entry of "S" will cause the output to go to the CRT screen; "P"
send
"F" will direct
to a disk fi7e
the output to the printer;
will
(you
will be prompted
for a ffle name); or "R" will create a "Report
(see
Image"
next paragraph). A , or default, response
will be
Both
the
"S"
executed
were
"F" (file) and "R"
as though
selected.
options will trigger the questions below.
(report configuration)
An
it
USING
By
A REPORT
CONFIGURATION
response
an "R"
to the output option prompt you will
creation of a report configuration file. The next prompt
used
you want
of three formats, Report, Reach or Quoted,
when
report
is
the
output
run:
which
SELECT
THE
1)Report,
OUTPUT
2)Reád»
FORMAT
or
FORMAT:
on
DataFlex
a
data
base
file.
1984
Data
for
ask
the
format:
of
a
under
A sequential ASCII
format consisting of each
separate line terminated with a carriage return.
the format that the DataFlex
utility READ uses to "Read" data
READ
element
will
TO BE USED
3)Quoted
A formatted columnar
report consisting
I) REPORT FORMAT:
elements
arranged
data
in columns
sectiom column headerm
appropriate names, and totals (if selected) at the end.
2)
start
making
the
data
QUERY TO GENERATE
title
their
data
This is
into a
__—————__——______=————
Copyright
(C)
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
QUERYING
A-46
DataF1ex
DATABASE
THE
2.0
User's
Manual
——————————————
===——
ASCII
A sequential
QUOTED FORMAT:
file format compatible with many
versions of BASIC and the "merge"
files created and used by many word
and commas
quotes
("BJ') are used to delimit
processors, in which
Leading
fields and each record is terminated by a carriage return.
QUERY,
from
trimmed
from
and
are
the
fields
of
output
blanks
trailing
(unless you
report configuration
but not from output of the generated
subsequently edit
to do SO).
3)
it
Then
you
be
will
prompted:
THE
ENTER
REPORT
IMAGE
NAME
(8
MARACTERS
MAX)?
up to eight (8) characters
in length that
with the fi7ename
configuration file to be stored under by
the report source
QUERY will
add an extension of .RPT to your
the operating system.
entry resulting in a final name of the file of fi1ename.RPT.
Thereforep
you must
not specify your own extension to the filename.
If you doF QUERY will ignore it.
Respond
wish
you
QUERY
a file already exists with that name (filename.RPT),
will
message
to that effect and ask whether
issue a warning
or not to
in this case is .
overwrite the file. The default response
If
Next
you
will
a message:
see
REPORT
PRESS
IMAGE
CREATED!
TO
CONTINUE......
above.
shown
will then again display the output option prompt
is intended to give you the opportunity to output the actual
(as opposed
data
to the report configuration file which you have just
your
only purpose
for running QUERY at this point was to
created).
If
REPORT
fí1eg choice "A" to abort would be
configuration
create the
your choice.,
QLJERY
which
In
must
order to use
compile
the
it
A>COMP
into
report configuration file created
a .FLX
file with the comnand:
by
QUERY9
you
fl1ename.RPT
filename is the name you gave the file in answer to QUERYG
above.
Prior to compiling itg you may wish to modify it in one
way or anothem
in which case you may do so as you would with any
DataFlex
source
configuration
other
file (see the chapter on How to
configuration
Write a Configuration in this manual). The compiled
be executed
from
would
then
the operating system with the comand:
where
prompt
A>FLEX
filename {output destination}
—————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
B"l
—— ————————-——————
——————————————————
==========
EEEEE=====
PROGRAMMING TUTORIAL
==========
======"===
_______"_"
·
CREATING
A DATAFLEX
APPLICATION
——
zm: zz="=
OF YOUR OWN
you will
is to
experience how easy
section of the tutorial,
having
DataF1ex
ever
without
to "program".
application using
Them
have
once
you
an application
functionfngg you will be introduced
be
by
done
what
can
just
the slightest effort into
putting
to
"customizing" your application requirements.
In
this
create
it
an
in a
to appoint you as manager
achieve this, we have decided
with word prothat has just bought their first microcomputer
cessing and DataFlex. As the member of the group who "took a computer
been
you have
selected to be the one to become
course
in co1lege'%
(and
familiar with the new system and to undertake the development
systems.
management
some
new
information
perfection!)
of
To
company
and thoughtful
gi"wpó
you and your associates recoga creative
The
nize the value of properly planning the information system.
first
a personnel
for the
information system
task defined is to develop
Being
company.
provides several methods to implement
your application
at this point is the
requirements. The easiest and most efficient
of a data base file on your CRT
facility for youwordto create an "image" DataFíex
Editor program.
screen
using a
processor or the
DataFlex
is a format into which data can
in DataFlex termino1ogyg
can be displayed on a CRT screen, or on a
inserted for output.
It
The image
can
include prompting
printed report.
or 1abelling for
where
which
the
is stored in the data base, and "windows"
information
images
a text
with
created
stored data will be output. DataF1ex
are
editor (one is included with DataFlex) or any word processor that can
create and edit a plain ASCII file. Creating an image with your
a visual approach
to designing your
editor allows you to develop
works.
how
looks with how
applications that combines
An
be
"image%
it
it
a utility program
may
an
is
supplied with DataFlex, called AUTODEF, into a data base file
and data
definition
entry screen. AUTODEF reads in the "image"
file,
how you want
asks
things to workg and then
you
some questions about
outputs another file (called a "configuration source" file) onto your
and executed
a
as is, or modified to meet
disk that can be compiled
and
then
compiled. The rest of this
particular set of requirements,
this process. There are othéi"» more flexible ways
section illustrates
FILEDEF)
which
these
accomplishing
functions (such as through
of
are
in this manual.
described elsewhere
When
comp1eté»
"image"
it
be
processed
by
—-——
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
PROGRAMMING
B-2
TUTORIAL
—'—
Manual
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
————
'
Getting Started...
made up an image
procesSg
we have
the familiarization
file
below
with the task defined
to help you get underway
printed
be using
above.
We will
as the
basis of the rest of the tutorial.
You can also use
as is or modify
with your word processor or the
DataFlex
Editor to suit your own tastes for actual use in your own
business.
To
speed
it
and
it
it
Type
in with your
it
it
save
this:
under
the
processor or the DataFlex
with no extension.
word
name
it
PEOPLE,
text editor and
It should look like
/SCREEN
PERSONNEL
,...........,...,.........
EMPLOYEE
LAST
NNE
:
ADDRESSI
:
ADDRESS2
CITY
:
SOC.
#
SEC.
_j'_J_
:
$
PAY
TYPE
:
PEOPLE
:
ZIP
_
:
:
RATE
and
_
ST
PAY
Refer
to the
terminology
MI:
:
:
l*
..............................
FIRST:
-
HIRED
DATE
FILE
._
(H=Hour1y
or
_
"image"
concepts.
file
as
S=Sa1aried)
we
learn
some
basic DataFiex
the first line above is a PAGENAME by which we can
below)
The "windows"
(see
with DataFlex connands,
A
assigned
numbers
sequence.
are
fn a left to right, top to bottom
by the PAGENAME followed by the number
of
given window is addressed
window,
for example
the EMPLOYEE LAST NAME window above is SCREEN.I.
The
"/SCREEN"
address
the
on
image
a
) that you
(and
see above
underline characters (
in the PEOPLE
They
on
your
are
disk)
called
"windows".
data
represent
the area
file
where
The
on a CRT screen
information can be entered or displayed.
number
the length of
of underline characters in a window determines
Ten underlines define a
the data that is valid for entry or display.
window
that will accept
ten characters of data input or display.
The
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
—
Access
————————————————————————————————————————
Corporation
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataF1ex
PROGRAMMING
Manual
B-3
TUTORIAL
==———————————————————————————————————————
the three types of
illustrates
DataFlex. The three types are called
PEOPLE
data
ASCII»
can be stored by
NUMERIC and DATE.
that
data
is any character or group of characters, that can be typed
the letters A to Z and a to z; numbers 0...9;
the keyboard:
etc.; and space.
punctuation such as comma (9)9 period (.)p colon (:
when you
That's right... a space charactem generated
press the space
keyboarch
bar
as
is just as important to the computer
on the terminal
any other character.
ASCII
from
L
a person's
of ASCII data are: the name of a city (MIAMI),
("N" for new or "U" for
(Mike), or a single character symbol
but they are
used). Numbers can be entered into ASCII windows,
value or charactertreated only as characters and have no numeric
An example
of numbers that could be carried as ASCII data
istics.
number
numbers,
such
would
be identification
on
as the registration
the side of an airplane (N8847J).
Examples
name
ASCII
ters
character
)
(
data
such
Is represented in the image
that following the employee
as
by
underline characin PEOPLE.
name
underline
placing certain other characters among the data "window"
characters, you can specify either of two other types of data for the
By
window.
data
windows
are specified by the inclusion of one decimal
point (.) in place of one of the underline characters for a window.
such
They
as
are appropriate for data which signifies quantities,
volumes
amounts
of moneµ
of fueñ or quantities of parts in
done
on the data.
inventory, particularly
if calculations are to be
windows
NUMERIC
data
the minus sign
will accept
entry only of numbers,
and the decimal
point
(.).
(-),
NUMERIC
data
point is at the rightmost position in a numeric
), the window will accept
entry of whole numbers only
9999
point is placed within the group
but not 9.99 ). If the decimal
)9
window
(
of underline characters that make up a numeric
then
formats
the entered
or displayed data according to the
would
display 12.3
point (the window
position of the decimal
._
as 12.30).
If
the
decimal
(
window
.
._
it
DATE
windows
slashes (l)
the PEOPLE
(
shoyn
are
in the image by underline characters and
The "Date
Hired" in
in the specific format " / _J ",
"image"
of a date _window.
is an example
_
prompting
and any descriptive
placement
of data windowm
or other
information is not of importance
to DataFlex or the AUTODEF Utility.
Only
are
of interest to
the three different types of data windows
Ít¢s
DataFíex. Don't overlook the "/*" at the bottom of the image.
very importantp as you will see.
The
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
PROGRAMMING
B-4
DataFlex
TUTORIAL
2.0
User's
Manual
=
______—
processor or the DataFlex Editors you can inspect the
file at addyour leisure... change it9 lengthen one of the
ASCII
windows
some underlinesh
translate the prompting to a
(just
etc. By doing this you can get a feet for how an
foreign language,
"image"
be manipulated to be just
can
the way you want it.
Using
Nord
your
PEOPLE
image
how to do all
about
of this. ietfs get
The
the operating system by typing FLEX.
Configuration option
play. Select the DataFiex
On that menw
select the option for AUTODEF.
from
The
CRT screen
will
ENTER
"ROOT
NAME"
clear
and
Master
from
Menu
the
DataFlex
will dis-
Master
Menu.
prompt:
OR
TO EXIT
OF FILE
Load
done!
it
Enough
TO CREATE:
DEFINITION
to return to the menu, press , otherwise type
AUTODEF know the name of the
you want
to work
file thatPEOPLE
where
working
system
a
you
on
the
is
not
on.
are
file
If
located on the "logged in drive", then you must type the drive desig"B: PEOPLE"
would
be a
nation where the file is stored, for examp1ep
typical entry for a floppy disk based system where the PEOPLE file is
stored on drive El:
you
If
PEOPLE
want
to
let
.
DataFlex
AUTODEF'S
will now display a
processing of the
FILENAME
IMAGE
the
file:
files
d: PEOPLE
CONFIGURATION
FILE
d: PEOPLE.FRM
"d: " in the above list
you may include with
PEOPLE
will
WHAT IS
as
a
result
of
d: PEOPLE
NAME
DataFlex
created
d: PEOPLE
NAME
ROOTNAME
FILE
DATAFLEX
that
of
SUMMARY:
FILE
The
list
PEOPLE
then
THE
the purposes
of
sufficient...
enter
correspond
(e.g.
to any
C: PEOPLE).
drive designation
prompt:
MAXIMUM
For
will
our
a
NUMBER
OF RECORDS
work
here,
value of lOó.
a small
"PEOPLE"
number
COULD
of
HAVE?
records
will
be
AUTODEF will
read
the PEOPLE image file
Without further interaction,
from
for
the disk. When the image has been read, you will be prompted
Any name up to IS characon the image.
the names of the data windows
with a letter and contains no spaces can be used.
ters which begins
but for purposes
of consistency as we go through this exercise, please
enter the following list of window names as they are requested.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
DataFlex
~~
User's
2.0
pR0gRAj¶qINg
Manual
——
===================~~~~—~~~—"
LNAME
FNAME
MI
ADDRI
ADDR2
CITY
ST
ZIP
SSAN
DATE
PAYRATE
PAYTYPE
Code
ZIP
window
will be highlighted
) as
underline character (
example
Account
Social Security
Date
Hired
the Pay Rate
the Pay Type
Each
below
indicates the
prompting for the Last Name:
The
LAST
:
:
CITY
:
SEC.
DATE
FIELD
:
ADDRESSI
ADDRESS2
SOC.
ENTER
NAME
#
HIRED
Number
asterisks ( *****
are
being asked
by
of the
appearance
FILE
***************
$_._
PAY
RATE
:
PAY
TYPE
:
screen
it.
when
FIRST:
it
is
MI:
_
:
_l—j_
in place of the
.............................
ST
:
)
about
you
PERSONNEL
....
EMPLOYEE
"""
Last Name
First Name
Middle Initial
the first line of Address
the second line of Address
City
State
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
B-5
TUTORIAL
(H=Hour1y
or
_
:
ZIP
_
:
S=Sa1aried)
NAME FOR FIELD_I:
you wish
to back up and rename a windowp the BACK
will move the asterisk "cursor" back to the desired
window.
After all windows have been named, you will have the opportuhave
been
any mfstakes
inadvertently
nity to redo the process
is:
entered. The prompt
As you
proceed,
WINDOW Flex-key
if
if
Press
If
"R"
"C"
to
continUeg
or
the above list has been
to re-enter the window
"R"
to re-do this
properly
entered9
names.
—————
=
Copyright
page:
press
_
"C";
if
not, press
~
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
PROGRNNING
B-6
of the window
of the fields which
make
to
fn
LNAME
2.
FNAME
5.
ADDR2
6.
CITY
9.
SSAN
LO.
DATE
l.
FIELD
ENTER
NUMBER
3.
7.
II.
TO
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
list
is presse6 a
a selection
the data base.
"C"
When
you
data
TUTORIAL
INDEX
are
MI
4.
ST
8.
PAYRATE
will
to be
names
be
displayed for
to FIND the
used
ADDR1
ZIP
12.
PAYTYPE
OR
TO END:
_
by Social Security
will want to find personnel
"9" to select that window for indexing.
Since
Manual
Number,
we
enter
it
can
DataFlex can allow for duplicate entries in a data fi1eg or
The choice is up to you.
In tPe case of a name windowp
reject them.
whereas
you would
probably want to allow for duplication,
in the case
a
is unique
for each person)
of a social security number (which
duplicate entry (two identical social security numbers constitute an
erroneous
entry) shou7d be rejected.
The
If
next
prompt
WILL
THE
want
you
duplicate
establishes
DATA
IN
THIS
combining
employees
order
by
BE UNIQUE?
INDEX
is allowed:
_
duplication
entriem press
alíowech
press
"N"9
"Y".
if
you
to reject
want
to create a single index to FIND
three fields containing data on an
example
By
name are
a good
of applying this feature.
index
a single
will put
the LÑ/ÑÉ9 FNAME and MI windowsp
That
in proper alphabetical sequence.
is, they will be in
Last Name, then First Nameg then Middle Initia1.
can be
Multiple data windows
information in the data base.
employee's
or not duplication
whether
used
The
in one index, pÜce the
enter multiple data windows
by spaces.
in a sfngle index entry9 separated
at hand. that entry would be:
To
numbers
of the
windows
For
example
ENTER
FIELD
NUMBER
TO
INDEX
OR
the above entry to create the
created. Them designate that the
unique
(allow duplicate names).
Make
second
data
TO END:
index
in this
entered
have
the index information for
and create the fndex
the file definition
the operation of the application.
After
you
process
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
the
L 2 3
for the file being
index will NOT be
PEOPLE,
and
data
AUTODEF
files
wIll
for
05/16/84
DataFlex
PROGRNNING
Manual
User's
2.0
B-7
TUTORIAL
—
It is
file was created by AUTODEF called PEOPLE.FRM.
located on the same disk drive where the PEOPLE image file is located.
been
we have
working witM and DataF1ex
It contains themakeimage that
Commands
the image function with the data file that was
that
PEOPLE.FRM
looks like this:
created by AUTODEF.
A command
.
/SCREEN
PERSONNEL
.,..........
EMPLOYEE
NAME
LAST
:
:
CITY
:
SEC.
SOC.
DATE
#
...........................
FIRST
:
ADDRESS1
ADDRESS2
FILE
ST
MI
:
ZIP
:
_
:
_
:
:
HIRED
:
PAY
RATE
:$
PAY
TYPE
:
_/_/—
._
(H=Hour1y
or
_
S=Sa1aried)
l*
OPEN PEOPLE
ENTER PEOPLE
ENTRY PEOF'LE.LNNAE
ENTRY PEOPLE.FNAME
ENTRY
PEOPLE.MI
ENTRY
PEOPL£.ADDR1
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ADDR2
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ST
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.SSAN
PEOPLE.DATE
PEOPLE.PAYRATE
ENTRY
PEOPLE.CITY
PEOPLE.ZIP
ENTRY PEOPLE.PAYTYPE
ENTEREND
ABORT
PEOPLE.FRM
cessor
and
Copyright
can
be
loaded
with the
DataFlex
Editor or your
word
pro-
inspected.
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
PROGRAMMING
B-8
TUTORIAL
DataFlex
===="="=__~——_~__~————~
2.0
User's
Manual
——————————~
"compiled" to be run under DataFlex. The Datain the form that we see 'ft here, and
processes
the internal
into'a highly compressed
file that contains
Should
and instructions
codes
we wish
on which
DataFlex operates.
to
change
application works (and we will),
the way that the personnel
and re-compiled.
PEOPLE.FRM
can be modified with your editor
After
the compiler will output a file called
processing PEOPLE.FRM,
PEOPLE.FRM
must
Flex compiler
now
reads
be
PEOPLE.FRM
it
PEOPLE.FLX.
COMPILING
A DataFlex
CONFIGURATION
FILE
DataF1ex
compile PEOPLE.FRM into an executab7e
program select the
Menu
Configuration option from the Master
screen. On the
a Configuration
Configuration Menu. enter the number for the Compile
When prompted
type
option.
there for the file name to compi1ep
PEOPLE.FRM.
Make sure
to include the .FRM file extension or you will
be instructing
to compile the file PEOPLE, which does not
the program
command
contain the necessary
lines to create an application.
To
DataF1ex
disk drives will now become activep and some recognizable portions of PEOPLE.FRM will be displayed on the CRT screen. Don't be
You may think that what
a1armedl
you see
is some form of "programiS a display of the comand
lines as
mer's revenge". In faCtg
some very useful functions to
DataFiex is compiling them and serves
advanced
DataFlex users.
Your
it
The
has
done
with AUTODEF in the case of this
creation processy
The
creates a support file required for the compiler.
file
name of filename.FD where
"filename" is derived from the name of
file
examp1ep
a
the image
Therefore,
When
Menu.
file processed
a file called
compilation
You
are
by
AUTODEF.
PEOPLE.FD
The
is complete, you will
ready
to test your
now
file
image
exists
now
on
name
was
PEOPLE.
the disk.
returned to the DataFlex
first DataFlex application!
be
From the Configuration
Menu
or Master Mentg select the "Run a DataFlex
Configuration" Option. When the option is selected, you will be
prompted
for the name of the application that you want to run. On a
floppy disk system.
enter the drive letter of the diskette drive on
PEOPLE,
PEOPLE is located followed by the word
which
e.g. B: PEOPLE.
On a hard
dfsk system no drive letter specification
is necessary
unless the PEOPLE file group is located on other than the logged-in
device. See the menu sample on the next page.
It shows the RUN
option selected from the menu, and an entry to RUN the file
B: PE0PLE(.FLX)
Copyright (c)
has
been
made.
1984
Data
Access
~
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
PROGRARNING
Manual
TUTORIAL
B-9
————
YOUR
REGISTERED
DataFlex
Configuration
0
l
2
3
l
l
4
5
6
7
li
li
2.00
Utilities
0
l
l
l
Menu Definition
System
Editor
AUTODEF (quick
entry screen)
Configuration
DataFlex Configuration
File recovery (fre1)
l
A
Compile
Run a
Re-index
Generate
8
9
l
file
a
ASCII
"
file
l
l
l
l
READ
t
Please
se1eCt
one of the above
options or press
Si
to go back
one menu >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
You have
selected to run a DataFlex configuration
Please
enter the name of the
Menu Systan
***
*** DataFlex
configuration..........
should
screen
look like
is more
with. But now
that is waiting
entry screen
from
data
the data base.
we
a few"seconds?
your
have
been
dealing
is
an
In
active data
and recall
iñtOo
ENTERING
:
File Definition
l
l
I
l
l
#
———————
0
li
li
l
Serial
NAME
0
INFORMATION
it
ON A DataF1ex
SCREEN
l
l
Fi'PfñPlF
image
that
just an image;
for you to enter data
the
than
PEOPLE
it
IMAGE
positioned in the leftmost position of the last
cursor
To enter information
name window.
into the system you simply
Enter a last name, first nameg middle
in the blanks" in the image.
iriitiab addresm etc. until all of the windows contain data. If
there is not any data to be entered into a WñYiOWY press the RETURN
jump
key and the cursor will
to the next window.
should
Your
be
"fill
(Pay
has been entered to the last window
(and
a )
in the case of the PEOPLE screenL the displayed information will
automatically be stored in the data base on the disk. ÍtfS that
two
or three people
in the same fashion...
simple. Now, enter another
stored in the data base as we
will be useful to have a few records
When
data
Type
it
proceed.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
PROGRAMMING
B-lO
DataF1ex
TUTORIAL
2.0
User's
Manual
——
ON A DataFlex SCREEN IMAGE
image
should be
record in the data base, the screen
clear and your cursor should be located in the 7eftmost position in
The personnel
Press
the FINO Ccxnmand Key.
the last name window.
that you just entered on the screen
record for one of the employees
Which
should
one
appear.
is it?? If ail is functioning properly at
be the
one alphabetically
at the
this point, the displayed name should
beginning of those that you entered.
INFORMATION
RECALLING
Having
saved
RECORD Command
NEXT
should
scan
same place in the last
Key.
The record next in
name
This process
until the
can
end
the cursor in the
Leaving
the
a
fill
now
through
the
Now
reached.
the
screen
list
try the
windows.
of all
personne7
RECORD Command
PREVIOUS
windoic,
press
alphabetical
Key.
be
sequence
repeated
to
of the file is
Catching on??
base
any name in the data
just by entering
in
pressing the FIND Command Key just as with the
covered
in PHASE I of the tutorial. To locate
JoneM
George
for him),
that eme had been entered
record (assuming
into the first
type "Jones" into the last name window and "George"
George
Then
press
jones' record
name window.
the FIND Command Key.
instantly.
will be found in the data base and displayed on the screen
You
can
directly
it
FIND
and
name window
VENDOR screen
image
the
named
"Jones" but did not know his
looking for a person
Datacould enter just the last name and press FIND.
find the first Jones in the data base and display his
Flex
there were multiple "joneses" would be
record. The "first jones'%
named Jemes
After
lowest first name.
a person
with the a1phabetica17y
finding the "first Jones", you could use the NEXT RECORD Command to
move
further through the data base to find and display the record for
the Jones that you were seeking.
If you were
name9
first would
you
if
wanted
to display the record for a person and could not rememc1ose7
the exact spelling of his name9 enter something
or the
to display the
if you wanted
first part of the name. For example, 'NCO".
DataF1ex
will then find
you could enter
record for McDougab
the record closest to the data that you have entered and display it.
record is not the person
that you were looking fom
If the displayed
you
(there might be a McOonald
In the data base who would be fOund
entered "MCI)") you can use the NEXT RECORD or PREVIOUS RECORD Command
Keys
to scan up and/or down the data base until the correct personnel
record is found and displayed.
If
you
ber
if
Impressed?
You
should
be.
You've
done
programmer
could have taken an experienced
Good
with conventional software tools.
peek
at the power of DataFlex!
————
what
matter of minutes
at least days to complete
jobll And wefve only begun
in
~=
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
a
———
it
to
~~
05/16/84
Copyright
to
use ber make
the of
(c)
1984
DaÉa
Access
However,
Some knowledge
of inner
order?
out Letts
records?
the
With
OECKPOINT...
FIND
known
by Keyslowest
farp
stored
information
Into
security
you
of
suggestions:
workings.
start
the
data
We
as
you
the
that
shallinformation
this
records
with
entry
have
it spent YOUR
have
Displaying
windows
you
be
number)
a
directly
system
that
The
DataFlex
based
accept appearance
never
message
of
designed
on
improved?
of
How do.
in
the new
it)>
might
the
on the
personnel
easy
about
left
for
What
that
with
person
or the
information
personnel
system explaining
1etG APPLICATION... data
and
personnel
to of
have
the
in
might
a
it
single screen,
the
menu?
questions
computer
operation
...or
Corporation
help
in
to more
information
built
is.
thatinformation
the
message
on how
it7
"frlendly'b
answered
office
the
person
to
and
the
read?
screen
be
exit about
screen
files.
needwill
as
the
and
finding
differentwith
reduce
the
screen
the
people
or
return
the
of
know?
most
its
in
lay-
by data
simply
and
(name
entry
be
the
better?
logical
sequences
recalled
commands.
(given
it
general
DataFlex
could
is
the
doing
to
then
Is
knowledge
base
displayed
different
key-stroke alphabetica11y
picky...
and
information
how
information
not
two
get
itself.
the
want be
have
dataand
num-will
have
who
...is
will a
stored
05/16/84
Where
the dataYouSo
that As QJSTOMIZING
social
good
you've
could
the
time
and
displayed
typing
screen.
wereRemember
BACK
security
name
ity recordg
DataFlex
social
will
number
WINDOW
to
Command
the
fields
number
social
then
be
cursor
number, that
security
now
window.
used
Comnand
and
Keyand
press
cause
security
in
the to
in
AUTODEF
to press
press
RETURN find
the
KeyIf
social
recall
sequence
CLEAR
you
social
number.FIND
to
records
you
to
moveshould
the
security
to
moveALL
were
security
of
display
record
The
the
in
to
move
the
asked
records
the
NEXT
cursor
remove
field.
of
cursor
the number
the
data
which
andthe
to
cursor
the
backwards
record.
To base?
be PREVIOUS
down
individual
window9
of
currently
find
displayed,
the
too to
You
Om
a
the
data
in
RECORD you
farp
record
selected
just
the
with
social
displayed
can
base
press
in
image.
Command
the press
by
orderg
enter
fields
the
secur- social
the
the
a
mumber.
a
2.0
User's
Manual
PROGRAMMING
TUTORIAL
B-ll
B-12
PROGRAMKING
DataFlex 2.0 User's
TUTORIAL
Manual
of this type refer only to the appl'lcatiom not to the strucTherefore.
ture of the information that is stored in the data base.
controls the
we need
the PEOPLE.FRM file since
only to modify
Once
our
modifications are
application.
function of the personnel
be recompiled and the application
PEOPLE.FRM
made,
can
will have new
features as a result of the changes.
Changes
it
To
modifications are made to PEQPLE.FRM with the text editor.
help identify which windows can be used to FIND information in the
place
around
data
base,
some kind of symbol
you can
the name and
Messages
image.
to the
in the screen
social security number windows
typed
image
works
be
about
how
can
the
simply
at the bottcm
operator
of the image change the
of the image for reference. These alterations
LOOKS.
way that the application
The
themmodifications can be made in PEOPLE.FRM to the comands
can have
selves. New commands can be addecb or existing connands
added
operational characteristics
to them to change the way that the
WORKS.
application
Other
proceed
load the PEOPLE.FRM
with these modifications,
your text editor or word processor and make the additions
are shown in boldface in the file on the next page.
To
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
file
to
with
that
ft
05/16/84
pR0gRAmNg
Manual
DataFlex 2.0 User's
B-13
TUTORIAL
/SCREEN
PERSONNEL
,.,,.,.,....................
NAME
ADDRESSI
ADDRESS2
SEC.
DATE
#
HIRED
:
_'
ST
PAY
:
PAY
TYPE
:
>
<
(NO
:
ZIP
_
:
DASHES!)
_j/_J_
:
RATE
MI
<
:
:
:
CITY
SOC.
:
.........................
First
Last
EMPLOYEE
FILE
$
.
._
(H=Hour1y
_
or
# and press
Sec.
a Name or Soc.
to exit
and return to
OR press
Enter
S=Sa1aried)
FIND to display
record.
DataF1ex
Menu...
the
l*
OPEN
PEOPLE
PEOPLE
ENTRY PEOPLE.LNAME
ENTER
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.FNRIE
PEOPLE.MI
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ADDRI
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ADDR2
PEOPLE.CITY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ST
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ZIP
PEOPLE.SSAN
ENTRY
PEOPLE.DATE
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.PAYRATE
PEOPLE.PAYTYPE
//
//
//
{CAPSL0CK.MECK="HS"}//forces
slashes
allow
to put comments
into the corrmand area!
double
you
entry to
//uppercase and accepts
//on1y letter H or S
ENTEREND
ABORT
When
you
edited
see
the
changes
made these
to the PEOPLE.FRM
again
to disk, recompile itp and execute
results of the changes.
have
file
file,
from
save
the
your
menu
to
For
could be included here for PEOPLE.
could be applied to the Pay Rate entry to make
did not exceed a certain value, or State could be set to
sure
that
accept
no
you have
resides
the
only
state in which your business
almost
The possibilities
employees.
are
endless, and
out-of-state
endless
range
that¶s what DataF1ex
is all about--fu1fi11ing the almost
in information
of application requirements that are encountered
processing. Good luck!
Several
other
example,
a
enhancements
range
check
it
——-—————
—————————————————————
(C)
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
Copyright
if
05/16/84
B-14
PROGRNNING
"""" "
TUTORIAL
"
DataFlex
User's
PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
~~
————
(C)
Manual
———~~~__ .._, ,,_—,___,,. ,.—————.
—... —...—===
THIS
Copyright
2.0
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
~
05/16/84.
——
—————————
————
——————————~~
——
: ;:eaEii22É
formatting
with
——————_—:
::::::::::
images
8"15
ÉI--Z==
OVERVIEW
This
defined with "IMAGES".
record, entry screen
or report
format can look exactly like what you create on the CRT screen with
As straightforward
a concept as
editor.
your word processor or text employ
this is, very few products
it. Dataf1ex can use IMAGE
FORMATTING
create a configuration for
to create a file definition,
data
entry and provide the basic format for reports.
DataFlex. formatting
Throughout
possib1e7
wherever
that
means
can
your
be
data
heading,
look like a form.
format should
It should have a explandata
be enteréd»
procedural
to
material
for
the
descriptive
data
and a place for the
to be entered. The
ations and prompting»
image
is
placing and content of the descriptive part of the screen
should
appear
familiar to the operator, and
up to you.
totally
It
The places where
have
the
flow of the data entry fields.
a logical
data
fields are to be entered into the form image are called DATA
The placement,
WINDOWS.
is very
format and length of the data windows
important to how DATAFLEX interprets the image.
The
image
"PAGES"
IMAGE
A configuration
image
can have
A single screen
is called a "PAGE".
multiple PAGEs, including tiered entry screens, help screens, and any
Each PAGE can be manipulated
other display that may be desired.
PAGEs can be displayed on
Image
individua11y by the configuration.
the screen, used for data entry or output to a device (printerp
The page
by a page
name.
console or file). Each PAGE is identified
name goes
after a "/" in the first space on the first line of the
A
begin
and must
image,
with a letter and may not contain spaces.
configuration which does not begin with a "/" as the first character
in the first space on the first 1irm followed by a pagerwñé»
will be
A PAGE continues in an image
until the
rejected by the compiler.
start of the next PAGE (another "lpagename")
or the end of the image
section (indicated by "l*" at the start of the last image line).
PAGES used
Image
not have more lines
input/output should
for screen
than
the height of your terminal as defined in SETSCREEn (often 24
used
Pages
not have more lines than
for print reports should
lines).
the paper (labels, cards, etc) that the report is printed on.
The
image
"/*"
at
defines the last
bottom). The pagename
below
the
PAGE
is
a configuration
"PERSON"
(note the
of
(note the
first line).
/PERS0N
MY FIRST
NAME:
FIRST
AGE:
l*
_
.
WEIGHT:
._
SCREEN
IMAGE
LAST
NAME:
DATE
OF BIRTH:
====
—————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
_/_/
Data
Access
Corporation
07/10/84
FORMATTING
B-16
WITH
data
three DataFlex
types (ASCII, NUMERIC,
specific format that can be used for IMAGE data
The
Manual
User's
2.0
DataFlex
IMAGES
DATE)
each
windows.
have
a
). The
l. ASCII windows are composed of underline characters (
length of the window (and the data which can be entered there) is
Any printable
character can be
defined by the number of underlines.
one for each
underline in the image.
entered in an ASCII window,
windows
are
point in or at
defined by placing a decimal
(
point is placed
at
the decimal
of a window
or
.). numeric
If
.
end,
digit position for input
that place will count as a
is
to an underline when the screen
(i.e. DataFlex will convert
ready
point will display as a
for input). otherwisep the decimal
NOT
toward
the
marker
on1yy
and
decimal
total length of
position
count
and "-"
be entered into a numeric
Only
numbers,
can
the number.
"."
window.
Entries containing other characters will be rejected.
2.
NUMERIC
the
the
end
__
it
_
_/_/_
DATE windows
are
defined by the format:
be entered in the standard MM/DD/YY
format as
"DATA TYPES",
unless your system was supplied
Internai1y9 dates are stored as 3-byte numbers
3.
.
The
date
must
previously under
in "Euro-date" format.
representing the number
Ip Year
O to the date entered (referred
to as
of days from January
"Julian dates". For applications involving dates outside the range
dates
).
can be formatted using a 4-digit
l90l-l999,
year (
the entire application should
this
format is specifiech however.
If
use this format consistent1y9
since 12/24/44 generates a different
by i2/24/l944.
2-digit year entries (which
value from that generated
being
accept
window
as
the
will
in
the
first century A.D.)
still
should
be trapped in the configuration.
In 4-diglt year modeg
For
DataFlex
will handle dates from L A.D. through the year 2500.
convenience9
the operator may use periods "." or any other punctuatfon
mark
in place of the diagonals "/" in entering dates. Internal
calculations on screen and report displays are not affected by use of
this option.
covered
_/_/
are referenced by number within a PAGE, with the window
sequentially,
left to right, top to bottom. the This
above
In
applies to all image formats: screens, reportsp etc.
PERSON.3,
PERSON.2,
PERSONA
example,
the window names are PERSON.I,
There
and PERSON.5.
is a DataFlex command "NAME" which allows you to
assign other symbolic names to each window.
Data
windows
numbers
assigned
the /PERS0N page above were displayed with the "PAGE" command or
would
look just the way you see
printed with the "OUTPUT" command,
above
except
that the appropriate data would have been MOVED into
the data windows.
If
it
it
DataFlex will
The
windows.
interpret PERSON as a page with 6 lines
type and length of each data window are
PERSON.I
PERSON.2
PERSON.3
PERSON.4
PERSON.5
-
lO-character ASCII
20-character ASCII
3-character integer
4-character number,p
Date
(no
l
decimal)
place after
and
as
5 data
follows:
number
the
decimal
__
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
point
__
07/10/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
FORMATTING
Manual
WITH
IMAGES
B-17
———————————————————
—————
===—=======~~~~~~——~—~~~—————————————————
When
the
windows
data
filled
are
MY FIRST
FIRST
NAME:
AGE:
25
Note
that
COMMANDS.
the
is
data
SCREEN
John
156.5
WEIGHT:
In,
moved
PERSON
might look like
this:
IMAGE
Doe
LAST
NAME:
DATE
OF BIRTH:
into the
l2/12jl956
windows
data
DataFlex
by
required two pages to accomodate additional
format might look like this:
a configuration
information, the
If
image
/PERS0N
MY FIRST
FIRST
SCREEN
LAST
NAME:
AGE:
_
/JOB
.
WEIGHT:
_
._
IMAGE"
NN4E:
DATE
MY PERSON'S
OF BIRTH:
_l_j
JOB
WORKS FOR:
ADDRESS:
ST:
CITY:
JOB
_
TITLE:
ZIP:
l*
PERSON and JOB.
This image has TWO pages:
separately by name.
pulated and addressed
for the second screen would be jCB.l, JOB.2
—————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
Each
.The
page
can be maniwindow
names
JOB.6.
default
through
05/16/84
B-18
FORMATTING
WITH
IMAGES
IMAGE pages
in a configuration
to format your input and output.
structures of the configuration.
variable in which data is stored.
window
as well as write to it.
images
are
and MOVE
itself
Manual
are
They
Each
You
to input your
is unnecessary
entry
window
You may use the data
variable.
after you have given the command to accept
user
it
for data
a temporary
used
than
just a convenient way
are actually part of the data
data window can be used as a
read
can
the data out of a data
more
it to
variable
it.
input to
For
the
as
User's
———
The
When
data
2.0
DataFlex
~~~~
example,
if
had
you
previously
could
is acceptable.
(age)
PERSON.3
argument
then
you
use
ACCEPTed
PERSON.3
data
anywhere
into the window
that a numeric
EXAMPLE:
MOVE
(PERSON.3+1)
TO PERSONA
In data
entryp any data that exists in a data window will become the
default value for the record (existing or new) and can be edited or
field edit keys defined In SETSCREEn.
cleared with the DataFlex
WINDOW
FORMATTING
CHNUCTERS
characters that do not affect the
of the window but do affect the
These
formatting characters are
the data in the window.
image.
used
by placing them
directly in the data window
in the screen
examp1e+
For
a "P"
in a window specifies that numbers IAQO and over
These
formatting characters only apply
should have comas
inserted.
comas
(For example,
in numbers
to output using the PRINT command.
The exception to this
are
rule is
not allowed in data entry.)
which
CAPSLOCK,
works
in both data entry and in print.
If placed at
the beginning of a window these characters will not be interpreted;
They
same
they will simply be displayed as though
part of a prompt.
with the exception
is true if they are placed
at the end of a window,
point, which in that position signifies a number with
of the decimal
places. The formatting characters must be mbedded
in
zero decimal
by)
(surrounded
the data window character in order to function
properly.
There
are
TYPE
data
FORMAT of
other
(ASCII,
window
formatting
numeric.
date)
MARACTER
,
C
O
Z
@
$
DESCRIPTION
Embed
Upper
in numbers
only (caps lock)
to left with zero
commas
case
field
Display zero
Trim leading
Floating $ on
Fill
as
&
blank
trailing
left
FORMAT
OUTPUT
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
_»
._
abc
.
124
0.00
O
Z_.
_
@_
blanks
$_._
Calculations and string manipulations on data
should be avoidedb
since formatting can change
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
= 23p456.99
= ABC
= 000000124
= (spaces)
23456.99
C_
ENTRYBBBB = ENTRY
567.17
= $567.17
in formatted windows
the apparent "value" of
05/16/84
DataF7ex
User's
2.0
FORMATTING
Manua7
WITH
IMAGES
B-19
Calcuof the ca1culat1on or manipulation.
the contents for purposes
(database
data
be done
on the source
lations and manipulations should
variab1eg
etc.) from which the
element, literal string, in-memory
window
was filled to begin
of the results to
with, with replacement
desired for output purposes.
the window.
if
IMAGES
IN
DATAFLEX
CONFIGURATION
FILES
can contain
filescommands
are
DataFlex
configuration source
The configuration
tion commands.
with the operatorp the IMAGE, and the data
handles
manager
the duties of storing, findingg
stored on the system.
interact
data
data
and configuraVERBS that
The
base
manager.
IMAGEs
action
base
configuration file
the commands section.
DataFlex. The commands
configuration.
The
has
The
two
the IMAGE
parts:
IMAGE section defines
specify
what
action will
and
relating
format section,
the interface to
by the
be taken
and
first part of the configuration file is the IMAGE. The image
section MUST start with a "/" in the first column of the first 1 ine.
If there are no images for the configuration the first line will there
simply be "l*", which signals the end of the image section.
If
PAGES for the
image
are
configuratiom
the name of the first page will
The
end
be on the
first line and ALL of the images follow directly.
of the IMAGE section is indicated by a "l*" on the last line of the
image
section.
The
be placed
name.
can
on the same line as the page
option tells DataFlex to hold that page in memory at all
This improves
throughput
times during execution of the configuration.
speed
when
a page
for output. Since RESIDENT does
is used repetitively
Where
should
be used
use up m«nory
sparingly.
the RESIDENT option
is
is not used the image format will be called off of disk when
needed.
It takes less than a second to read an image from disk.
The
option
The
RESIDENT
"RESIDENT"
it
it
The "HELP"
option can also be included on the page name line, marking
See
the page as a help screen callable by pressing the HELP Flex-key.
Function Keys" for further information on
the section of "Using
providing and accessing HELP screens.
After the "l*", the image section of the configuration ends and the
The cownand
command
section consists of the convnands
section starts.
Commands
and options listed
section of the manua7.
in the comiand
exist for Data Entry, reporting, data base manipulation, PAGE
manipulatiom data movement,
reading and writing sequential filem
any other function you may require.
conditional processing and almost
~
Copyright (c)
———————-————-———————-—
—
Access
1984 Data
Corporation
——————-————
05/16/84
B-20
FORMATTING
WITH
IMAGES
DataF1ex
2.0 User's
Manual
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
THIS
PAGE
Data
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
_"
===
05/16/84
8"21
———————————————
—
———————
———————————
————
~
———————
:=:==""
DESIGNING
DATABASES
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
—
——————————
—————
ORGANIZATION
OF DATA
Informatiom or DATA, can be organized in two ways: structured and
size or length or
unstructured.
Unstructured data has no particular
Examples
books
and the "pile
of
letters,
of this would be:
position.
word
In a computer,
papers" on top of your desk.
processors are
usually used for processing unstructured data. When data is strucby what
they
of data are predefined and identified
turecb groups
Structuring data allows for more consistent and efficient
contain.
storageD
forms, such
retrieval and evaluation of the data. Business
as an mp1oyment
of structured data that you may
form, are an example
Accounting procedures
already use in a manual system.
are a method of
structuring the financial data of a business. DataFlex is a tool for
system.
structuring ANY type of data in a computer
All of the data which makes up a particular
referred to as the "data base".
files
Data
information
of structured
Groups
analogous
to
example:
For
are
business form.
applications could
a
have
like
systan
things
up
Each
to identify
it
DATA
FILES.
particular
file cabinet drawer full of a employee
a file cabinet drawer
of
full
data
applications on a
file of employee
125 data
from
one to
is immediately accessible or
DataFiex
FILE
file is assigned a
uniquely.
can
make
is
a
Each
information.
system.
become
DataF1ex
computer.
about
information
files
of structured
"ON LINE"
to the
NUMBER
NAME and a FILE
Each
individual RECORDS.
record would be
A
application in our example.
file is a
group
of like records. DataFlex can have from one to 64AOO records
assigned
Each
a unique
DataFlex record is automatically
in each file.
RECORD NUMBER when
is created. This number can be utilized as a
number
and is also useful when
system-assigned
account
relating
records from different data files together (as we shall see later).
Data
files
analogous
made up of
are
to ONE employee
it
A field
is one discrete
record is composed
of data "FIELDS".
piece of data that is of a defined type and size which is stored in a
record. There are usually many fields in each record. Each field in
for that record. A records
DataFlex is given a name that is unique
(see
number
in each
preceding paragraph)
is automatically assigned
DataFlex
were
an
record. It can be used and displayed as
number
howevem
change
You cannotp
the record
ordinary numeric
field.
a record number
or assign
yourself.
Each
if it
Data
fields
Examples
of
are
data
fields
Agep Job Sought,
Dateg
in each record. Each
In
records of like kind
Copyright
(C)
1984
FIELDS
make up
is contained in
of
a group
summaryp
referred to as ELENENTS in the record.
in our émployee
record would be:
Last Name*
from
can have
one to 255 fields
etc. DataFlex
by an ELEMENT NAME.
field is identified
sometimes
Data
Access
a
a RECORD
and
multiple
FILE.
Corporation
05/16/84
DESIGNING
B-22
DataFlex
DA7ABASES
2.0
User's
Manual
— —.-————————————
—
_==""===
_
DATA
TYPES
data
In DataFlex, each
as one of three types.
field can be assigned
The basic storage
Each
type uses the computer's storage differently.
how many BYTES
You should
know
is ca71ed a BYTE.
unit of a computer
The three
computer
disk system has available.
of storage
your
types are:
DataFlex
data
that
- This refers to the full set of printable characters
and
numbers
can
generate. It includes all letters,
your computer
Examples
of fields which would be "typed" as
special characters.
ASCII
Each
and notes.
ASCII
data
field
include; namem descriptions,
a maximum
length (number
of characters) that the data in
is assigned
ASCII
Each
character requires ONE byte of
the field can occupy.
storage. Numbers (0...9) entered in fields that are of the ASCII type
properties.
will be treated·on1y as characters without numeric
ASCII
The only characters that can be put into a numeric
field are
numbers
a minus
(0...9),
sign "-"g and the decimal
point
Examples
Numeric
fields are used to store numbers.
are: "prices,
amounts;
Numeric
and quantities.
fields can be used in ca1cuiations.
data
TWO numeric
In DataFlex, each
characters defined in a numeric
NUMERIC
the
-
".".
fields take up half the
require ONE byte of storage9 so numeric
Numeric
a
fields must be assigned
of space as ASCII fields.
number
This storage
point.
of characters before and after the decimal
CANNOT be
split over the decimal point, thus 1.2 and 10.2 and 10.12
would
all require TWO bytes of stcirage.
field
amount
dates
can be represented as ASCII
or NUMERIC fields
In DataF1ex»
convenient to have a special data type for them.
window
be entered in a date screen
a date can
in the following
or using any
punctuation mark as a
formats: MMDDYY, MM/DD/YY,
Once the date data
is entered
delimiter (e.g.g MM.DD.YY or MM,DD,YY).
For
be displayed formatted as MM/DD/YY.
applications involvwill
a four-digit
ing dates outside the range 1901-1999.
year may be speciimage.
in the screen
this
election
is made, the
fied (MM/DD/YYYY)
If
format must be used consistently for dates throughout the app7icatiom
be trapped out in the configuration,
and 2-digit
year entries should
as they generate different
internal values (e.g.9 12/24/44 has a
different
internal value from 12/24/1944).
In 4-digit modeg DataF1ex
The date is
handle
from
the
dates
can
year I A. D. to the year 2500.
as a six-digit number
representing the number of
stored internally
These
days
are
called julian
since day one of year zero (0l/0l/00).
dates. Julian dates can be used in calculations Just like numbers.
Date
Thus
you can add 31 to 12/05/81 and get 01/05/82.
fields always
require three bytes of storage.
DATE
is
-
it
Although
more
it
the correct type and
is important that each data field is assigned
length to hold the largest or longest possible value
is of sufficient
that yoti would want to put into the field. It may be worthwhile to
abbreviate some long values to shorten the field length and take up
less space in your record. The total storage requirement for each
by adding
up the length
record. or the RECORD LENGTFb can be computed
is
in bytes for each field in the data record. Space consumption
determined
by a field's
defined lengtM not the length of data
from
one record to the next.
actually entered into
It
it
Copyright
(C)
-——————
1984 Data
Access
————
——————————————————————
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
DESIGNING
Manual
User's
DATABASES
B-23
Indexing in Applications
DataF1ex
the capacity to store
has
up
to
64
to
file. Therefore9
it is important
example,
For
interest quickly and easily.
would
employee
you
probably
file folders,
That
by
you
data
filed in order
the file quickly,
his
long
so
way
have
name.
as
you
the
records in each
able to locate records of
of
in a file drawer
thousand
be
have
employee's
each
can
"pull"
name.
the record
file
from
in a file is
in alphabetical sequence
Placing the records themselves
needed.
when
can be found
so that
one way of organizing the data
works
whether
The method
the file is stored in a cabinet or on a
computer
"Finding" something
in an organized scheme is
system's disk.
and efficient.
easy
it
who was
however.
that you wanted to find an employee
when
You know
interviewed a month ago (you know... what's-his-name).
To go directly
he was interviewed,
to his recor"d»
but not his name.
have
you would
to previously have cross-indexed the file by date. Or,
you could search
the whole file until the desired record was found.
Consider
A computer
files.
It
(index) of
exactly the
search
itself.
file
both
indexed
file
the desired
is different
or sequence
Even
though
its
listing
same options to find information
in
themg
or maintain some kind of organized
of each record separate from the data
or more elements
examp1ep
For
applications could be
a
of employment
That
and by DATE RECEIVED.
NAMEs,
by applicants'
way.
element
be searched
even
can
its order
for efficiently
has
can
one
a computer
if
that of the records themselves.
from
can
look through a card f11ep
practical each time that
scan
its
that
you
process
want
to
MUá-l faster than
you could
takes far too long to be
review
or change a record.
files
indexing system
index) of the
geographical area. Listed
The
with the name is a number which can be used to "find" a person.
number
phone
functionally
with the
in the telephone system compares
To find a persom
you "look him up" in
record number on a computer.
by his number.
Then you
"access" the person
the list.
A telephone directory
is a perfect example
The phone
book
works.
is an alphabetical
names
of people with phones in a certain
of
how
listing
an
(an
stores each new record at the end of the data file; figurvirtue of its
ative1yg at the bottom of the existing list.
It ham by second,
third,
relative position in the file, a record number:
first,
To
good!
provide for rapid access to the
etc. But that does you no
records in a file. DATAFLEX keeps "indexes" of data that can be used
to find a particular record. Each index is an organized list made up
from
each
record, and each recordG number.
of like data elements
DATAFLEX
A computer
listing
record
DataF1ex
index
works
of selected data
number
(like the
system
Copyrjght (c)
can
1984
the
the phone book.
It is an organized
record in a file which includes the
number)
of the record. Each record in a
or "found" by up to four different
same as
from
each
phone
be
accessed
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
B-24
DESIGNING
DATABASES
DataF1ex
2.0 User's
Manual
computers
support nine indexes).
fndexes(in B-bit computers--W-bit
can
of each
define which elements
designer of a DataFlex database
find
record are to be used to create the index(es). and thereafter.
the records.
The
stands
ISAM (ISAM
Sequential Access
for Indexed
indexing management
is the best method for computer
available.
DataFlex keeps index data files up to four ways simultaneous1y
on B-bit computers
(nine ways on l6-bit). That means our
by NAME and DATE and two
employee
other things
could be indexed
file
and
(perhaps
all at once.
social security numberL,
job classification
speed,
For
current after each
the DataFlex B+ ISAM keeps all indexes
every
time you enter data
record entry, without a long "SORT" process
(N-LINE
into a file. These features are referred to as MULTI-KEY,
DataFlex
Method).
a B+
uses
B+ ISAM
ISAM.
is
of multiple indexes
creation and automatic on-line maintenance
important feature of DataFlex. This cross-indexing allows superflexible access to any record in your data base in minimum time.
The database
Records
can be
can be located by entire
or partial key.
by any
iñdéxo
randomly
searched
without timeor sequentially,
consuming
procedures.
reorganization or" other clumsy
The
an
records can also be
addition to the KEJL EIELDS discussed above,
RECORD numbers
by their
just as rapid7y as by an index. The
system
the RECORD NUMBER to each record when
automatically assigns
field number
is created. The record number of any record is always
zero in the ffje definition.
In
found
Each
of the indexes
SEGMENTS.
Think
of
for
a
can be
file purchase
made
up
of
as many as
Each
drawer
it
4
is
file VENDOR ID would be
so
the primary indexing
dedicated to one
Within each vendor
(drawerb there would be file folders--one
field.
be arranged
The folders would
for each part supplied by the vendor.
PART NUMBER would
be the secondary
indexing
in order by PART NUMBER.
Within the folder for each part would be the orders for the
field.
which
be
(and
would
final)
the third
partp filed by ORDER NUMBER.
These
successive levels of detail serve to identify
indexing field.
and is an example
each
record (order) ljn¶que1yy
of a three-segment
consuming
¶ndexp
one of the 4 indexes
available for each file in B-bit
only
the orders can be arranged
environments. With the file drawerm
there remain three additional
the one way, but with DataF]exg
An
orderings (indexes) available (eight in 16-bit environments).
say PART
additional index could be another multi-segment indexp
NUMBER/VENDOR
ID/0RDER9
for those situations where you would want
by part number.
And there could be yet
vendors
and orders grouped
further indexes, multi-segment or single.
a
vendor,
of
orders.
will NOT allow two records In the same file to have exactly
can appear
the same key value. Howeverp
to the operator that
duplicate values have been accepted. To allow for duplicate recordsp
is
the record number (designated as field zero in the file definition)
assigned
as the last
in the index. Since record numbers
field segment
be
NEVER
index
are
duplicated
the same, the full
entry can never
(DOE,J/200
differs from DOE.J/75).
DataFlex
it
—
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
—- ————
-, ——————————————.-.,,
—————.,
.,—,. —-. —
05116/84
Corporation
AUTODEF
DESIGNING
Manual
User's
2.0
DataFlex
B-25
DATABASES
PROGRAM
AUTODEF is the easy
an
way to produce
DataFlex utility program
image.
configuration from, and for9 a freshly-drawn entry screen
your
ultimate goal is beyond the
for use even
It is reconnended
after running AUTODEF»
of AUTODEF (in which case,
actual capabilities
you would
edit the resultant configuration source
or
file with EDITOR
def1n1t1on
and also edit the
word
with FILEDEF
file
processor,
your
recommended
for use in multi-entry-screen
necessary). It is also
be appended
which
ENTRY configurations
can
configurations to produce
together lnto'the command section of the eventual ENTRY configuration.
images
together in the same
also appended
with the related screen
order at the beginning of the same file.
The
ENTRY
if
if
job is to read an image file (see Formatting With Images)
have
previously created either with the DataFlex Edjtorg or
which
is capable of producing
with any word processor of your choosing
ASCII
represents the input "form" that
files (most can). The image
you
intend the operator to see when entering to. or searching irg the
With
database.
it. AUTODEF creates the data, index, and definition
files, and the fields with their names and the type of data each field
wIll contain.
AUTODEF's
which
you
rootname.kn
for the
File definition
Ff)e/fie1d names
The data
file
The index f11em n=lndex
rootname.FRM
The
rootname.FD
rootname.TAG
rootname.DAT
To
run
you
Configuration
of the database
"ROOT
NFME"
number
file
source
type AUTODEF at the command level and press the return
select the AUTODEF option from the DataFlex
(rootname
no argument
If AUTODEF is invokedwill with
prompt
you
for a
you wish
to define)
follows:
AUTODEF,
Or,
key.
processor
macro
may
Menu.
it
as
ENTER
TO EXIT
"ROOT
NAME"
FILE
OF
OR
DEFINITION
TO CREATE:
of the file to be
drive specification
as ROOT
the following could be entered
C: CLIENT
B: MYIMAGE
NAMES:
input file resides on the
or, where the
or
You may enter a command
logged
line of: AUTODEF
drivep AN IMAGE.
ROOTNAME at the
operating system leveñ in which case AUTODEF will
skip the prompt for rootname.
The
ROOT NAME is
AUTODEF.
the
input to
For
name and
examp1e9
has
After the rootname
an argument),
will
it
ENTER
You
THE
should
MAXII¶JM
respond
N%ER
AUTODEF
been enterech
(or
ask the following
question:
if
OF RECORDS
with your best
COULD HAVE?
"rootname"
reasonable
with
invoked
was
realizing
estimaté»
two
things:
.
you elect too few recordm
is
a.
back
to FILEDEF and increase the number
databaseñs
capacity (after doing whicM
it
If
always
possible to
in this
of
records
it
will
be
go
necessary
———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
to
REINDEX
run
on
User's
2.0
DataFlex
DATABASES
DESIGNING
B-26
Manual
the database).
system
option in SETSCREEn was set YES for preAUTODEF
then
of disk space required for databases.
up" all
the files
go to your disk drive and
(indexes. datay and so on)
necessary
for this new database
enough
space
to contain the database
with spaces to pre-empt
when
is entirely full of data. Some multi-user syst«ns
is advisable under other conditionm but
require this, and
should
ensure
free disk space
you
that you have sufficient
to this
available before entering a large number in response
question when the system option is set to YES.
If
b.
your
allocation
will next
"fill
it
it
the Fields
Naming
AUTODEF reads
for each image
image
and prompts
of a name
for the assignment
These
names
are
assigned to identify the
that has been created. When referring to
in
your
window.
in the database
file
fields in configurationsg the correct format to use is
fi1ename.fie1dnameg
where
fieldname is the name you assign in this bÉ
database
file. You will As
process, and filename is the name of the
prompted
right of the image.
for the names from top left to bottom
AUTODEF proceeds
through the fieldm the underscores for the field to
be replaced with asterisks
be named will
in the displayed image to
Type
window
show you which
the
you are
currently being asked to name.
You may
name you wish
to assign to the field in the indicated window.
BACK WINDOW Flex-key to change
a name assignment.
use the
fields
these
named
DataFlex
to identify
names created here
will be used throughout
format estabin the fi1ename.fie1dname
the elements
of the database
and
MUST be consistent,
The use of the element
names
lished above.
conform
to the symbol name conventions established for all DataF1ex
They
must
element
data
start with a 1etterp contain only
references.
15
numbers,
may not be longer than
'L"p or "#". Fieldnames
letters,
characters.
The
NOTE:
Your
screen
Image
must
with the
begin
characters. of which the first must
by a diagonal
punctuation, preceded
will abort, displaying the message
AUTODEF
After
be
page
(up
name
to ten
letter, no spaces or AUTODEF
this Is omitted,
(l).
IfSCREEN
IMAGE MUST BE NAMED.
"ERROR,
a
ABORTING!"
all
the fields
are
named,
to continue or
"R"
At this pointp you may re-do the
with an "R".
errors by responding
continue to the next step.
page
Press
Copyright (c)
"C"
1984
Data
Access
line
bottom
the
prompt
to re-do this
will
page
_
it
find that
0therwise9 answer with
if
you
Corporation
ask:
has any
and
a "C"
07/18/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
DESIGNING
Manual
B-27
DATABASES
=
..———
————————-—
The
display the field names
will andnow prompt
for which fields
screen
previous step,
indexing.
ENTER
NUPBER
FIELD
TO
INDEX
you
are
have
be
to
OR
declared in the
used
for
TO END:
enter the number of the fie1d(s) by which you want to FIND
Entering a field number» and then
in the file being created.
pressing will create an index containing data from the field
number
whose
was entered.
Multiple field numbers can be entered (up
indexes
6 on 16
systemm
8
4
up
on
to
to
bit systems) to create
bit
See the
composed
of multiple data fields.
first part of this chapter
for further information on indexing.
should
You
data
As
will
field numbers
display:
THE
WILL
selected for indexing,
are
DATA
IN
THIS
INDEX
The default
selected
is N, which
combined
with the data in the field
wIll repeat until you
This prompting
4 indexes
systems,
indexes
for
As you
end.
select each
if
BE
the
UNIQUE?
bottom
prompt
line
_
will cause the recordthe number to
index.
to establish
itself
ID
reached
maximum
have
be
of
the
key
or you
for B-bit systems,
field to index, the display will
to
number
and the field
the
name.
change
to include an "*" between
If
you wish
to revise an index after creating ito pressing the BACK
back
can
WINDOW Flex-key will
you
so
one field
move execution
redefine the index. Press without a field number entry when
index
have
made all
designations you desire.
you
l6-bit
the completion of assigning indexem AUTODEF will create the
AUTODEF will
display
required for the configuration.
and automatically
several systan messages
momentarily on the screen
The configuration
retün to the menu.
file output of AUTODEF is
The rootname.FRM
configuration source
called rootname.FRM.
file may
be modified using the EDITOR
or your own word processor prior to
"as is" when output from AUTODEF.
compilation, or compiled
Upon
files
be compiled
must
an executable DataFlex
to produce
To execute
a compile at the
operating system command leveb
program.
Merm
you are
operating from the DataFlex
type COMP rootname.FRM.
a
select the Configuration Menu and enter the option for "Compile
See the
for more
chapter on the DataFlex Compiler
Configuration".
Rootname.FRM
If
information.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
B-28
DESIGNING
DATABASES
THIS
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
DataFlex
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
B-29
_ _______
========"=
======----------—————————
======="==
"""""""""
HOW TO WRITE
""": ""::":
A CONFIGURATION
—————————
——————————
===========.==============~———~~———~————~~—~~——~~——~—~—
——
~~—————
configurations are semi-compiled. This means that the
"source" file which you create must be translated by a separate step
can
into a form which the computer
execute. Execution of a (semi-)
compiled
configuration then is actually faster than execution of an
uncompl1ed
source
list would be. This section of the user's manual
of creating the application.
refers only to the physical process
Other
parts of the manual will instruct you on what commands and
functions can be used within the configurations.
DataFlex
A
configuration
to be used.
respects:
ready
I. It
2.
fileA
can
is a set of compiled DataFlex commands which
in
configuration is different from a program
only
be
executed
by
the DataFlex runtime
such
Information from other systansp
in the DBMS9 affect the operation of
as
the
are
two
system.
file
definitions
configuration.
the ACTION of your application in
configuration determines
IMAGE definitions.
and forms
relation to the DEFINED file definitions
be used
must
be:
Before
can
a configuration
The
it
form
with the DataFlex
In source
ASCII
other text editor that produces
l.
Created
2.
Compiled
any
from
by
executable
3.
CREATING
the "source" file form into
the DataFlex runtime Systan
EDITOR
files.
a
(a
file
.FLX
utility
that
with the DataFíex
runtime systan
in the presence
the other files required for execution (FILELIST.CFG
appropriate data and key files).
Run
THE
SOURCE
or
is
file).
of
and
FILE:
are
five ways to create the original source
file for a configuration, of which four are "automatic" and the fiftM which is "manualj'
may also be used
for editing configurations created by any of the
First, there are the AUTODEF and FILEDEF utilities with
other means.
image"
and
option to create both the file definition
the "read screen
code
configuration source
for a data entry screen. Second1yp
there is
the QUERY utility to generate a REPORT configuration source code file.
Finally. there is the READ ut1]ity9 which creates configurations to
data
convert ASCII data files to DataFlex
files. Last1yy there is the
EDITOR
DataFlex
or any other text editor which is used to create the
code
have
any source
no éfféctó
file from scratch. Modifications to code
until the modified source
of coursep
file is recompiled.
There
Copyright (c)
————
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
~
05/16/84
B-30
HOW TO WRITE
The
be
configuration source
listed and modified
DataFiex
A CONFIGURATION
by
files
means
are standard
custcmarily
ASCII
employed
User's
2.0
files,
for
so they
such
Manual
can
files.
format of a configuration file is quite sImple: the IMAGE page(s)
each
identified with a slash
is (are) at the top of the configuratiom
in the first column of the first line followed by the name of the
"/"
An
The image
IMAGE page.
format itself starts on the next line.
image
is terminated with the next occurrence of a "/" in the first
marks
"lpagename"
space
the next image pagep or a "l*"
of a line.
The
signals the end of the last image in the configuration.
first a
line of the configuration file must contain either a "lpagename"
or
image
in the file.
"l*", the latter indicating that there is no
The
in the source
the configuration commands start.
be any of the commands
can
listed in the comnand sections of
this manual,
or any commands you may have created with the macro
be in upper
system.
Commands
and filenames can
or lower case-images
between
in screen
the two except
DataFlex does not disti nguish
Command
and
lines can be up to 255
(quote-enclosed) material.
After the
These
file,
"l*"
literal
the end of a line on your
characters long. If a command line reaches
line on the next
terminal's screem you can continue the coímand
terminal line either by typing a semi-colon (;) followed by a carriage
let the line "wrap" on your screen.
returm or merely
The
then
following is a sample of a simple configuration to
the systtim
date:
allow the operator to modify9
disp1ay9
and
/DATEX
TODAY'S
enter today's
Please
DATE
date
IS:
in
_J_l_
MMIDD/YY
format
and
press
RETURN.
/*
OPEN
SYSFILE
DISPLAY
ACCEPT
SAVE
SYSFILE.DATE
TO DATEX.1
TO SYSFILE.DATE
DATEX.I
SYSFILE
ABORT
//
//
//
//
//
Open
Show
Accept
Save
Stop
the system file
the date that 'is set
date
the updated
the systw file
and end configuration
———
——
—————
————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
HOW TO WRITE
Manual
A CONFIGURATION
—
HOW TO COMPILE
B-31
—
A CONFIGURATION:
createch there is one more
file has been
A compiled
be used.
can
before
configuration must be created which the DataFjex runtime system can
or
called "COMP.COM" (compi1é)»
execute. This done by a program
COMPile
reads
COM.CMD in CP/M-86
you
the source
versions.
file
a nevg
additional file with the
previously created and produces
The ".Fl-X"
special extension ".Fl-X" after its filename.
file can be
(see
executed
by
the section on
directly
the DataFlex runtime system
"Operational Orientation" for further information).
Once
step
source
a configuration
which
be executed
must
it
process
is started by typing the word
of the source
file to be compiled. A
compiles will be shown on the screen.
This
name
"COMP"
listing
followed
of the
by
the
file
as
full
it
EXAMPL E:
COMP
datex. src
and produce
the
This will read and compile the source
file DATEX.SRC ready
The ".FLX"
e "DATEX.FLX".
is
configuration
to run.
file
The
a configuration
that will run.
This step must be done to produce
".SRC"
name is not required by the
extension on the source
file
compi1erp
by DataFlex. but is recommended
nor
practice where
extensions are not purposely being used for some other end.
fil
of the configuration during compilation you will
a ">" before each
line.
This is the line number
line actually output to the runtime system.
of the
If an
error occurs during runtime this number will be shown with the error
A command
message
line in the source
to help .you find the error.
file
one or several lines in compilatiom
so the line
can generate zet"cb
numbers
by
numbers
some
may
seem
over
line
the compiler
to skip
output
Th is
be expected
as they would
to appear based on the source version.
command
know
how
source
many lines a particular
takes up.
lets you
commands
Most
generate one output i ine.
listing
and
On the screen
note
some numbers
command
"
Following is
options that
a complete
can be used
list
of the compiler (COMP.COM)
individually
or in combination
command
as below:
line
f1INCTPN
Error
E
S
Stop/Pause
on
Do not
delete
F
L
Save
Echo
output
output
Dx
Save
.Fl-X
M#
Expand/contract
temporary
files
listing in file (.PRN)(LST:
on
printer
)
listing
file on Drive x:
expansions
memory
for
macro
Use of this option will
on Error
cause
Option E: Stop/Pause
The
an error
is encountered
compilation to stop
in compilation.
screen
displaying the code which triggered the
display will freeze»
errom and some of the code above it, and the message to press any key
Once
has been
a key
pressed, the option to
to continue compiling.
abort the compñation (Yes or No) is offered.
Ccmpile
if
Copyright
(C)
1984
——————————
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
A CONFIGURATION
HOW TO WRITE
B-32
DataFlex
2.0 User's
Manual
Do Not
Files Compilation produces
Delete Temporary
is run, which are automatically deleted when
time
compilation finishes or is aborted. One file has the literal name of
used
by the
FORMTAG.TMP,
and contains the names of the windows
and the other has the variable
name of
configuration begin compi1ed*
filename.lC, and contains the Intermediate Code of the configuration
(further explained in the section on "Modifying and Extending
These
DataFlex).
files are not of interest to the general usen but
there is a reason why you wish them not to be deleted, this option
will retain them.
Compile
two
Option
files
S:
it
every
if
Option F: Save Output Listing 'In File The compilation
expansion
invo7ves
into groups
of subprocess
of some comands
commandsg
and generation of line numbers
for each line of this code.
be output to a
The numbered
can
of the
lines with sub-connands
Compile
name
primarily to
their expansions
a
file
This option would be of
the F option.
created custom macros and wishes
to see
in the context of the configuration they work it.
by
filename.PRN
user
use of
who has
use
The output
Option L: Echo Output Listing on Printer
be printed
on the
described above under Option F can alternatively
This Is helpful for locating errors
printer during compilation.
for compiling more
reporting during compi1ation9 and is recommended
complex
configurations,
Compile
Option D: Place .Fl-X File on Drive x: If you wish the
configuration to be saved to a logical drive other than the
on which
the compiler and source code are9 the D Optiort, followed
the letter of the desired drive will cause the file filename.FLX to
written to the specified drive.
Compile
compiled
one
by
be
When
Option
M:
Expand/Contract Memory for Macro Expansions
compilation begins, 4 kilobytes of your computer's memory is allocated
for the compiled
of macro commands into subcomands
for expansion
and the rmainder
is available
configuration (6K on 16-bit systems)»
which
window
names,
include pagenames,
for the storage of symbols,
in-memory
Some configuraelements,
database
variables and labels.
than
is available for them productions need more space for symbols
ing
compilation
the error message OUT OF MEMORY. When this happens.
# represents the number
where
be reattempted with the option ML
can
from
of kilobytes of RAM to be made available for macro expansion
l to
# less than 4 would
be appropriate
for B-bit
9. In such cases,
6 for 16-bit
and less than
systems.
systems,
Conversely. in those
where
expansion
space
macro
cases
is inadequate (compiler error MACRO
EXCEEDED),
BUFFER
SIZE
the M option can be used to expand the
available space as high as 9 kilobytes.
Compile
EXAMPLE:
COMP
Pause
file,
myfi1e.frm ;ESFDB
temporary
on error,
save
fi1es? create
and output MYFILE.FLX
to drive B:
semi-colon is part of the option syntax,
options are used.
The
———
Copyright (c)
and
must
a
.PRN
be
listing
typed
when
————————————————
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
HOW TO WRITE
Manual
————
A CONFIGURATION
B-33
———————
HOW TO RUN A CX)NFIGURATION:
is ready to
the configuration has been created and compiled
At the operating
runtime system.
with any installed DataF1ex
command
system
level you simply type the word "FLEX" followed by a
and the name of the configuration.
space
If "FLEX" is entered without
a following
configuration file name, the menu system
(if present on
the disk drive) will execute. As sucM "FLEX" is the usual opening
statement operators are taught to enter to initialize the system.
it
Once
execute
EXAMPLE:
FLEX DATEX
Executes
the DATEX
configuration
shown
above.
execution is under control of the DataFlex runtime, you never
since one configuration
to come back to the operating systang
command
RUN another using the (MAIN
to completely automate
your
application as is done in the MENU system.
Once
have
Copyright
(c·)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
can
05/16/84
B-34
HOW TO WRITE
A CONFIGURATION
THIS
———————
————————
1984
Copyright (c)
Data
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
DataF1ex
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
"
_""___"_____"""__""_"__"""""""_"""""""":
_
8"35
"""""""
————"— ~~~
"==~"""""",
E: EEEE====
~~
DATAFLEX
=====
UTILITIES
—=__====.=.======,_——~~~~~~_
=================———~~~——————~———————
—————
————
~~——4w——~——
EDITOR
is a stand-alone text editor for the
DataFlex EDITOR program
creation and manipulation of DataFlex configuration files and images.
It is invoked by keying:
The
EDITOR
the operating system where is the name of the
is desired to edit or create.
If the filename is
omittecb EDITOR will initialize with a default filename of WORK, which
saving to disk or,
may be changed
upon
to re-edit
it is expected
under
may be saved
this name and
the file many times in succession,
(with no filename).
re-edited by default each time EDITOR is invoked
from
file
it
which
it
if
files
of EDITOR is to create the source
While the primary purpose
sequential file maintenance
Datañex,
is also useful for general
word
and limited
processing. EDITOR features full screen
cursor
movementp
scrolling,
vertical and horizontal (up to 158 columns)
There
is also a
insertion and deletion of characters and lines.
ASCII
search
for patterns in text.
text files
feature to search
using EDITOR.
either be created or edited (changed)
for
it
and
can
is taking
the cursor to show where the editing process
cursor's movement
is controlled by the "FLEX-KEYs"
SETSCREEN
Some of the FLEX-KEYs
assigned
program.
in the DataFlex
keys
perform
the same functions in EDITOR as they do in normal
different functions
DataFlex operation, while other FLEX-KEYS perform
from
there are
in DataFlex. This is because
the ones they perform
certain functions in EDITOR which are purely text-editing"functíonsp
Ffna11y9
and which
a number
are
in DataFlex operations.
not supported
of the FLEX-KEYS are not used at all in EDITOR.
EDITOR
place.
uses
The
EDITOR
FUNCTIONS
This section
the FLEX-KEY
RETURN:
ARE EXECUTED
lists
which
(RETURN
the
BY
functions
the
executes
"FLEX-KEYS"
of the
EDITOR
DataFlex
EDITOR
followed
by
command.
KEY)
RETURN key will
the cursor to the
enter text on a line and advance
the cursor is on the last line of the
next line of the display.
If
display, hitting RETURN will cause the displayed text to scroll up one
line.
If the cursor happens to be in column I (one) of the text, then
hitting the RETURN key will cause an insertion of a blank line at the
point where the cursor was.
The
'
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
+
05/16/84
B-36
UTILITIES
DATAFLEX
DataF1ex
2.0
User's
Manual
————
(UP
UP ARROW:
ARROW KEY)
UP ARROW key
will
the cursor is on the
scroll up one line.
The
will
(RIGHT
ARROW:
RIGHT
The
will
scroll
DOWN ARROW key
screen
If
"without erasing
move the cursor
down one line
if
one line
necessary.
down
on
the screen.
ARROW KEY)
ARROW key
RIGHT
Qne line
on the screen.
display then the text will
up
(DOWN ARROW KEY)
DOWN ARROW:
The
The
the cursor
line of the
move
first
will move the cursor
existing characters.
any
one
character to the right
the
the display will
the screen
cursor is at the right boundaryThe of
maximum
length of a text line
scroll horizontally
to the right.
The
is 158 characters.
cursor will not move into unwritten space.
If
LEFT
(LEFT
ARRQÑ:
ARROW KEY)
to
will move the cursor one space to the left without
The
existing characters.
cursor will not move past the
SCROLLED
has HORIZONTAL
unless the screen
of the screen
right by a previous RIGHT ARROW command.
DELETE
END OF LINE:
The
LEFT
erasing
leftthe
The
ARROW key
any
boundary
DESTRUCTIVE
BACKSPACE
all
1eftg deleting
INSERT
QÍARACTER:
BACKSPACE
(DESTRUCTIVE
will
key
the text
(INSERT
from
KEY)
move the cursor
the cursor to the
QU\RACTER
one
end
space
to the
of the line.
KEY)
will move the text line to the right by one
for the insertion of a character at the
the line contains the maximum number of charcursor position.
If
be
The key must
acters (158) then the last character will be lost.
pressed
one time for each
character to be inserted.
The
space
á-lARACTER
INSERT
key
opening
up the text
DELETE
The
and
a1ARAcTER:
DELETE
move
Copyright
(DELETE
MARACTER
KEY)
key
will delete the character under the cursor
text to the right of the cursor one space to the left.
CMRACTER
all
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
UserIs
2.0
DATAFLEX
Manual
UTILITIES
INSERT
(SAVE
LINE:
RECORD
KEY)
SAVE RECORD key
will insert a line above the line
the screen
After this key is presséd»
cursor appears.
text below the cursor, and leave a blank line to edit.
The
(DELETE
LINE:
DELETE
The
B-37
—————————
——————
— —
RECORD
DELETE
will
which
will
the
scroll all
KEY)
RECORD
key
on
delete the line
on
which
the cursor
appears.
LOAD
(BACK
FILE:
FIELD
KEY)
BACK FIELD
key
will dmr the teU buffer and ask for the filename
of the text file to load. Tf this jcé\/ Y(ijsi pj"essec1 M' Msítakm pj"ess
ESC to abort and return to the text
in the buffer without loading new
text.
The
SAVE
FUNCTION
(USER-DEFINED
FILE:
KEY)
USER-DEFINED
FUNCTION
key will
save
the text file in the buffer to
answer
you change
the disk.
your mind after invoking this cowñáñdo
If
its query by pressing the ESCape key. The prompt will offer the
opportunity to save the file under its original filename (WORK
by merely
EDITOR was invoked
with no filename specification)
pressing
an edit
the RETURN key.
If a different filename is desired after
necessary)
may be
sessiom a new filename (with drive specification
to the prompt.
entered in response
The
if
if
ESCAPE:
The
KEY)
(ESC
ESCape
should
naming
conform
(generally a
the file name
TAB:
(FIND
The FIND
depending
KEY)
key
on
BEGINNING
be
will tab eight spaces to the right
the last direction that the cursor
OF LINE
The CALCULATE
being
edited.
will
will exit the document
editing portion of EDITOR and
of the output file to the disk. The output file
to your standard operating system
file name conventions
two
character drive specificatiom
eight characters for
plus a three character file type extension).
key
allow the
placed
Capyright
or
HOME:
(cALájLATE
or
was
to the
moved.
left
KEY)
will move the cursor to the beginning of the line
the cursor is on the first character then the cursor
at the top of the text.
key
If
—————————
(C)
1984 Data
——————————————————————
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
·
B-38
DATAFLEX
DataF1ex
UTILITIES
2.0
User's
Manual
——————
BACK
The
PAGE:
(PREVIOUS
PREVIOUS
RECORD
The
FIND
NEXT
key
(NEXT
FORWARD PAGE:
RECORD
key
will
RECORD
wi11
(SUPERFINO
TEXT:
KEY)
RECORD
page
the cursor
backward
24
lines.
KEY)
page
the cursor forward
24
lines.
KEY)
SUPERFINO
key
will display the prompt
"Find string:
at the bottom
respond
by keying in the
of the screen, to which the operator should
string which
is desired to find in the file. Once the string has
been
is desired.
found, it may-be editedp deletech or whatever
If the
SUPERFINO
key
again. the prompt will reappear. If the key
is pressed
promptg
pressed
again, in response
the string entered
is
to the
previously will be searched
for again in the fi1e9 and will be
searched
twice, until a
for every time the SUPERFINO key is pressed
different string is entered in response
to the prompt.
"
The
it
topyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
DATAFLEX
Manual
UTILITIES
B-39
——————
———
REINDEX
UTILITY
The DataFlex index
are maintained dynamically during normal
No reorganization
system
is generally necessary. However.
operation.
made
due to changes
in the
structure after the entry of datm
adding
may be necessary
new Indexes
or system
to rebuild
failure,
The REINDEX
index
new
provides this
create
or
.Kx
independent
Each
index
with a
extensiom
function.
is an
which
where
x is a number
distinguishes the index from other indexes
files
file
it utility
files.
of the
database.
paragraph)
next
(see
REINDEX
file
rebuild all indexes,
particular one.
can
or just
batch
on1yg
indexes
one
TWO types of index
are
files in DataFlex; ON-LINE indexes which
and
maintained dynamically during file creation and maintenance
which
indexes
are
usually used for infrequently-used report
indexes
when a record is
The batch
sequencing.
are NOT updated
created or deleted as the on-line indexes
are.
There
are
BATO
is a 5th index (on 8 bit systans--lOth index on 16 bit systems)
that is reserved for "ad hoc" sorting of existing files. REINDEX can
for this index and create a new index
redefine the specifications
Any other BATOI
index can also be redefined from the
interactively.
command
line.
There
WHEN TO USE REINDEX:
are indications that your index files may be damaged and
2)
I) A DataF1ex
error 2Óp 2L 22 or 26;
"out of order" when an attempt is made to list
them
in order; 3) Trying to FIND one record and getting another; 4)
Records
"missing" out of the data file. For any of these indications
be used
on the suspect
data
is recommended
that the FREL program
REINDEX
data
case
the
is damaged.
before
in
file
itself
file
The
following
you must
Records
REINDEX:
run
seeming
to be
it
USING
REINDEX:
be used
instructions can be given on the
in two ways:
line that calls REINDEX, or its operation can be controlled
interactively.
First we will deal with the interactive mode.
REINDEX
can
command
When REINDEX
is
be greeted with
a
with their
played
REINDEX.
to
to
hit
ca17ed
If
with
no
menu.
files numbers.
file
have
you
more
more
You
than
should
line.
you
will
files will be disthe file you wish
select
active files you may press
REINDEX
any time within
(Note: the file selection
32
At
get
files listed.
to return to the menu.
is the same as that in QUERY).
process
arguments
on the command
The active DataFlex
you
may
———————————=———
—~~=~~~~~K————————~~~
——
Conyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATAFLEX
B-40
DataFlex
UTILITIES
User's
2.0
Manual
—— ———
selected a file, the following menu will
select an operation according to your needs:
Once you
You must
have
be
displayed.
DATAFLEX
REINDEX
ALL
INDEXES
will read the data file selected and rebuild
Re-create all indexes
defined indexes. This fs generally used when a system or power
failure makes the validity of the index file questionable.
Note
program
OPTION
that
if
the validity
should
TWO
-
be
used
RE-CREATE
data
of your
before the
ALL
BAT(M
file
REINDEX
is in questicm
the
all
FREL
program.
INDEXES
Re-create BATCXI indexes
will create all indexes marked as "batch" for
the selected data file. This is generally used before generating
indexes, Le., before end-of-month
reports that require the batch
reporting.
OPTION
THREE
-
RE-CREATE
ONE
INDEX
one at a time.
Re-create one 1ndexD allows you to remake indexesg
program
you made
a new index with the FILEDEF
This may be required
or you had a disk error on an existing Index. Option three will list
indexes
and allow you to select the index you wish
to
the ava11ab1e
re-create.
if
—
Copyright
(C)
=
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
DATAFLEX
Manual
User's
2.0
FOUR
OPTION
UTILITIES
B-41
——————————
—————
—
-
& CREATE
DEFINE
"AD
HOC"
INDEX
index. This index
Option four allows you to create an "AD HOC" batch
be used
can then
This option will ALWAYS
in any DataF1ex
output.
create index 5 (or index 10 on 16 bit systems). When selected,
You may then select up to four (4)
REINDEX
will display a field list.
(6 on 16
fields to be included in the index
bit systems).
If there
on the screerg you
are
more
fields in the selected file than will
fields or the
may use the key to get more
key to start
at field one again. Once you have selected the fie7ds to
and REINDEX
press
will proceed
to
index by field number,
is the same
create the new index. (Note: this field selection process
as that used
in QUERY).
fit
FIVE
OPTION
Delete
from
ad
the
used
space
REINDEX
-
-
DELETE
"AD
disk
irÑej
re-create all
on the RE-INDEX
for (FILE).
indexes
This is equivalent to Option
Menu.
EXAMPLE:
REINDEX
REINDEX
22
-
Will select the
interaction.
file
all
Recreate
MENU
number
and
indexes
file
for
to the
proceed
22.
REINDEX
menu
for
user
EXAMPLE:
REINDEX
REINDEX
Will
Option
22
recreate all
Two on the
MENU
- Select
BATa{
batch
indexes
RE-INDEX
Menu.
file
for
22
and
.
display
REINDEX
This is the
same
menu.
as
EXAMPLE:
REINDEX
Recreate
Copyright
(C)
22
BAT(J1
all
1984
batch
Data
indexes
Access
for
file
Corporation
22
05/16/84
DATAFLEX
B-42
DataFlex
UTILITIES
——————————
====———— ————————————
REINDEX
index for the specified
re-create the specified
Will
Manual
— —————
~
.
User's
2.0
file.
EXAMPLE:
22"1
REINDEX
Recreate
REINDEX
index
one
of
file
22.
... that follow. This
numbers
tQ the field
will redefine
The index
Four,
but any index can be re-defined.
is like Option
will
be a BATCH type unless
was on-line
before REINDEX was run.
it
EXAMPLE:
REINDEX
REINDEX
22
REINDEX
file
2L index
delete the ad
ad hoc
indexes.
Will
on
5 4 5 O
hoc
REINDEX
QUIET
put at the end
5 by
fields:
DELETE
index .
4,
5
and
This
O.
command
works
only
QUIET
of the command line will cause REINDEX to display
for each record instead of the index data.
only a "*" on the screen
Shortening the display increases throughput speed.
.BAD
REINDEX
Will create a file by the name rootname.BAD
duplicate records found during reindex.
with
a
list
REINDEX
FLEX
Will MAIN back to the Flex configuration
This gives you the capability to run
reindex is done.
(like a report) after a reindex operation.
of
a
any
after the
configuration
EXAMPLE:
REINDEX
22
DUPLICATE
BATM
RECORDS
FLEX
IN
MYREPQRT
REINDEX:
records fn any non-ad hoc indem
to maintain the requirement that all
I) NOT
option to:
will be given the
DELETE BAD RECORDS and leave the
in an improper
state;
or 2)
file
The
of bad records
List the bad records to a file or printer.
file
will have the name rootname.BAD
REINDEX
encounters duplicate
must
delete one of the records
index
entries be unique. You
it
If
Copyright
(C)
——-—————
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
DATAFLEX
Manual
B-43
UTILITIES
~
FREE
LIST
UTILITY
to as
list of available (deleted) records in a file is referred system
the "FREE LIST". It is dynamically maintained during normal
operation (unless "REUSE DELETED SPACE" is set "Y"es in SETSCREEn).
But
due to system
may be
failure (disk errors or power fail)
This is done with the FREÍnecessary
to rebuild the free list.
check
the file for type consistency (bad
utility.and FREL will also
delete any bad records.
data)
The
it
WHEN TO USE
FREÍ-:
Conditions that would Indicate
Power
failure with data files
1..6.
USING
the
for FREL
Disk errors.
need
open.
and
REINDEX
78»
Errors
are:
81
or
FREL:
FORMAT:
FREL
(to display
or
a
FREL»
FREL
(to
FREL on
a
file
whose
files
number
before executing
is already
known.)
EXAMPLE:
FREL
Check
running
If
indexes
lO
file
FREÍ-
for that
FREL
AND BAD
10
for consistency
indicates
file wIth
any bad
REINDEX
and
rebuild
its
records, you should
after running FREL.
free
list
rebuild
the
RECORDS:
encountered
any bad records are
during FREÍ-, the record(s) will be
deleted and the data from them can be sent to a file or to the
".BAD"
is p"ut on the cownand Iirm the bad
pri nter.
If the option
be listed
When the
to the file "rootname.BAD".
records will always
be given the option to:
bad record is encounteredp
you will
l)
first
2)
Not
delete the record and leave the file in an improper
state;
List the bad records to the printer;
or 3) list the bad records to
there are many ways "bad" records can
the .BAD file. NOTE: Although
be created,
a consistent
attribute of bad records is the presence
of
FREL
as "bad"
control (non-ASCII)
characters in data fields.
lists
any
record having such characters in it.
If
——————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATAFLEX
B-44
DataFlex
UTILITIES
—————
+
2.0
User's
Manual
~
READ UTILITY
THE
has the function
of automatically writing
DataFlex's READ program
configurations which "read" standard ASCII format data files and
produce
with record numbers and any
DataFlex data fi1em complete
indexes
of the data which might be desired.
It does thisand by querying
certain
of the source
the user as to the characteristics
file,
of the DataFlex file to be created.
desired attributes
(a)
two main
are
uses
configurations:
to
for READ-produced
software environments such as MBASIC*,
"import" data from non-OataFlex
and
SuperCalc*
SDI,
dBASEII*
SDF,,
DIF,
MailMerge*,
the like;
VisiCalc*
database
and
(b) to re-READ ASCII data from a predecessor DataFlex
having more or fewer fields
into a newly-created DataFlex database
than
in their length or data type).
the original (or changes
There
In order to provide a realistic
context for the explanation of READ.
the following instructions cover how to convert a data file from
do not
dBASEII*
purposes
format to DataFlex. If your particular
merely
indicate
skip those sections whose headings
involve dBASEIL
that they pertain to dl3ASE, and substitute the appropriate
environment. The overall process
instructions for your source
involves the use of DataFlex
utilities other than READ. This
interaction between READ and AUTODEF (and possibly other utilities)
is9
agaim typfcal of most uses to which READ would likely be put in
actual use.
HOW TO CONVERT
DBASE
II
TO DATAFLEX
FILES
Involves producing two complete
copies of the
this procedure
be transferred
after the
(the intermediate one may be erased
to
files
process
is completeb the transfer of large files may require some
and even
planning of disk space,
of processing time for very large
For
this reasom
that the preparatory work
is recommended
files.
be done
is desired to
with a subset of any large file whfch
convertp and that the results of that work then be applied to the
entire file after its efficacy has been confirmed.
Since
it
be
can
This procedure
version of DataFlex.
it
executed
If
you
a demo
files using "DEMO
the error
to re-lnltialize DataFlex
on small
data
should
encounter
EXCEEDED",
will be necessary
before you can continue your work from the last disk access
prior to
Natura11yy
make sure
the occurrence of the error.
your data file is
backed
From dBASEp
proceed.
up before you
print out the databaseG
structure for reference in the following steps.
LIMITATION
MAKING
The
can
THE
it
MAIN
step
first
be amazingly
ENTRY
SCREEN
is defining
easy
database
happened
dBASE's
for your dBASE
(and
retained at least your .ZIP
need
is a plain ASCII file showing
and their
types.
Copyright
—
(C)
1984
Data
Access
in
database
your
you
if under
to
DataF1ex,,
develop
ZIP
screen
which
the
a process
main
entry
and
report formatter
screen
files
from the effort). What you
the fields of your data elments,
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
If
You
2.0
User's
Don't
.ZIP
Have
DATAFLEX
Manual
Screen
UTILITIES
B-45
Files
is your origina) entry command file (.MD) full of
caption GET variable" statements, then modify the .CMD file
FORMAT TO PRINT
by SETting
right before the first "Él" and run the
which
program
That will print out your screerg
with your printer on.
then
have
for which purpose
in ASCII,
you will
to "draw" on the screen
EDITOR
will do fim. Now
your favorite word processor or DataF1exvs
screen
you can go on to the final
preparation steps below which are
and ZIP-created entry
manually
common to both
screens.
If'
"e
all
1.c
you
SAY
If
You
Kept
have
.ZIP
Ff1es
in use puts out its own file with a .ZIP extensiom a .CMD or .FMT
and a .ZPR
for dBASE which you won't need anymore,
file intended
for use in printing out a copy of the screen. This .ZPR file is what
image
you can
use to create the screen
for DataFlex. If you erased
your .ZPR file but saved the .ZIP fi1ep you can recreate the .ZPR file
(Caution:
just by loading the .ZIP file Into ZIP and resaving.
if
by ZIP
and then
you
use a .CMD or .FMT file produced
edited under its
ZIP
from
name.
with
resaving
original
will overwrite the byfile
its
renaming
You can avoid this
earlier ZIP-generated version.
your
But
ZIP
chance.
none
of this really
gives you the
output file when
you're working on a backed-up
disk, right? Right!)
matters, because
Load
the .ZPR file into your favorite word processor, or the DataFlex
EDITOR,
and erase
the first Iirm which reads
Then
01*****
File filename *****".
delete all embedded commands (those
in [brackets]) and all #variable GET commands and évariable SAY
comands»
together with the variable names.
ZIP
file
Final Preparation of the
Screen
should
whether
you got 'it from
you
now have,
a .ZPR file or
and a prompt
manua11y»
anyg
"drew"
is a screen with its tit1eg
for each data item to be input in a logical position on the screen
followed by enough space on the line for the data item to be entered
loaded
Nowo with this
into either your word processor or
into.
file
DataF1ex's
EDIT0R»
should
draw
you
a blank with underscores
after each
prompt
in the same position as you used to have your GETs and SAYs.
Each blank should
be as long as the field
length defined in dBASE
numeric
For
(this is how DataFlex
will figure out the field length).
one underscore
with a
fieldm there is one further step. Replace
remembering
go in the ffelch
place should
period wherever
the decimal
point will actually provide space for the l's
that that decimal
The
point).
position in your number (first place left of the decimal
blank for a five-digit integer (no decima1sk for examp1eg would look
four
like: "
.", without the quotes, of course. That's right:
underscores
and the decimal
any of the fields
is a datep
point.
If
make
look like this:
that DataFlex
"_/_/_"d remembering
Lastp
actually supports dates as a separate formatg
unlike dBASE.
open
up a new line at the top of the screen
(don't worry
the bottan
if
line of your image scrolls off the bottom--this new line won't be part
a
of the displayed image). At the leftmost positiom give the screen
by a diagona7
(/ENTRY_SCREENg
name for DataFlex
for
to use, preceded
What
if
it
it
^opyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATAFLEX
B-46
DataFlex 2.0 User's
UTILITIES
example). Save the file under a name which wi17
Now
is ready for DataFlex to read
your screen
structureg all from the screen.
DataFlex database
it
be
and
Manual
meaningful to you.
create your new
.
CREATING
THE
WITH
STRUCTURE
DATABASE
AUTODEF
AUTODEF
image
ft¶6 time to "feed" the screen
to AUTQDEF.
will
you need
fields that
define fields only if they're in the image.
If
aren't in the imagey you'll either need to add them to the image (they
using FILEDEFt
can be rwoved later),
or edit them into the database
but that's another story.
Now
From
.COM
the operating
system,
the
or
DataF1ex
prompt
with
the
méñtb
run
AUTODEF
(it's
a
the filename of the screen
first
file). and
image
yoWre creating a new database9
rather than
file
tell
Then
how many
records you're going to
editing an old one.
tell
need
the database
to hold (maximum 64,000). AUTODEF wIll then display
image
and walk
you
through each of the blanks you provided
your screen
in DataFlex), asking you what you want to
(they¥re called "windows"
but
You can
you 1ike9
use your old dBASE names
name the
variables.
DataF1ex
allows 12 characters in fieldnames, so you may wish to expand
somewhat
them
inte1ligibi1ity.
to improve
Answer
it
it
if
the
fie1d(s) are indexed. Give
will ask you which
Be sure
fields you used in dBASE.
to give
at least Qneg so
unless you are displaying the
DataFlex will be able to find recordsp
record numberg in which case you don't have to have any indexed
fields.
Then
AUTODEF
it
same
it
After this, AUTODEF will create a ffle (called a configuration file in
DataFlex) identified as "filename.FRM" which will contain not only
image
and a means
your
screen
of displaying it, but also a complete
database
by its
indexem editing, de1etingg
searching
the
for
facility
anbedded
and adding
records, with no additional comnands.
or
wish
Of course9
do later
you
otherwise.
to add bells and whistles
.FRM
you can edit the
to your entry configuratiom
file with your word
EDITOR
to provide them.
processor or the DataFiex
if
with the DataFlex
compile
or executable from the operating
It will createfromthe file
"fi1ename.FLX'4
which
be executed
can
either
the DataFlex menu or
No point
"FLEX
from
filename".
the operating system with the command,
We haverñt brought the data
in running
yet. though.
over for
the
so from
yet. This is a good time to compile it, however.
and DataFlex
operating systan, issue the command "COMP fi1enagte'4
will
do the rest over
Compilation is a step
the next two minutes or so.
DataF1ex
taken
which
be
must
configuration you createg by
with every
be re-compiled each
and a configuration
must
whatever
time you
means,
want
to make a change in the way
runs. This step isn't present in
dBASEy
so don't forget to do
in DataFlex when it's called for.
To
use this configuratiom
compiler, selectable from
systm as "COMP fi1ename.FRM".
you must
the
menu
it
it
it
Copyright (c)
it
1984
Data
Access
it
Corporation
05/16/84
User's
DataFlex
2.0
BRINGING
HOME THE
DATAFLEX
Manual
UTILITIES
B-47
DATA
should
do
you
last step Is bringing the data over, something
first
with a small test data file and then later with the whole file after
works
made
sure
right.
everything
you've
The
The
Part:
dBASE
Start
dBASE
Do not invoke
any
into USE.
bring your database
want
as
DataFlex to end up with the same record numbers
unless you use record
wouldn't be of concern
using (which
scheme).
numbers
account
you have
or some such
deleted
have
you
to manually re-delete them in
in your databasm
to eliminate the
unless you PACK your database
will readjust
record numbers
in dBASE.
and
dBASE
indexes
dBASE was
numbers
as
if
records
DataF}exg
you
If
will
first
records . This, of course,
your
a large database
wIth one or more indexem the
If you're converting
do use the largest
you
index maintained
conversion will run faster
This assumes that you will want the same index in your
i n dBASE.
The largest
index is the one whose index file
DataFlex version.
(.NDX)
is larger than any of the other .NDX files. Your record
numbers
wIll changep
of course.
if
COPY
Now
the
.COPY
If
some
database
TO
to
an
f i1ename
ASCII
SDF
delimited
with the
coimand:
DELIMITED
your
records have apostrophes
want
to make the command look
marks
instead of the apostrophes
of
will
quotation
you
file
(JerryG Pool Hail) in th€m»
like this to use double
otherwise provided by
dBASE:
.COPY
TO
filename
SDF
DELIMITED
WITH
"
AUTODEF created
the DataF1ex
from your
"filename" is the same filename as
dBASE won't write
but
directly into
file,
an intermediate
version of your
will create the file "fi1ename.TXT%
data. Also make sure your disk has space on It for a copy of your
data
If your data file is large
file that is as big as the original.
will take some time--hours for really large
(over lOOk) this process
data
files over a megabyte.
Make
image
sure
file.
it
If yoWre running on a crowded hard disk or otherwise have less free
disk space than your data file. there are options you can use in the
which
COPY command
will enable you to COPY the file in pieces. Agai n,
sequence.
an index, COPY the file out in the index
yotdre utilizing
For
examp1eg
rst
if your index is on last A name, COPYCp canthen be D run to fí Fp
through
through
output all last names beginning with
dBASE
and DataFlex
and so on.
can easily be put
into
This process
command
fi1es/configurations
that call each other until all records
brought
have
been
over. and run as a batch. After completion, check
in the DataFlex
the number of records
file to make certain that no
records were missed.
if
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
DATAFLEX
B-48
2.0
DataF1ex
UTILITIES
User's
Manual
——————,
———
The
DataF1ex
Part
DataFlex's READ Uti1ityg which is itself a
whose
operation creates a configuration
DataFlex
which
causes
to read your filename.TXT file and put data into
(DataF1ex)
as
with all indexes
fi1e9 complete
your filename.DAT
READ has
Like any good DataFlex configuration,
specified in AUTODEF.
by pressing the HELP key,
so use
lots of help in it, accessed
READ is invoked
whenever
either from the DataFlex
questions come up.
menu or from
the operating systm with the command "FLEX READ".
last step is done
DataFlex configuratiom
The
by
and
it
that lists the DataFlex files already on
starts up with a screen
see the one you created when
running AUTODE©
disk. You should
Then
with a selection number to its left. Respond with that number.
and ask you
name of this
a new screen
display
the
target
file, be
will
will
the file
the name of the file to read from. TÍÁsy of coursep
dBASEG
COPY
command
from
in the step
you created (filename.TXT)
READ
Then
ask you the name you want
above.
to
Enter this name.
will What
configuration source
give to the configuration source
file.
READ
file?
will convert your source data file using a DataFlex
configuration which will actually be written by READ when you're done
So give
needs
all
telling
to know about the desired conversion.
(I used DBASREADL
but do not give it the same name as you
ft a name image
gave
your
file (and resultant data entry configuration) in
AUTODEF above?
or your old file will be overwritten by the READ
be good.
and that wouldn't
configuratiom
READ
your'
it
it
After you've given
will
c1earp
and
the
it will
READ
name for the
ask you whether
fi1é» the screen
file is line-
configuration
your source
or
abovep
your
comma-delimited. If you did everything as recomended
by entering the
and you
can tell READ this
coma-delimited,
is
file word "COMMA"
The READ
entire
in the window.
will ask you how many
Refer to your dBASE
fields are in each record of your source
file.
structure printout and count the fields for the answer to this
question.
Next
you have
comes
the part that could be tricky
sequence
of fields as they were fn the dBASE
DataF1ex
windows
hancb
and in the
in the screen
if
in the
one
hand.
made
any
structure
image
on
change
on the
the other
For
each
field of your source
fi1ep READ will ask you which
database
goes
to.
field number (sequentially)
of the DataF1ex
If
ffeld sequence
step along
your dBASE file structure and your DataF1ex
together exactly the same9 this step is easy. One goes into I, two
But
the first field of your dBASE
into 29 three into 3, and so on.
while your
structure is LASTNN4E9 and the second is FIRSTNN'4E,
DataFlex
image
screen
starts off with FIRSTNAME and has LASTNAME
second.
you'll have to tell READ about the switching at this point.
Compare
your printouts to make sure about any possible switches. If
there are fields in your source
file that you don't want transferred
(or if there are fields in your DataFlex file that you don't want data
fields
transferred intoh you can do that here by skipping source
file
by not
with the key or skipping target file fields merely
using their sequential numbers.
it
if
needs
After thiSg READ knows all
to know, and
to compile the configuration immediately.
want
it
———-——- -——. ———..,..——-.——
1984 Data
Access
Copyright (c)
Corporation
will
Since
ask
you
you
have
ifto
you
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
DATAFLEX
Manual
B-49
UTILITIES
compile the configuration before you can use itp the usual response
The question is asked
would
be "Y"es.
here
to give you the
opportunity to edit the conversion configuration before compiling
if you want to. Normally. you wouldMt want to.
it.
But
will then write the conversion configuration and compile it.
hasn't done your conversion yet--it's Just put everything in
place for you to do it. Your final step is to to run your conversion
configuration from the "Run a Configuration" choice on the menw or
fi1ename'4
where
"FLEX
filename is the name you gave
give the comiand
you
the
the conversion configuration in READ.
first runworks
If
and everything
all right,
configuration on a small test database
database
doing
on the large,
real
is as simple as
the dBASE
running
conversion steps on itg putting the resultant .TXT file in the right
place where your READ configuration can find itg and giving the "FLEX
filename" cormand again. You must have the same filenames as you used
the first tiÍñé» of course.
READ
READ
it
WHAT REALLY
HAPPENED
HERE?
In the foregoingg we did one conversion step in dBASE9 creating one
copy
of your original data file with a .TXT extension.
image
Either manually
or from a .ZIP dBASE fi1ep we created a screen
with any extenslom which you might have named FLEXFILE.
for DataF1ex
number
We then
ran AUTODEF on that image
of files.
file, producing a below.
Then we ran
data
and index
W1éSo
empty
as listed
some of them
READ,
to read your
generating a DataFlex configuration specifically
dBASE-generated
file. convert its contentm and put them into the
This is a list of the files in the
files createdwhichunder AUTODEF.
sequence
in
they would have been created:
processed
original dBASE data file
version of the dBASE data file
File from ZIP for the dBASE entry screen
Printable version of the ZIP file
DataFlex
image
screen
(possibly from .ZPR file)
AUTODEF-created
code
entry configuration source
Compiled
(executable) entry configuration
DataFlex
data
by AUTODEF
file created
DataFlex
any,
index Áfí»
created by AUTODEF
any
Additional DataFlex indexes,
Names of DataFlex
fields. created by AUTQDEF
database
Definition of DataFlex
READ-created
code
source
for conversion config.
Compiled
(executable) conversion configuration
FLEXFILE.DBF
Your
FLEXFILE.TXT
FLEXFILE.ZIP
FLEXFILE.ZPR
COPYed
FLEXFILE.
FLEXFILE.FRM
FLEXFILE.FLX
*
*
*
FLEXFILE.DAT
FLEXFILE.KI
FLEXFILE.Kn
*
*
FLEXFILE.TAG
FLEXFILE.FD
*
if
DBASREAD.FRM
DBASREAD.FLX
if
*asterisk indicates the minimum files which you must retain in
database.
Additional database
and/or
order to use your new DataFlex
be created.
All the others may be
configuration files mayp of coursep
retained for future reference or modification if desired (and space
allows).
The
———————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
B-50
UTILITIES
DATAFLEX
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
===——_==————————————
————————————————————————————
———— —————~__
WHAT DO WE HAVE
HERE?
efforts is much more than just a data file that
indexes
for
addition, we have created complete
rapid finding of records in the database7
the fi1ey
facilitate
Furthem in
including any we may have had in the dBASE version.
AUTODEF,
we have
display and entry facility for the
created a complete
ed1tg
through
which
database
we can querµ
or add to, the new
recorcM
DataFlex database.
The
product of
DataFlex
can
tO
these
use.
In
All further processing of the data and related configuration files to
not present in dBASE
of DataFlex's many capabilities
take advantage
simu]taneous1y9
open
(multiple command
true multi-user
files
operatiom Julian date functiQnsp and moreL may be done on the
DataFlex file family entirely within DataFlex. You're on your way!
~—
.,., _"" _ = _
Copyright (C)
]984
_ ~~~~~~~~~~~
Data
Access
Corporation
~
—
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
DATAFLEX
Manual
DATAFLEX
conversion
applications
DataFlex
DataFlex 1.6X
The
1.6X
TO
programs
to the
2.00
UTILITIES
B-51
CONVERSION
provide for the transfer of exi sting
2.00 syntactical representation.
new
is DataFlex l.6X ENTER and REPORT
input to the conversion process
configuration files. The files must be working l.6X DataFlex configuThe output of the conversion process
is DataFlex 2.00 source
ratl ons.
be compiled
must
into
can be run, the source
Before
they
files
files.
using
compiler.
DataFlex
the
configuration
executable
flies
The
compiler requires the creation of a new support fije
each
existing data (.DAT extension) file in your
This .FO file wIll be created by the 2.00 FILEDEF
l.6x application.
which
FILENAME
The DataF1ex
when a
file definition is saved.
utility
is given to a data file will be used as the base name of the new file
to
that will be createch and an extension of ".FO" will be appended
and the compiler
This file will be used by the conversion program
to assign symbolic names to the individual fields in the data file.
FILENAME
and the
These
symbolic names will be composed of the DataFlex
FIELD
NAME that each
field has been assigned. Valid characters that
NAME are
be used
[A..Z» 0..9» #9 @p _g $]. If
as part of a FIELD
can
other characters are used in FIELD NAME they will be automatically
converted to an underline character by FILEDEF.
The DataFlex 2.0
(FILENAME.FD)
for
it.
and select the
create the .FO file. run the 2.00 FILEDEF program
has been
Once the
be converted.
loaded, use
file
file that(3) is to FILEDEF
in
to inspect the data file's DataFlex FILE
option three
NAME and all
the FIELD NAMES in the file. If the DataFlex FILE NAME
has
not
been
filled in, or the FIELD NAMES are not correctp you may
correct them at this time.
To
data
use option nine (9)
in FILEDEF to
the modifications are comp1eteg
(.DAT
files) to disk. The 2.0 version
the data file definition
create and write the
of FILEDEF will at this point automatica11y
data
must
be performed
.FO
needed
on all
process
This
files
file.
which
by configurations
used
are
2.00.
to be converted to DataF1ex
The
.FO
flies must be on the same logged device as the compiler when
the source configuration is compiled. Data files created under
Versions 1.6X are otherwise completely compatible with DataFlex
Version 2.0.
Once
save
CVTFRM
used
to convert the ENTER CCNFIGURATIONS
1.6X
to DataFlex 2.00 and CVTRPT is used
( .RFT)
CONFIGURATIONS
.
is
DataFlex
REPORT
( .FRM)
from
to convert the
the
requires only two file names to perform
conversion program
conversion: the name of the version í.6X configuration fi1eg and a
source
name for the Version 2.00
file which is output by this process.
The Version 2.0
output file name must be different from the Version
l.6X configuration file name,
The
————
———— —————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
.,,,,, ,.., .,, ..————
05/
16/84
DataFlex
UTILITIES
DATAFLEX
B-52
User's
2.0
———————
Manual
——————-—
and the output
A sample
input filename is VENDOR.FRM.
Once
'It is
the conversion is comp1etep
filename will be VEN.FRM.
necessary
to compile the configuration into an executable file.
EXAMPLE:
A>CVTFRM
ENTER SOURCE FILE
OUTPUT FILE
NAME:
(conversion
VENDOR.FRM
NAME:
VEN.FRM
is done
here)
DONE.
CONVERSION
A>COMP VEN.FRM
ERRORS
that
a) CANNOT FIND
The conversion
name
encountered:
be
may
INPUT
FILE
program
can
not locate the input
disk directory to be sure
for spelling
on
AND OUTFUT FILENAI'ES
MUST BE DIFFERENT
b) INPUT
The conversion program
requires that input and
an ouput
of the same name
different.
If
overwritten.
C)
CANNOT
file
FIND
.FO
<<#>>
file
name
be
will
it
be
FILE
been
IS
which
is there.
output
exists7
declared by the configuration
the default drive.
fileon has
A data
not found
d) FILE
A data
it
the input
Check
file.
NOT OPEN
has not been
opened
has
been
which
program
referenced
by
is
the
configuration.
e)
A
FILE
<>,
field number
configuration
f)
<<1'>> IS OUT OF RANGE
FIELD
has been
referenced by the 1.6X
which
does
WINDOW #
not
appear
definition
file.
#
has
which
an option number
in
is
The message
shows
versions).
the line number on
The original
configuration
the invalid option number appears.
be corrected before conversion is re-attempted.
invalid
must
data
OUT OF RANGE
g) UNSUPPORTED OPTION # ON LINE
The original
I.6X configuration
which
fn the
(under
it
both
h) OVERLAPPING
IMAGE SECTIONS
ARE NOT ALLOWED
Under
some circumstancem DataF1ex
Version l.6X
Report
section line
declarations can include one or more 1ine(s) in both of two adjacent
This condition is impossible for the conversion program
to
sections.
hand]ep
and must
be corrected in the 1.6X
configuration by actual
and changing
of the section line
duplication of the common 1inesg
declarations so as not to include any of the same line numbers.
All of the errors
process.
~_~==~=~~———~
Copyright (C) 1984
above
_
Data
are
fatab
and
will
abort
—————————
Access
Corporation
the
conversfon
05/16/84
DataF1ex
2.0 User's
DATAFLEX
Manual
MENU CREATION
UTILITIES
B-53
AND MAINTENANCE
DataFlex is supplied with a powerfuH versati1ep and easy-to-use
system
for creating and maintaining menus which supports the execution
other executable (.COM and .CMD) fi1em
of DataFlex configurations,
and prompting for the entry of necessary
operator input at run time.
be made to execute
The menu system
upon
can
cold bootp providing a
insulates the operator from the computer^s
"shell" which positively
operating system
at all times.
DataFlex configuration
(filename
and creates data
for the menus under
files
MENUDEF is
Like any good "Flex" applicatiom
the df filename "MENU".
and rapidly
be created
menus
can easily
or
fully _promptech and
and answering
MENUDEF
them.
modified simply by following the prompts
also has extensive HELP screens, which can be called at any time
during execution by pressing the HELP Flex-key.
This
utility
MENUDEF.FLX),
CREATING
is
itselfusesa
and
it
AND SELECTING
NENUS
from
Configuration menu,
the DataFlex
selecting "Menu Definition"
or invoking MENUDEF from the operating system íiith the command FLEX
MENUDEF,
and headers
a list of the numbers
of the menus currently on
The "headers" are
the legends
the disk will appear as shown below.
identifying what each one
appearing at the top center above the menus,
Upon
i S:
DATAFLEX
MENU SELECTION
MENU SYSTEM
HEADER
NUMBER
ENTER NUNBER OF THE MENU YOU WISH TO EDIT:
PREVIOUS
RECORD Command
NEXT
You may use the
or
press
or
to start
a
new
menu.
_
Key
for
more menus
(HELP screen
available)
=
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
B-54
DataFlex
UTILITIES
DATAFLEX
2.0 User's
Manual
in numerical order.
This screen will display all menus now existing
pressing the NEXT
If there are more than five menus on the drive.
RECord
Pressing the
Flex-key will display the next five menus.
Each menu
RECord
PREVious
is
Flex-key will display the previous five.
and the menu number
displayed
actually a record in the MENU database,
According1µ the number of a given
Is the record number for the menu.
be changed.
a RETURN
a new menu is desirech entering
menu may not
If
should
To delete a lTléñLb the menu
will begin creation of a new menu.
RECord
and the DELete
be selected for editing
function key pressed.
Entering the number of an existing menu will move execution to the
next screem with data filled into the blanks for the menu you
selected.
EDITING
EXISTING
This is the
menu
MENUS
configuration
screen:
MENU CONFIGURATION
MENU SYSTEM
DATAFLEX
MENU NUMBER:
HEADERI:
HEADER2:
_.
DEFAULT
MENU:
_
ACTION
PROMPT
.
(on
return)
PASSWORD
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
(N)ew
(Q)uestions
(H)eader
(D)e1ete
Menu
(I)nsert
(C)hange
{HEI-P IS
AVAILABLE}
(S)ave
(P)rint
(A)ppend
e(X)it
_
— —
of
first
record for existing menu
"PROMPTS"
are
the actual on-screen prompts
describing what the menu choices are.
are in the
displayed under the word
displayed to the operator
displays whatever
choices. The column
column
The
windows
prompts
which
passed
are
displays the comands
to the
in the
selection of the choice. As "ACTIONS"
system
execute
second
any of the systm
will
the menu
ccmmands
described in the section of this manual on Manipulating Files
of the
except RUNPROGRAM.
It will also execute another menu by entry
Sub-menus
word
"MENU"
are
followed by the number of the desired menu.
by use of this comand.
executed
Entry of the OAIN comnand followed
by a rootname
any
in this window will cause the menu system to execute
that name.
configuration having
existing DataF7ex
The
second
column
operating
system
upon
afjovEb
column
~~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
DATAFLEX
Manual
third column displays a password
choices from unauthorized access.
MENUDER
MENUDEF
used.
Whoever
in the
system.
be
itself
must
has
Since
if
password
MENUDEF
to
access
protect the menu
are
displayed by
passwords
protected
are
access
to all the passwords
any)
to
passwords
(if
The
B-55
UTILITIES
has
blank at the lower
in the single-character
cursor initializes
screen
will clear
corner of the screen. If "N" is enterecb the
and then
of menus) for selection
redisplay the previous screen
(list
of an unused number under which to create a new menu.
The
right
The
would
choice will
like to insert
"I"
query
as
a menu
number
to the choice
choice.
which
before
you
"H" choice will
at the top of the
place the cursor into the blanks
The header
includes
screen, where the menu header may be modified.
definition
of the "Default Menu'b which is the number of the menu
(RETURN)
should
be executed
which
is
in the event that a null response
given
to the choice query. Typically, the default menu will be the
need
which
not
menu from
the menu being defined was called, but
which
méñlb
typically
necessarily bep especially for the master
defaults to itself.
The
it
The
"D"
de1eteg
choice
and
do
will
which
ask
upon
so
menu
number
choice
entry of the
you
would
like to
number.
"Q" choice will
temporarily and display the
exit the screen
questions for the menu on another screen, which will be shown and
which
el
Questions
below.
discussed
are
operator prompts
icit further
input from the operator relevant to the choice which was made, such as
RETURN when the printer
"Press
is turned on and loaded".
The
The
"C"
change,
changes
The
very
choice will
and
place
may
be
"P"
choice
handy
for
which
line of the menu you would like to
cursor in the blanks for that choice so that
query
the
made.
which
will permit printing of the menu definition,
occasional off-line
reference to the structure of
is
a
menu.
the cursor on the next blank choice line for
"A" choice places
entry of an additional choice at the bottom of the menu.
The
The
menu
and writing
"S" choice causes an exit of the screen
permanent).
changes
to disk (making the entered
The "X"
choice causes
YOUR áiANGES?
YIN"
the question to
to
Definition system
called will appear.
Menu
OPERATOR
Questions
Once
appear.
will
be
left,
appear:
"BEFORE
this question is
and the menu from
the
of the edited
YOU EXIT,
answered,
which
it
SAVE
the
was
QUESTIONS
can
be
asked
the action of the
Copyright (c)
1984
menu,
Data
of the operatoi"»
by the inclusion
Access
included in
the responses
of the characters $L where
and
Corporation
05/
16/84
DATAFLEX
B-56
DataF1ex
UTILITIES
=
===—~———
User's Manual
——————
2.0
the dollar sigm and the seconcb
the first character is explicitly
the
represented by the # sign, is a digit l through 6p identifying
question number matching
the question defined for the menu on the
below:
shown
question screen
DATAFLEX
MENU
QUESTIONS
SYSTEM
————————
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
l
:
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
2
:
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
3
:
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
4
:
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
5
:
EXPLANATION:
QUESTION
6
:
prompt
for each
Enter the screen
section of the other screen, or
question referenced in the
to return.
ACTION
ESCAPE
support only six questioñs» but each defined question
Each
menu.
many times as desired throughout the
defined question will display up to two lines to the operator,
neede&
for an introductory explanation and the 'Following actual
The
question.
cursor initializes in the sIngle-character blank in the
lower right of the screen. Entry of a number for which a question
already exists will place the cursor in the blanks for that question
for editing of the data in the blanks. Entry of a number for which
there is no question will place the cursor in the blanks for that
number
for entry of new data. Data for a question may be deleted with
the field delete keyg but there is no reason to delete such data until
Actual de7etion of a
the number is needed for another question.
question consists of removing
references to its number from the action
windows
of the Menu Configuration Menu.
Each
may
menu will
be asked
as
if
Each menu supports only nfne choices, so that selection
may be made by
display easy
the entry of a sIngle character, and to keep each screen
may nonetheless be
for the operator to scan.
Extensive menu systems
constructed by thoughtful arrangement
of sub-menus
of related groups
of functions called from a main menu.
~~~~~
Copyright
(C)
~
1984
~ ~~
Data
Access
Corporation
~
~~
_——
—
———————————————————————————
05/16/84
"
~
C~l
~ ~~—
~~~~~~~~———~~~—
~—~~~———~——————————————————=."———~—~—=———————
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~~ ~ ~
==========
ELEMENTS OF CONFIGURATIONS
ZZZZZ±FZZZ
~~~
~————
==========
=====:
==""=__
=:=
—————————
==========
======.===—
~
=
which
be
(see
can
Definitions)
several types of arguments
These
by a DataFlex command.
serve
the purpose
of enabling
the manipulation of various types of information both 1itera1iy and
symbo): ica1ly.
Arguments
are
established by DataFlex connands,
file
and are
or various forms
of delimiterm
structure definitions
symbols.
by
identified
There
are
acted
upon
are
declarative in
DataFlex commands which establish arguments
i.e. they provide no action other than establishing the
These
cormands
are
treated separately in the chapter on
variable.
There
Commands".
is a Definition command for each of the
"Definition
argument
typem which are listed below:
The
nature?
ARGUMENT TYPES
STRING
NUMERIC
DATE
INTEGER
INDICATOR
Most
arguments
both
have
a
type
and
one
of
the
classes listed
not
change.
below:
ARGUMENT CLASSES
CONSTANT
VARIABLE
DATA BASE
ELEMENT
WINDOW
CONSTANTS
is
a
are
numeric
explicit
constant;
data
values that do
12/12/83
is a date
For
examp1ep
3
constant.
VARIABLES
of a
represent data values that can change in the course
is maintained in the computer's memoryp
configuration's
execution.
It
A variable
and Is of a fixed length.
is "typed" as listed aboveg and
can contain only information
consistent with its type. If data is not
DataFlex will convert
to the
of the proper
type for a variab1ep
is MOVEd. (see MOVE comand) Variables in
proper type when
DataF1ex
are global in a conÉigurat1on.
it
it
smallest discrete addressable components
of
with the syntax
they are addressed
FILENAME
"FILENN4E.FIELDNAME"
where
is the DF_FILENAME
established for
and FIELDNAME
FILEDEF
is the
the data file in the DataFlex
Uti1itµ DataFlex
FILEDEF
TAG_NAME established
for the data field in the
DATABASE
the
ELEMENTS
database.
~~~
Copyright (c)
In
are
the
DataFlex
———————————————————————————————
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-2
ELEMENTS
Any
utility.
be addressed
OF CONFIGURATIONS
database
from
can
DataFlex
element
e>isting
configuration.
any
on
any
2.0
User's
Manual
addressable disk drive
EXAMPLES:
DF_FILENAME.TAG_NAME
INVENTORY.QTY_IN_ST0CK
WINDOWS are
typed
They
addressed
are
and
by
images.
formatted positions in DataFlex screen
reference to the name of the PAGE of which they
and their
The
are
a component.
sequential position in that page.
from
sequence
is established by numbering
the windows
to
rightp
left
in the PAGE;
top to bottom
i.e. the top leftmost window is number l.
The number
is combined
with the name of the PAGE in the following
format: PAGENAME.# where
is the sequential number of the window in
Symbolic
be created for windows
names
can
the page.
with the NAME
"r
command.
STRING
CONSTANTS
A
text string constant is a literal representation of a group of
"as
printable characters that is handled
is" by the command processor.
string is defined to the DataFlex command processor by enclosing
the group of characters in single ('stringñ or double
("string")
The form
quotation marks as delimiters.
of the quotation mark
selected to start the delineation of the text string must also be used
as the marker
for the close of the string.
This is done to allow the
use of either
of the text string delimiters within a string.
The
EXAMPLES:
'text
string'
"Tom's
file"
"computer" 'Press to exit...
'In case of fire, yell "HELP"!'
'
Care
must
be taken
to use the correct combination of
ending
quotation marks with strings that contain the
For
example,
the string
can't gol' would be
as
fÍ
STRING
card.
'I
"I cáñ¶t go!",
however,
would
be
beginning and
alternate form.
interpreted by DataFlex
interpreted correctly.
VARIABLES
A
string variable is a name which you designate to represent a string
of characters which will have a consistent meaning
(but with contents
"CUST0MER_NAME").
that vary) throughout your application (for examp1e9
The variable
be declared (using the STRING
name must
commandL
and
its
length efther specified in the command or not specified, in which case
The string
defaults to 80 characters.
variable must be declared
before
is used.
After declaration, the string variable can be
by name throughout a configuration.
referenced or accessed
Variable
must
begin
names may be up to 80 characters
in 1engtM
with a 1etter9
and may not contain a space.
it
it
If
you don't specify your
four characters ("Bill"k
characters long (with 76
Copyright (c)
variable's length. but the contents are only
DataFlex will still handle
as 80
So for variables
spaces,
in this case!).
it
——————
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
ELEMENTS
Manual
C-3
OF CONFIGURATIONS
—————————————
———————
—
with short contents, you can save a great deal of memory space by
below). String
defining your variables as short ones (see examples
variab7es can have more than 80 characters in them tocb if they're
defined to. They may have up to 255 characters in them,
if needed.
be 1argeg
remember,
But
even
variables defined as large will always
when their
characters if it
contents are short.
"Bill" would be as255having
length 255.
were
the contents of a string variable defined
The
format for declaring
command
STRING
var1ab1e_name
STRING
STRING
flag
STRING
STRING
an_input
a
variable
string
Is:
lengtM
{string
EXAMPLES:
l
response
IQ
lOó
my_entry
strings "FLAG'4
The
"RESPONSE",
"AN
INPUT"
"MY
and
ENTRY"
are
declared for a DataFlex configuration by the above commands.
"FLAG"
a length of one
(I) character,
is defined as having
"RESPONSE"
is defined to eighty (BO) characters by default,
"AN INPUT"
since length isn't specified in its command,
is
is
defined to a length of ten (IQ) characters, and "MY_ENTRY"
(lOó)
hundred
characters.
defined to a length of one
NUMERIC
CONSTANTS
specific
sing1eg
Numeric
constants are
expressions or' other
forms
of
numeric
numeric
arguments.
values that are
used
in
EXAMPLES:
234
l(diameter*3.l4)
the first
that can be
On
second
used
100000
lOó
(FICA_WAGES*13.7)
1ine»
example
used
wherever
1inep
example
the
-50
10.52
numbers
the
six numbers are simply that:
On the
and however
useful or necessary.
constants
values 3.14 and 13.7 are numeric
in expressions.
VARIABLES
NUMERIC
variable is a named symbolic representation of a number that
as the subject of a DataFlex commandG
execution or
The numeric
variable must be declared before
expression evaluation.
by
can be referenced or accessed
After declaration,
is used.
Only
numbers
may be stored in a
name throughout a configuration.
numeric
variable.
A numeric
can
be
used
it
it
Mu1tlp1e
definition
numeric
line.
Copyright (c)
variable arguments
The variable
names
1984
Data
Access
be defined on
can
be separated
must
Corporation
a
single
by
spaces.
07/18/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
OF CONFIGURATIONS
ELEMENTS
C-4
=
_____=~
_
~~
Manual
————————————
FORMAT:
NLNBER
varlab1e_name2
varfab1e_namel
...
variab1e_namen
EXAMPLES:
N%ER
quantity
NUMBER amount_due
NUIE)ER
area_code
credtt
range
of values for
- 99,999,999,999,999.9999
a11owab1e
The
+ or
phone_number
phone_exchange
variables
numeric
in DataFlex is:
EXPRESSIONS
that are evaluated
type arguments
Arithmetic expressions are numeric
by DataFjex comnands.
acted
upon
Expressions ÁQjjQt have
as they are
They
are
into a variable.
to be evaluated first and then placed
autcmatical1y evaluated by the DataFlex comand
processor when
The result
encountered
of
during the execution of a configuration.
by the cormand.
the expression is then processed
of an expression
representation may be a component
valid numeric
varfab1esg
numeric
ehments in
including: numeric
constant5p numeric
as filename.fieldnameb
date variables or
the data base (addressed
by an operator and stored in a data
data
Input from the keyboard
Any
window.
The
to
used
are
following symbols
to fnstruct
the expression evaluation:
the
comand
processor
how
perform
ADDITION
SUBTRACTION
"
*
MULTIPLICATION
DIVISION
RETURN GREATER THAN
RETURN LESS THAN
PARENTHESES'
/>
<
(
...
)
However,
the
four operators above are se7f-exp1anatory.
Two numeric
expressfon operators require some explanation.
arguments
upon
the
are supplied to these operators* and depending
be
symbol
selected, the greater or lesser of the arguments
will
example:
For
returned.
In 3>59 5 will be returned; in 3<5, 3 will be
No modification
is made to the data. These evaluations only
returned.
make selections,
The
last
first
two
which
arguments
Expressions are formatted by enclosing the numeric
in parentheses. The DataFlex
up the expressiom with operatorm
make
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataF1ex
User's
ELEMENTS
Manual
OF CONFIGURATIONS
—
—
—————————————
——————
C-5
and evaluates the
processor recognizes the parentheses
expressiom making the result available for command processing just
used
in place of the expression.
a constant had been
command
as
if
EXAMPLES:
(argl + arg2)
(argl
- arg2)
(argl * arg2)
(argl / arg2)
(balance + sale)
payment)
(balance
(quantity " value)
(principal / months)
are
supported to control the sequence
Multiple levels of parentheses
In an expression that
of the arithmetic evaluation of the expression.
the portion of the expression contained
contains multiple parenthesesg
pair of parentheses
in the innermost
will be evaluated first.
EXAMPLE:
qty_on_hand))
(un1t_cost)*(reorder_qty
- would be
UNIT_C0ST
multiplied by the
this example,
because
RE0RDER_QTY
and QTY_0N_HAND
the
difference between
the
difference is enclosed in parentheses. WIthout
parentheses, UNIT_C0ST would first be multiplied by
RE0RDER_QTY,
and QTY_CN_HAND
subtracted from the product, a
mean'ingless
result.
In
Without
DATE
NOTE:
parentheses
In
an
expression, evaluation
Is
left
to rfght.
VARIABLES
supports two date formats in different versions of the
formats are MM/DD/YY and DD/MM/YY.
product. The two supported
For
the.
We refer to the latter
as the "Euro-date" format.
we will refer to formatted dates
purposes
of this documentation
though
accept
even
Euro-date versions of DataFlex
as MM/DD/YY,
and return dates
of DD/MM/YY.
the
format
in
DataF1ex
The displayed
in Julian form as numbers.
are
stored in DataFlex
and reports
in screens
printed date format MM/DD/YY which appears
storage format. A date
representation of the numeric
is a de-coded
variable can be defined to manipulate date information within a
command.
Multiple date
configuration by using the DATE definition
definition
line.
variables can be defined on a single argument
Dates
and
data
value.
stored in the date variable is a Julian numeric
Therefore, any operation requiring calculations on dates can be
executed
directly by reference to the variable without the necessity
and reportm
for type conversion. When dates are output to screens
routines which are flagged by the data type of the
internal DataF1ex
automatically into the MM/DD/YY format.
variable decode
The
it
..——
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
DataFlex
OF CONFIGURATIONS
ELEMENTS
C-6
2.0
User's
Manual
FORMAT:
DATE
date_variab1el
..
date_variable9
.
EXAMPLES :
DATE
DATE
DATE
due
today tomorrow yesterday
invo1ce_due
CONSTANTS
Date
constants (expressed
DataF1ex
comands, but
can
be
placed
use
in
date
in date
variab7es.
as
MM/DD/YY)
can
they cannot be used
variables using the
be
used
within
DataF1ex
as the subject of
expressions. They
"MOVE"
comand
for
EXAMPL ES :
LEGAL
DATE BIRTHDAY
MOVE 01/16146
--
LEGAL
DATE
--
TO BIRTHDAY
BIRTHDAY
MOVE 01/16/46 TO BIRTHDAY
CALCULATE
(BIRTHDAY
+ 365)
(01/01/83
TI I FGM
--
CAL(JJLATE
LEGAL
—
DATE DATE_S0LD
MOVE 01/01183
cALájLATE
TO
IQ)
+
TO NEXTJ3IRTHDAY
INVOICE.DUE
TO DATE-SOLD
(DATE-SOLD
+
IQ)
TO
INVOICE.DUE
FILENAMES
data
base
filenames" of DataF1ex
files can be used as connand
be
must
Valid "df_ filenames" that can be used as arguments
established with the DataFlex FILEDEF utility (see the section of this
manual
on File Definition
for a discussion of the df_ filename
conventi ons) .
The "df_
arguments.
FORMAT:
df_ filename
"df_ filename" in the format
OPEN
OPEN
coman
d
example
is
an
argument
for the
.
———————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporaticm
05/16/84
2.0
DataF1ex
ELEMENTS
Manual
User's
OF CONFIGURATIONS
C-7
EXAMPLE:
OPEN
CLOSE
Inventory
customer
The symbolic names
as
can be used
in a database
of individual elements
A spécif'ko
arguments
formatted
for a variety of DataFlex commands.
which
composed
are
of
syntax is provided to represent these arguments.
the filename
and
fieldname of the data
base
element:
FORMAT:
FILENAME.FIELDNAME
EXAMPLES:
fnventory.description
custcimer.current_ba1ance
custcmer.credlt_11m1t
INDICATORS
with the
indicator is established by issuing an INDICATOR comand
of the comnand.
takes on the
indicator name as the argument
It
characteristics
of a "flag" which is tested by the configuration to
The
determine
whether
a connand
line or group is to be executed.
does
not
INDICATOR
comand
"set"
only establishes an indicator;
to a status.
An
it
it
FORMAT:
INDICATOR
1ndfcator_argl
INDICATOR
pass
ind1cator_arg9
...
EXAMPLES:
See
the chapter
on
fall
new
INDICATORs
————————————————
Copyright (c) 1984 Data
Access
old
for
change
more
information.
Corporation
05/16/84
C-8
ELEMENTS
—— —————————
1984
Copyright (c)
OF CONFIGURATIONS
THIS
PAGE
Data
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
DataFlex 2.0 User's
LEFT
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
=============="""""":
"""""""":"""""""""""""::"::7"""
=~"~==~===,~
="=""""""""""""""""""""""
=""=======
======="==
""""""
DEa-ARINg
DATA
ELEMENTS
———
==========
C"9
"
""""
==========
::::Z ~ -- ~~
———————
——————
There
five DataFlex Definition
are
Commands:
STRING
NUI¶3ER
DATE
INTEGER
INDICATOR
a means
of identifying
serve to provide the configurator with Once
identified,
the
typed variables to the DataFlex compiler.
used
be
can
variable argument
at will throughout the configuration.
which
must
precede
The definition
comnand
establishes a variable
the
first use of the variable in a given configuration.
They
FORMAT:
COMMAND var1ab1e_arg
EXAMPLE:
STRING
keyboard_1nput
comands
three definition
support the three data types which
defined in a DataFlex file structure: ASCII strings, numbers
(stored as packed BCD), and dates (Julian - stored as packed BCD
numbers).
In the case
up to nine
of the NUMERIC and DATE connands9
(9)
line.
variables can be defined on a single comand
The
can
first
be
STRING
Command
maximum
a default
If the maximum string length is not spéc1f"fédo
by DataFlex.
Use of defined
length of 80 characters is assigned
therefore,
string space is not dynamically allocated in memory;
conserve
memory
can
utilization.
significantly
length specification
The
Strings consume their defined length plus 2 bytes in memory.
is from I to 255
allowable range for string length specification
characters.
FORMAT:
STRING
Copyright
(C)
variab1e_name
1984
Data
Access
{string
length}
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
ELEMENTS
DATA
DECLARING
C-lO
2.0
User's
Manual
EXAMPLES:
STRING
STRING
flag I
response
my_entry
lOó
STRING
The string
variables HÁG$ RESPONSE, and MY_EN1RY are declared
FLAG is
DataFlex
a
configuration by the above commands.
for
defined to one (I) character. RESPONSE is defined to eighty
(BO)
characters by default, and MY_ENTRY is defined to a
(LOO)
characters.
length of one hundred
If entry is subsequently made to
declared length of the variable,
a string
variable
excess
input
which
will
be
exceeds
the
discardecb
such
as:
STRING
code
MOVE "ABCDE"
3
TO code
will not contain ABCDE.
It will contain only the first
characters, ABC. No error will be declared unless one is
provided for the condition in the configuration.
CODE
NUMBER
3
Command
Multiple
definition
numeric
line.
variable arguments
The variable
names
be defined on a single
can
must
be separated by spaces.
FORMAT:
NUMBER
variab1e_namel
NUMBER
NUMBER
amount_due
NIM3ER
area_code
variab7e_name2
variab1e_namen
...
EXAMPLES:
quantity
credit
phone_number
phone_exchange
and has a value of zero
10 bytes of memoryp
variable consumes
m«nory
for
there is sufficient
automatically when
is declared.
If
can manage
up to 32g767
active NUMBER variables
storing them DataF1ex
in DataFlex is:
at one time. The range of numbers
+ or
- 99,999.999.99%999.9999
A NUMBER
it
DATE
Command
date variable
Mu1tip1e
arguments
can
be
defined
line.
FORMAT:
DATE
date_argl
DATE
DATE
due_date
...
date_argn
EXAMPLES:
invo1ce_date
ffrst_reminder
=,=~~———~~————~—""
(C)
1984
Copyright
Data
=
Access
on
a
single
"
comand
second_reminder
Corporation
"""""
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
DECLARING
Manual
DATA
ELEMENTS
_—— —————
INTEGER
C-ll
————.
Command
INTEGER
command
allows the creation of a memory variable to
contain an integer value. It differs from the NUMERIC variable in
anch
for storagep
less mmory
of
that the INTEGER variable consimes
accuracy
in calculations.
course, does not support fractional
However,
the greatest value of integers in corifigurations is when they
used
are
for counters, in FOR 1oopsp and with the INCREMENT command.
Some pre-defined
integers provide access to DataFlex systan variables
(e.g. ERRLINE = the last error line).
The
available for Integers is plus or
all
storage type in the data base;
(BCD).
as binary.coded decimals
In memoryg
ID bytesp
element
constnes
while an INTEGER
2 bytes.
The
range
INTEGER
minus
327767.
There
is no
numbers
are
stored on disk
however,
a NUMBER data
data
element
occupies only
FORMAT:
INTEGER
argumentl
INTEGER
my_age
qty_so1d
...
argumentN
EXAMPLES:
INTEGER
qty_returned
qty_shipped
Integer variables are stored in an internal array in the order in
CHAIN
connand
is execute6
they are declared. When the DataF1ex
This provides the facility to
the integer array is jiQt reinitialized.
pass
integer values from one configuration to another without writing
the values to a file.
which
integer array is sequentially allocated as the variables
is desired to pass integer values in
we suggest
that the same integer names be
declared at the beginning of each configuration to provide for a
When integer values
are
not
consistency in variable referencing.
be initialized
passed
between
before use.
configurations,
they should
The
internal
are
declared. Thereforeg
QiAINed
configurations,
if it
EXAMPLE:
MOVE O TO sheep_counter
//
inlt1alize
sheep_counter
————————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-12
DECLARING
DATA
DataF7ex
ELEMENTS
——
INDICATOR
2.0 User's
Manual
————
Command
The INDICATOR
which
argument
The INDICATOR
command
defines a special type of DataFlex
definition
control.
is used for conditional processing and program
comíand
creates an "Indicator".
the argument
of the INDICATOR
is tested by
of a "flag" which
a cormand
line or group is to
the configuration to determine whether
be executed.
Indicators are discussed fully in the section on
"Conditional Execution".
The named
indicator established as
command
takes on the characteristics
FORMAT:
INDICATOR
Copyright (c)
1984
ind1cator_arg
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
==—————~—————~
C"l3
""""""""""===—————
—— —
—————
~~~~
——————————
——————————
==========
MANIFULATING
DATA
ELEKNTS
=========~~~—————————————————————————
— ———————————
==========
=
———————————
MOVE Command
provides the facility to "transport" data throughout a DataFlex
for the type or location of the source
application without regard
or
window
Data
can be MOVEd from
to window»
destination arguments.
element
window
to windowp
to e1%entp
to data base "e1ment"» element
etc.p etc. Where expressions are
expression to window or e1emeñt»
they will be automatica1ly evaluated with
part of the MOVE connandp
Further. any
the result being MOVEd to the destination argument.
automatically.
required type conversions will also be executed
MOVE
FORMAT:
TO
dest1nat1on_var
MOVE
source_var
MOVE
"DataFlex" TO str1ng_arg
06/01/83 TO date_arg
TO invt.qty
(invt.qty
- qty_ordered)
screen.date TO lnvo1ce_date
// then...
(invoice_date + 30) TO invoice.due
EXAMPLES:
MOVE
MOVE
MOVE
MOVE
MOVE command
decodes
the type of the destination variable and
internally
generates one of the fOllowing types of move commands for
the comnand processor:
The
MOVENUM
MOVEINT
MOVESTR
for numbers
for integers
for strings
While
the source may be
Neither variable may be a label or indicator.
The
numbem
may
variable
destination
a literal string
the
not be.
or
MOVE command
will not update accumulators in the SUBTOTAL section of
command
See the PRINT
for this purpose.
the REPORT macro.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATA
MANIPULATING
C-14
INCREMENT
2.0
User's
Manual
Command
comand
INCREMENT
The
DataFlex
ELEMENTS
counter for loops
indicators may not
integer I.
operates on
repetitive
used
in this
and
a
be
integer variable, and is used as
1abelm and
Literals,
operations.
command.
only by the
incrwents
It
an
FORMAT:
INCREMENT
comnand
This
MOVE
...but
fnteger_var
is equivalent
to:
('lnteger_var
I)
+
TO
integer_var
in operation.
is faster
——————
CALCULATE
Command
the
using the
argument
CALCULATE
is of
if the destination
MOVE
connand
numeric
use
instead.
you
the
the
type. If
are not sure,
MOVE can
also evaluate expressions.
CALCULATE
The
result
An
to
is
comnand
used
an expression and
numeric
type. When
to evaluate
a destination
variable of the
comand
you must
determine
abbreviation of the CALCULATE
with the full comnand
commanch
"CALC"
can
be
used
move
inter-
word.
changeably
FORMAT:
CALC{ULATE}
expressfon_arg
TO
destinat1on_var
TO
invo1ce.date_due
EXAMPLES:
CALWLATE
CALC
CALC
(12+6)
TO g_tota1
(date_ord+cust.tems)
(3.14*66.4) TO area
not be a label. indicatorp constantg or
The
integer9 numer1cg
or date variable.
It
SUBTOTAL
update
CALCULATE
comnand
section
accumulators in the
will not
See the PRINT
command
for this purpose.
of the REPORT macro.
The
ASCII
destination
variable.
Copyright
(C)
variable
may
may
be
an
—————-.————
Access
1984 Data
Corporation
05/16/84
CR 5
~ ~—~~—_~———~—__~======"="="=====
==-==: ::
DATA
"=""======
——~—
=-EFE=-==-
ENTRY
——~~———~——~~———~=======
—~ —~ ————
—————
——————
————————————
———
and
Application requirements for data entryp file maintenance
file
met by the DataFlex ENTER command
macro.
inquiry, are efficiently
data
ENTER provides a complete program
skeleton for
entry using IMAGE
The ENTER macro
can handle multi pIe rel a'ted
formats and Flex-keys.
f11esp
transaction creation and online
fileThereupdateare proceduresp
user-defined procedures for specific operations so
editing.
procedures
and
auxiliary update
error
the user can set up whatever
trapping may be required.
skeletons, they can only
macros
are stand-alone program
Specl
a configuration.
ic connand
statements are used
around
the command macros to provide functions to
a variety
of requi rements.
connand
Since
be used
once
within
and
accommodate
The
group
which
comand
is in fact an entire
invokes the ENTER macro,
of processing routines that perform the following functions:
ENTER
l.
ENTER data
via
type checking,
2.
CREATE
with validation,
error trapping.
images,
and
screen
checking
range
FIND
4.
EDIT
.
6.
records in the
data
and
imagep
screen
data
on
in the data base by key field and display
the formatted CRT "image". Single records or multiple
related records can be "found" with a single key stroke.
scannéd»
Data
be inspected,
"edited, deleted.
can then
3.
5
CRT
base
with data entered through
update
related data
in the process»
base
records, key iMéxésó etc.» all without having to
for such activities.
create routines and procedures
the
~
f
in
it
existing records in the
related data
properly update
etc. without custom routines
DELETE
requi
CLEAR
records
red
the
on-line.
from
updates
displayed
data
from
data
data
base
and
and in the
process,
records, key indexesD
procedures.
base
the
screen
base
while processing
all
image.
~
————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
C-16
DATA
DataFlex
ENTRY
2.0
User's
Manual
=="·="'="'=
The
operation of the
ENTER
command
with have previously
fijes dealt AUTODEF
FILEDEF
or
utilities.
assumes
macro
that the database
been
defined with the DataFlex
can be displayed with
Mu1tipie records from different database
files
by the ENTER macro.
However.
and f1exibi11ty
ease
the structure of
that only one record from
the ENTER comnand does impose the limitation
a given data
Íile may be displayed on the screen at one time. It will
Connot, for example,
support a multi-item format like an invoice.
be "programmed"
withfigurations requiring mu1ti-1ine formats should
The ENTERGROUP comand
is useful In
out the use of the ENTER macro.
See the INVOICE.FRM
formatting.
applications requiring multi-line
demo
file for an example of a programmed mu1ti-1ine (non-ENTER)
configuration.
specific command structure is used with the ENTER macrog and there
designed
comnands
to control the formatting
a series of optional
image.
of the screen
actions which occur within the data windows
Configuration examples
at the end of this chapter can serve as a
useful guide during the discussion of these coimands.
A
are
and
————————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
ENTER
User's
2.0
DATA
Manual
STRUCTURE:
CONFIGURATION
IMAGE
//
lpagenamel
---- first
image
of
page
following
image
of
pages
l*
PRE-
//
//
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
EN7RY
ENTRY
ENTRY
--// end
...
field
{window}
....
.....
{options}
//
RETURN
OPTIONAL
---
commands
--RETURN
----
OPTIONAL
ENTER
COMMAND
="="
----
_______"___
ENTRY
for
each
required at
end
of
//one
USER-DEFINED
ENTEREND
//
""-and
all
AUTOPAGE required only for
second
and following
screens
{windjw} {options}
RETURN
ENTER.EXIT:
images
section
image
of
SECTION
field
ENTER.SAVE:
cormands
multiple
start ENTER mini program
declare related files In order:
"senior" to "junior"
//
//
page
//
have
COMMAND SECTION
//
//
//
ENTRY
=
AUTOPAGE
can
MACRO USING
fi1e2
filel
//
//
----------section
image
open
INVOKE
"""___"____
//
start
files
//
used
and
any variables
// initialize
window
formatting commands
give
//
f11el
f1le2
OPEN
OPEN
SECTION
---
/pagename2
----
C-17
ENTRY
ENTRY
PROCEDURES
//
//
//
//
//
//
save
save
end
procedure
procedure
end
of exit
//
End
of
section
------comnands
procedure
save
procedure
comands
procedure
of
exit
exit
POST-ENTRY
window
procedure
ENTER
PROCESSING
mini
program
====-
-
Image
Section. Pre-Enter Commands. Enter Command
sections:
and Post-Entry Processing
Line, Entry Sectiom User-Oefined Procedures
above
The section markers
shown
are
for instrucare
discussed below.
tive purposes
only. They are not required in actual configurations.
The
above
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-18
DATA
ENTER
IMAGE
DataF1ex
ENTRY
2.0
User's
Manual
SECTION:
IMAGE SECTION
start with one
using ENTER should
in a configuration
These
images
in the blanks" forms for the operator.
or more
for the fi1e(s) used in the
will be a window into the database
be used
The same images
can
for all file maintenance
configuration.
should
image
form
The
contain
functions and will use the Flex-keys.
that
prompting to inform the operator on the contents of the windows
Each
with a
page
of the image must be preceded
are displayed.
pagename
("l" followed by the name of the page). Help screens may be
included in the Image section (see the HELP comand). The image
section of the configuration is terminated with a "l*".
The
"fill
ENTER
PRE-ENTER
SECTION:
In the PRE-ENTER
ENTER macro
must
all
section,
be
OPENed.
the section on "Manipulating
required to ready the system
included here.
ENTER
of the
The
OPEN
will be used by the
is further described in
comands
Any other DataFlex
be
should
entry session
that
files
command
Records".
for a data
COMMAND LINE:
specify all of the database
files that the
The files
listed on this
during execution.
(when
SAVEd and CLEARed
the operator
line will be
in the last window of an
presses
the SAVE Flex-key or presses
image)
Other
files that are open may still be used within the ENTER
.
macro
is required to SAVE and CLEAR any such file, those
but if
FINIh
actions must be written into the configuration expiicltiy.
RELATE and DISPLAY
operations on records from such non-ENTER files
will still be performed automatically.
The
ENTER
ENTER
macro
COMMAND LINE
must
will
access
automat1ca11y
it
SEQUENCE in which
the files on the ENTER command line are declared
The "main" fi1ep the one on which
the primary file
is significant.
maintenance
is being done, MUST be the first file in the list in a
Any
right sequence.
file
file whichmain fs relatedand TOanyby the main
left to
TO which
be declared to the right
must
of the
file
file,
should
be listed
that file relates
next. This will put the files in
order with relationships pointing to the right and is required to
ensure
is properly attached to the
that when a record is SAVEd
that DELETIONS will
fi1e(s) to which
relates.
This also ensures
properly delete the relationships to the record(s) which are DELETEd.
The
it
it
explains relationships among database
chapter on "File Definition"
example
in that chapter. an ENTER comand
Following
the
given
files.
line for the Sales Transactions file would read "ENTER TRANSACTION
PARTS CUSTOMER",
and the PARTS and CUSTOMER database
files would be
updated
through entries made into the TRANSACTION mal n database
file
and changes
in both).
(including new PARTS, new ajsToMERs?
The
.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16184
DataFlex 2.0 User's
ENTER
ENTRY
DATA
Manual
C-19
ENTRY
SECTION:
interface with the data entry operis the primary
connect
the
of the entry section is to logically
elements
data
base
This is done
in the image.
with the data windows
handles
The ENTRY command
the display of
with the ENTRY command.
data, finding records, moving data into the record buffer and clearing
When each
of the above operations is executed. the
the windows.
for ENTRY comands. One or more
entire entry section is scanned
line to provide formatting
options can be placed on each ENTRY cormand
for the data controlled by the command.
The
ator.
ENTRY SECTION
The object
command
command
in that
differs from any other DataF1ex
in any
functions and that they can be executed
several different
window
FIND
used
EXAMPLE:
sequence.
Flex-key is
in a
the
If
controlled by an ENTRY command, all of the ENTRY commands are scanned.
If the FIND is successfub EVERY data element in that file for which
there is an ENTRY command will display its contents in its data
The
has
it
ENTRY
window.
GOTOs,
(INDICATORs,
commands
etc.) can be included in the ENTRY
of operation or set conditional
section to control the sequence
When
should
be avoided
SAVE commands
in the ENTRY section.
entries.
data
is put into a data window with the ENTRY command, the data is
window;
JUST in the data
record buffer until
isn't moved into the
The CLEAR Flex-key will
controlled by
clear windows
a SAVE is done.
DISPLAY
(see
by
commands
those
ENTRY commands,
controlled
but not
section on Di rect Control of Data Entry for DISPLAY command).
Other
it
The
format of the
ENTRY
where
file
ENTRY
cormand
is
as
follows:
wIndow
{options}
element
"fi1ename.fie1dname" Is any database
fields).
or an expression (for calculated
fl1ename.f1e1dname
this instance, the brackets {} are to be actually typed
in this
configuratiom
contrary to the notation elsewhere
brackets are used only to signify optional cormand e1«nents
reader of the manual.
Format
options for the ENTRY command are as follows:
In
POINTS
open
in the
manual
where
to the
{P0INTS=n}
where
"n" is the number of places to the
This can
point in the window.
right of the decimal
reformat a window or can be used to configure an
integer-only numeric
field by setting a value of zero
(O)
for "n".
— ————
——————
———
Copyright (c)
an
SJLNIU
F|INcTTnN
DECIMAL
in
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATA
C-20
DataFlex
ENTRY
=
~———
FIND
IF
Manual
index
Executes
on the main
of
a FIND EQuals
data elment on the EN7RY command line is a
part.
If the desired FIND is on a multi-segment
index, the AUTOFIND should be on the last entry
command
that make up the index, so
for the segments
has
been
entered
for FINDing
that all data necessary
Record
number
may
prior to execution of the AUTOFIND.
AUTOFINDing
data
which
the
not be part of the index of
Windows
element
for data from related
is a part.
will also be fi11e& provided there are ENTRY
files
connands
for those windows.
{AUTOFINCñ
which
the
AUTOFIND*
SKIP
User's
2.0
~——~——————
FOUND*
REQUIRED*
a record is
the window
the data in the wiñájwY
and move the
cursor to the next window.
If no such
record has been F0UNlj, leave cursor in window and
accept
operator input.
{SKIPFOUNCñ
FOUND with
Display
key
data
if
data
in
matching
Requires that an active record be in the
before the operator can pass this window in the
The
image.
in this window until a
cursor will rémaln
successful FIND Is completed. The BACKFIELD Flex-key
the FIND on
can move the cursor in reverse to execute
another window.
Pressing the CLEAR Flex-key will
return the cursor to the first wfndow on the image.
{FINDRECÜ
buffer
UPPER
CASE
REQUIRE
RANGE
ENTRY
CHECK
{CAPSLOCK)
Converts all lower
entered in the window to upper
alpha
case
case.
{RE(JLJJIRED}
moved
data
been
The
cursor cannnot be
entry window until data has
current window.
characters
to the next
entered into the
= #L iC2} {RANGE.=
nn/ddlyy. m/dd/yy} Provides
automatic check of entered data and declares an
window
the date
error and returns the cursor to the
or numeric
value entered does not fall within the
specifications
in the comand. The first value is the
and the second
low
end of the rangep
is the high end.
and lower values in the comand
The upper
are
included
Literal numbers and dates can
within the valid range.
be used.
Variables may not be used.
{RANGE
an
if
VALIDITY
MECK
{mECK="entryl|entry2|entryn"}{MECK=string_var}
Provides an automatic check of entered data and
declares an error and returns the cursor to the window
if the entry does not match any substring in the aiux
comand. Where an eligible entry has fewer characters
than the window9 the excess characters must be speciThe vertical
bars
below
(shown
as 16).
fied as spaces
optional delimiters.
(I) shown below are recomended
be characters unlikely
to
De1imitersp if úSéd,r should
The connand
be input erroneously by operators.
may
in-memory
alternatively
reference a previously-defined
element):
string variable (not a window or database
{MEa(="YEslNoBlYBBlNBB"}
"
"————————————————————
05/16/84
Corporation
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
User's
2.0
DataFlex
ENTRY
C-21
to the record
Puts data in the windows
changed
been
any data has
regardless of whether
Norma11yg
from
a put will
displayed.
that originally
not occur unless some data has been changed.
{FORCEPUT}
PUT
FORCE
DATA
Manual
buffer
DO NOT PUT
DATA
being
changed
from
{NOENTER}
Data
the found record is displayech but
preventing entry.
the cursor skips the wiñdowo
NOENTER skips the window
no record is found,
even
unlike SKIPFOUND (see above).
ENTRY
NO DATA
into the
from
{NOPUT}
Do not put data
the window
This protects data from
record buffer.
by the operator.
if
Combination
of NOFUT and NOENTER above.
is not moved from the window into the record
buffer, and the cursor skips the window.
{DISPLAY0NLY}
ONLY
DISPLAY
Data
RETAIN
DISPLAY
RETAIN
ALWAYS
Maintain the data in window
is execute6 but clear the
successive CLEARs are keyed.
{RETAIN}
command
{RETAINALL}
never
Maintain
data
in
even
window
window
at all
ifif
a CLEAR
two
times;
clear.
cotmands
comandm and may be
with asterisks are all FINDing
(see
elements
database
the
relating to indexed
only on windows
Databases"
on
more
indexing).
on
for
information
"Designing
chapter
The
used
*
The
options,
command
cumulatively
EN1RY
on
an
and
ENTRY
file.field
the formatting
line:
options
above
can
all
be
used
command
page.5
{AUTOFIND,SKIPFOUND,CAPSL0CK}
maximum
length of any DataFlex comnand line is 255 characters.
within
Multiple options on an ENTRY command line are all enclosed
brace
(,)¿
characters {braces}, separated by comas
The
special form of the ENTRY command is
The default mode of the
displayed.
when this format is used.
A
be
where
used
expressions
window
becomes
display
are
the
to
only
FORMAT:
w1ndow_arg
ENTRY
(expression)
ENTRY
(date_today+30) screen.5
EXAMPLE:
ENTRY
AND AUTOPAGE
The ENTRY command
can be used
by using the-AUTOPAGE
windows
cally in
explicitly
Copyright
the
ENTER
written
(C)
1984
macro
reference to image
functions automatiand needs
imagep
to be
more
screens.) AUTOPAGE
without specific
command.
for the
there
(AUTOPAGE
firsttwoscreen
or
only
if
Data
————————————
———————
_ ___=~_=~~~~>=————
Access
05/16/84
Corporation
are
C-22
DATA
sequentially
down)
of
accesses
the command
Data
NOTE:
the
Entry),
The
ENTER
DataF1ex
ENTRY
User°s
Manual
starting witht the top line and working
image
named as the argument
of the screen
(see
the section of this manual on Direct Control of
and permits the window
references to be left off.
to right9
(left
windows
the
ENTRY
command
macro
or
Since
ENTER
command
is
2.0
can
ONLY by used
ENTERGROUP
within the
within
the
ENTRY
section of
command.
composed
of a set of subroutines, a RETURN
is internally
required to terminate the ENTRY section of the configura-
tion.
If you don't
processing,
need
you
of the user-defined procedures
or post-entry
simply end the ENTER configuration with an
any
may
ENTEREND.
a totally
straightforward,
unimaginativeg
illustrates
makes
use of the AUTOPAGE
configuratiom
It
page window
references are not necessary.
It has all of
of an ENTER configuration:
The
next page
yet efficient
function, so
the components
ENTER
labeled
image
1.
A
2.
An
OPEN command
3.
An
ENTER
4.
ENTRY
commands
with
5.
ENTRY
commands
terminated
6.
An
with filename
with filename
command
ENTEREND
argument
command
data
to
element
end
by
argument
arguments
a RETURN
the configuration
~
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
DATA
Manual
="=———___—~—
EXAMPLE
ENTRY
C-23
———————
FOR ENTER
FORMAT
/LIST
My
Mailin'
List
Name:
Address:
City:
State:
l*
// --
ZIP:
_
pre-enter
--
OPEN MAIL
ENTER
// --
MAIL
'
//
open
//
start
data
enter
begfning of entry section
AUTOPAGE
LIST
ENTRY
MAIL.NAME
ENTRY
EN1RY
MAIL.ADDRESS
MAIL.CITY
EN1RY
MAIL.STATE
ENTRY
MAIL.ZIP
RETURN
ENTEREND
file
macro
--
sequentially assign windows
not actually required in this
single-screen configuration
//
//
//{AUTOFIND}
{CAPSLOCK}
//
//
//
end
//
end
of entry section
not actually required since
is enterend
next
command
of enter
macro
———————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DATA
C-24
DataFlex
ENTRY
User's
2.0
Manual
——————
PROCEDURES
USER-DEFINED
THE
in related
configurations will need to perform updates
These
error checking or delete protection built im etc.
which
by five user-defined
procedures
are
operations are accommodated
when the corresponding DataFlex Flex-key is
automatically executed
The Userpressed
during the execution of the ENTER configuration.
Defined procedures
are:
ENTER
have
Many
files,
ENTER.SAVE:
ENTER.DELETE:
executed
executed
on
on
ENTER.EDIT:
executed
on
ENTER.CLEAR:
executed
on
a SAVE command
a DELETE command
and on a DELETE
an EDIT
a CLEAR command
ENTER.EXIT:
executed
on
an
EXIT
command
command
are automatically called by the ENTER
from
any other
functiona11y no different
labeled DataFlex sub-routine called by your own GOSUB comands. The
name is
inclusion of the colon ": at the end of the procedure
required to identify them as labels; om!tting the colon will cause an
error.
These
ljser-Oefined procedures
command
macrog
but they are
"
If
an
ERROR
function
The
or
The
is declared within
be disabled.
ENTER.SAVE
an
any
procedures
of the
the associated
will
existing
ENTER.DELETE
procedure
reccmi
is executed
is edited.
is
procedure
whenever
whenever
executed
a
new
an
record is created
existing
record is
deleted.
The
ENTER.EDIT
OR an
deleted
save
procedure
related
The
procedure
existing
to keep
whenever
an existing
record is
is executed
This works well with the
record is edited.
the consistency of counters and totals in a
file.
ENTER.CLEAR
procedure
is
executed
whenever
the
CLEAR
Flex-key is
pressed.
The
and
key
whenever
procedure
the escape
is executed
is primarily intended to allow conditional disabling
by declaration
of an error.
ENTER.EXIT
Each of the User-Defined
with the use of a RETURN
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
procedures
command
Access
must
(see
the
be ind1vidua1ly
example
on the
Corporation
key
is
of the
hit
escape
terminated
next page).
'
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
DATA
Manual
ENTRY
C-25
the use of the ENTER.SAVE and
executed
every time a record is saved
An application
and edited/deleteck
requirement for a
respectively.
However,
uses
information.
only one
for the
mailing
in
is desired to maintain an on-line counter of how many records
illustrates
below
The configuration
ENTER.EDIT
procedurem
which
are
list
file
list
are
this we will establish a field in the system file
file.
that contains the number of records in this file.
be incremented
when
To maintain the count correct1y? the counter must
when
a record is dejete6
the counter must be
a record is created;
and when
decrementéd»
an edit is donep
the counter must be left
it
To do
the
(SYSFILE.COUNTER)
unchanged.
/LIST
Mai1in'
My
List
Name:
Address:
City:
ZIP:
ST:
_
l*
//
only those parts of this
OPEN
OPEN
that
example
MAIL
SYSFILE
//
ENTER MAIL
AUTOPAGE
are
open
changed
other
have
comments
file.
LIST
{AUTOFIND)
ENTRY
MAIL.NAME
ENTRY
MAIL.ADDRESS
ENTRY
ENTRY
MAIL.CITY
MAIL.ST
ENTRY
MAIL.ZIP
{CAPSLOCXJ
RETURN
whenever
ENTER.SAVE
procedure
a record
will execute
// The
executed,
procedure
When a record is createcb only this
is
//
incrementing
the
counter.
//
ENTER.SAVE:
CALC (SYSFILE.COUNTER+1)
TO SYSFILE.COUNTER
SAVE
The
//
from
save
procedure
procedure
For
decrements
SAVEm
which
return
whenever
a record is deleted
is executed
the counter.
delet1om it decrements
It also
the counter in an edit, but true edits are followed by
ENTER.SAVE,
execute
offsetting the decrement
to zero.
ENTER.EDIT
or edited.
ENTER.EDIT:
SAVE
saved.
SYSFILE
RETURN
//
//
//
//
is
a
CALC (SYSFILE.COUNTER-I)
SYSFILE
RETURN
//
return
from
delete
TO SYSFILE.COUNTER
procedure
ENTEREND
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-26
ENTDISPLAY
DataFlex
ENTRY
DATA
2.0
User's
Manual
Command
comand
causes
all ENTRY data elments for the data
to display on the screen, along with all
in the argument
those in other related files. Its apparent effect is exactly as
by the operator.
though
the SUPERFINO Flex-key had been pressed
It
may be used
in the ENTRY section of an ENTER or ENTERGROUP configuration and/or in a KEYPROC (for the FIND key, for example).
ENTDISPLAY
The
file
named
FORMAT:
ENTDISPLAY
ff1ename>
is the
the displayed record is to
Where
TO ABORT,
subroutine below would give the prompt
key was pressed,
and then, depending
on which
OTHER KEY TO CONTINUE",
or
either resume execution at the predefined procedure "RPT.LOOP"
(Pressing any key
abort via the predefined procedure "END.OF.REPORT".
other than ESCape actually would cause execution to resume.)
REPORT macroG
default mode of operation
by the operator while the
key
any
is
mode may be disabled entirely
or modified to
confirming question when a key Is thus
The
hit
if
EXAMPLE:
RETURN
RPT.KEYPRESS:
//
Must
be
added
l
PAUSEKEY
STRING
TO ABORT,
"PRESS
INPUT
[KEY.ESCAPE]
RETURN END.OF.REPORT
RETURN
end
ANY OTHER
of section
KEY
commands
TO CONTINUE"
PAUSEKEY
RPT.LOOP
should
This procedure
immediately after the
RETURN
after
command
shown
in the configuration
located before the REPORTEND command, and
The
of the last group of section commands,
be added
above
explicitly
on the first line must
in order to insert this procedure.
be
end
END$0F$REPORT
is used instead of
the predefined procedure
would
tota11ing and other terminating procedures
would
be appropriate
to use in
skipped. Use of this procedure
printer misfeed, ribbon breakage,
or a similar mishap.
If
END.0F.REP0RTg
PAGE
be
case
of
BREAKS
automat1ca11y
maintains the number of lines remaining
macro
current page in manory at all times while outputting.
It will
things like number of lines required by a SUBTOTAL or BODY
image
allowed to operate in its default mode,
automatically, and
and subheadings
as required at the top
of each
reprint headings
will
doing
you are
"fancy" pagfng that requires direct
new page.
If
have
you will
to provide commands within the
controb howevem
The PAGECHECK command
appl1cab1e
section(s) (typically
the BODY).
checks
whether
in the command argument
the number of lines given
sends
The FORMFEED command
remains
a "raw"
on the current page.
formfeed
at the top of the new
(that is, it does not print headings
[PAGEBREAK]
GOSUB NEWPAGE utilizes
the PAGEBREAK
page). The sequence
predefined indicator and the NEWPAGE predefined procedure to print
commancb
The following
headings
for
at the top of the new page.
would
examp1eg
at the top of
eject the current page and print headings
The
REPORT
on the
handle
it
if
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-44
the next
page
page:
if
there
PAGEQIECK
Cpagebreak]
The
following
DataF1ex
AND OUTPUT
REPORTING
less
were
6
than
lines
left
2.0
on
User's
Manual
the current
6
GOSUB NEWPAGE
would
command
do
the
same
thing unconditiona11y:
FORMFEED
GOSUB NEWPAGE
REPETITIVE
REPORTS
multiple times for different
report can be put in a loop to execute
selection criteria. Put a label at the beginning of the report and
then, at the end of the reportp CLEAR the report data file and GOTO
Remember
to provide some
the label at the beginíng of the report.
means
for the operator to exit the loop.
A
MULTIPLE
To
a
make
disk
COPIES:
multiple
file;
and
copies of
(2)
print
a
"TEMP.$$$"
OUTFILE
REPORT
//
//
INDEX.I
X BY
report -----REPORTEND
//
The
following
//
You
[NOT
"LST:
COUNT
INTEGER
SIRING
STRVAR
"
//
Output to
Do report
to
file
temporary
multiple
file
Output
OUTFILE
times
to printer
132
have
must
set up NUMBER 0F_COPIES previously.
TO NUMBER OF_C0PIES
FOR COUNT FROM
"TEMP.$$$"
DIRECT_INPUT
l
SEQEOF]
REPEAT
READLN
WRITELN
[NOT
the disk
lines print
DIRECT_OUTPUT
(I) set your
times.
report you must:
that file multiple
SEQEOF]
STRVAR
STRVAR
LOOP
FORMFEED
LOOP
CLOSE_INPUT
ERASEFILE
Copyright (c)
1984
"TEMP.$$$"
Data
Access
//
//
//
Reads
li//
End
Close
//
a
Writes
End of
line
a line
REPEAT
from
TEMP.$$$
to the printer
loop
FOR loop
before delete
File no longer needed
Corporation
of
07/18/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
REPORTING
Manual
"",_
C-45
AND OUTPUT
~
TO REMEhdER
THINGS
l.
2.
The
REPORT
The
be
may
used
used
only
which
can
be
subtotal breakpoints
or in any other RELATEd
a
configuration.
output is
be
must
255
characters.
They
indexed.
should
be processed
Data
only from
The contents of formatted
variables.
for calculations or other processing.
AUTOPAGE
invisible
section.
An
command
and
command
invisible
an
database
windows
is executed
at
RETURN command
BODY section of the report is executed
satisfies the selection criteria.
REPORTING
WITHOUT
be
commands;
elements
cannot
The
which
can
file.
and total
only by PRINT
registers are updated
update
CALCULATE
and DISPLAY
do not
the registers.
5.
7.
within
MACRO
Subtotal
MOVE,
6.
REPORT
once
as
file
THE
e
line length
maximum
3. Fields
in the main
4.
macro
ABOUT
or in-memory
re?lab1y be used
the beginning of
at the end.
once
for
every
each
record
REPORT
of configuring reports is by use of the Report macrcn
with the QUERY program
to generate the configuration.
howevem
The Report
macro,
is by no means the only way of configuring
convenience
a pre-programmed
suitable to a wide
reports--it
is merely
The following
range
configuration outputs a data file
of purposes.
(called SAMPLE in this example)
to the printer in record number
Note
sequence,
that
using a format image with a pagename of IMAGE.
found
in reports
lacks headings, totals and subtotals commonly
produced
by the Report
macro.
The
usual
way
often starting
it
/IMAGE
l*
OUTFILE
OPEN
°'LST:
SAMPLE
output to the printer
the data file to output
//Clear the record buffer
//Clear the screen
//Direct
"
//Open
CLEAR SAMPLE
CLEARSCREEN
REPEAT
FIND GT SAMPLE
IF0UNDI
BEGIN
PRINT
SAMPLE.NAME
PRINT
PRINT
SAMPLE.CITY
SAMPLE.STATE
PRINT
SAMPLE.ZIP
OUTPUT
[NOT
END
SEQEOF]
BY RECNUM
//Find
the next record
TO IMAGE.3
(C)
//Stop at
Data
command
used
IMAGE
LOOP
1984
//AUTOPAGE
//not
IMAGE.4
ABORT
Copyright
number
//Must state TO
//Window.# since
TO IMAGE.I
TO IMAGE.2'
TO
by
Access
Corporation
end
of
file
07/18/84
C-46
REPORTING
AND OUTPUT
DataF1ex
—
2.0
User's
Manual
——
.
THIS
PAGE
Data
Access
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
—————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Corporation
07/18/84
ZZZ±ZTZZZZ±ZFF2:
ZZZ::2:::7:::::::7:::7:::::::-----
==========
ZZZZZZTZZZ
FILE
DEFINITION
(FILEDEF)
-
C-47
=========
=Z======
== —=_—___—
==========
———————
OVERVIEW
FILEDEF
file definition
utility enables you to create a complete The
for data base files used in a DataFlex application.
file definítiom once created, contains information about the file namep indexed
Each DataFlex
fieldm and field information.
file must have certain
etc.,
information about the structure of the data? file name, indexes
Once
donm
be used.
can
this information is
established before
avai1ab1ep
through the data base managéí"» to any DATAFLEX program.
can adjust thei r operation to the type
During execution, the programs
and length of the
files and fields in use. This gives DataF1ex its
The
it
unique
APPLICATION
INDEPENDENCE.
APPLICATION
INDEPENDENCE
means
that the same data file
multiple applications without the duplication of effort
found
In most conventional application programs.
be used
can
and storage
in
EXAMPLE:
payable
and a
accounts
We may want
receivable, accounts
to implement
three files with name and address
mailing list.
Instead of having
informatioñ» we could have one name/address
file which is referenced
Only
by all
this one file need be defined, stored
three applications.
and updated
thus saving both time and
for names and addresses,
storage... a real bargain!
these
data
base
with the
files potent1a1ly are so integrated
be put into the
total application picture, thought and care should
contents and eventual relationships of the files. A well-designed
will almost automatically mean an effective and
file structure
successful app1 ication.
Because
~ ~ ————————
—————
——————
—
————
—————
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
Copyright (c)
05/16/84
FILE
C-48
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
"=============———————————————————
STEP
ONE
-
PLAN
THE
AMONG 7HE
RELATIONSHIPS
DATA
FILES
2.0
User's
Manual
—
DataF1ex
applications uses only one independent
file, there
To gain the benefits
of the interrelationships.
inter-fileDBMS
structureg read the following section carefully
file relational
A thorough
understanding
to see how to build a multi-file structure.
DataFlex
will be extremely
the
single
configuration at
of
file level more
comp1exg
If
are
your
no
in rapidly gaining an understanding of the
The following
section treats data theory
structures.
definitely
pertains to DataFiex (although
not just as
There
is irrelevant to less-capable software products).
are a number
and
mastery
of this area
of good books available on this subject,
your
by referring
may be enhanced
to some of them.
helpful
multi-file
genera11yg
WHAT FILE
it
it
ARE FOR
RELATIONSHIPS
managemeñt»
but
concept
in database
File relationships are an advanced
applications.
its benefits probably apply to most serious database
Although
none
provides
the capabi11typ
some software products offer
with the ease and power of DataFiex. File relationships are typica71y"
which
is the
invisible to an operator running a DataFlex application,
best
Most
way for it to be.
existing microcomputer applications are
designed
to use only one data file, but many of those would benefit
approach.
Compared
with single-file
greatly from a multi-file design
design
approaches,
file relationships offer the following advantages:
it
efficient
utilization
of disk
a.
More
b.
Equal
c.
Greater consistency of data
data
elements
in comon.
d.
Improved
records
support wIth
data
efficiency
the
having
in
data
a
smaller
space.
number
of records.
of records
having
data applying to
in comon.
groups
in
groups
changing
of
simple mailing list of
illustrate the conceptg let us use a Each
record in the list would
indivuals at their business addresses.
have
the individuaVs name, name of the company where they worG
Sq far,
address
this would se«n
of the company7 and a phone number.
But
suppose
that groups of
application.
to be a typical sing1«fi1e
You
all worked at the same company.
fifteen or twenty
of these people
would
want
one of
an individual
but
record on each persom
still
have
movecb
you would
to find each record for someone
the companies
who worked
Ifb on
in each one.
at that company and change the address
were
takem company names and
the other hand, a relat1onal approach
would
addresses
be kept in a separate
file
file, and each person's
The company
but
would
have
no address.
name
namey
in
his company's
would
be in the company
and address
(to support the relationship)
file
would
be many fewer
There
to which each person's file related.
be
would
each
persoMs record
company
flies than person fiiesjphoneand number
when the
in it). Moreover,
smaller (having no address
or
ABC company
moved,
of all 27 people on your list who
the addresses
work
in every record) by changing
(consistently
there would be changed
be
And there would
only the company record for the ABC company.
To
if
it
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
FILE
Manual
DEFINITION
(FILEDEF)
C-49
—————
———
—
either.
nothing apparently missing from each person's recorvh
DataFlex can be configured to show each personG full company name and
address
as though
were
part of the person's actual record. Th is
provisions are
process
is fnvisible to the operatom unless explicit
And
made to render
visible (which wouldn't normally be desirable).
changing
from
when john Doe moved
the ABC Company to the XYZ company,
would
be as easy
name from
as changing
his company's
his whole address
ABC to XYZ (provided there was already a record for the XYZ Company
in
your company file--if there wasñft, you could create a new onm right
there "in" John Ooefs record entry screen) .
it
it
It goes even further, DataFlex can relate ten files to each other
online simultaneously (In l6-bit computers--capacity in 8 bits is
we could keep
all our
individuals,
f ive) . If we were selling to these
by the person's name.
sales in a file related to our persons
file
Then,
when looking at a sa1ep
we could view
the customer's complete
(now
name and address
looking through two fi1esp all the way to the
only the
related company record) with each sale, even though
number)
is part of the sale record.
customerG name (or account
But
then, are the hallmarks of the need for related files: groups
which
be the same at all
must
times
of records having data elements
for groups
(like customer
of sales transactions),
or, looking in the
data
groups
in a
series of identically-structured
opposite directiom
type of file
record. Dataflex provides a he1rarchica1, or one-to-many
the speed and efficiency of your
relationship which can improve
application greatly.
These,
GENERAL
LAYOUT
OF FILES
of your file relationships as a "tree" structure
This exercise gives
in configuring the application.
you a
to establish not only the files involved in the application but also gives the ability to see how data can be grouped
and specifically
to each of the files.
together effectively
Drawing
is the
a
schematic
step
first
chance
EXAMPLE:
DATA
FILE
RELATIONSHIPS
CUST(MER
FILE
VENDOR
FILE
^
I
^
l
—--->
I
I
FILE
"
i
I
I
I
I
I
TRANSACTIONS
FILE
(C)
1984
Data
Access
PARTS
I
I
SALES-----'
Copyright
"TREE"
l
PURMASE
TRANSACTIONS
FILE
Corporation
05/16/84
C-50
FILE
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
2.0
User's
Manual
———
"Data
Relationships" to maintain the inter-file
utilizes
The lines
connecting the files show
relationships you have defined.
the relationships among the files. In the actual file definition
these
relationships are established through the use of related fields.
A representation
among
the
like this one will make the RELATIONSHIPS
The fields
through which different
readily
apparent.
are
files
files must be
numeric
or date) and the same
of the same type (ASCIL,
related
length.
DataFlex
The
four
There
relationships in this representation point UP the tree.
structure:
file relationships in the illustrated
2)
3)
SALES TRANSACTIONS
IQ PARTS
IQ_PARTS
PURCMSE
TRANSACTIONS
SALES TRANSACTIONS
IQ CUSTOMER
4)
PARTS
l)
are
IQ-VENDOR
remember
that the topmost
visualizing
files as a tree structurm
those
that do not draw on other
files or "leaves" of the tree are VENDOR
PARTs
in it,
for information (e.g.g the
file above has no Lower
files
down on
but
in it).
every
record In the PARTS file has"a vendor
the tree there are files (like PARTS) which depend on the VENDOR file
The bottom
of the tree is the TRANSACTION files
for information.
from
where
data
all of the other files contributes to existing and new
(TRANSACTIONS).
records
When
In DataFlex, the lower
files on the tree are RELATED TO higher a files.
VENDOR
is related to
This means that art inventory PARTS record which
(display or print) information in that
record can automatically access
VENDOR record.
In relational
multi-file structuresp one element of data could have a
field entry in several levels of the tree ü.é.» VENDOR ID could be
part of the VENDORg the PARTS and the TRANSACTION files). Like fields
"related" together by DataFlex. In
in dffferent files are logically
and in the prompting you
this manuah
will encounter in the wi71 be
configuration utilities, the term "relates" or "relationship"
used
linking of
frequently.
It is used to refer to this logical
is controlled by DataFlex's Data Base
fields in different files which
Manager.
The
relationships
point
UP
the tree;
the
PART
ID
in the
TRANSACTION
in the PARTS file and the VENDOR ID in the
file relates TO the TOPART IDVENDOR
ID in the VENDOR
PARTS
the
file. ThereforeD PARTS
file relates
can autcmatica11y include not only PARTS data. but
transactions
AND VENDOR data.
from
these
the tree
HOW TO CREATE
DataFlex can automatically
relationships.
RELATED
find records
up
and
down
FIELDS
by which
two criteria
are
to choose the fie1d(s) through which
to relate two files: (l) for the Data Base Manager to find a record
in one file from a record in another file (i.e.9 find the VENDOR
(2)
and
to have the system automatically
record from a PARTS record);
There
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
FILE
Manual
_
carry the value in
report selection.
THE RELATED
BE OF THE
FIELDS
IN
SAME TYPE
C-51
_______—~—=======
forward to another
field
a
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
__________
file
FILES
DIFFERENT
AND LENGTH!
for indexing or
MUST
the field
Is created for FINDING purposes,
field relationship
related TO must uniquely identify the record. If the relating
be an
then
there should
field isn't the higher recordts record number,
numbers
are
inherently
index made up of that field alone. (Record
which
is why they are the prime choice
indexed, and inherently uniqueg
The lowest-numbered
relating field in the file
for relating fields.)
Thi s
is the one which provides the primary relationship.
definition
is referred to as the PRIMARY re1at1onsh1p. (Again. the record number
field in any file definition.
the lowest-numbered
is always
When
being
a
relationships to other records is FOUND, th8
a record that has
This makes the
records
relates TO will be found automatically.
as though
they were part of the original
records related TO appear
invisible to the
record. The use of mujtipje files is typically
operator) .
When
it
fl1eG
related-to
The
record
number
is normally the best choice of
Relating by record
access
no index
is
on which
to base a primary relationship.
number
has three advantages:
is fast (since
requiredL the record number is ALWAYS unique,
field
it
and
changed.
it
cannot
be
that relates to a record number in another should
of Ip 2 or 3 bytes' length. The length is
maximum
by
in the file
potential number of records
DataF1ex
stores two digits per byte of field
rel ated TO. Remember,
field will store related record numbers
length, so a one byte numeric
up to 99g 2 bytes up to 9999.
etc. Three bytes is always a safe
This field, and any other related field in a new record, will
length.
by the field
be updated
relates TO when the record is saved.
A
be
field
in
file
one
a numeric
determined
field
the
it
using a record number as the primary relationship between
the records of different files, you may still wish to have other
relationships between the records for more convenient multi-file
FINDi rig.
Rem«nber
relationships must be based on
that these secondary
field numbers that are higher than the numbers of the fields on which
the primary relationship is based.
When
are
you
In
the typical
rel
ated
FROM
would
VENDOR
being
related
find
PARTS
an
records
would
be many
being
in the
TO each
related TO (each
record in the
W1htout
supply
many PARTS) .
the field
this relationship,
NOT uniquely identify
FROM would
a record (you
can't
PART ijtSt by knowing
Thereforeg the
the VENDOR).
there
case,,
re1atl
individual
file
would
be
file
ng
for tasks like listing all the
else, like part Ilb to facilitate the
part irrespective of who its vendor might be.
indexed
by
something
parts for a vendor AND
finding of an individual
file
VENDOR
Name,
Numberg
Part Numberp
at this point which fields (Record
Below
in your application.
etc.) will be used for RELATIONSHIPS
are
Thi s
four of the five files in the schanatic shown two pages ago.
Decide
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
FILE
C-52
User's
2.0
Manual
displays the actual fields in each f|1e9 and the
one
Hint:
fields the relationships are based upon.
Can you
find
relationship.
of the relationships shown is a secondary
it?
rendition,
show
arrows
however,
which
EXAMPLE
VENDOR
STRUCTURES
OF FILE
FILE
PARTS
O
,
O
RECORD NUMBER
2
l*
VENDOR ID
ADDRESSI
3
ADDRESS2
<-------1
<-----------2*
3*
4
"
5
6
AND RELATIONSHIPS:
SALES
TRANSACTIONS
FILE
RECORD NUMBER
VENDOR RECORD
O
S
RECORD
DATE
NUMBER
QUANTITY
PART ID
2
VENDOR ID
PART ID <—-------3*
QTY IN STK
:
PRICE
:
DESCRIPTION
:
P
0
Q
0
:
FILE
CUSTOMER
I
FILE
:
O
RECORD NUMBER
2
l*
CUSTOMER
ADDRESSI
3
4
ADDRESS2
LIMIT
CREDIT
5
TOTAL
The
<
NAME
4*
CUSTOMER
5
AMOUNT
RECORD
#
SALES
(<-—) represent a relationship and the mH' represents a
could exist
is indexed. Note that other relationships
fi1eSg
these
and/or to other files, and other fields might be
for finding and reporting purposes.
arrows
which
field
among
indexed
VENDOR
in the PARTS file is used for the PRIMARY relationship
process
since no indexing
file to speed up the RELATE The
VENDOR ID is also
with Field 09 the record number.
by
relationship to allow reporting and FINDing
as a secondary
ID in the PARTS
file.
RECORD #
VENDOR
with the
is needed
provided
VENDOR
The VENDOR
VENDOR and
ID field
PARTS
must
be
of the
same
length
and
type in
both
the
files.
file and in the SALES TRANSACTIONS file must
length in both files. PART ID in the PARTS
'is used
must
as the only segment
in an index since
file
SALES TRANSACTION
from
the
as the primary relates-to
file.
field
The
be
ID
PART
of the
in the
same type
be indexed
PARTS
and
it
ID in the SALES TRANSACTIONS
file is listed as indexed,
did not want part ID to be included in the SALES TRANSACTION
fi1ep we could have made its Field 4 the smaller and faster PART
RECORD S, and based
the relationship on that field instead.
The
if
PART
but
we
Reports
record
TIONS
of transactions could be printed either by PART ID or CUSTOMER
are
since both indexes
present in the SALES TRANSAC-
number,
FILE.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
Manual
STEP
FIELDS
TWO
-
LIST
THE
FILE
DEFINITION
(FILEDEF)
C-53
of the data fields that will be required
the specifications
fields,
including their typeg length and. for numeric
A convenient
point.
the
of places to the right of the decimal
IMAGE of the data
way to do this
entry form
Is to create the screen
(Refer to the section of this manual on 'rFormatting
for each file.
With
Option 7 read this IMAGE and create
Images".) Then let FILEDEF'S
a preliminary
Option 7 will prompt you
file definition automatically!
through the process, as described below in Step 4. If this file will
to be sure that the fields used for
relate to other files, remember
the relationships have the same length and type in each of the related
Determine
in each
file.
number
files.
EXAMPLE:
/VEND
P
0
:
0
0
VENDOR
ID:
VENDOR
:
0
0
:
CONF'ANY
P
0
:
0
b
RECORD
:
O
4
:
NINE:
ADDRESS:
:
:
V
a
ST:
CITY:
CREDIT
:
0
b
:
LIMIT:
ENTRY
DATE:
S
TOTAL
._
_
ZIP:
:
:
$
:
O
CREDIT:
._
_J_J_
0
0
:
e
0
l*
This image could later be used directly by FILEDEF to create a
Note
definition.
that the image is terminated by a "l*" character
and is necessary
for
combination. This Is an "end of image" marker
DataFlex
to distinguish the image from the configuration commands.
After
this:
FIELD
NMBR
Option
7 has
FIELD
OFFSET
FILEDEF'S
rum
FIELD
FIELD
TYPE
LEN
Option
DEC
PTS
3
would
MAIN
INDEX
produce
a
chart like
RELATES--TO
FILE
FIELD
ID
ASCII
O
O
O
VENDOR
2
9
30
ASCII
O
O
O
C0MPANY_NAME
3
4
39
69
30
30
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
ADDRESS
CITY
5
99
O
O
101
lOó
2
5
5
ASCII
6
7
ASCII
NUMERIC
O
O
O
O
STATE
ZIP CODE
2
O
O
O
CREDIT_LIMIT
8
9
Ill
5
3
NUMERIC
2
O
O
O
O
O
T0TAL_CR£DIT
ENTRY_DATE
l
8
I
116
~~~
Copyright
(C)
DATE
~~
1984
Data
O
LINEA
—
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-54
DEFINITION
FILE
OVERLAPPING
EXPERTS
(FOR
FIELDS
DataFiex
(FILEDEF)
Úserfs
2.0
Manual
CNLY)
need
may be times when you
to have more than four field segments
in an index (four is the segment
limit for an index fn 8 bits; six is
See the section of this manual
on "Designing
the limit in 16 bits).
Databases"
of single- and multi-segment indexes
for a full dSscussion
these
and indexing.
For
special cases,
DataFlex has another field
the user
type called the overlapping field. This field type enables
The
a group
they were one large field.
of fields as though
to address
overlap field spans other fields already existing in the file
spanned
The fields
by the overlap must
occur
definition.
consecutively in the file definition.
There
this featurep first append a field to the file of the type
Then
set the FIELD OFFSET of the overlapping field to the
field offset position of the first sub-field and the FIELD LENGTH of
the overlapping field to the total length of al) of the sub-fields you
wish
specify the index
to include in the index. Them ,of coUrseg
number
for the index based on the overlapping field (rather than on
the fields
Is composed of).
To use
OVERLAP.
it
what
This is
the chart
overlap field comprised
FIELD
NMBR
FIELD
OFFSET
I
2
l
g
FIELD
LEN
on
on
the preceding
the first two
FIELD
TYPE
DEC
PTS
look like
would
page
fields
MAIN
INDEX
were
added:
if
an
RELATES--TO
FILE
FIELD
—
8
30
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
VENDOR_ID
COMPANY_NAME
3
4
39
30
30
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
ADDRESS_LINE_1
69
O
CITY
5
99
2
ASCII
O
O
O
STATE
6
101
ASCII
O
O
O
ZIP
7
8
106
5
5
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
CREDIT_LIMIT
T0TAL_CREDIT
9
IQ
116
O
O
O
O
O
O
ENTRY_DATE
—————
Copyright
Ill
l
~
(C)
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
DATE
OVERLAP
3
38
1984
2
2
Data
=
Access
CODE
—~——_
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
FILE
Manual
===——~~——
STEP
THREE
-
DEFINITION
(FILEDEF)
C-55
~~~~~———~
DETERMINE
THE
KEY
FIELDS
indexes
allow you to FIND records by fields which are
be determined
defined as indexed. The fields you wIsh to index should
Each DataFlex index can
be
at this point in the FILEDEF operation.
6 fields
composed
on 16 bit
of up to 4 fields on 8 bit systemm
There
be up to 4 indexes
systems.
can
for each file (9 on 16 bit
systems). Each index defined will be stored in an index file that has
as the data
the same rootname
file. It will be opened automatically
when the data
file is opened.
DataF1ex's
that each index requires disk storage and a small amount
time when saving or deleting records. System size and
performance
a consideration
of your key file
may become
in the design
A rule of thumb
is that an index will take about 2 times
structure.
the amount of disk space as the number of bytes in the data fie1d(s)
ten
For
example,
an index is made up of 1000
is indexing.
that
All indexes
the index file size will be about 20K.
byte part numbers,
are
kept up-to-date on-line automatically.
for a database
Keep
of
mind
in
update
if
it
for
field does NOT have to be indexed
during output
records from the database
STATE field
in a mailing list record was
make a report of all
a
records matching
would
DataF1ex
have
dich
you
to evaluate
indexing often
record. For this reason,
process.
A
to be used to SELECT
For
examp1e9
operations.
not indexed, you could still
particular STATE value.
If
the STATE field of every
does
speed
up the selection
it
if
a
field in one file is being related to by records in anotherg
the only field in the index. This is required for the relate
process
to uniquely identify a rel ated record. Overlapping fields can
be used
here
to create a single-element index for relating tOo which
is actually made up of data from several fields.
If this is done, the
relating file must also have an overlapping field of the same length
to support its end of the relationship.
If
it
a
must
be
DUPLICATE
RECORDS
to allow multiple records in a file to have the same key
as the last segment
of
include field zero (the record number)
uniqúé»
their inclusion
the index. Since l"8corcj numbers are always
key
can make otherwise duplicate
values
with other index elements
with record number AND
unique. Note that a field CAN NOT be indexed
be the target of a relationship.
If
you
va}ueg
wish
as field
zero
in DataFlex, can
record numberp which is addressed
Thi s creates an often useful access
be considered INDEX ZERO.
by order of entry)
method
(e.g. transactions which need to be accessed
There
which
has no disk storage overhead.
is actually no INDEX ZERO
(no
this is Dataflex's method of defining
file called FILENAME.KO);
FIND
You may always
or
is to be made by record number.
that access
The
A
may exist with no other indexes.
report by record number.
file
record number for the record currently in the buffer is maintained
The
also
under
as
Copyright
filename.RECNUM.
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
FILE
C-56
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
========~——————
2.0
User's
Manual
—~~~~~+—~—~~~
a field
in more than one index (perfectly
participates
must
be designated during the
acceptablek one of the indexes
MAIN
operations.
as the
index for the fi?1d for FINDing
definition
Index
The MAIN
will be the one automatically used by DataFlex to FIND
of
records from the file when a given field is selected as the source
a key
value for record retrieval.
Where
"EXAMPLE:
In the
example
file
above
structure
2)
VENDOR ID (unique).
COMPANY NAME plus RECORD NUMBER
3)
CREDIT
I)
Number
LIMIT
l,
VENDOR
ID,
would
be
would
while the others
and reporting.
Notice that
VENDOR
plus
VENDOR
ID
we
might
have
three indexes:
(duplicate company names
(duplicate credit limits OK).
generally
useful for
be used
FINDing
OK).
to support relationships,
records for maintenance
participates
in two indexes. This is fine, but
the MAIN index for that field. In this case,,
Ilj is the first segmentg
is deslgríated.
ID
be selected as
one must
where
VENDOR
Index
One,
allow for duplicate company names in Index T\Ñqp Field Zero (the
combinations.
is included in the index to create unique
record number)
To
STEP
FOUR
-
USE
FILEDEF
This section takes
FILEDEF
an
utility
can
application.
a
TO PUT
IT
ALL
TOGETHER
procedural step-by-step look at how DataFlex's
used
to create and maintain the data files of
be
"A>"
the program type "FILEDEF"
at the operating system
CONFIGURATION
NENU.
The program
the
from
will
or select
in order to obtain the data
sign on and present a serles of prompts
FILEDEF
from
needed
is
to define the data file, Each of the prompts
presented here with the how to's on their use and their relationship
to the rest of the DataFlex system.
To execute
prompt
IF
it
YOU MAKE
AN INCORRECT
ENTRY:
which
choices proceed
through a series of prompts,
in order to continue.
at any pofntp you are not
If
sure
is still necessary
of the answer9
or you key a wrong response9
that satisfies
to answer all of the questions, at 1east'w1th something
and get back
in order to proceed
to the FILEDEF
the program,
however,
Once
all the questions have been answerech
operations menu.
gives you the opportunity to modify your earlier
the menu (see below)
answers
or to abandon them altogether (choice 10)» and leave your
original file (if any) unchanged.
Some
must
FILEDEF
be
menu
answered
it
———~———
="=~=__"=="=="""—
(C)
1984 Data
Access
Copyright
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
FILE
Manual
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
C-57
=
NUMBER:
FILE
ENTER
prompts
the configurator with a list of
run, the FILEDEF Program
enter an unused
currently defined files. You may modify one of theseg
number
to start a new file or reactivate one not currently on the
file
1 i st.
When
may enter FILEDEF
at the operating
level to pass a file number directly to the program
without going through the files menu.
As a
system
shortcutg
you
command
(YIN)
NEW FILE
If you have selected a file number
list then you must tell FILEDEF if
that does not
this is a new
appear
file
or
in the file
an inactive
one .
If
you are
a "Y".
creating
this
with
file
for the
first
time
the question
answer
already exists, answer the question
If a file definition for(you thiscan fi1e
just press enter to default to the "N"
with the "N" response
The
responseL which will give you the chance to reactivate the file.
system
will then ask for the ROOT name, USER DISPLAY nameg and DataFlex filename of the file.
DataFlex
ication configurations
existing DataFlex
as described above.
appl
installed on
re-activated
If
you
FILEDEF
an
purchased
system
must
separately
their
have
are
modifying
be
menu will
preliminary
an existing
or re-activating
displayed.
Otherwise, for a
information will be required:
file
new
which
are
file
numbers
definitiong
file,
the
some
ROOTNAME
data
ROOTNAME refers to the base
name of any DataFlex
or
configconform
The ROOTNAME must
to
uration file created by FILEDEF.
filename conventions of up to eight letters and
operating system
numbers.
DataFlex will append the appropriate extension based on the
use of a particular
physical file (see the appendix). Make up an 8
for your file WITHOUT AN EXTENSION!
character or smaller rootname
The
wish
to specify the drive on which DataFlex is to place the
in the
filem prefix the file name with the drive specification
standard format: drive letter (A..P) followed by ": followed by
filename.
If
you
data
"
EXAMPLE
This
ROOTNAME
would
be
Copyright (c)
a
W/DRIVE
file
1984
called
Data
B: MYFILE
SPEC.:
"MYFILE"
Access
located
Corporation
on
disk drive "B".
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
FILE
C-58
Manual
———
DISPLAY
USER
Nm:
will be displayed in the FILE
Enter the name you would like to
see displayed to the operator for this
file. If the file name is
preceded
will not display on the runtime file display
with a "@"
The maximum
length of the user display name is 30 characters.
menus.
The User
SELECTION
display
menus
name is the one which
by DataF1ex
programs.
it
DataFlex
FILENAME
filename can be up to ten characters long and must start
The DataFlex filename is used
to reference a data file
letter.
does
from
In that
not contain drive specifications
configurations.
is a "soft" reference to a file that makes an application indepenconfiguration.
dent of a particular hardware
It is also usedg along
to define DATA BASE ELEMENT names within a
with a field's Tagname,
DataF1ex
The
with
a
it
it
file.
RECORD
LENGTH
This is the physical size (in bytes) of the record you will be
DataFlex
will automatically block sma?1 records into 512
creating.
byte blocks. Larger records can be any multiple of 128 bytes. You
can assign
the record length by selecting option 4 from the FILEDEF
operations menu.
If there is a conflict between what you assign as
the record length and what the syst«n needs to correctly block the
autwat1ca11y by
recorcb
record length will be blocked
the necessary
FILEDEF
when you enter the record length.
know the record length at this
point, you may enter it.
If you
from
an IMAGE and don't know the record
creating a definition
to zero. The READ SCREEN option will then
size, you may initialize
will block records in all
set the record length for you. DataF1ex
sizes from l to 26 bytes, 28 bytes, 3Ó9 32p 35» 39, 42p 46p 5L 5&
256,
128,
l7Ch
and upward
649 73,t 85» l029
in multiples of 128 bytes,
to a maximum to 4 kilobytes.
If
you
are
it
MAX
# OF RECORDS
value entered here is the maximum number of records to be stored
in the database
for this file. The figure entered here is nonyou elected the system
option (see Installing
critical unless
DataFlex) which provides for pre-a11ocation of disk space for the
maxium
you may feel free
possible size of your database. Otherwisep
room
available for the number of records in a
to make some growing
particular
file.
The
of records in a DataFlex file is 64AOO.
expand
the maximum number of records after
re-enter FILEDEF and enter a larger value for
the REINDEX utility to rebuild the index(s)
number
The absolute maximum
NOTE:
the need arises to
If
datag
file contains
Then,
run
field.
parameter.
under
a
this
the
new
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
FILE
Manual
REUSE
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
——————
C-59
-—————-
————————
DELETED
SPACE
(YIN)
applications you will want DataFlex to reassign the disk
in
released when a record is deleted from a file, howevem
applications where you want to use the record number as an audit trail
To allow the
this would not be desirable.
or as a transaction number,
otherwiseg enter o.
re-use of deleted spacep enter es;
For
most
space
mLTI-UsER
(YIN):
RE-READ
If you are running on a multi-user systan (and you have a multi-user
version of DataFlex) and you wish for this file to utilize the feature
at the same
of allowing multiple users to write to the same recordMULTIUSER
NOTE:
option
time then enter a 'Y', otherwise, enter 'N'.
of SETSCREEN must be set to (Y) to utilize RE-READ.
DEFINITION
FILE
THE
MENU
After completing the entries just covered
FILEDEF
operations menu will be displayed.
FIELD
CREATE/EDIT
CREATE/EDIT
3:
4:
FILE
DEFINITION
DISPLAY/PRINT
PARAMETERS
AND NAMES
SET FILE
5:
ERASE
6:
7:
8:
9:
IQ:
R00TNAMEp
It
looks like
etc.,
this:
the
SPECIFICATIONS
l:
2:
about
INDEXES
DATA FILE
INACTIVE
SET FILE
DEFINITION
CREATE FILE
DEFINITION
CREATE FILE
SAVE DEFINITION
ABORT FILEDEF,
FROM SCREEN
IMAGE
FROM .DEF IMAGE
AND EXIT
FILEDEF
DO NOT UPDATE DEFINITION
FILE
numbers
next
(l - 10) to selectandyour
2,
either execute
Options l
or
7 are
the same:
of using Option I or Option
used
The methods
definition.
to reach
file
option one takes you field by field through
that end are different:
where
you make the specification
entries
the record definition
7 functions just
like the DataFlex AUTODEF Utility
manually. Option
and determines
the record structure autanatical1y from the screen
You
may
enter
action.
one
of the option
files
For
new
Option
7. The results
creation of a DataFlex
you
MUST
image.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-60
FILE
OPTION
I
-
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
CREATE/EDIT
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
FIELDS
This option allows you to create new field
existing ones in a record definition.
attributes
or
change
the file which is currently active in FILEDEF is not a new fi1e9
all entries under this option will contain a default to the
(except for 'any new
existing value fbr each field that is prompted
fields you may be adding).
If
then
the existing value in darts:
will be displayed withdarts
is to be maintained as the
value in the
If the then
to skip the question and maintain
response,
hit
then
the new
The prompt
.
current
the val ue;
informatiom
the default
iffollowed
by
is not correct
enter
.
Each
field in the record will
tion unless you enter a field
verification
step (SEE BELOW).
be presented sequentially
number
"E"
to jump to
or
for modifica(exit) on the
you
select Option l for the FILEDEF operations menu. you will be
will display
positioned at Field l. The current field specification
The field
edit menu looks like this:
with the field edit menu.
When
OPTIONS:
G
I
D
A
C
R
+
E
ENTER
EDIT
FIELD
-
Go
to field number
Insert before this field
Delete this field
Append
a field
to end.
Change
this field
Reposition field offsets
Display next field
display previous field
menu
Exit to master
á-K)ICE:
OPTIONS:
Repositions you at the field number entered
to field number
of that field. You will be
displays the current- definition
prompted
for the field number to go to after entering the option.
G
and
-
Go
rcjcm
for a
I - Insert before this f'kjd - Creates
by one.
incrementing all the higher field numbers
specifications
for a new field may be entered under
available field number.
by
new field
Them
the field
the newly-
this field
Deletes the current field and reduces
- Delete
higher
field numbers by- one to adjust for the deletion.
D
A
field
speci
a field
to end
in the File Definition.-
Append
ficati ens
Copyright (c)
(see
1984
below)
Data
A new
You
field
must
all the
will
be created as the last
enter the new field's
.
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
Dataf1ex 2.0 User's
FILE
Manual
Change
or edit this field
- for the
tions
current field.
C
-
Allows
you
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
C-61
the specifica-
to re-enter
to reset field positions after
offsets - Required
- Reposftion field has
been modified.
The positions
of the fields in
the file definition
any
the record buffer (field offset) must be recalculated whenever
in length.
field is added,, deletecb or changed
R
-
Moves
you
forward
- -
Moves
you
back
E
Exit to
+
-
You
in
Always
moves
2 and press
a
file
****** FIELD #
# is the number
NAME:
FIELD
The tagname
Returns
-
you
FILEDEF
to the
menu.
if
to the next field. For examp1ep
Field 3 will be displayed.
on the last
you are currently
field
editing
,
create a new
definition.
******
of the field
you
if
the following
asked
be
will
menu
-
are
on Field
will
field
fie?d.
one
master
field.
one
each
questions for
you
are currently
field:
editing.
(tagname)
be
you enter here
and
and documentatSom
be used,
along w¶th
utilized by FILEDEF and QUERY for
be displayed in the
file definlon.
the
DataFlex filename as part of
will
ti Data It Base Element name,
Command
Language.
The
in the DataFlex
the
tagnames
are
stored for each file in a separate ASCII file called
rootname.TAG.
The maximum
tagname
Valid
length is 15 characters.
characters in tagnames
are:
pranpting
will
[
The
first
invalid.
FIELD
This
'A...Z', '0...9'. 'e'. C'. '#'
]
and
Spaces
(A...Z).
character must be alpha
(_).
will be replaced with an underscore
slashes
are
and
(
TYPE:
will
will
N=NUMERIC,
A=ASCII,
D=DATE,
0=OVERLAP
)
to either:
set the field
letters)
only)
DATE
Stored
Jul ian; output format: MM/DD/YY
which
OVERLAP
A field
re-defines areas of the
record.
(numbers
and
ASCII
(numbers
NUMERIC
-
The
next
For
ASCII
NUMBER
This is
fiel
depends
prompt
on
the field
type entered
above.
fields:
OF QURACTERS
the maximum
number
of characters to
be
assigned
for this
d.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
————
———
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-62
DEFINITION
FILE
For
—
fields:
NUMERIC
NUMBER OF MARACTERS
Each
number
is broken
TO THE
OF THE
LEFT
NUMBER OF CltARACTERS
Enter the number of
TO THE
RIGHT
OF THE
———
POINT
DECIMAL
and
into two parts: left
Enter the number of characters to the
(Minimum
of 19 maximum of 14.)
point.
point.
Manual
DataFlex 2.0 User's
(FILEDEF)
=======
right
left
DECIMAL
of the decimal
of the decimal
POINT
point (O to
characters to the right of the decimal
point are
4). The characters to the left and right of the decimal
DATE'
For
added
the total field length.
together by FILEDEF to compute
Dates
fields, no questions are asked,
are ALWAYS stored as three-byte
(
numbers.
For
FIELD
OVERLAP
fields:
OFFSET
OFFSET:
OF FIELD
IN
RECORD
This number represents the relative number
of bytes from the beginning of the record
to where the current overlap field starts.
If there are no previous overlap fields in
the recor6 then this number will be the
number
of bytes in the record up to the
If there are
first overlapped field.
their combined
previous overlap fie1dSg
in developing
length must not be counted
this number.
FIELD
LENGTH
LENGTH:
OF FIELD
IN
BYTES
This is the number of bytes the overlap
will span in the record. It should
field
be the total
length of the overlapped
fields.
For
ALL
field
RELATIONSHIP
types:
TO FILE:
NUMBER·0F
FILE
RELATED
FIELD
this field relates TO a field in another
fi1e9 enter the number of that file here.
A printout
of the
of the file definition
related-to file would be helpful for
answering
this and the next questiom
there is a relation.
If there is no a
FROM this
relationship
field, enter zero.
If
if
RELATIONSHIP
TO FIELD:
(FIELD
NUNEIER OF RELATED
FIELD)
in the
the question above was answered
then
(with a numberL
enter the
affirmative
number
of the field which is being related
TO.
Otherwise, enter a zero.
If
creation or editing of the selected field is now complete.
information for this field will be re-displayed for inspection
purposes.
If you wish to make further changesg enter a 'C',
is correct, enter a "+" to move on to the next fie16 or enter
menu.
to return to the activities
The
The
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
If
an
all
'El
~~~~~
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
OPTION
-
2
Manual
User's
the index(s) for a
to easily define
2 allows you to create or change
following "dialog" with FILEDEF allows
want
to your file indexed:
HOW MANY
you
The
file.
how
you
TO 4
(One
YOUR RESPONSE
PROMPT
FOR THIS
INDEXES
C-63
INDEXES
CREATE/EDIT
Option
FILEDEF
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
FILE
FILE:
A NUMBER
IN
THE
RANGE FROM
l
This will
to nine in 16-bit computers)
correspond to the number of unique
indexes you wish to have automatically
maintained for this file.
-******
THE
INDEX
HOW MANY
FIELD
if
FOLLOWING
WILL
REPEAT
FOR EA(>I
INDEX
NONE
The number
******
-will
SEGMENTS
IN
INDEX:
# OF
--
be
of the
displayed.
FIELDS
on 16
six segments
examp1é»
you
(6
USED
bit)
Each
--
index
IN
you
INDEX»
index
in 16-bit
might want
are entering
RANGE:
may have
computers.
l -
4
up to
For
to find on a
field named LASTNAME7 but also include
fields in the
the FIRSTNAME and MIDLINIT
index (for a total of 3) in order to
have
records with the same last names
Samuel)
properly
(Smith, Robert; Smith,
by
sequenced
first name and middle
initial within the list of Smiths.
Enter the number of fields to be
included in this index.
ON LINE
INDEX
(Y
be
If you answer Y(esL the index will
every
maintained on line and updated
time a change is made to the database.
the index will
If you answer N(Ó)9 only
passively as part
function normally
and will
be
of the file definition,
processed
updated
only when specifically
through REINDEX as an "ad hoc" index.
N(o)
Reasons
(a)
include:
for answering
your
systetds capacity for maintaining
by
indexes
on line
is already consumed
this index
more
important indexes; (b)
is needed only at infrequent intervals
for a periodic report, and not for
(c) this index is
routine FINDing;
and on line
updating
large and complex.
would
slow
in a large database
processing time down more than is
OR N)
justified.
——
Copyright (c)
1984
~
Data
~~
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
FILE
C-64
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
===========———~~~~~—~
-SEG X FIELD
THE
FOLLOWING
2.0
——
REPEAT
WILL
FIELD
NUMBER:
FOR EACH
NUNBER
SEGMENT
User's
Manual
"""""""""""""
--
SEGMENT.
OF INDEX
Enter the field number you want for this
The order in which
you
index Segment.
enter each field number will determine
its indexing precedence.
-\NHIW
THE
FOLLOWING
INDEX,
INITIALIZE
(X
APPEARS
OR
INDEX
Y),
(Y
ONLY
SHOULD
OR N):
FOR FIELDS
BE
ALREADY
IN
ANOTHER
BY THIS
specified above
USED WHEN FINDING
INDEX
--
FIELD?
is used
in
If the field
either this (the
another index a1ready9
current--X) index or the earlier one
from
should
be designated for FINDing
a
screen
with the cursor in the window for
this field. Generally, the index In
which
this field is first, or nearest
Your
the flrStg should be chosen.
choice will be designated the "main"
index for the current field in the File
(see
Definition
printout below).
of the above information was
from previous (default) data for
then
index9
an existing
the index will
However
automatically be initialized.
If
any
changed
if
ñQ changes
have
been
madeg
you
will
the option to initialize or not.
and there is
If an index is initialized
data present fn the data file a message
wIll appear
telling you to "REINDEX" the
section,
index. (See UTILITIES
have
REINDEX).
DELETING
AN
INDEX
select Option 2 from the
to delete an jndexp
Then
in
enter the OLD number of indexes
and
for number of indexes
press .
If
Ip enter
zero for its number of segments.
indexg
For
press
repeatedly to default
a higher-numbered
for the index
the prompt
through the questions until you have reached
you wish
to delete. Then enter a O for that index's number of
fo11owfng
The index
numbers
segments.
the deleted one
for indexes
i.e. if index 2 was deleted from a 3 index
the same
will ranain
...
When you
remafn.
would
delete an index, its
file, 'Indexesbe l and 3 from
will
the
disk.
deleted
file
time you
operations
responding to the
you want
to delete
at any
If
FILEDEF
wish
menu.
prompt
Index
~"""==""========,————————————————————————
"
Copyright (c) 1984 Data Access Corporation
——————
05/16/84
OPTION
3
PRINT
-
FILE
Manual
Dataflex 2.0 User's
FILE
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
C-65
DEFINITION
PRINT
The
third option on the menu,
inspect the file that has been
will
DEFINITION,
FILE
allow
you
to
defined.
have
the output to either the screen
the choice of sending
(default),
the printer, or a file.
If you send the output to the
printer make sure that ft is turned on, and set ON LINE before
entering this command to avoid a lockup.
You
you are sending
the output to a fi1eg the filename will be the
ROOTNAME that you have
supplied for the
that you are editing. and
Sending
have
an extension ".DEF"
(or rootname.DEF).
the
document
can help you
the application.
After sending
output to a
If
file
it will
file
the output to the fi1ep you can edit
include
in other documentation.
FILE
DEFINITION
FROM .DEF FILE"
for
it
file
A completed
DEFINITION
FILE
LISTING
more
with your text editor
to Option 8 be1Owg
information.
printed out, looks like
when
definition,
it
Refer
FOR FILE
and/or
"CREATE
this:
#21
***************************************************
ROOT NAME
= VENDOR
DISPLAY
NAME = VENDOR
DATAFLEX
FILENAME
= VENDOR
FILE
USER
***************************************************
RECORD LENGTH = 128 (USED =
MAX NUMBER OF RECORDS = 400
DELETED SPACE IS REUSED
RE-READ
INACTIVE
MULTI-USER
112)
(USED
= 5)
***************************************************
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
DEC
MAIN
RELATES--TO
Nt4BR
OFFSET
LEN
TYPE
PTS
INDEX
FILE
FIELD
2
l
31
I
30
30
ASCII
ASCII
1
O
O
O
O
O
VENDOR_NAME
ADDRESS
3
4
61
75
14
2
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
CITY
STATE
5
77
9
ASCII
O
O
O
ZIP
6
86
3
ASCII
O
O
O
PH0NE_AC
7
8
89
92
3
4
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
PHONE EXCHG
PH0NE_NUMBER
9
10
96
2
98
102
4
4
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
TERMS
CREDIT_LIMIT
CREDIT_USED
106
110
4
3
O
O
O
O
O
O
PURMASES
LAST_PURCHASE
li
12
13
INDEX
I:
FIELD
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
O
NUMERIC
l
l
NUMERIC
DATE
SEGMENTS:
<1>
I
<0>
-——————————————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
—-—————
05/16/84
C-66
FILE
OPTION
4
Option
4 on
the
change
data
-
file,
OPTION
5
-
User's
Manual
will
PARAMETERS/NAMES9
SET FILE
allow you to
menu,
number
maximum
in a
namesg
of records
record 1engthp
Defaults are supported
the REUSE DELETED SPACE OPTION.
Refer to the NEW FILE section for
of operation.
the
file
and
here for ease
information on
2.0
FWUMETERS/NAMES
FILE
SET
DataFlex
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
questi
these
ERASE
DATA
ons.
FILE
Thi s
This optfon is used when ALL data in a file is to be deleted.
could come in handy when you want to delete sample data9 and bring the
system
up under
actual conditions, or when an end of period zeroing of
You
a data
is necessary.
This is a POWERFUL command.
will be
fije
asked
to confirm that you actually do want to zero the file before
to a capital "Y" (we want you
executes. This prompt will only respond
to be abso1utdly sure) . After the data file has been erased, the
without data, may be saved with Option 9.
remaining file definition,
If this is not done, the file definition will also be erased.
it
OPTION
6
-
SET
FILE
INACTIVE
This option will allow you to delete a name from the list of files
that appears
at the start of FILEDEF without actually deleting the
data
files from the disk. You will need toa confirm
file definition or want
capital
(Again, with
that you actually
to perform this action.
"Y"
only) . N0TEp to reactivate a fi1e9 upon entry into FILEDEFp
select the file number of the file that you want to reactivateg and
respond
for
to the question "NEW FILE" with "N". The procedure
removing
is to first set the file
all trace of a file from the system
ERASE eommand
then
use the
in the MENU or
inactive through FILEDEF,
your operati ng system.
OPTION
7
-
CREATE
FILE
DEFINITION
FROM SCREEN
IMAGE
This option reads in an IMAGE (created with a text editor) from a file
and all
you
the window
specify in response
to its prompt,
information in the image file is used to create a basic file
and optionally
an ENTER configuration.
Refer to the
definition
for more on how to create IMAGEs.
section on "Formatting With Images"
which
IMAGE to read
in.
for the file name of the screen
is located on a drive other than the default driveg
the file name with the proper drive speciffcation.
If you
want
an ENTER configuration
created for this fi1e9 answer "Y" to the
The configuration
created will have the ROOTNAME of
next questi on.
the IMAGE used, with an .FRM extensi on added.
If you want only to
and
with
not a configuration fi1eg respond
create the file definition
"N"
to this prompt.
You
will be
the file
If
precede
prompted
=" ".== ~ —~ ——
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
(FILEDEF)
DEFINITION
FILE
Manual
C-67
——————
—————————————
———————————
image
screen
will be evaluated from top to bottom.
left to Thiright»
s
to extract the types and lengths of the fields in the image.
that may already exist under
process
will replace any field definition
the selected file name.
If you require a more complex file definition
with related fields or overlapping fields, you may use this option to
create the basic field structure and add the needed relationships
using Option One.
The
79
define the
FILE
DEFINITION
After using Option
8
OPTION
CREATE
-
indexes
with Option
FROM .DEF
2.
FILE
filename extension .DEF which can be created with
be used
can
to recreate the structure of the file
Sayg
that you
for example,
This option has other uses.
definition.
had a
you wanted
on an B-bit computer
that
to move to
definition
filemodel.
We wIll
asstme
is installed on both
that DataFlex
a l6-bit
You can
machi nes.
use Option 3 to create an ASCII
text file for the
This ASCII file can be transported to the 16-bit
definition.
file
Once on the
communications
by a data
machine
program.
l6-bit machine,
this .DEF file can be read by FILEDEF Option 8 to recreate the file
A new
created in this manner will
there.
definition
file definition
be empty
serves
to transport file
this process
of data. Of course
in the other direction also.
definitions
The ASCII
3
Option
OPTION
9
with
file above)
(see
SAVE
-
DEFINITION/EXIT
FILEDEF
just created or edited to the
This option saves the file definition
di sk.
another
After this option is executed, you will be asked
Respond
"Y"
to be loaded for file definition.
file definition is mol"é»
you
desire to edit
or "N" to exit FILEDEF.
if
if
disk space for the maximum
If you elected pre-a11ocat1on files of inrequired
DataFlex (see Installing
installing
possible size of database
DataFlexñ the files will be created at this time (If you are
maximum
In their
sIze when completely
establishing a new database)
enough
should
make certain
space
is available for
full of data. You
of dots during the
the new files. Your screen will display a sequence
time
is creating the new filem which may consume an hour or more
the new files are sizable.
if
it
respond
to the prompt
If another file is to be 1oadeL you may isalso
known.
the
This reduces
with the next file number to load
time required to load the menu and begin editing on the next file.
if it
OPTION
10
-
ABORT
FILEDEF
lO will
to the file
exit FILEDEF without making any changes
NOTE:
definition.
If you used Option Five to erase datag and you
then
abort with this optioñ» the selected erasure will not occur.
same is true if you deleted an index or took any other action.
Option
The
—-———
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
C-68
FILE
DEFINITION
(FILEDEF)
THIS
PAGE
Data
Access
DataFlex
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Corporation
05/16/84
ÉTTZT:
C-69
:::::::áF::;::F:F:::::F:::Z7IZ:II]I:I:ZZ:Z---
======="""
==========
==========
SAMPLE
——————————
——————————
__"__
==========
==========
APPLICATIONS
is an
multi-file configuration is provided with DataFlex. It Howinventory / order entry system which you may find quite useful.
The order entry sample
is, rather.
ever, that is not its purpose.
you wish to
intended as a teaching tool and as a starting place should
construct such a system.
A sample
order entry configuration
sample
data
files on your
become
you
thoroughly familiar
attempting to create your own
The
ing
as suppl
master
with
led is
disks.
how
multi-file
and
fully
It is
why
it
operational
works
step In understanding DataFlex is to run the
first From
"DATAFLEX
Menu.
you may select
the Master
rati on.
the order entry system.
FILE
BEFORE
configurations.
The
A SINGLE
includthat
recormended
demo configuDEMO" to run
SCREEN...
deal
with DataFlex using only ONE file at a time. To
operation at this level we will use the CUSTOMER file.
Although
the WSTOMER file is related TO by other files. It relates to
by
and thus can
be used
no others,
itself.
First
we
demonstrate
will
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
————
——————
Access
Corporation
~~~
05/ 16/84
THE
ájSTOMER
is only one
Select "CUSTOMER
look like this:
ACCESS
Manual
SCREEN:
There
DATA
DataFlex 2.0 User's
APPLICATIONS
SAMPLE
C-70
used
screen
to access
FILE
MAINTENANCE"
from
and
update
the
the
menu.
The
CUSTOkiER
CORPORATION
CUSTOMER
CUSTOMER
should
screen
NUMBER:
file.
MASTER
FILE
.
NAME:
ADDRESS:
ST:
CITY:
ZIP:
_
.%
DISCOUNT:
_
.
PURCMSES/MONTH
AMOUNT
DUE
$
$
.
$
PURMASES/YEAR
._
_
._
configuration to do file
single file screen
look-up on the CUSTOMER file. Refer to the Operator's
Guide
section of this manual on how to use the DataFlex Flex-keys to
operate the screen.
This is
maintenance
a simp1ep
and
This screen
displays all of the data in the CUSTCNER file. The first
autofield is actually the record number assfgned
matically by DataFlex. Note that the use of record number this way Is
CUSTOMER numbers
assigned
User
optional.
or ID'S could also be configured with only a small modification to the system.
If an existing
CUSTOMER number
is entered into this field, the data from the CUSTOMER
file for that record will display when the key is pressed:
EXAMPLE:
Enter
a <2> and
ájSTOMER
two
will
in
window
one.
and
the
data
for
display.
————————————————
————————
Copyright (c) 1984 Data Access
Corporati
on
05/16/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
SAMPLE
Manual
APPLICATIONS
C-71
CJJSTOMER
file is also INDEXED by the byCOMPANY NAME data field.
placing the cursor either
This allows us to FIND custaner records
over
entering all or part of a company name
the CONPANY NAME window9
and pressing FIND,
or using the above procedure on the
EXAMPLE:
with the CLEAR Flex-key
l) Clear the data windows
Hit to move the cursor to the COMPANY NAME
command
3) Type
a
in "DATA" and execute
4) The CUSTOMER data
for "DATA ACCESS" will display.
2)
up to
systems
files
To
window
could be indexed
in this way on 8
four fields on this screen
which
have
(9 fields
Screens
multiple
on 16 bit systems).
per
displayed can have up to thismany indexes
file.
ENTER
customers
new
into
the
CUSTOMER
bit
with this screen:
database
l) Clear the screen.
The
Strike to bypass the CUSTOMER number window.
number
automatlcally.
will be assigned
3) Type
data
into each window and press .
4) When all
are
fillech the record will
the required windows
be saved
in the database
2)
After reading the OPERATOR'S GUIDE,
comfortable with what the
you
feel
keyboard
I)
2)
3)
4)
comnands.
You
should
FIND ANY RECORD BY EITHER
CREATE NEW RECORDS.
EDIT
EXISTING
DELETE
Copyright (c)
be
experiment with this
program
does
as
yctú
screen
use the
until
various
able to:
KEY.
RECORDS.
RECORDS.
1984
——————————————
——
————-———
Access
Corporation
Data
—-—————
05/16/84
2.0
Manual
User's
DESCRIPTION:
FILE
CUSTOMER
DataF1ex
APPLICATIONS
SAMPLE
C-72
(sizep content and indexing) of the CUSTOMER data
displayed or printed out with the FILEDEF program.
looks like this:
display/printout
specifications
The
base
file
The
be
can
LISTING
DEFINITION
FILE
FOR FILE
#25
***************************************************
FILE
ROOT NAME
NAME
USER DISPLAY
SHORT
NAME
= CUSTOMER
= CUSTOMER
= CUSTONER
FILE
***************************************************
(USED =
RECORD LENGTH = 128
MAX NUMBER OF RECORDS = lOó
DELETED SPACE IS REUSED
INACTIVE
MULTI-USER
RE-READ
103)
(USED
= 4)
***************************************************
FIELD
OFFSET
FIELD
NMBR
FIELD
TYPE
FIELD
LEN
DEC
PTS
MAIM
INDEX
RELATES--TO
FILE
FIELD
O
O
CUSTOMER
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DISCOUNT
PUR MONTH
O
O
O
PUR
O
O
O
O
O
O
PROFIT
DUE
things
about
the
1
31
30
30
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
2
3
4
5
61
75
77
14
2
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
ASCII
O
O
6
7
87
88
l
4
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
O
2
O
O
8
92
4
NUMERIC
2
9
10
96
lOó
4
4
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
2
2
1
FIELD
l:
INDEX
10
SEGMENTS:
This display
tells
The
file
CUSTOMER
When
fileFILE"list
a
"CUSTOMER
Each
one
file
that will
number
show
and
file
can
(C)
file:
on
a
disk directory)
it will
show
is
as
file
(record
(provided there is sufficient
contain up to lOó customers
but
that only four records currently exist.
====."=====".======"==="=====—_———————————__—
Copyright
ájSTOMER
record will take up 128 bytes in the data
that of the l28g 103 bytes have been used.
disk storage)
YEAR
25
is displayed to the operator
CUSTOMER
length)
The
(the
ZIP
<0>
the following
is DataFlex
NAME
The ROOT FILE
"CUSTOMER"
us
<1>
O
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
—————————————
05/16/84
DataFlex
If
2.0
SAMPLE
Manual
User's
APPLICATIONS
C-73
to be added will be
is deleted. the next customer
deleted custanerts disk and record number automatically
DataFlex (deleted space is REUSED).
a custaner
assigned
the
by
file
The CUSTOMER
ment.
(Multi-user
There
types,
10 data
are
and names
One index
customer
Note
the
is not
is set
fields in each
are also shown.
to be used
INACTIVE).
in
a
custaner record.
multiuser
environ-
Their lengths,
for the CJJSTOMER file, composed of field
field <0> (the system
record number).
is active
name),
expected
Re-read
and
NUMERIC
that the 4-byte
point.
fields
decimal
will
each
hold
8
digits.
<1>
2
data
(the
after
file the record number is used as a system assignThis provides for maximum operator and systan
when
speed
since the operator
record (particularly
finding a custcmer
numbers).
Where
would
remember
this doesn't
frequently used customer
work
field for userwelb you could create an additional indexeci
assigned
account
using the
IVS or not use any codes at all by always
FIND the record by QJSTOMER
CUSTOMER NNE.
The operator can easily
by record
NN4E since that field
access
is also indexed. Although
number
is fastest, the INDEXING in DataFlex is so fast that indexing
should
of performance.
for reasons
not be avoided
Notice that in this
ed
account
number.
The
record number
index
create unique
THE
file
The
name
"CUSTOMER.FRM".
is made part of the index with CUSTOMER
with same
entries to allow two customers
<0>
CONFIGURATION
of the
The
ájSTOMER
NAME
to
name.
FILE
file
configuratfon
configuration on your
file looks like this:
demo
disk is
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
APPLICATIONS
SAMPLE
C-74
/F0RM
DATA ACCESS
DataFlex
2.0
NAME:
Manual
CUSTOMER
CORPORATION
CUSTOMER
User's
NUMBER:
MASTER
<_.>
'
<
ADDRESS:
ST:
CITY:
DISCOUNT:
_.%
$
PURMASES/MONTH
$
PROFIT/YEAR
with
Windows
l*
//
//
//
.
$
PURMASES/YEAR
._
_
._
be
> can
<
used
to
FIND
customers
file
maintenance.
simple ENTER configuration for customer
sequentia11y9
windows
the AUTOPAGE function
are processed
named.
do not have
and the windows
used
to be explicitly
be opened
must
OPEN CUSTOMER
All
This is
Since
be
ZIP:
_
a
the
ENTER
AUTOPAGE
ENTRY
//
CUSTOMER
files
FORM
is followed
connand
by
the
database
element
it
references.
the
//
//
//
Each
//
//
//
//
Do data
Translation:
entry on the record number of the customer
Automaticaily FIND by this field when data in input, but
file.
do not
put data back into the record buffer since record number
caMt be changed.
//
Translation:
//
//
The
window
options
assigned
is
can
by
After the
autopage.
by {}.
CUSTOMER.RECNUM
command
surrounded
ENTRY
ENTRY
{AUTOFIND,N0PUT}
CUSTOMER.CUSTOMER
ENTRY
ENTRY
Do data
entry on
CUSTOMER.ADDRESS
CUSTOMER.CITY
ENTRY
ENTRY
CUSTOMER.ZIP
ENTRY
ENTRY
CUSTOMER.DISCOUNT
CUST0MER.PUR_MONTH
the
customer
name
of the
customer
file
CUSTOMER.STATE
Translation:
for the month
When
the customer
in this window
{DISPLAYONLY}
file
is
founcb
display
ENTRY
CUST0MER.PUR_YEAR
{DISPLAY0NLY}
ENTRY
CUSTOMER.PROFIT
{DISPLAYONI-Y}
RETURN
//
ENTEREND
//
ABORT
//
KEYPROC KEY.USER//
OUTPUT
FORM
ENTAGAIN
RETURN
//
//
//
purchases
return from entry section
end of enter configuration
abort after escape key.
Define action of user defined key
Output
the page
Return
to same window
End definition
of user defined key
————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
FILE
DataF1ex
The
the
User's
2.0
HELP
above
screens
listing
image
screen
SAMPLE
Manual
in the actual configuration have
to save space» as have certain
APPLICATIONS
been
spacing
C-75
eliminated in
lines in the
.
format of the screen.
top of the configuration
file is the IMAGEappears
in the first part
DataFlex will display the form exactly as
First the page is named with the "/F0RM",
of the configuration.
designating "FORM" as the name of the page. The DATA WINDOWS are
from
numbered
Notice that the last four
left toandright, top to bottom.
windows
that the last three contain exactly two places
are numeric
There
in this
point.
to the right of the decimal
are ten windows
image
format.
The
it
between
the fields
there is a one-to-one correspondence
this image,
Images
do
on the CRT screen.
in the data file and the display windows
not need to display all fields from a file; a single data field from
a file might be all
that was needed to be displayed.
In
contains a "l*". This mark
line following the end of the screen
of
indicates the end of the image format. It is a required e1«nent
compiler where the end of the
the DataF1ex
the configuraton.
tells
It
image
is, and where the command part of the configuration begins.
The
command
line opens the CUSTOMER
in a configuration must be OPENed.
beginlng of the configuration.
first
The
be used
in the configuration
The next
line
Command Group.
more
whole
"ENTER
All files that
file.
be
OPENS should
are to
at the
the ENTER
that is really
controls the
since
CUSTOMER"
is a DataFlex
just a comnand
like a complete
operation of this configuration.
The
ENTER
command
than
program
begins
macro
it
next line, "AUTOPAGE FORM", tells the DataFlex compil er that we
By using AUTOPAGE,
we don't have
will be using the page named "FORM".
assigned
They
are
automatically
to specify each window on the page.
by the connand.
in sequence
The
The next 10
ENTER ccmnand
work
ENTRY comands
with the
lines are ENTRY commands.
The window
and window.
data
element
and specify each
be emitted because
of the use of the AUTOPAGE Command.
numbers
can
See the
complete
section of this manual on the ENTER Command Macro
discussion of the functions and uses of ENTRY.
The
first
ENTRY
connand
AUTOFIND:
(C)
Executes
uses
a FIND
key
is
not put data
the record number
riot be changed.
NOPUT:
Copyright
line
Do
1984
Data
Access
for
a
options:
two
using data
pressed.
in the
INTO the
(the window
BACK
Corporation
record
data
window
when
the
buffer since
in this case) can
05/
16/84
SAMPLE
C-76
DataF1ex
APPLICATIONS
Manual
2.0 User's
———————
Refer to the
ENTER
Ccmmand
section for
Macro
a
full list
of options.
each
of the command lines to see how the file and
this time, review
image
and
in the screen
names
correspond to the windows
field element
Note
that in line one, record number is
the data file definition.
connected
This is typical in files
to window one (account number).
number.
where
the record number is used as a system-assigned account
At
The last line of the ENTER configuration
maintenance
ABORT.
When a
session
ESCAPE key will
cause
the configuration
file
WSTOMER
You
total
FILE
REPORT
for CUSTCNER FILE is an
is complete. pressing the
to abort.
EXAMPLE:
list
need
a simple report to
The following
purchases.
ájsToMER
our
customers, their
is the output of the
and
discount
REPORT
program:
FILE
DISCOUNT
CUSTOMER
PUR/YEAR
100.00
4
3
DATA ACCESS CORPORATION
DYSAN CORPORATION
15%
5%
49,713.50
2
MAXELL
MT MICROSYSTEMS»
20%
30%
57,000.00
l
INC.
12,056.00
118,869.50
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
~
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
SAMPLE
Manual
APPLICATIONS
C-77
— —
is
This report
produced
wIth the following
report configuration:
/HEADER
QJSTOMER
FILE
DISCOUNT
CUSTOMER
/BODY
PUR/YEAR
RESIDENT
/TOTAL
_O%
0
l*
OUTFILE
OPEN CUSTOMER
REPORT
//Print
//direct the output
//open the custaner
INDEX.I
CUSTOMER BY INDEX.I
the customers
in custcmer
HEADER
SECTION
OUTPUT HEADER
SECTION
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
»D_
name
order.
//slmply
BODY
QjST0t·ER.RECNUM
ájSTOMER.CUSTOMER
ájsToMER.DIscoUNT
file
output the
id
//customer
//custcmer
name
number
//subtotal
will
page
is
headings
system
assigned
PRINT
ájsT0MER.pUR_YEAR
OUTPUT BODY
SECTION
TOTAL
SUBTOTAL
BODY.4
OUTPUT
take the accumulator
print
window
and
//for any numeric window.
in
another
//it
//print the total purchases
database
//custcmers
TOTAL
for all
in the
REPORTEND
ABORT
—————— —
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
~
Corporation
05/16/84
SAMPLE
C-78
2.0
User's
Manual
FILE:
VENDOR
THE
DataF1ex
APPLICATIONS
like the CUSTOMER file, is a single file configuraat a later time. The first
relate other files to
Then
step
is to run the VENDOR configuration from the DEMO menu.
examine
with that of the
for VENDOR and compare
the file definition
file,
vendor
The
tion.
We
it
will
it
file.
CUSTOMER
FILE
DEFINITION
LISTING
FOR FILE
#21
***************************************************
FILE
ROOT NAME
USER DISPLAY
SHORT NAME
NAME
= VENDOR
= VENDOR
= VENDOR
***************************************************
(USED =
= 128
MAX NUMBER OF RECORDS = 400
DELETED SPACE IS REUSED
RECORD LENGTH
RE-READ
MULTI-USER
.
112)
(USED
=
15)
INACTIVE
***************************************************
FIELD
OFFSET
FIELD
NMBR
LEN
FIELD
FIELD
TYPE
DEC
PTS
MAIN
INDEX
RELATES--TO
FILE
FIELD
2
3
31
l
30
30
ASCII
ASCII
O
l
O
O
O
O
VENDOR
ADDRESS
61
14
ASCII
O
O
O
CITY
4
5
6
75
2
ASCII
O
O
O
STATE
77
86
9
3
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
ZIP
PHONE-AC
7
8
89
92
3
4
ASCII
ASCII
O
O
O
O
O
O
FH0NE_Exá-g
FH0ME_NUMBER
l
9
96
2
NUMERIC
O
O
O
O
TERMS
10
98
4
NUMERIC
2
O
O
O
CREDIT_LIMIT
li
12
102
106
4
4
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
2
2
O
O
O
O
O
O
CREDIT_USED
PURCHASES
13
110
3
DATE
O
O
O
LAST_PURCHASE
INDEX
Note
l:
FIELD
SEGMENTS:
<1>
<0>
number
is used here
of record number as an account
indexing is also very much the same as in the CUSTOMER
file. The only real difference is the content of the
that the
as well.
data
base
The
Copyright
(C)
use
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
fields.
mation
User's
2.0
SAMPLE
Manual
This is an important DataF1ex
is dealt with remains
constant
concept:
even
though
APPLICATIONS
C-79
that the way inforthe application may
change.
introduces us to the DATE data type and field format.
are kept in JULIAN format, or, the number of days
since day zero. SInce dates are kept as numbers we can use them in
arithmetic expressions (add or subtract them). This is quite useful
for ageing
reports and due date calculations,
etc. Even though
dates
they are always
displayed in a DATE format
are stored as numbers,
window
(_J_J_) automatically converted to the conventional MM/DD/YY
format.
file
The VENDOR
Dates
in DataF1ex
File
maintenance
on
the
VENDOR
file
uses
——————————————————-————————————
————
Access
1984 Data
Corporation
Copyright (c)
the following
configuration:
—-——
05/16/84
C-80
SAMPLE
/F0RM
DATA ACCESS
DataFlex 2.0 User's
APPLICATIONS
VENDOR
CORPORATION
VENDOR NUMBER:
CCN'ANY:
<
<
_
TERMS
_
)
(DAYS)
LIMIT:
CREDIT
_.OUTSTANDING
REMAINING
Data
in
l*
<
> can
be
ENTRY
//
//
//
Translatiom
._
_J_J_FIND
used
//
Translation,
._
files must be opened.
// all
// inltalize enter macro. windows
automatically assign
//{NOPUT,AUT0FIND}
FORM
Do standard data
VENDOR.ADDRESS
VENDOR.CITY
entry
ENTRY
ENTRY
VENDOR.STATE
VENDOR.ZIP
VEND0R.NONE_AC
ENTRY
ENTRY
ENTRY
VENDOR. PHONE EXOlG
VENDOR.FHONE _ NUMBER
VENDOR.TERMS _
ENTRY
ENTRY
VENDOR.CREDIT_
VENDOR.CREDIT
ENTRY
When
the
on
LIMIT
_USED
vendor
Translation,
//
//
Translation, When a record is
minus
of credit limit (FORM.II)
window.
is
FOUND,
ENTRY
VENDOR.PURMASES
ENTRY
VENDOR.LAST_PURMASE
RETURN
ENTEREND
ABORT
note: the entry
//
KEYPROC KEY.USER
command
can
FORM
——————
—
1984 Data
founch
Access
name
of the
display credit
display the result
credit
vendor
used
file.
in this
used
(FORM.12)
{DISPLAY0NLY}
fn
of the calculation
this window.
{DISPLAYONLY}
return from entry section
// end
of enter cormand
//
after escape key.
// bestop
used
only
//
//
//
ENTAGAIN
RETURN
vendor
{DISPLAY0NLY}
(FORM.II-FORM.12)
ENTRY
the
{DISPLAYONLY}
file
//
//
(C)
$
VENDOR. VENDOR
ENTRY
ENTRY
Copyright
CREDIT:
._
._
with the record number of the vendor
file
the record buffer since
find record, do not update
can't be changed.
number
ENTRY
OUTPUT
$
vendors
to
VENDOR.RECNUM
Do data
entry
automat1ca11y
record
$
CREDIT:
$
OPEN VENDOR
ENTER VENDOR
AUTOPAGE
ZIP:
:
TOTAL PURMASES:
LAST PURQUiSE:
FILE
'
ST:
CITY:
(
MASTER
.>
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
Manual
inside an enter or entergroup
Define action of user defined key
Output the page
Return to same window
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
SAMPLE
Manual
APPLICATIONS
C-81
—————
Notice the similarity
Each
ENTRY
this
between
line
connand
—
the one for
field with a
and
file
base
a data
links
new:
to the bottom. we see something
This is a calculated field that translates
ENTRY
Close
FILE
21,
WHEN DISPLAYING
(FORM.12)
FROM THE VALUE
RESULT
IN
(F0RM.I1-F0RM.12).
to:
SUBTRACT
THE
OF WINDOW
VALUE OF WINDOW 12
(FORM.ll)
AND PUT THE
li
13.
WINDOW
CUSTOMERS.
WINDOW.
is not a report for the vendor
file supplied with the sample
this one is up to you. Create a report format for
configurations;
VENDOR and use the CUSTOMER report as a model.
After making the
report, add
to the MENU using the MENUDEF program.
There
it
After.making your reportg try your hand at a simple file definition
AUTODEF takes a screen
and configuration
using the AUTODEF Program.
and makes
both
IMAGE format created with a text editor
the file
from
and compilable configuration
After making
definition
file
it.
and type
thesep
look at the file definition
with the FILEDEF program
Then
out the configuration with the operating system TYPE command.
compile the configuration.
THE
INVENTORY
FILE:
the inventory file we start to see the true power of DataF]ex.
Each
inventory part is supplied by a VENDOR, so the INVENTORY file is
said to RELATE to the VENDOR file. When an inventory part is found
(called into memory),
the RELATED VENDOR record automatically comes
with it. This relationship is automatically maintained by DataFlex.
With
DATA
INVENTORY
CORPORATION
ACCESS
MASTER
FILE
——————
VENDOR NUNBER:
PART
ID:
YOUR PART
ID:
VENDOR
_
NAME:
.
DESCRIPTION:
STOCK
QUANTITY:
REORDER
QUANTITY:
$
PROFIT/YEAR:
$
AVERAGE
PRICE:
COST:
.
.
SALES/YEAR:
$
.
._
_
._
$
._
$
.
WHOLESALE
STOCK
VALUE:
_
PRICE:
$
$
._
._
———————
—
Copyright
QUANTITY:
QTY ON ORDER:
.
SALES/MONTH:
LIST
MINIMUM
.
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
SAMPLE
C-82
DataFlex
APPLICATIONS
2.0
—
— ————————————
User's
Manual
—————
running the inventory data entry screen, the first two fields are
of interest
actually out of the VENDOR file. You can find the vendor
by either
keyp
screen
just like you could in the VENDOR
on this
VENDOR PART ID:
to find
screen. You can then move the cursor down to
number
and then
the first (or any) part for that vendor. The vendor
key", that is, you must
vendorG part number make up a "two segment
part number
then, put in all or part of the vendors
find the vendor,
to find a record by that index. To find the first part for any
vendor,
key.
enter the VENDOR NUMBER or NAME and hit the "SUPERFINO"
When
The INVENTORY
is also
and "DESCRIPTION".
PART ID"
file
windows
and
find
a
indexed
(able
You can put
particular
to find records by) "YOUR
the cursor in any of these
partt
fill
In
firstp then
partg find the vendor
This
configurain
the
other
did
the other
screens.
from
this inventory
tion will also allow you to create new vendors
number,
and when
vendor
vendor
name
no
a
new
with
screen. Just enter
Later we will see
will be created.
you SAVE the partg a new vendor
how to disable this
you want.
feature
When
you
are
creating a new
windows
like you
if
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
INVENTORY
APPLICATIONS
C-83
DEFINITION:
FILE
DEFINITION
FILE
SAKPLE
Manual
User's
2.0
LISTING
FOR FILE
#22
***************************************************
FILE
USER
ROOT NAME
DISPLAY
NAME
SHORT
NAME
=
=
INVT
INVENTORY
=
INVT
FILE
***************************************************
RECORD LENGTH
- 128 (USED = 104)
(USED
MAX NUMBER OF RECORDS = lOó
DELETED SPACE IS REUSED
MULTI-USER
RE-READ
ACTIVE
= 33)
***************************************************
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
FIELD
DEC
MAIN
RELATES--TO
NMBR
OFFSET
LEN
TYPE
PTS
INDEX
FILE
FIELD
----I
————-—
-—---
--O
-——--
-—-—
21
O
-—---
2
3
2
15
-—-—NUMERIC
ASCII
3
15
ASCII
4
5
18
33
68
l
l
2
35
3
ASCII
NUMERIC
O
3
O
6
7
71
73
2
3
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
O
O
O
O
8
76
3
NUMERIC
O
9
79
5
NUMERIC
2
10
84
89
5
4
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
2
2
12
13
93
97
4
4
NUMERIC
NUMERIC
14
101
4
NUMERIC
l
II
INDEX
INDEX
2:
l:
FIELD
FIELD
SEGMENTS:
SEGMENTS:
INDEX
3:
FIELD
SEGMENTS:
.
O
O
VENDOR
VENDOR PART_ID
O
O
O
O
O
O
PART_ID
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
O
O
O
O
MINIMUM
REORDER
O
O
O
ON_0RDER
O
O
O
SALES_M0NTH
O
O
O
O
O
O
SALES YEAR
PR0FIT_YEAR
2
2
O
O
O
O
O
O
LIST_PRICE
WH0LESALE_PRICE
2
O
O
O
AVG_C0ST
<1>
<3>
<2>
<4>
<0>
record number (field
first field "VENDOR NUMBER" RELATES toallthethat's
This is
required to RELATE
zero) of the vendor
file (#21).
makes
and
essentlaily
the
the inventory file to the vendor
file
vendor
file a logical extension of the inventory file.
The
it
indexes. The first index is by vendor
part id (field two). This combining
fields to make one index is called a multi-segment index. Since
record number is NOT appended
to this index, two parts Cáñft have
which
would
be a duplicate
AND part number,
record.
same vendor
The INVENTORY
number
(field
file
one)
has THREE
AND vendor
of
the
the same part to be
field 39 or YOUR PART ID, a1lowing
different part numbers,
yours and the vendoMs. Could
two
parts have the same part number?
If notp how could you allow that
Answer:
No, two
you wanted?
parts could not have the same
but
number,
circumstance could still be dealt with
if they coulcb the ZERO
by appending
field
(the record number)
to the indem
effectively
index
despite the duplication.
entry unique
rendering the composite
Index
known
TWO is
by two
on
if
Index
column
allows access by
of the file definition.
THREE
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
DESCRIPTION.
The main
Notice the
is the
index
Corporation
"MAIN
number
INDEX"
of the
05/L6/84
index
there
there
THE
used
that will be
are
no fields
are9
the main
INVENTORY
IFORM
DATA ACCESS
DataFlex
APPLICATIONS
SAMPLE
C-84
In this file
field.
one index, but where
FIND
by that
you
used
in more than
becomes
important.
when
that are
index
CONFIGURATION:
ENTER
(some
image
lines are deleted
area
to conserve
NUMBER: <
VENDOR PART
ID:
YOUR PART
<
STOCK
QUANTITY:
REORDER
QUANTITY:
$
AVERAGE
>
'
MINIMUM
$
COST:
QUANTITY:
_.
QTY ON ORDER:
._
._
._
._
$
PRICE:
FILE
'
.
PROFIT/YEAR:
MASTER
>
.
$
the
NAME: <
.>
<
SALES/MONTH:
LIST
_
ID: <
DESCRIPTI0N:
from
space)
INVENTORY
CORPORATION
VENDOR
Manual
User's
2.0
$
SALES/YEAR:
WHOLESALE
STOCK
._
S
PRICE:
$
VALUE:
._
._
l*
//
//
This enter configuration is a
with two files. The inventory
OPEN INVT
// All
OPEN
VENDOR
ENTER
INVT
AUTOPAGE
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
These
VENDOR
FORM
fields use the
to the FORM
assigned
ENTRY
little
file
more
sophisticated
RELATES
to the vendor
since
it
deals
file.
files must be OPENED before use.
// The order of opening the file Is
// not important.
INVT and VENDOR.
will maintain TObothVENDOR
// ENTER
// Since INVT relates
it MUST be
on the ENTER line.
// first
// INVT is the main file.
Set
AUTOPAGE
//
page.
VENDOR.RECNUM
up to automatically
option--the windows
assign windows.
automatically
are
{AUTOFIND}
Translation, do data entry on the record number of the vendor
file.
by number.
Automatically try to find the vendor
Note
that the element
of the related TO file is used here
PUT to the VENDOR field
and automatically
of the INVT ff1e.
be used
The
should
always
in a case like this.
related TO element
(This configuration
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
is continued
Corporation
on
the
next
page.)
05/16/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
SAMPLE
Manual
C-85
APPLICATIONS
—————
VENDOR.VENDOR
data
entry
ENTRY
Translation, Do
Skip
this entry
that a vendor be
{SKIPF0UND,FINDRECL}
on the vendor
name of the vendor
and REQUIRE
found
has already been
//
a record
Iffound
//
to continue.
//
{SKIPF0UND,RETAIN}
ENTRY INVT.VEND0R_PART_ID
Do data
part id of the
entry on the vendor
// Translation,
Skip
this if a record has been found (preventing
// file.
the entry after a clear window command.
// and retain
{RETAINALL,REQUIRED}
ENTRY INVT.PART_ID
ENTRY
ENTRY
These
//
//
//
INVT.MINIMUM
ENTRY
ENTRY
INVT.REORDER
INVT.ON
ORDER
inventory
changes)
{CAPSLOCK}
INVT.DESCRIPTION
INVT.QJJANTITY
ENTRY
file
do not
use autopage--they name each
form
is acceptable.
OISPLAYONLY}
ENTRY INVT.SALES
MONTH FORM.IO
UJISPLAYONLY}
ENTRY INVT.SALES
YEAR FORM.ll
fields
window.
Either
The
ENTRY
ENTRY
INVT.PR0FIT_YEAR
INVT.LIST_PRICE
ENTRY
INVT.WH0LESALE_PRICE
ENTRY
ENTRY
INVT.AVG_C0ST
FORM.15
(INVT.QUANTITY*INVT.LIST_PRICE)
line
above
//
RETURN
ENTEREND
ABORT
KEYPROC
//
//
KEY.USER
OUTPUT FORM
//
Notice that there are now
the configuration section.
both
the
FORM.16
Define action of user
Output form to list
Return
to same window
files
and
files
two
INVT
OPENED on
VENDOR,
the
This
defined
key
two lines
first ENTER
to
tells
The ORDER
INVENTORY
in this screen.
are
listed on the ENTER line is important.
RELATED TO by the others go to the right
are
of
The
TO them.
is called the MAIN
VENDOR
these
which
FORM.14
displays a calculated field.
return Is required at the end of the entry section.
// as is ENTEREND.
// After the ESCAPE key is hit, abort.
ENTAGAIN
RETURN
which
FORM.12
FORM.13
and
files
of
use
in
The
the files
relate
file. The
first
file
MAIN
file is the one that relates (directly or indirectly) tocanallbt the
(there
others. INVT is the main file in this configuration.
files that areMt related to at all).
files
which
the VENDOR file while all the others are
the same (related) field is present in
RECORD NUMBER in the VENDOR
both
such
as;
file and VENDOR TO
files,
ALWAYS use the field
NUMBER in the INVENTORY
that is related
file,
by the other(s)
That's why VENDOR.RECNUM
in the ENTER configuration.
VENDOR NUMBER in
is used in the first window instead of INVT.VENDOR.
when a record is
the INVENTORY file will be automatically updated
The
from
two
fields are
the inventory file.
first
from
When
saved.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
APPLICATIONS
SAMPLE
C-86
User's
2.0
familiaribasic
This ends the sample section of the demo for your initial
be studied after
The rest of the demo should
you
zation.
operations with some application work of your own.
APPLICATION
Select "INVOICE
look like this:
ACCESS
INVOICE
ENTRY"
BILL
TERMS
_.
—.
PART
from
the
demo
one
in
or
files at a timep but
order entry application.
two
our
menu.
The
invoice
will
screen
INVOICE
CORPORATION
NUMBER:
DISC
master
STRUCTURE:
been
So fam we have
considering only
what
is happening
to really understand
LetG look at the whole picture:
DATA
Manual
ID
ájST0NER#
.
.
TO:
VIA
DATE
SLSMN
ORDER
OJSTONER
—J—l—
QTY
PRICE
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
~~~~~~
——————————
TOTAL
To
a new invoiCeg
enter the invoice number.
ájSTOMER
NUMBER in window
two
or the CUSTOAR
create
$
You
NAME
._
may then
window
ENTER
three
the CUSTONER data will
ship-to address; you
This will
display.
The
these
you wish.
to
may change
fields
cursor will then move
invoice header area and take the default values (these are coming from
In the LINE ITEM section the object is to find an
the ájSTOMER file).
inventory item by either of the two keym and then ENTER the QTY sold.
A default
for the unit price will come from the inventory file less
will be
the discount in the ájSTOMER file. The other affected windows
keys
You may use the arrow
updated
and you can save
to
the line itan.
The delete record key
deletes an
up and down through the items.
move
entered line item. Press the ESCAPE key to print the Invoice.
the
and
do
a FIND.
Once
in
found
have
a customer.
you
become
the default for the
if
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataF1ex
SAMPLE
Manual
C-87
APPLICATIONS
Vendorp
are
five files open in the Invoice screen; Customerp
The
Line itans (inventory transactions).
Inventoryp Invoice header9
structure of the files looks like this:
There
CUSTOMER
t
I
I
VENDOR
I
l
l
I
INVENTORY
l
l
LINE
l
ITEMS-----r
a multi-line
configuration that produces
multi-file report like
is included on your disks as the
"Flex-gramming".
is advanced
It
understand
You should
basic operations with ENTER
file "INVOICE.FRM".
which
and REPORT before trying
uses
a configuration
like INV0ICEp
comand
descrfbed in the next section.
The
this
The
f11esg
and
screens
reports that
make
up
the
demo
are:
REPORT
CONFIGURATION
ENTER
CONFIGURATION
NONE
DATE.FRM
VENDOR
VENRPT.RPT
VENDOR.FRM
22
INVT
INVT.RPT
INVT.FRM
25
CUSTOMER
ájsTRFT.RFT
CUSTONER.FRM
29
INTRAN
MOVEMENT.RFT
INVOICE.FRM
FILE
NUMBER
FILE
NAME
l
SYSFILE
21
(SYSTEM
FILE)
(INVENTORY)
(LINE
ITEMS)
~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
CorporatiotÍ
05/16/84
C-88
SAMPLE
APPLICATIONS
THIS
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
DataFlex
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
"
=""""_""""__—"____———""~~""""""~~"_
"===~"====="""""""""~"""""""""
=
__~~~—~—
=======
ENTRY
——
DIRECT
~~—
—~———————
======="""""_"""""""_
___
= ""
CONTROL
OF DATA
=
D~l
"====
==========
===
==========
============
"
""""""""===,==============,=============———_
PAGESp
image
DataFlex Forms command group controls screen
with datm
including display of the PAGE Image, filling the windows
moving
to the record buffem formatting display
the data from windows
of data, and clearing both data and images from the screen.
The
Command
PAGE
action of the PAGE command is to display any labeled PAGE of a
configuration on the screen. PAGEs are labeled through the use of a
"pagename"
of Configuraas discussed in the chapter on "Elements
The prerequisite
for the PAGE command is that at least one
tions".
defined and labeled image page be present as part of the configuration
Images"
See the section on "Formatting With
processed.
being
for
details of the page configuration.
The
FORMAT:
PAGE
pagename
PAGE
PAGE
ffrstscreen
PAGE
PAGE
pageheadfng
EXAMPLES:
PAGE
secondscreen
subNadlng
reportbody
MOVE
or DISPLAY to a page will be immediately displayed in the
for that page.
appropriate window when a PAGE command is executed
It
is important to note that since windows
are variables and can be used
just like any other defined and typed variable in DataFlex, data can
be MOVEd to or from
a window
without the necessity of displaying the
Any
PAGE
image.
———————————
ACCEPT
CXmmand
and waits for keyboard
places the cursor in an image "window"
for the ACCEPT command is a
Further. the QIÜjL valid argument
window,
is the
referenced either as the format PAGENAMEÁ where
number
of the window in the pagep or as a named window with the window
command.
by the NAME definition
name established
ACCEPT
input.
"r
input into a
displays the operator's keyboard
pass
the input data
above). It can, optfonaljy,
configuration using the optional
in the DataFlex
extension as part of the execution of the same command.
field edit keys are active during an ACCEPT command.
ACCEPT
On executiom
(as
window
specified
to any legal argument
"TO
The
argument"
DataFlex
——-———-————-——————-——-——————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-2
CONTROL, OF DATA
DataF1ex
ENTRY
2.0
Manual
User's
ACCEPT,
remember
using
that the window reference itself is a
Data
does
valid variable that can be used throughout a configuration.
not need to be moved to another variable for processing in calculations, data base operations etc. Useful amounts of memory can be
conserved
by using the window
a
as a variable
to contain data;
a dual
variable is defined only to hold the data input from a windorg
overhead
is created to store the same information.
When
if
FORMAT:
{TO
ACCEPT
window
ACCEPT
screen.3
ACCEPT
screen.3
ACCEPT
window7
argument}
EXAMPLES:
TO
¶nventory.descript1on
defined
ACCEPT
screen.3
TO
P
previously
(w1ndow7
inventory.qty
TO
by
NAME command
screen.lO
{T0 argument}
is omitted from the ACCEPT command
"window"
be processed
manner.
can
in any normal
{TO argument}
Where
the
is used, an automatic MOVE command is executed
"window"
from
when the input is received, placing the data
into
has no
election
"argument". The "ACCEPT window TO argument"
which
will hold the same data as
effect on the contents of the wlndcm
may
is executed. The window argument
after the comiand
the argument
be
of the ACCEPT command line by using the AUTOPAGE command.
Where
the
line,
the
optional
data
in
itself
(see
out
left
AUTOPAGE)
already exists in a window from a previous
will be the default entry for the next
appropriate PAGE is not displayed at the time that
executed, the PAGE will be displayed by the ACCEPT.
If
data
DISPLAY9
it
=
DISPLAY
ACCEPT.
ACCEPT.
an
MOVE
ACCEPT
If
or
the
is
—
Command
in the same manner
as
explicitly
outputs data to a window
allows input.
Accordingly, the QñiY valid output destination
either as PAGENAME.#
for DISPLAY is a window in m image addressed
where
"iV is the sequential number of the window in a page image9 or
DISPLAYed
data
as a name established with the NAME command.
will not
clear when the CLEAR ALL Flex-key is pressed; only data displayed by
wf71
respond
the ENTRY comand
to the CLEAR ALL Flex-key.
DISPLAY
ACCEPT
FORMAT:
DISPLAY
argument
TO window
DISPLAY
1nvt.descrfpt'lon
EXAMPLES:
DISPLAY
Where
~~+~
Copyright (c) 1984
name"
Data
screen.3
TO mem_name
member.name
"mem
TO
was
Access
previously
created with the
Corporation
NAME command
05/16/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
AUTOPAGE
be
reference
The window
AUTOPAGE.
may
AUTOPAGE)
(see
out of the
left
OF DATA
CONTROL
DIRECT
Manual
DISPLAY
command
D-3
ENTRY
by
using
Command
on a
of windows
performs m automatic sequential numbering
ACCEPT and DISPLAY
the ACCEPT, DISPLAY and PRINT commands.
which
in
follow an AUTOPAGE command will reference windows
from
for the
sequence
to r1ghtg top to bottom. The argument
left
AUTOPAGE command
is any pagename valid for the current configuration.
only to be used on a portion of a PAGE, the number of
If AUTOPAGE iswindow
The
be added
{}
may optionally
to the command.
the starting
should
below
shown
braces
not be typed--only the number of the
to process
starting window.
every window in the
It is not necessary
but
PAGE after
an AUTOPAGE commandg
the list of windows
to process
must
be continuous (no gaps)
after each AUTOPAGE command.
AUTOPAGE
PAGE for
commands
DISPLAY
AUTOPAGE allows the use of the ACCEPT)
without the necessity of specifying the window
action is to take place.
and PRINT
commands
where
the command
FORMAT:
AUTOPAGE
pagename
uu
AUTOPAGE
emp1oyee_record
EXAMPLES:
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
ACCEPT
//D'lsplay
//Dlsplay
emp.city
emp.phone
TO data.ver1fied
AUTOPAGE emp1oy8e_tax_status
DISPLAY
emp.marftal
emp.exemptions
DISPLAY
CLEARFORM
and
BLANKFORM
//Dlsplay the screen
//Dlsplay the 8th window
//Disp1ay the 9th window
8
Commands
data
commands
remove
pagename),
(by
image
These
entire
the screen
the 1st window
//D1sp1ay
the 2nd
//D1spiay the 3rd
//D1sp1ay
the 4th
//Accept input to the 5th
emp.name
emp.address
from
an
image
windows.
window
individual
They
or
a
can address
range
of
an
windows.
For
example,
to the
data
after
data
diskó
from
has been
entered
commands
can be
ready
the image
to
one of these
and
the windows
a screen
executed
image
and
saved
to clear the input
for the input of more data.
CLEARFORM removes
all data from the
follows:
character" in the window as defined in
and
image
Utility; BLANKFORM removes all data Thein the
two
different
displays ASCII space characters in the windows.
forms
of operation are provided to allow as much flexibility as
possible in application design. Most configurations will probably use
BLANKFORM when
CLEARFORM.
The DataFlex READ configuration
uses
displaying the field tag names for reference.
The commands
differ
and displays
image
the SETSCREE
Copyright
(C)
1984
as
the
Data
"fill
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-4
OF DATA
CONTROL
ENTRY
DataF1ex
2.0
User's
Manual
FORMAT:
pagename
pagename
(clear entire
BLANKFORM
CLEARFORM
BLANKFORM
window
window
(clear
CLEARFORM
BLANKFORM
window.nl
window.nl
CLEARFORM
THRU
THRU
page)
a window)
window.n2
window.n2
(clear a range of windows
starting at window.nl and
stopping at window.n2)
OUTFILE
Command
to identify the sequential device (printer,
screen, a
is to receive data controlled by the OUTPUT command.
The
for the OUTFILE command is any valid file or device name
OUTFILE
command
exists in
addressable by the operating system.
If no usecb
and the OUTPUT command
a configuration,
is
output will be
directed to the printer port.
If the OUTFILE comand is provideb but
provided with the
this means that an argument
with no argUment7
operating or menu command which runs the configuration will designate
DAILYREPORT
CCN: would
command
FLEX
system
the device (the operating
cause
the configuration DAILYREPORT to be output to the screen).
If
no argument
is entered on the command 1inep output will again go to
LST:
Finally, the OUTFILE command may
(the printer in most systms).
an argument
in the configuration as shown below.
itself havemarks
are
required for literal arguments.
Quotation
OUTFILE
disk
is
file)
argument
used
which
FORMAT:
btr1ng_arg}
"string_arg" is a literal text string in quotation marks
or a string variable containing the name of a legal output
device or file.
OUTFILE
Where
EXAMPLES:
(list
device))
OUTFILE
"LST:
OUTFILE
"abc.dat"
(output to
OUTFILE
destdev
(output to device or file indicated by
the contents of string variable DESTDEV
"
(output to printer
OUTFILE
(looks for
file
ABC.DAT)
argument
from
command
line)
OUTFILE
command
permits output in the same configuration with
For
exampieg
after data for an invoice has been
other operations.
be sent to a printer
can
for demand printing.
inputg
The
it
OUTCLOSE
Command
OUTCLOSE is used
After a file or device is established with OUTFILE,
when the configuration
is being terminated.
to "close" the file/device
Copyright
(C)
1984
————
Data
Access
——————
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
2.0
Manual
User's
======="====—
"———
This
is
uses
no
CONTROL
OF DATA
ENTRY
D-5
—————~——~~~——=========="=
= == —~——————~—————~m———~~
==
command
which
DIRECT
it
since
argumentp
open.
operates
on
any
device or
file
FORMAT:
OUTCLOSE
===================W======
———~
OUTPUT
=
Command
OUTPUT
addresses
argument
a "pagename"
by "pagename"
to OUTFILE.
tin>
data.
and
prompts.
All
data
OUTFILE.
sent to
are
transfers the entire page
in the page--format-
and
referenced
See
OUTFILE
command.
FORMAT:
OUTPUT
pagename_arg
OUTPUT
invoice
EXAMPLE:
&
=====~~
———~———~
NAME Command
NAME
is
rather
be
can
windows
There
used
to identify
PAGENAME.#.
than
NAMEd:
explicitly
in a
are two
page
forms
with a specific identifier
A window
of the command.
FORMAT:
NAME
Or
a group
of
NAME
Using
page_name.#
windows
window_name
in
page_name
a
page
can
window_namet
be
NAMEd:
window_name2
...
window_name8
be NAMEd on
can
of the command, multiple windows
multiple NAME command lines can be used to
do
of the windows
in a page,
the names of all the windows
Care
should
be taken
conveniently on a single line.
to avoid
not
(such
word
as NAME, PAGE,
using any command or opticm
of DataF1ex
datep
number,
etc.) as a window NAME. The names are applied to
windows
in order froru t® left to rightp and then down by line.
the
a single
NAME all
second
comnand
form
line;
if
fit
EXAMPLES:
quantity
NAME
invt.6
NAME
lnvt part_id
of an AUTOPAGE with a
group
of windows
starting
the
should
pagename
not be
multiple NAME lines may be
Use
descr vndr cost price quantity
starting
with that
repeated
used
if
window
window
after
necessary
i¥ enables
number.
the
NAMEing
of a
instancep
AUTOPAGE command.
Agaim
to NAME all the windows.
the
In this
EXAMPLE:
AUTOPAGE
NAME
Copyright
(C)
invt 7
quantity stock
1984
Data
pmfit
Access
total
Corporation
05/16/84
D-6
DIRECT
FORMAT
Command
CONTROL
OF DATA
DataFlex
ENTRY
—
2.0
User's
Manual
———————————
DataF1ex
window
one or more
may have
format and data verification
The options are
applied by use of a FORMAT comand
options.
the desired options, and any applicable
specifying the window.
In this instance, the brackets {} used to delimit
parameters. NOTE:
·
the options are literal, and are to be typed.
Each
FORMAT:
FORMAT
w1ndow_arg
{optionl.
opt1on2
...
optionN}
"pagename.#"
be in the form
can
or a named reference
The following
options are
established with the NNE Command.
available for window formatting:
"Window_arg"
FUNcTTñN
DECIMAL
.SYNTHX
FORMAT
{P0INTS=n}
where
"n" is the number of places to the
This can
point in the window.
right of the decimal
reformat a window or can be used to comfigure an
integer-only numeric
field by setting a value of zero
(O)
for "n".
entry
and
UPPER
CASE
{CAPSL0CK}
This option accepts upper case
converts lower case entry to upper case.
RANGE
CHECK
í¥2} {RANGE = m/dd/yy,
nn/dd/yy} Provides
= #1,
automatic check of entered data and declares an
the date
error and returns the cursor to the window
does
numeric
the
within
value
entered
not
fall
or
where
the
values specified in the RANGE coímand,
first
value is the low end of the rangep and the second is
The
high
end.
and
upper
lower values in the
the
command
are
included within the valid range.
{RANGE
an
if
VALIDITY
MECK
{a1E«="entryl1entry2lentryn"}{NECK=string_var}
Provides an automatic check of entered data and
declares an error and returns the cursor to the window
the
entry does not match any substring in the eEcK
Where
command.
an eligible
entry has fewer characters
the
wIndow,
than
characters must be specithe excess
below
The vertical
bars
(shown
as B).
fied as spaces
below
recommended
shown
are
delimiters.
optional
(I)
Delimiters, if used, should be characters unlikely to
The comand
be input erroneously by operators.
may
in-memory
reference a previously-defined
alternatively
element):
string variable (not a window or database
if
{WECX="YESlNOBlYl6BlNBB"}
{OECK=password}
Calculations and string manipulations on data in formatted windows
should be avoidéd»
since the formatting can change the apparent
of the calculation or
"value" of the contents for purposes
be done
on the
Calculations and manipulations should
manipulation.
(database
data
e}ementg
source
literal string, in-memory variable,
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
DIRECT
Manual
CONTROL
——————
OF DATA
was
if
D-7
——-————-————
———————————
etc.) from which the window
of the results to the windoic,
ENTRY
with, with replacement
output purposes.
to begin
filled
desired for
following additional options are valid for formatting output for
Like the other format options, they
the DataFlex PRINT command only.
are
set using the FORMAT comand.
The
BLANK
{SUPPRESS)
SUPPRESS
Strips
data
QIARACTER
spaces
and
with
numeric
spaces
remaining after data
character specified in "x".
is put in
window
{SIGNRT}
ON RIGHT
on
the right
dollar
sign
a minus
sign
less than O.
Places
va7ues
FLOATING
in
spaces
{FILL="X"}
FILL
Fills theIn
SIGN
output (leading spaces
in a7phanumeric).
from
trailing
side of
numeric
{FLOATA
DOLLAR
Places
a
numeric
floating
value.
line
Multiple formatting options on a comand
and separated by
single pair of braces
comas:
($)
on
are
enclosed
the
left
of
within
a
a
EXAMPLE:
"}.
{CÁPSLO,MEÉ="YESINO
=====—
PRINT
Command
data
PRINT
command
moves
to a window and uses special formatting
In particular,
options where they are Included 'In the configuration.
the PRINT command is the only comnand which can update SUBTOTAL
accumulators in the REPORT macro.
The
FORMAT:
{TO
window}
PRINT
arg
PRINT
lnvt.descr
fnvt.descr TO BODY.2
payrol1_amt TO BODY.3
EXAMPLES:
PRINT
PRINT
in the first
forcep since the
Note
example
connand
above
that
contains no
—————————————————
————
Access
(C)
1984 Data
Copyright
an AUTOPAGE connand
window
reference.
Corporation
must
be
in
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-8
CONTROL
OF DATA
DataFlex
ENTRY
2.0
User's
Manual
=======—~——~———~—————————"——
ENTERGROUP
data
entry environment. The
inclusion in more custom-programmed
been
may have
configurations
in whicht for one reason
or anothem
The
use of ENTERGROUP will
elected not to use the ENTER macro.
first
procedures
load
that define the operation of
a set of predefined key
the function keys: NEXT RECORD, PREVIOUS RECORD, BACK WINDOW, CLEARp
SAVE,
howeverg
and SAVE.
will not save the record under ENTERGROUP,
end of the
Rather,
as
will under ENTER.
will simply go to the
ENTERGROUP and resume
Likewisep CLEAR will
execution from there.
ENTERGR0UPg
under
rather than clearing both the
clear only the screen
ENTER.
SAVE and CLEAR
does
under
and the record buffer,
as
screen
be redefined to provide whatever
action is appropriate
can,
of course?
as can
all the other Flex-keys, using KEYPROC
to the application,
(see
procedures
Function Keys".
the section on "Using
The ENTER macro
provides a complete
ENTERGROUP command
is intended for
it
it
it
it
Multiple
group
access
must
ENTERGROUPs
be ended
Each
same configuration.
key
The use of multiple
command.
by ENTERGROUP.
can
be
included in the
with
an
ENDGROUP
to records is
fully
ENTERGROUP
ENTRY
commands
supported
FORMAT:
ENDGROUP
Any
the
changes
end of
will be moved to the record buffer at
in the ENTRY windows
the enter group unless NOPUT was used on the windows.
EXAMPLE:
ENTERGROUP
ENTRY
ENTRY
ENTRY
ENTRY
ENDGROUP
INVT.ID
INVT.DESCRIPTION
{AUToFINcñ
{FINDREQ,SKIPFOUND}
INVT.VENDOR
{DISPLAYC)NLY}
INVT.PRICE
would
allow FINDS in the INVT file by either ID or DESCRIPTION
The record buffer would
be edited
allow the PRICE to be changed.
with PRICE but the record would NOT be saved.
This
and
options are available in an ENTERGROUP, as is the
The
described in the section on "Data Entry".
SUPERFINO
and DELETE Flex-Keym howeverp
are
not defined, as they are
the
more
flexible possible applications of
in ENTERg because
programming
ENTERGROUP require application-specific
of these
These
as they do not in ENTER.
Flex-keys can be programmed
functioim
on
as described in the section of this manual
with KEYPROC comandm
"Using
Function Keys".
is desired for some reason to alter the
If
pre-programming
of other Flex-keys as provided in ENTERGROUP for a
those
specific application,
other Flex-keys also can be re-programmed
with KEYPROC comnands.
ENTRY
ENTDISPLAY
All
formatting
command,
it
———
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/10/84
DataFlex
CONTROL
DIRECT
Manual
User's
2.0
OF DATA
ENTRY
D-9
using one ENTERGRQUP.
is a sample configuration
It is the same
Tutorial" section
configuration as is shown in the "Programming
used
the ENTER macr"o» and the
except that that example
of this manuab
The di fferences between
the
uses
an ENTERGROUP.
one on the next page
two versions of the configuration
are
instructive.
Below
ENTER
/SCREEN
..
PERSONNEL
..... ..... ,., ..,... .... ...
Fi
Last
EMPLOYEE
NAME
:
:
CITY
:
SEC.
SOC.
#
:
HIRED
DATE
RATE
:
PAY
TYPE
:
...... ... ...... ... .....
MI
rst
_'
ST
:
ZIP
_
:
>
<
_J_J—
:
PAY
..
<
:
ADDRESS1
ADDRESS2
FILE
$
._
(H=Hour1y
_
or S"Sa1aried)
Enter a Name or Soc. Sec. S and press FIND to display record,
OR
press to exit and return to the DataFlex Menu...
*
/
OPEN PEOPL E
START:
//begin loop
//enter·grou p
ENTERGROUP
AUTOPAGE SCREEN
ENTRY PEOPLE.LNAME
ENTRY
PEOPLE.FNAME
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.MI
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ADDR2
PEOPLE.ADDRI
ENTRY
PEOPLE.CITY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ST
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.ZIP
PEOPLE.SSAN
ENTRY
ENTRY
PEOPLE.DATE
PEOPLE.PAYRATE
ENTRY
PEOPLE.PAYTYPE
{CAPSL0(X,8IEá(="HS"}
//endgroup
//save record
//clear buffer
//cIear screen
//begin loop
//define esc key
//to abort
ENDGROUP
SAVE PEOPL E
CLEAR PEOPLE
CL EARFORM
GOTO START
KEYPROC KEY.ESCAPE
ABORT
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporati
on
05/16/84
D-lO
DIRECT
CONTROL
THIS
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
OF DATA
PAGE
Access
ENTRY
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
DataFlex 2.0 User's
LEFT
'
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
É:
====
___———————_~———~
__
D"ll
————————
::É:EE:E
MANIPULATING
::::::====
STRINGS
————————
—
—~———
—~—+
String commands allow manipu1atton of various forms of
string data. They can be used on literal string arguments,
windows,
string variab]esp or data base elements. If a non-string
will be
for a string comanch
variable is used in the argument
String variables
converted to a string before the string operation.
in the
are
declared using the STRING command, which is described.
be
That
section should
of Configurations.
chapter on Elements
reviewed
and understood
prior to attempting the use of commands
described in this chapter.
The
C)ataF1ex
text
it
most
cases9
the string comiands
act upon an existing string.
and move
the
specified by its variable name, or entered as a Jiterab
"TO"
The word
is the
result of the action to a destination variable.
designator preceding the destination variable which is to receive the
Certain string commands return the results of
output of the command.
These
back
variable name.
"replacing"
their processes
to the source
should
be used
for the fact that the
with due regard
string comands
string will not be available after
original contents of the source
execution of the connand.
In
The
general
format of DataFlex string
COMMAND
src_strtng_var
TO
dest_string_var
all comands
require the length
DataFlex
integers.
string commands
both
and destination
source
for the
Not
is:
comands
and
length position
specifiers,
variable
action.
position
can
use
comand
the
same
which
name
are
as
EXAMPLE:
a_str1ng TO a_string 10
will take the leftmost ten characters of a_string
the result back ínto a_str1ng.
LEFT
and
place
——————
LEFT
Command
LEFT command
extracts a specified number
string starting with the leftmost character
the extraction into a variable.
The
of characters from a
places the result of
and
————————————————————————————————
—————— —
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
———————
05/16/84
D-12
MANIPULATING
DataF1ex
STRINGS
2.0
User's
Manual
—————
FORMAT:
source_string TO dest_str1ng §#
LEFT is the conYnand9
source_string is the string argument
being acted upoñ» TO designates dest_stringp and ## is an
integer number or variable which specifies the length of the
sub-string to be extracted starting from the beginning of
the command will output a null string
source_string.
If #í¥0 and less than or equal to
is greater than the
string length.
the source
If ##2<1 while
string will be outputp
string, the entire source
length of the source
string, the
while if ##2 is greater than the length of the source
string will be output.
rightmost character only of the source
m
m
m
=
The
""""
=
Command
ASCII
ASCII
source
comnand
and
string
takes the ASCII value of the
places the result in a numeric
character of
variable.
first
a
FORMAT:
ASCII
string
Where
ASCII
INITIAL
1n1t1a1
TO
numerfc_variab1e
EXAMPLE:
will
Copyright (c)
a value of "Abernathy"
fn1t_val
value of 65 in "INIT_VAL".
has
TO
return
a
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-14
DataFiex
STRINGS
MANIPULATING
2.0 User's
Manua7
——————————
MARACTER
Canmand
it
CHARACTER corrmand
to
takes an integer (O to 127) and converts
its equivalent ASCII character, then places the result into a string
useful for creating strings needed for
variable.
This is particularly
be
printer or other device control where the string values cannot
conveniently created from the keyboard.
The
FORMAT:
MARACTER
integer
TO
stríng_var
EXAMPLES:
Where
LEAD_IN
CFIARACTER 27
has been
TO 1ead_1n
will
value of
place
a
declared
27
(the
as
ESC
declared
EIGHTLPI
has been
Where
MARACTER
65 TO arg
will place an "A" (ASCII
code
string
a
character)
as
65)
a
in
string
variable
in
LEAD_IN
variable
EIGHTLPI
.
POS Command
POSition
comand
scans
a source
string for the occurrence of a
result
designated "target" substring9 and returns an integer numeric
which
is the starting position of the target string within the source
string.
In the event the target substring is not found within the
source
stringp the POS command stores a zero in the specified
variable.
The
FORMAT:
TO num_var
IN string2
STRINGI
is the colmlandp
is the string to be scanned
for, IN designates STRING2p STRING2 is the string to be
TO designates the
scanned
for an occurrence of STRINGln
variable NUM —VAR which will contain the
destination numeric
result.
POS stringl
Where
POS
EXAMPLE:
Where
S7RINGI
= "DEF%
POS strlngl
IN str'lng2
and
TO
will
4
Copyright (c)
return
a
value of
1984
Data
Access
STRING2
= "ABCDEFGHI"
posit
in POSIT.
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
MANIPULATING
Manual
User's
STRINGS
D-15
=
=====~~~———~———
LENGTH Command
LENGTH returns the length of a designated string
as an integer number
LENGTH counts
the number of printable
variable.
in a numeric
LENGTH will
give a different
in the argument.
characters and spaces
the
result for what may seem like the "same" data according to whether
See the
e1«nenG
argument
a variable.
a windowg
a database
is
discussion at the
end
of this chapter
on
or
"String
Operations".
FORMAT:
TO
LENGTH string
LENGTH
Where
num_var
is the comand, STRING is the string whose
variable
is to be determined. TO designates the numeric
action.
contain the result of the commandG
length
to
EXAMPLE:
STRIN="ABC"
Where
TO how_1ong
LENGTH string
will
return
a
value of
3
to
HOW_L0NG
—————
PAD Command
The
is used to make strings of specified length.
is the source
of the data
the variable which
identifies
PAOded,
and the second
the destination string in
identifies
to
which
the PADded result is stored after processing. The third
argument
is an integer value or variable designated as the length cjf
the string to result from the execution of the PAD convnand.
If the
w,i11
be added
spaces
to string
original string is shorter than 1engthp
to length.
to extend
If the stringbe is longer than 1ength»
eliminated
of length will
characters in excess
The
PAD
firstbe
comand
argument
it
FORMAT:
#if
TO dest_string
PAD source_string
Where
PAD is the comand, S0URCE_STRING
contains the string
DEST_STRING
be PADdedp
contains the PAOded result of the
##
and
comnand,
is the integer value or variable which
specifies the number
required) that will
to
of characters (including spácés>
if
contained in the resultant string.
be
EXAMPLE:
Where
ALPHA_ STRING
" "ABC"» and spaces are
TO beta_string
5
PAD a1pha_str1ng
will store "ABCBB" in variable BETA_STRING
represented
as
"kS"
BEFORE = "ABCDEFG"
Where
PAD before TO aftor 3
will
store
"ABC"
in variable
AFTER
——————-———————————————-———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
TRIM
DataFlex 2.0 User's
STRINGS
MANIPULATING
D-16
Manual
Comand
The TRIM comnand
from
the contents
strips both leading and
of a string variable.
trailing
Embedded
blanks, if presentf
blanks are not
affected.
FORMAT:
TO dest_string
TRIM source_string
S0URCE_STRING
Where
contains the string to be
DEST_STRING
will contain the TRIMmed string.
replacement
and DEST_STRING
may be the same
if
operated
on,
SOURCE_STRING
and
is desired.
EXAMPLE:
are represented
Where
spaces
"C2BifBbybseaBBB"
TRIM
will
APPEND
as
"B"9
and
LQNGSTRING
=
longstring TO shortstrtng
in SHORTSTRING
place "2Mif8byl6sea"
Command
to join two or more strings together.
together can be 1itera1sg variables. and/or
string cormands
strings created through the use of other DataF1ex
be a
(such
as CHARACTER).
Stringl in the FORMAT below must always
This variable will contain the APPENDED string after the
variable.
command
has
been
executed. Strings cannot be APPENDed to a litera]
string constant.
facility
APPEND provides the
APPENDed
The strings
FORMAT:
APPEND
APPEND
name,
and
STRING2
STRINGI.
joined to
executed
str1ng2 ...stringN
is the command, STRINGI is a string variable
through STRINGN are literals or variables
remains
STRINGI
after the connand
is
string.
the variable name of the expanded
strlngl
Where
as
EXAMPLE:
SIZE
Where
= "big"
COLOR = " blue"
Where
APPEND size color " balloon"
will
result
in the value of "big blue balloon"
in
SIZE
"collect"
strings into a ñéWY mpty variable,
that target variable with d MOVE "" to STRINGI
your variable's name for STRINGI).
If this fs not
APPEND command
the
done,
will attanpt (and fail) to operate on the
(to the
string in its default initialized
statep which is a17 spaces
in
String variables are initialized
declared length of the string).
for the stringfs maximum
this way to reserve enough space in mtmory
be APPENDed
cannot
sIze, but
to in this state, since It is "full"
of spaces.
it
you wish
to
necessary
to clear
command
(substitute
NOTE:
is
If
it
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
,
UPPERCASE
STRINGS
MANIPULATING
Manual
D-17
———
~and
The
UPPERCASE
case
letters
connand
to
scans
uppercase.
and
designated string
a
converts
al?
lower
FORMAT:
UPPERCASE
string
UPPERCASE
Where
comand
is the
acting
on
STRING.
EXAMPLE:
STRING="Smith"
Where
UPPERCASE
string
will return STRING
CMDLINE
as
"SMITH"
————————————
Command
comnand
arguments
entered at
executing a DataFlex configuration,
the operating systan level as part of the initial command entry line
use?
variables for later repetitive
with the
can be stored to string
CMDLINE
comnand.
This permits certain run-time choices to be made by
Separate
and entered without
the operator (or the menu system)
prompting
from
within the configuration.
When
EXAMPLE:
FLEX MYREPORT CON:
and runs
Executes
the configuration called
the FLEX.COM
The "CON:
"MYREPORT".
until a later point in
is not executed
the execution of the configuration when a CMDLINE cotmand
and stores
to a string variable
retrieves that argument
which
in
is subsequently read by the configuration (and used,
this
casep
file
"
it
to direct
the reportfs
output to the screen).
from
as to number
with no limitation
will retrieve arguments
the last prior-executed operating system comand
or the last pr"kr
Arguments
whichever
CHAIN commancb
more
was executed
recently.
are
from
each
separated
above), and, once
other by spaces
(per the example
retrieved by CMDLINE, are no longer available from the same sourceg
argument,
having
been
any.
replaced by the next succeeding
(MOLINE
if
FORMAT:
CMDLINE
string_arg
aqDLINE
output_device
EXAMPLE:
——
———
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
~~~~~ G
05/16/84
D-18
MANIPULATING
——————
SIRING
~,
OPERATIONS
class (in-memory
of a string affects
the differences are
database
variab1ep
The
the
as
way
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
STRINGS
================.========————~———
—
~~~~
e1aneñt»
trailing
(B
blanks
indicates
follows
are
a
Manual
·~.———————————
—
——
or window
contents)
handled. Basically,
blank space):
fill
Element:
the
All characters plus additiona1 blanks to
Example:
(set in File Definition).
declared length of the eWnent
(IQ characters)
"The8Hague8"
Database
Only
"TheBHague"
WIndow
Example:
Contents:
Whatever
In-memory
was
Variable:
loaded
from
the
database
element
characters, including the
above9
the window illustrated
blank characters plus the embedded
all
10
from
Windows,
which
and
back
This is
database
from
a window.
and
variable
would
were
the
does
the TRIM connand
traf1ing blanks without
"Miami,8F1orida"
file.city
a
would
TRIM strings
just as
to TRIM leading and
how to display
e7elnentsp
it.abovegIf
it
tráiling blank. If it
only
contain
it
blank.
a way
then,
is
input to
illustrated
from
two
blanks.
embedded
actual characters, fncludlng
(trailing
blank dropped)
were
contain
loaded
8
non-
(see
abovek
MOVEing
tOg
lO-character
fi]e.state:
city 10
state 10
fi1e.city
to city
f'l1e.state to state
city
state
STRING
STRING
TRIM
TRIM
SHOW
This is
var.cíty
contents
space
could
".r
variables
to display the same thing from in-mcmory
var.state, each of which has length equal to their
The
(5 and 7 respectively
for Miami and Florida).
coma and
handled
they
only to illustrate an alternative;
differently
handled
either way in either instance:
how
and
are
be
STRING
comma 2
MOVE "gY' TO comma
SHOW var.city
comma
In
generañ
manipulation
it
by
var.state
is preferrable to use
the String comands.
———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
in-memory
Corporation
variables
for
05/16/84
"""
- -------------"
""="===""""""""""""
=~==~=~
CONDITIONAL
EXECUTION
=Z=====Z==
=_=====~==
————————————
0~19
":::"::J::::
—
=""====""»
~———"~—=
===ZZZZZ
for obtaining conditional execution of
Indicators will be discussed
tests.
argument
They
(often referred to as
a
special
of
type
are
first.
There
controls command line execution.
"flags") which conditionally
TRUE and FALSE.
two
are
possible statuses for an indicator:
DataFlex provides
commands,
two means
INDICATORS
and IF
(See
the chapter
indicator is created with the INDICATOR command.
in
indicators remain
Declaring Data Elements.) Upon declaration,
their default status of FALSE until an INDICATE comnand or some other
to the other
event in the execution of the configuration resets
status of TRUE.
An
on
it
on a command
If an indicator is TRUE» the cormand which follows
an indicator
is FALSEp
line in a configuration will be processed.
If
will be skippe& and execution will move
line (or group)
the connand
A TRUE indicator
to the next line.
will also cause the processing of
a WHILE - ENCL, REPEAT - UNTIL
or BEGIN - END structured cormíand group
which
line.
follows the indicator on a connand
it
by enclosing
may be used
in brackets
an indicator
command
to the DataF1ex
to identify
processor.
connand
1ine(s)
is intended
at the beginning of the
The command
to control.
processor recognizes the bracketm and does
indicator.
the appropriate conditional testing on the enclosed
Once
definecb
("I"
must
and
be placed
"I")
it
it
it
It
FORMAT:
[ind1cator_arg]
command
[salel
MOVE
SHOW
EXAMPLES:
[mentber]
[cred1t_ok]
[sIngle male]
[s1ng1e][male]
SHOW
SHOW
SHOW
TO lnvt.qty
(lnvt.qty-amt_sold)
code:
'
IEnter membership
up to ' cust.l'lmit
'Credit approved
fNot1ce
format for multiple indicators'
"This format works the same!"
this format, the connand
processor tests the INDICATOR for a
the INDICATOR is TRUE, COMMAND is processed.
status.
If
If
and the
INDICATOR
then
the command is skippech
is not TRUE (FALSE),
(or the next indicator
in the configuration is processed
next comiand
fs tested, etc.).
Using
TRUE
useful to be able to
status of an indicator rather
done
using the word NOT in front of an
line to reverse the sense of the test applied
a configuration,
based
on the
a connand
TRUE status.
This is
When
execute
creating
than
its
indicator on a
to its status.
comand
—————————————
Copyright (C) 1984
it
is
sometimes
FALSE
———————————————————————————-—-——————-—
——-————————
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
EXEájTION
CONDITIONAL
D-20
User's
2.0
Manual
FORMAT:
INOT
indicator]
comnand
EXAMPLES:
[a_test]
"argl"
MOVES
if
Cnot
a_test]
MOVES "arg2"
if
MOVE argl
A_TEST
is
TO screen.l
TRUE.
MOVE arg2
A_TEST
is
TO screen.l
FALSE.
is this
[NQT
member]
SHOW 'Who
INOT
cred1t_ok]
SHOW
guy?'
the credit
'Confiscate
cardll'
be used
can
together
separated by spacesp
to three indicators,
be
a comand
line should
within the brackets to test whether
processech
or, if space a11OWSg a set of brackets may be used for each
both
and
improve
are
readability.
Either format works,
indicator to
A NOT can
precede
used
any
indicator
in this manual.
in illustrations
the sense of the test on the indicator which follows it.
to reverse
them
through
Concatenation of indicators in this manner interrelates
"ANDS"
(that fSg all of them must be TRUE for a TRUE result--if any is
FALSE,
then
the combination is FALSE).
Up
FORMAT:
[{NOT
}indicatorl
{NOT
}ind1cator2
{NOT
}indicator3]
ccmmand
EXAMPLES:
[sale][cred1t]
Icred1t sale]
function
Same
[saiej[N0T
Indicators
be
can
[member]
SETTING
There
SHOW
as
SHOW 'Enter item ID:
example
above.
credit]
used
charge
i
'Sorry? credit
to conditionally
limit
exceeded.'
set other indicators:
TRUE
STATUS
formats for using the
status.
three distinct
an indicator's
are
establish
SHOW
INDICATE
INDICATOR
°Enter item ID: '
First, and most simply, indicator
reset using the following command
arguments
can
INDICATE
be
comand
explicitly
to
set
or
format:
EXAMPLES:
INDICATE
INDICATE
Copyright
(C)
1984
indicator
indicator
Data
TRUE
FALSE
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
OataFlex
Secondly,
lished
User's
2.0
the
the
by
EXECUTION
D-21
of an fndicator can be estabor FALSE condition
There
mode operator.
are
eight (8)
of a comparison
for an indicator:
TRUE
use
modes
comparison
CONDITIONAL
Manual
lass than
less than or equal to
equal
to
greater than or equal to
greater than
not equal
string Inclusion
string matching
LT
LE
EQ
GE
GT
NE
IN
MATQI
mode operator,
using
a
with a comparison
the INDICATE comiand
status of TRUE or FALSE is given to the named indicator based on the
and the selected mode of
outcome
of two arguments
of the comparison
comparison.
That status is then tested each time that the indicator
the comnand line which follows the
to determine whether
is encountered
indicator In a configuration should be processed
or not.
When
For
the following
example
IR!JE
5 GT 3
666 EQ 666
999 LT 1000
3 GT 5
666 EQ 999
1000
LT 999
IN
'ABC*'
and
are:
EALSE
'B'
"IN"
comparisons
'ABC'
MATQ1
"MATM"
IN scans
example
indicator
'A'
'A'
'ABCDEF'
have
the following
IN 'XYZ'
MAT(J1 'B'
differences:
of another string;
string for the presence
When one string
is IN anothem
fs IN "DAC".
is returned TRUE.
one
"A"
for
the
equal1ing another. If the strings
from
the
returned TRUE.
It variescomparison
MATQI will
perform
the
is equal to the same
against only part of the string and
part of the other string the indicator will be returned TRUE.
The partial
string
to be tested is represented with the
"AB*"
where
asterisk convention used by most operating systems
means
anything that starts with "AB" is considered TRUE with
whatever
follows in the rest of the string not being evaluated
The asterisk
may be used
only in
test.
or considered for the The
be a completely
second
argument
must
the first argument.
explicit
string.
tests for one string
equal
are
the indicator is
mode
EQ comparison
in that
i'«re
if it
————————————
1984 Data
Copyright (c)
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
CONDITIONAL
D-22
DataF1ex
EXWJTION
2.0
="="==""""—."="=—"""====————
The
In
mode
comparison
this manual.
operator will
be
represented
as
"MODE"
User's
Mama?
—
in
examples
with a mode operator creates an
format of the INDICATE comand
the
easy-to-read "sentence" which includes the INDICATE comnand,
compared
by a
which
and two other arguments
are
indicator argument,
comparison
mode operator:
The
FORMAT
INDICATE
AS
'lndicdtor_arg
argl
mode
arg2
components
are
All of the illustrated
required for a correct INDICATE
"INDICATE"
command
instructs the DataFlex
"sentence". The connand
command
the indicator_arg is the
processor to set an indicator;
indicator which will receive the TRUE or FALSE status that is the
from
"AS"
the
provides a syntax transition
result of the comparison;
argl and
establishment of the indicator to the comparison
itself;
arg2
must
be present to create a valid comparison; and
finally the
comparison
mode operator must
establish what test is to be applied to
argl and arg2 to arrive at the TRUE or .FALSE status result to be
applied to indicator_arg.
EXAMPLES:
AS age
GT 21
INDICATE
of_age
INDICATE
in_stock
INDICATE
credit
ok
AS
INDICATE
eureka
AS
strlngl
INDICATE
gotcha
AS
'ab*'
AS
GE order_amt
lnvt.qty
cust.ba1
IN
MATM
LT
strfng2
string2
third format for setting an indicator
To support this
established indicators.
the following syntax is provided:
The
GROUP,
ANY,
ALL.
AND,
OR and
cust.cr_1imit
uses
form
other previously
of the INDICATE command,
NOT
is used to define up to three other indicators which will be
tested together to estab7ish TRUE or FALSE status of the Indicator
"AS"
defined by the INDICATE comand. It replaces the transitional
"sentence".
the INDICATOR command definition
GROUP
in
argument
ANY creates a TRUE status for the indicator
if any of the up
ALL requires that all
to three indicators Included in GROUP Is TRUE.
of the fnd'lcators in the GROUP be TRUE to pass a TRUE status to the
indicator being set. The format for this form of INDICATE is:
""—"""————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
————————————————————————
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
CONDITIONAL
Manual
—
———————
D-23
EXEájTION
————————————
FORMAT:
INDICATE
Ind GROUP ANY/ALL [ind ind {ind}] {AND/OR ANY/ALL [fnd fnd]}
"C" and "J",
used
The bracket characterm
to enclose the
GROUPed indicators
part of the convnand syntax.
are a necessary
and up to 2 GROUPS
Each GROUP may contain up to 3 indicators,
(conjoined by and or OR) may be in one comand. Each group
ALL.
by ANY
be preceded
must
"
or
EXAMPLES:
INDICATE
us_car
would
set the
indicators
GM.
GROUP ANY [gm ford chrysler]
US CAR TRUE when
any
CHRYSLER was TRUE.
indicator
FORD,
or
[male citizen of_age]
all three indicators MALE, CITIZEN?
for the indicator CONSCRIPT to be set
INDICATE
conscript
would
require that
0F_AGE
be
TRUE
of the three
GROUP ALL
and
TRUE.
testing to be compounded
of an indicator to be
The AND and OR conjoiners
allow conditional
NOT enables
the sense
to set an indicator.
reversed for a particular test.
EXAMPLES:
INDICATE
SINGL,
and
and 0F_AGE
TRUE.
HANDSOM were
INDICATE
[squirrel possum]
set the indicator HUNT TRUE
SQUIRREL
or POSSUM were true, or
GROUP ANY
hunt
would
were
INDICATE
of_age] AND ANY [rich handsoml
TRUE only
if indicators MALE»
at least one of the indicators RICH and
e1ig1b1e
GROUP ALL Cma1e singl
would
set the indicator ELIGIBLE
TRUE.
spanish
would
TRUE,
BRAZIL
[bear 1n_season]
either of the indicators
OR ALL
if
if
both
BEAR
and
IN
SEASON
NOT braz11]
GROUP ALL [cent_amer] OR ALL [south_amer
indicator CENT_AMER were
set indicator SPANISH TRUE
TRUE and indicator
or if indicator SOUTH AMER were
if
were
FALSE.
on number
limitations
of indicators in a group and number of
by
in a comnand (3 and 2 respectively) can easily be overcome
and within
GROUP connandsg
a consecutive
use of successive INDICATE
the
can be reset many times to
same indicator
series of such connandm
space
memory
for many different indicators.
avoid consuming
The
groups
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataF1ex
EXEQJTION
CONDITIONAL
D-24
2.0
User's
Manual
—— — —
PREDEFINED
INDICATORS
predefined 'Indicators
Several
are available
as
part of the DataFlex
syntax:
TRUE
TRUE
FINDERR
FOUND
SEQEOF
TRUE
TRUE
SEQEOL
KEYPRESS
PAGEBREAK
TRUE
TRUE
MULTIUSER
TRUE
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
record returned to buffer on FIND
record returned to buffer on FIND
end of sequential
file
end of line
in sequential file
pressed
has been
(set by KEYMECK)
a key
new page
(set by F'AGEOECX)
is set multi-user
your
DataFlex system
no
indicators can be used at any point in a configuration to make
which
on the condition
sets
portions of the configuration dependent
be
The status of the indicator
even
can
indicator.
the
of
status
the
should
be done
INDICATE
connand,
with
great
this
but
using
the
reset
depend
on internal.settings
care, since other operations are likely to
indicators.
of the status of these
These
IF
TEST
IF test
is an alternate means of obtaining conditional execution.
Indicators provide a means of applying the results of a test to
The IF
lines throughout a configuration.
individual comand
numerous
test, on the other hand, allows a specific test to be created on a
command
or not the single comnand
line that determines whether
following the IF test on the same line will be executed.
The
What
is
an
IF test?
IF test
a
sets up a "comparison" sentence. In the sentencep
statement is made regarding the relationship of two items. They are
mode operator to see
compared
using a comparison
if they are equab
one greater than
the other, or any of several other relationships.
An
EXAMPLE:
car is bigger than a breadbox.
compares
a car and
This sentence
mode
This sentence
is "bigger".
A
a breadbox.
is TRUE.
Its
comparison
The objective
of the test is to arrive at a status result of TRUE or
FALSE.
For
executing a cormand line,
the purposes
of conditionally
comand
sentence
relat1onshfp between the
the
correctly
states
the
following the IF
is TRUE and the comand
variables, the sentence
command
will pass by the comíand
will be executed. A FALSE sentence
the
line.
on
IF
Copyright
line,
(C)
and
1984
go
Data
on
to the
Access
comand
on
Corporation
the line following
if
the IF
05/16/84
There
User's
2.0
DataFlex
eight
are
CONDITIONAL
Manual
for IF tests:
modes
comparison
less than
less than or equal to
to
greater than or equal to
greater than
not equal
text string inclusfon
text string matching
LT
LE
equal
EQ
GE
GT
NE
IN
MATCH
using
the IF testp a status of
of two
the outcome of the comparison
the selected mode of comparison.
When
The followíng
commands:
Now
are
examples
of
TRUE
which
comparisons
EALSE
5 GT 3
666 EQ 666
3 GT 5
666 EQ 999
999 LT
'El'
IN
'ABC*'
1000
1000
'ABC'
MATQ1
'A'
'A'
'ABCDEF'
LT
might
be
based
line
stated in
on
and
IF
999
IN 'XYZ'
MATQI
'B'
in place for the
are
is created
in the comnand
FALSE
or
arguments
IBUE
of the pieces
all
D-25
EXECUTION
full
command
sentence.
FORNAT:
IF argl
mode
ccmnand
arg2
components
are
required for a correct IF
illustrated
IF specifies
The coímand
the correct action to
"sentence".
to
the command processor; "argl" is a variable which will be compared
"argl" and "arg2" must be present
"arg2" according to the mode;
comparison
mode
and the
because
compare
one thing;
operator
you cannot
comnand
must
establish what test is to be applied;
will be executed
if the test is TRUE.
All of
the
command
EXAMPLES:
"Hoorayl" TO screen.5
then
the
greater than numberb
be executedD
DISPLAY
comand
placing "Hoorayt" in window
5 of pagename
"screen" in the configuration.
If numberl is
then
smaller than numberb
there will be no DISPLAY.
IF
In
numberl
this
DISPLAY
GT number2
numberl
example
is
if
wi71
(balance +
this case,
credit_l1miC
called "sale".
GOSUB will
the
IF
In
if
then
If
not
be
executed.
————————————"_"—""—"____"_ ""__====.======X
—————————————-————————————————
——————
Copyright
GOSUB sale
LE credit_lim1t
result of the expression is less than the
the configuration is sent to a subroutine
exceeds
credit_1imitp
(balance + purchase)
purchase)
the
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-26
DataFlex
EXECUTION
CONDITIONAL
=====—————————
IF
LT
payment
commands
Manual
User's
2.0
————~——————————
BEGIN
balance
END
Herep
of
IF
the
statement is being
of
a group
commands
enclosed
used
to
by BEGIN
control
and
the execution
END.
However.
mode operators
of the comparison
are self-explanatory.
IN scans
one string
for
"IN" and "MATM"
warrant further explanation.
When one
"A"
string; for example
is IN "DAC".
the presence
of another
string is present IN another, the test is TRUE.
Most
tests for one string equa1ling another.
If the strings are
A special case
exists for MATM where only
the IF test is TRUE.
part of the string needs to be tested for equality for the status to
be returned TRUE.
This partial string match is represented by the
"AB*"
where
means
asterisk convention used by most operating systems
to compare only the first two characters for anything that starts with
"AB"
regardless of the rest of the string.
If the first two
TRUE.
characters are "AB" the test is comMdered
MATCJ4
equal
USING
NOT
"sense" of any IF test can be reversed by placing the
of the IF comnand:
in front of the first argument
The
"NOT"
word
FORMAT:
IF
NOT
argl
mode
command
arg2
Point of interest...
When
the
internally
indicator
DataFlex
expands
"LASTIF"o
it
processor encounters an IF command
the statement as a macro using the pre-defined
example
A model/macro
is:
comand
MODEL:
IF
xx
GT yy
command
MACRO:
INDICATE
[LASTIF]
Copyright (c)
LASTIF
AS xx
GT yy
COMMAND
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-28
CONDITIONAL
EXEájTION
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
DataFlex
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
CONDITIONAL
Manua7
EXECUTION
——
D-27
-—-
———
.
STATUS
Two
File Indicator
forms
of the STATUS
from
a specified
record
indicator are available to indicate
file is active in the buffer.
whether
a
FORMATS:
INDICATE
ind_arg STATUS f1'lename_arg
The
indicator IND_ARG is returned
(record is foundL
IF STATUS
The comaná
and
f11ename_arg
FALSE
if
TRUE when the
file is active
the record is not found.
comand
is executed
on the line
(record is found), and not
found.
executed
ifif
the file is active
the record is not
STATUS indicator
is used in a manner similar to the FOUND
but is useful in situations 'inolving successive
predefined indicator,
FINDs
unlike the FOUND indicator, which
in a number of fi1em because
is set according to the last FIND attanpted, the STATUS indicator
returns a result which is specific to the file which is named in the
The
command.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
~~
Corporation
05/16/84
D-29
------------—~———————~
==Z::::
CONTROLLING
"
"~
_
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _
EXECUTION
==: :=:==:=
==""="=="=
SEQUENCE
=
———————————————~——~——
————————
Control comnand
configuratiom
error
tion procedures.
The
group
provides structured flow
message
handling, a debugging
of control
mode,
and
within
termina-
a
group's actions alter DataFlex's default
of the control comand
comand
sequence
lines execution.
of configuration's
(top to bottom)
comtands
Norma11y»
executed
in the order in which they are
are
used
are
in
Control cormands
to provide other sequencé»~
written.
and
whicM
once
may be written
for examp1e9 often-used processes
"called" for execution from any of several other points in a configuterm
The usual
is "subroutines".
for these called processes
ration.
and
Control commands can also provide conditional skipping of comands
The "target"
for these
groups
in a confíguratfon.
of comnands
coimands
that tells DataFlex Where to go and continue execution is
and is defined as any continuous string
of
called a "LABEL",
characters at the beginning of a line followed 'lmediately by a colon
begin
must
with a 1ettem which may be followed by up to
(: ). Labels
These
examples
(no spaces
and letters
79 numbers
are
or punctuation).
of labels (they must be the first characters on their lines):
Many
EXAMPLE:
command
LABEL:
EXAMPLELABEL:
command
P0 0
command
label may optionally be followed by a comand
aboveh or the following
in the first example
(as
on following
lfnes for readability
in the
A
(as
on the same line
comands
may be placed
second
example).
GOTO Command
execution of a conf'lgurat'lon to a labeled jocatlon
Execution
line,
of
other than the next comand
comand(s) following the "target" label will continue until the
control command again transfers
configuration ends, or another
7ocat1on.
As with all corwnandsp
the
execution to another 1abe11ed
by indicators
GOTO may be preceded
GOTO transfers
the
in the configuration
FORMAT:
GOTO
1abel_arg
EXAMPLES:
GOTO update
GOTO de1_rec
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
CONTROLLING
D-30
SEQUENCE
EXECUTION
DataF1ex
2.0 User's
Manua7
———
ON GOTO Command
transfers execution to a label that is part of a
label is selected for execution based on the
value of the integer variable or expression specified in the comnand.
The value of the integer variable
or expression will be used to count
into the label list to an ordinal position designated by the value of
NOTE:
In the event the expression evaluates to less
the argument.
than
greater than the number of labels in the 1iStp the comnand
lbe orignored
command
and the following
will execute. If this is an
will
happenL
your confierror condition in your application (should never
declare an error (see ERROR command) on the next line.
guration should
The
list
ON GOTO cormand
The
of labels.
FORMAT:
integer_arg
GOTO
ON
(ftems-l44)
GOTO
If
ITEMS-144
ON
1abe1_l
labe1_2
1abel_n
EXAMPLES:
that point.
from
there.
to BANANASg
peaches.
bananas
apples, orangesg
from
Ib go to the label APPLES and execute
ITEMS-144
equals 29 go tO ORANGES and execute
3, go to PEACHES»
for 4,
the expression equals
otherwise go to the next line.
equals
If
If
and
ON screen.3 GOTO
ERROR 198
Go to labels EXIT,
exit
saveit de1eteit
SAVEIT»
DELETEIT
according to the value in
Ip 2»
SCREEN.3
has a value other than
the window SCREEN.3.
If
or 39 declare Error #19& where Error #198 has been defined
for the circumstance in FLEXERRS.DAT
=
""""""_"_
GOSUB Command
elsewhere
procedure
in
transfers command execution to a 1abe11ed
is
the configuration with provision that when a RETURN comand
encountered
in the label1ed procedure, execution will return to the
command
on the
line imed1ate1y following the line on which the GOSUB
The RETURN comnand,
appears.
of course, is written at the end of the
called procedure. DataF1ex
supports nesting of up to 20 GOSUB
procedures
at one time (that is, a GOSUB whídí
itself calls a GOSUB,
and so on).
GOSUB
FORMAT:
GOSUB
1abe1_arg
EXAMPLES:
GOSUB my_routfne
GOSUB check_for_credit
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
0
DataF1ex
2.0
User's
===========.———
=~_ ~=" " ————
CONTROLLING
Manual
SEQUENCE
EXECUTION
D-31
—~~————~
—————————
—
ON GOSUB Command
whose
procedure
ON GOSUB comand
transfers execution to a 1abe11ed
with provision
in the comnand,
label is one of a 1ist of labels given
procedure9
in the 1abe1led
that when a RETURN command is encountered
1rm'ied'late1y
on the line
following
execution will return to the comand
The RETURN cotrmañd»
of course9
the line on which the GOSUB appears.
is written at the end of the called procedure. The label is selected
for execution based on the value of the integer variable or expression
The value of the integer variable
specified in the comnand.
or
expression will be used to count into the label list to an ordinal
NOTE:
In the event
position designated by the value of the argument.
the expression has a value during running less than I or greater than
and the
the number of labels in the listo the corrmand will be ignored
following cormnand will execute. If this is an error condition in your
declare
app1icatlcm (should never happen),
your configuration should
DataF1ex
(see
ERROR comand) on the next line.
supports
an error
GOSUB
at one time (that 1»»p a
nesting of up to 20 GOSUB procedures
which
itself calls a G0SU& and so on).
The
FORMAT:
ON
RETURN
GOSUB
fnteger_arg
label
_1
1abel_2
1abel_n
Command
The RETURN comand
a GOSUB command
to
is
used
cause
at the end of a labeled
the execution to transfer
procedure
back
to
of the control transfer.
If RETURN has no argumentg
line following the
will transfer back to the comand
called the procedure.
line which originally
then
called by
the origin
execution
GOSUB command
an argument.
Valid arguments
for the RETURN comand
can have
This allows the
in the configuration.
other labeled comands
within a configuratiom
chaining of labeled procedures
or conditional
at locations other than the line
branching to labeled procedures
following the calling GOSUB.
RETURN
are
FORMAT:
RETURN
RETURN
after
// return to line
label _arg
// return to
GOSUB
a
labeled
connand
EXAMPLE:
[rainy]
RETURN
d1fferent_p1ace
RETURN
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
eAIN
DataFlex 2.0 User's
SEQUENCE
EXECUTION
CONTROLLING
D-32
Manual
Command
the
terminates the execution of one configuration and begins
as if an
execution of the configuration named in the command argumentp
operating system command were being executed. All data files (random
used
and sequential)
in the configuration containing the MAIN command
are
closed. All integer variables used by the terminating configurafor use by the succeeding
with their va1uesp
tion remain avai1ab1eg
one.
after they have been redeclared in the succeeding
configuration,
CHAIN
the CHAIN command may be either a literal string
within a pair of quotation marks,
or a string variamay contain as many
the argument
literal contents of system
allow in a command (typically
characters as your operating
will The
up to 128 charactersg counting spaces).
literal string and the
the
contents of the variable will be interpreted in the same manner:
characters preceding the first space will be considered the rootname
append
and DataFlex will
the .Fl-X
configuratiom
of a DataFlex
The characters
following the first space
extension and execute
and preceding the second
will be retrieved by the first CMDLINE
(see
command
explanation of CMDLINE in this
in the configuration
the
are
following the second space,
section).
there
characters
If command
any)
CMDLINE
up to
second
will
those
characters
retrieve
(if
the third space9 and so on.
The argument
of
enclosed
entirely
The
ble.
it.
FORMATS:
{string
CHAIN
"config_name
CHAIN
string_var
CHAIN
"inventory"
next_config
...
string}"
EXAMPLES:
//Execute configuration INVENTORY.FLX
//Execute first substring in variable
//NEXT_CONFIG
and pass
following substrings
//Execute configuration
"accts_rec LST: cust_name"
CHAIN
OAIN
//ACCTS
REC.FLX
and pass
CUST__NAME
LST:
//substrlngs
——————
MOLINE
Command
command
arguments
entered at
configuration,
executing a DataFlex
level as part of the initial command entry line
operating system
use,
can be stored to string
with the
variables for later repetitive
CMDLINE
command.
This permits certain run-time choices to be made by
system)
and
entered without separate
the operator (or the menu
prompting
from
within the configuration.
When
the
EXAMPLE:
FLEX
MYREPORT
CON:
and runs
the configuration called
until a later point in
is not executed
the execution of the configuration when a CMDLINE command
and stores
retrieves that argument
It to a string (andvariable
used,
which
in
is subsequently read by the configuration
this casep to direct the report's output to the screen).
Executes
the
"MYREPORT".
Copyright
(C)
1984
FLEX.COM
The "CON:
Data
Access
file
"
Corporation
07/18/84
OataF1ex
2.0
User's
Manual
CONTROLLING
EXECUTION
SEQUENCE
D-33
CMDLINE
will retrieve arguments' with no limitation as to number from
the last prior-executed operating system command or the last prior
áU\IN
whichever
Arguments
command,
was executed
more
recently.
are
separated
from
each
aboveb and, once
other by spaces
(per the example
by
aqDLINEp
icmger
from
are
no
same
SOWCéo
retrieved
available
the
having
been
argument,
replaced by the next succeeding
if any.
FORMAT:
CMDLINE
strfng_arg
CMDLINE
output_dev1ce
EXAMPLE:
DEBUG
===========
" "~" "
===
=
===
Command
which
a mode command
toggles on and off from its default
When on,
cause
of "OFF".
the line number in the
compiled
.FLX
being executed
configuration
to display on the
screen
as
is being executed whenever
the configuration is run.
Constants
and variables
also be displayed as they are declared
The
command
the DEBUG command is the
in the configuration.
Macro
Processor is also
intermediate FCODE output of the DataFlex
DEBUG
is
condition
it will
ftle
it
displayed with the line number
is compiled. Natura11y?
a
finished configuration
in
left
when
command
=====——~~———
ERROR Command
if
will
first
a
this
ready
containing a
not normally
for running by operators.
configuration
command
would
====
~
DEBUG
be
===
The trapping of the
Error reporting is done using the ERROR command.
System
error must be done prior to the ERROR command executiom
errors are trapped by DataFlex. The system errors (those under lOó)
"RUN TIME ERRORS'4
under
and may also be
are
listed in the appendix
FLEXERRS.DAT,
read
directly from the DataFlex database
Errors
file
which
occur during execution must be trapped by the configuration.
The
argument
is
of the ERROR command is the number of the error which
be declared, specified
either 1iteral1y in the command or by the
INTEGER)
The
use of a(n
variable.
errors are defined in the DataFlex
FLEXERRS.DAT
Custom
messages
may
supplied with the system.
to
error
file
to the file by use of the DataFlex configuration FLEXERRS.
numbers
lOó.
The
than
added
wil7
using error
greater
error message(s)
then
be displayed on the screen
on the last line
the ERROR command
if
with the number of the message (on an error
is ever executed
be
added
=========———~——~
Copyright
""" 1984
(C)
— ==
Data
=======
Access
=
—~~——————~——============
~ ~~—~~~—~=~——————~~—~~~=="====
Corporation
05/16/84
CONTROLLING
D-34
DataFlex
SEQUENCE
EXE(1JTION
2.0 User's
Manual
——-—————
—————————————————————————————
—————
condition).
DataF1ex
Such
error
configurations
will then be "standard" to
with the FLEXERRS.DAT
file.
message(s)
run
all
FORMAT:
ERROR
A'
EXAMPLE:
ERROR 4
would
display
the
message
"SEEK
TO
UNWRITTEN
EXTENT
(CP/M
ERROR)."
CLEARWARNING
Comnand
and
Warnings
ERROR comand
the line and
automattca11y
messages
can be
removed
deletes
whatever
printed
executed
after
line of the CRT using the
prints spaces to
It CLEARWARNING
is
was displayed there.
an ACCEPT comand.
It has no argument.
on
with
the last
CLEARWARNING.
FORMAT:
CLEARWARNING
ABORT
Command
Menu.
Any open
data
returns control to the DataF1ex
files are
is done,
closed when ABORT is executed. However no "cosmetic" cleanup
when this
would
be in order in most
cases
so at least a CLEARSCREEN
ABORT has
from
command
a screen-oriented
configuration.
is executed
ABORT
no
argument.
FORMAT:
ABORT
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
=======FZZZZZZZ¶EZZZ:
0"35
:""::::7:::::[:"I7I::::::Z::"
=====
BLOCKS
::::=Z====
AND LOOPS
——————————
—————
== ==== =
,
provide a means of executing
DataFlex Structured Control connands
and/or in loops. The parts of
parts of a configuration conditionally
under
a configuration
control of Structured Control commands are
called "blocks", and they are made up of a sequential series of
which
placed
between
commands
are
the "beginning" command (e.g.p
UNTIL,
(END,
FOR),
and the "ending" command
BEGIN,
REPEAT? WHILE,
and
LOOP).
control whethem
Indicators and parameters
of the comnands
the
how many times3
blocks are executed.
The
BEGIN
END
-
Cand
of the structured control commands is BEGIN - END. The
the
until
start of a group of commands that are executed
is encountered. Indicators and "IF'S" can be used to
do not
The BEGIN
and END comands
test both BEGIN and END commands.
After execution of the line containing the END
support arguments.
command,
execution goes to the next line of the configuration.
The simplest
BEGIN
defines
an END comíand
FORMAT:
BEGIN
COINAND
GROUP
END
EXAMPLE:
[found]
BEGIN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1ist.name TO screen.]
1ist.address TO screen.2
TO screen.3
list.city_state
END
is TRUE,
If [FOIJND] FALSE,
they
If it is
REPEAT
-
UNTIL
the DISPLAY commands
will be skipped.
will
all
be
executed.
———————
Command
a group
of commands in a loop
construct executes
condition is met or created, inclusive.
If the
the
condition is already met at the time execution first encounters
1OOPg the loop
will still be executed
at least once.
The REPEAT
UNTIL
UNTIL
a specified
FORMAT:
REPEAT
commands
UNTIL
arg
mode
arg
————-———
————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
BLOCKS
D-36
DataF1ex
AND LOOPS
2.0 User's
Manual
—
——
EXAMPLE:
REPEAT
MOVE
(count+1) TO count
count
UNTIL
count EQ 5
REPEAT until
The loop would
SHOW
REPEAT
COUNT
equa11ed
(inclusive).
5
LOOP Command
-
LOOP construct
REPEAT
requires that execution
is a loop which
continue until a conditional statement (indicator or IF command)
line terminates the
within the cormand group or on the LOOP comand
processing and causes an exit.
The
FORMAT:
REPEAT
connands
conditional
comnands
LOOP
or indicator-contro11ed
exit
connand
EXAMPLES:
REPEAT
SHOW
INPUT
[KEY.ESCAPE]
"*"
"Enter data: "
some_data
ABORT
[KEY.RETURNJ
LOOP
only if RETURN
is pressed.
Loop
key
REPEAT
CALCULATE
IF count
(count
GE lOó
key
is pressed.
Abort
if
ESCAPE
TO count
+
GOTO a routine
l)
LOOP
=========
Copyright
========—
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corpciration
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
BLOCKS
Manual
AND LOOPS
D-37
———————————
WHILE
-
END Command
establishes a test like an IF command which is
The END establishes
the end of
the test becomes FALSE.
checks
the
after execution of which the process
the comnand group,
WHILE condition,
and
is TRUE, loops back to the beginning of the
it
continues on with execution of comands
group, and if it Ís'FALSE.
"IF"
following the END statement.
If upon first execution, the executed
(not
at
condition is FALSE, the comnand group will be skipped
comand
The WHILE
executed
until
if
all).
FORMAT:
WHILE
arg_l
mode
arg-2
comiands
END
(see
mode
mode
is an IF comparison
arg_l is a variab1eg
and arg_2
is a string, date or
discussion of IF commandL
numeric
value. or a variable whose value is reset within the
loop.
Where
EXAMPLE:
WHILE
in_stock GT O
INPUT sale
CALC (in stock
- sale)
END
FOR
-
FROM
TO
-
-
TO
ín_stock
LOOP Command
This is a loop construct that has a specified range for its operation.
execution for a certain number of repetitions defined
It is based on(FROM)
(TO)
and ending
by starting
integer limits.
If execution first
encounters the loop while the value of the integer is outside the
once
limits in the comand. the command group will still execute
before exiting.
FORMAT:
FOR
1nteger_var
FROM
argl
TO arg2
comnands
LOOP
Where
integer variab1ep
integer_var is any previously-declared
or
constants, expressionsp
arg_l and arg_2 is are numeric
variables.
and
EXAMPLES:
FOR
timer FROM I to 500
timer TO an_integer
MOVE
LOOP
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-38
BLOCKS
DataFlex
AND LOOPS
2.0
User's
Manual
+
in the Structured Control command
or IF commands for multi-level
should not be used
conditional execution.
Structured Control comands
because
the
in the ENTRY sections of the ENTER and ENTERGROUP macrcm
which
BACKFIELD
key
is capable of defeating the initial comand
controls entry to the loop.
All
group
BÉGÍÑ7
can
Copyright
LOOP, and END comands
be used
with indicators
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
,
05/16/84
===="============------------—
_
-=
__====
0"39
——————
"
—
DIRECT
-======2==
CONTROL
OF THE
_
CONSOLE
=Z====Z===
——
Console
Input/Output (1/0) command group provides a facility for
and to perform a
directly addressing the CRT device (terminal screen)
useful in the development
range
of CRT operations which are sometimes
Before any of the console I/O group of
applications.
of more advanceA
be considered whether
commands
might be easier
is uséd» it should
imaging
facility
or more direct to utilize DataFlex's powerful screen
which
is available at the beginning of any and every configuration.
than
The console I/O command
screen
group
less
efficient
generally
is
images
to elaborate displays, and is intended for use
for moderate
only in exceptional situations.
The
it
independent
I/O command group are totally
actions of the Console
functions
of the particular codes and routines which activate screen
DataFlex
computer
acquires and
on any particular
or terminal.
maintains system-specific data about your CRT when the SETSCREEn
is run. The data from SETSCREEn is stored in the file
utility
each
FILELIST.CFG.
about
Data
is read from FTLELIST.CFG
your system
system-specific
to provide the necessary
is initialized
time DataFlex
data
for the execution of the comiands.
The
SHOW Command
SHOW command
provides the facility to output data to the CRT
output is directed
device. It will not output to the printer even
The data
output to
to the printer (see WRITE and WRITELN commands).
numeric,
the CRT"may be of any type (constant, variab1e»
strin>
which
The SHOW command
defines
acts on an argument
expression, etc.).
be
must
on the CRT.
Literal arguments
the data that is to be "shown"
and produce
embedded
a display of
quotation marks,
in single or double
and
the
argument
itself. Arguments without quotes are variables,
produce
Multiple arguments
a display of the contents of the variable.
No carriage
be used.
can
return is output at the end of execution of
Two consecutive SHOW command
lines will output data
a SHOW command.
to the same 1ineg one after the other, left to right, on the screen.
80 characters.
be longer than
Literal strings to be SHOWn cannot
The
if
FORMAT:
{argument
SHOW argument
...
argument}
EXAMPLES:
"p "
SHOW name ". " address
cIty'
by a
Display the va?ue of the string variable NAME, fo77owed
and a @ácEjb
then the value of the variable ADDRESSp
coma
followed by a coma and a spácév followed by the value of the
at the cursor position.
variable CITY on the screen
(continued next page...)
===
=
———————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-40
CONTROL
OF THE
DataFlex 2.0 User's
CONSOLE
Manual
———
(continued
EXAMPLES
from
SHOW "Hei1o9
"
Display Hello,
PERS_NFME
pers_name
the contents of the variable
at the cursor position.
followed
the
on
page)
preceding
by
screen
"Input today's date
Display Input today's date
cursor position.
SHOW
(MM/DD/YY):
(MM/DD/YY):
"
on
the
at the
screen
SHOW (12.70+TOTAL)
Display the results of adding
variable named TOTAL on the
to the value of the
at the cursor position.
12.70
screen
SHOWLN Command
This command is the same as SHOW, except that SHOWLN outputs a
outputs
that
carriage return after displaying all of the arguments
giving the cursor a new line on which to disp1ayg
to the teminab
SHOWLN connands.
is useful, among other
including succeeding
of output on the screen, which
thingsg for displaying vertical columns
is usually done in a loop.
it
It
FORMAT:
SHOWLN argument
{argument
...
argument}
EXAMPLE:
WHILE
LT 500
area_code
Code
SHOWLN "Area
"
area_code
"processing completed"
LOOP
would
reading "Area
display successive lines on the screen
Code
processing completed" until the value of
500»
where
AREA_CODE equa11ed
or exceeded
represents
the value of the individual area code.
—————————
INPUT
INPUT
The
to
Cmmand
a
comand
variable,
accepts
named in
keyboard
comnand
the
input
and
argument.
data
received
be INPUT only
can
INPUT data is in
assigns the
Data
Once the
keyboard.
the
and by no other means.
from
the
under
upon or processed
variable
can be acted
the variable,
INPUT
functions with all valid
name within the configuration.
the input data does not match the type of the
variable types, and
be declared (e.g.,
an
an error wÍT1
variable named in the argument,
INTEGER
type variable is named and alpha characters are input from the
keyboard9
an error will
occur).
After entry of the dátáo any Flex-key
will cause
to be loaded, although the RETURN key is the usual key
to use for the purpose.
it
if
if
it
FORMAT:
INPUT
Copyright (c)
'optional
1984
Data
prompting string'
Access
Corporation
var_arg
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
DIRECT
Manual
================——===_———————~———~—
EXAMPLES:
OF THE
CONTROL
D-41
CONSOLE
"""
—————
-
—
" todays_date
"Enter the date (MM/DD/YY):
at the current cursor
Display Enter the date (MM/DD/YY):
posltiom pause execution, and store subsequently-keyed
under
response
the variable TODAYS DATE
INPUT
INPUT quantity
Halt execution and store
variable QUANTITY.
GOTOXY
keyboard
under
input
the
Command
specified in
the CRT cursor to a position on the screen
providing control of the location of the
to the connanch
actions of other console I/O commands on the CRT device. GOTOXY
positioning;
other commands must be
provides no other function except
used
after the cursor has been moved to the desired
to do something
location.
GOTOXY sends
the arguments
FORMAT:
GOTOXY
Where
argl arg2
argl is the
is to
be
placed
LINE
on
the
and
is the
arg2
COLUMN
where
the cursor
CRT.
EXAMPLES:
GOTOXY
O O
Position
screen
the cursor at the
(line Op column O).
GOTOXY
12
range
by
left
upper
(HOME)
of
the
40
Position the cursor on line
screen).
24-1irm BO-column
The valid
determined
extreme
column
l2ó
for values of the line
the system configuration
and
40
column
(exact center of
a
arguments
is
SETSCREEN.
defined in
as
——————
CLEARXY
Command
CLEARXY command
position
clears from the coordinate screen
to the end of the screen. After
specified in the command argument
This
coordinates.
execution, the cursor is positioned at the argument
command
must
will cause an exit
not be used within a named PÁGÉ? as
PAGE
whatever
from
is invoked
in.
The
it
it
FORMAT:
argí arg2
Clear the screen
from
1984
Access
CLEARXY
~ +
Copy'right
Line argl.
column
arg2.
———————
(c)
Data
Corporation
05/16/84'
CONTROL
DIRECT
D-42
————
DataFlex
CONSOLE
OF THE
2.0
User's
Manual
————-————
———
EXAMPLES:
CLEARXY
O O
Clear the entire
CLEARXY
Clear
13
from
CLEARSCREEN
(see
below).
O
the beginning of line 13 to the
half of a 24-1ine screen).
bottom
of the
(bottom
screen
CLEARSCREEN
screen
Commánd
and sends
clears all printable characters from the screen
No argument
is used with this
the cursor to the "HOA" position.
CLEARSCREEN
command.
FORMAT:
CLEARSCREEN
Command
KEYMECK
a KEYCHECX connand
is execute6 a predefined indicatorg KEYPRESS9
TRUE
a key was pressed
at any time since input was last
(The
accepted
character generated
to a window or an ACCEPT stat«nent.
KEYCHECX
key was pressed
by whatever
is useful
is discarded.)
In
long processing cycles and reports.
When
is set
if
primarily
such
line with
has
been
for interrupting
is recormended
such
as
to display a prompt to the screen
KEYCHECX may be followed on the same
TO INTERRUPT".
KEYPRESS
which
comnand
another
is TRUE (a key
is executed
KEYPRESS
is FALSE (no key has been
pressed), and skipped
The KEYPRESS
indicator may be used at any time after
stateL so that
of a KEYCHECX comnand (to set
uses,
"PRESS
ANY
pressed).
execution
intervening
it
KEY
comnands
be
may
its
unconditionally
before the
KEYCHECX
on the state of KEYPRESS.
responds
the same to any key
does
not respond
to CTRLg SHIFT) or
executed
whose
execution depends
not distinguish among keys;
generates a character (it
command
does
if
if
which
BREAK).
it
FORMAT:
{optional
KEYQIECK
following
command}
EXAMPLES:
//Set KEYPRESS to TRUE or FALSE.
unconditionally
//tO execute
on KEYPRESS
//executes depending
KEYQÍECK
commands
[KEYPRESS]
KEYQIECK
a key
If
NOTE:
If
it
KEYCHECK
comand
GOSUi3 shutdown
has been
pressed,
comands
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
not be
branching
should
is desired to control
execute
Access
subroutine
under
used
by keypresses
Corporation
SHUTDOWN.
the REPORT macro.
in the REPORT
05/16/84
DataF1ex
DIRECT
Manual
User's
2.0
CONTROL
="=======——_———————————
OF THE
CONSOLE
macro,
the appropriate subroutine under the name RPT.KEYPRESS
ending
be defined in the configuration,
with the special form
RETURN RPT.LOOP.
RETURN connand
for the REPORT macro,
INKEY
D-43
— ———~——————~——
should
of
~
Ccmnand
the
into
inputs one character
It
execution
not display the character on the screen. It
aríd
key
is pressed,
is very useful for
of the configuration until a
be used
cannot
The cotmand
requires an argument;
this purpose.
without one.
from
INKEY
does
keyboard
an argument.
does
halt
it
FORMAT:
INKEY
argument
EXAMPLES: .
INKEY
a_key
Store the first
variable A_KEY.
SCREENMODE
key
input to the
keyboard
under
the
Command
SCREENMODE command
screen
sets the high- and low-intensity
The
as established
attributes
in the DataFlex SETSCREEn utility.
until another SCREENMODE comnand is executed, or
attribute will remain
a PAGE is displayed,
at which time the attribute will be set to low
There
SCREENMODE does
are
intensity.
not affect display of a PAGE.
no arguments
for this connand
other than the two shown below:
The
FORMAT:
SCREENMODE
I
sets
high
SCREENMODE
2
sets
low
Data
Access
intensity
intensity
——————-——————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Corporation
05/16/84
D-44
DIRECT
CONTROL
OF THE
CONSOLE
DataFlex 2.0 User's
Manual
=========
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
05/16/84
=============_"________"______"__""______""_
——
: :::-:
D-45
__
==="==="==
MANIPULATING
: :::::::::
RECORDS
=~
"""""
""""""""""""""""========—====""""""""
The
comnands
DataFlex Database
delete records in the database,
between
and among
records.
provide the facility to finch save
and to establish
"relationships"
and
that
individual DataFlex commands far exceeds
of these
making
"Flex"
in conventional high level 1angUages>
sma1]erg
and
more
easier to maintain than
configurations
consistent
application development
techniques.
alternative
The power
ava11ab1e
Database
Commands
and
FILEDEF
connands
linked to data
DataFiex Database
are integrally
FILEDEF
and
dictionary information established with the DataFlex
These
AUTODEF ut11ities.
a dictionary
of
create
utilities
specifications
for a data structure and stores it on disk. The data
dictionary contains data on each file's number of fields, field length
decimal
and type9
fie1dm name including drive
formatting on numeric
reference, multi-user statum key index structure, etc. All other
DataFlex
in the
operations can then "look up" the file specifications
needed.
data
This precludes the necessity for
dictionary whenever
data
and substant1a?1y
reduces
each
program
to maintain file-specific
time.
application development
The
Understanding
Record
Buffers
One
in your DataFlex
files resides on the disk drives.
The place in
record from each file can reside in RAM memory.
When a
where
memory
this record resides is ca?1ed the RECORD BUFFER.
record is read from the disk to the record buffer, data can be
be
The record
can then
in the buffer.
extracted from and/or changed
The buffer
does
its
is where DataFlex
written back to disk (SAVED).
work
on a given record.
The data
ACTIVE
record buffer contains a record that has been previously
the
database.
That is, the record exists both on disk and
have
been made
to
in main memory in exactly the same form. If changes
An edited
an active
that record is considered EDITED.
record bUfferB
in order to retain the
record MUST be saved back to the database
An edited record is
which
been made.
changes
have
still active.
An ACTIVE
from
read
record buffer contains either no data or data that does
(specifica]1y» newly entered data
exist in the database
A CLEAR record buffer is an
which
has not been
SAVEd to disk).
at all. In a CLEAR
inactive record that has had no data PUT into
and date
fields are zerop and all ASCII fields
buffer all numeric
When an inactive
but not clear record buffer is
contain spaces.
SAVEIL
be created.
a new record will
An
not
INACTIVE
(as yet)
it
—————————————————————————————
1984 Data
Access
Corporation
Copyright (c)
OÉJl6/84
.
MANIPULATING
D-46
DataFlex
RECORDS
2.0
User's
—
FILE
Manual
———————
MANIPULATION
cocrmandm
like ENTER and
the highest level of the DataF1ex
SAVEing
and
of the details of the record buffers, FINDing,
these
The way in which
CLEARing
operations
are taken care of for you.
done
are
is completely transparent to the operator and the configwhen you have
But
a requirement that necessitates
manipulaurator.
the basics of file
ting the files manually, you must understand
comandsg
When using the manual
records are NOT
manipulation.
file You must ensure
and cleared.
saved,
that these
automatically re1atech
operations are done, and done in the proper sequence.
When using
REPORT,
all
There
four basic
are
I)
FINDING:
Read
2)
EDITING:
Read
the
The
records,
Create
4)
DELETING:
Delete existing
for
b)
C)
d)
FINDING
database:
modify
them,
and
write
them
back
records.
records.
record is:
CLEAR
the record buffer.
the KEY data into the record buffer.
FIND the record by the KEY
field.
0ptiona11yg
RELATE the found
record.
for
data
data
EDITING
an
out of the record buffer.
If the FIND
be in the buffer and the record
will
existing
record is:
above)
FIND the record (see
to edit.
Put
new data
into the record buffer
SAVE the record.
fields
to edit the record.
done
after a "put" to an active record buffer to
disk.
Continuing processing after editing an active
record without SAVEing
will cause Error 82v and the file will
to be REINDEXed.
A SAVE must
the
data
to
be
it
The
The
for
procedure
CREATING
a)
b)
CLEAR the record
Put
the data into
C)
SAVE
procedure
a)
b)
to
Put
procedure
c)
new
a
After a FIND you may get
is unsuccessfuK the KEY
buffer will be INACTIVE.
a)
b)
a
database.
CREATING:
procedure
on
records for reference only.
3)
a)
The
operations to perform
manual
a
fields.
the record.
for
(C)
have
is:
buffer.
the record buffer
DELETING
a
FIND the record (see
DELETE the record.
Copyright
reccmd
move
1984
Data
Access
record is:
above)
to delete.
Corporation
05/16/84
O
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
Manual
MANIPULATING
RECORDS
D-47
—————
OPEN
=
Conunand
=
files associated with a file
available for DataFlex
operations.
for information on df_fi1ename).
Spec1f1caI1y»
when a
data
file, and all
file is OPENedg the referenced
associated key index files are opened,
buffer space is autcmat1cal1y
and upon
allocated in memorµ
completion of the OPEN operatiom all
files are available for on-line processing.
An
OPEN command
"df_fi]ename"
(See
the
FILEDEF
and
database
Kay files)
documentation
The
OPEN canmand(s)
and
be executed
must
be addressed
by
can
all
makes
(data
should be at the beginning of the configuration
before the flies associated wIth the df_fi1ename
other commands.
FORMAT:
OPEN
fi1e_name_arg
OPEN is the
{lndex.n}
"ff1e_name_arg"
is the "SHORT
(created in
of the file to be 0PENed,p and n
be
represents the number of an index that may optimally
loaded
to
into a memory "buffer" to speed sequential access
records in a fi?e.
Where
NAME"
command,
FILEDEF)
EXAMPLE:
OPEN
lnvantory
OPEN
personnel
1ndex.2
abovep
the "index.2" option after
In the second example
df_fi1ename "personnel" elects to load the second index
database
file fnto a memory buffer.
the
for that
optional Index buffering only provides a speed improvment when
Random
the access to records Is sequential, as in a report.
recordm wIll
operations, such as transaction entry to non-sequent1a1
not benefit from buffering.
The
usefulness of the index buffering option is, as with most other
The number
of the index is established
options, subject to tradeoffs.
as previously
created in the FILEDEF funcin the index definitions
locations required by FIND
tion.
If the option is selected, record
and other accessing
operations are read directly from the computeMs
active m«nory (RAM) rather than via a separate (slower) disk access
and file-read
operation.
The
The tradeoff
when
using
record buffering is the sacrifice of a portion
by this
RAM that is consumed
of tho computerG
process. The overall
RAM capacity of
number
of files opened,
size of your configuration.
determines
how (ñüch RAM is available
and so om
over
your computerg
and above
what
is required to carry out the applicationG basic
the index-buffering option is
functions, and will dictata whether
worthwhile, or even possible.
+_
_
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
~ »
—————
Corporation
————————
——————~——
05/16/84
MANIPULATING
D-48
DataF1ex
RECORDS
2.0 User's
Manual
—
environment, the optional
proper1y9
indexes
will maintain
are updated.
In a multi-user
and DataFlex
buffered indexes
index
even
buffering is allowed
in those cases where
a special
configuration source
files are being compilech
the compiler macro processor must be resident on the
The needed
device on which the compiler is located.
file is
"OF FILENAME"
established
in the
is
referenced as OF FILENAME.FD.
—
FILEDEF
Its name is maintained
utility when the file is defined.
wIthout assuming
separately so that the ".FO" file can be addressed
attached to the data file.
the drive specification
When
file
logged
DataFlex
needed
by
—————————
FIND Command
The FIND command
is used to get a desired specific record from a data
FIND
data
uses
base
on disk and place
into the record buffer.
keyboard
placed
input) to
in the record buffer (normally by prompted
indexg
search
a key
"find" a match and get the record. For examp1e9
maintenance
for a
situation,
the operator could be prompted
in a
number,
ID
some kiñdv an account
part code9 etc.
it
file
record
or "key" of
is placed
to the prompt
entered in response
for a match (or other relationship--see
by the FIND command.
performed
Data
search
The
All
FIND
FIND command
segments
in
operation,
into the buffer
below)
is
and
a
MODES
must
reference an existing index or record number.
the index will be used to locate the record with the
including record numbem
if included in the index.
by which
FIND must
be given a parameter
to execute. Do we want to
search
for a record with an exact match to the "key% or do we want
with a "key" greater than the value entered to the buffer?
the record
Five MODEs are
is called the MODE of the FIND.
This parameter
available:
LT
LE
Less
Less
EQ
GE
Equal
Than
than or
Greater
Greater
GT
than
Equal
or
to
Equal
to
Than
Finally, we must define what index is to be used for the FIND
This is specified by the number of the index to be usecb
operation.
where
(see
n
as INDEX.m
File Definition)
as defined in the database
is the index number.
FORMAT:
filename BY INDEX.n
is a number between
l and 5 (for B-bit computers) and or
I and ID (for 16-blt computers). INDEX.BATM
The index
must
RECNUM may be used
alternatively.
first have
been
definition.
defined in the database
FIND
mode
Where
n
between
~
Copyright
(C)
""
1984
Data
_
Access
Corporation
~
05/16/84
2.0 User's
DataFlex
MANIPULATING
Manual
RECORDS
D-49
EXAMPLES:
FIND
EQ
Find
a
equal
FIND
lnvt BY INDEX.2
record in the INVT file by
to the data in the buffer.
BY
GE member
The filename In
OPEN command.
number
with
2
a
key
INDEX.3
Find a record in the MEMBER file
the value is equal to or greater
NOTE:
INDEX
command
the
INDEX
by
than
number
previously
must
3
where
in the buffer.
data
the
have
been
OPENed
with the
command/MODE
used
GE is probably the most
combination.
It
retrieve a record based on an exact match with data in the
next
match
bufferD
is found, the
record following the value
or if no
of the buffer data.
The
FIND
will
result of executing a FIND operation is shown by either of two
FINDERR
FINDERR
and FOUND.
will be TRUE when the FIND
indicators:
operation is not successful by the specified MODE. FOUND will be set
TRUE when
a record is found
according to the specified MODE. These
indicators-can be used to direct the action of the configuration based
on the outcome
of the FIND command execution.
The
form
An alternate
of
number
is not known.
FIND
the
connand
can
be
where
used
the
index
FORMAT:
FIND
mode
FIND
GT
fi1ename,f1e1dname
EXAMPLE:
The
fi1ename.fie1dname
of
of
coursep
when
the
works
FIND command
only
commands,
specifically:
when
it
3.
CLEAR the record
MOVE the finding
Execute
the FIND.
4.
Execute
I.
2.
The
must,
occur at runtime
error will
The
INVENTORY.DESCRIP
following
INPUT
CLEAR
name
[FINDERR]
—
be
a
matched
definite
or
not»
example
wish
of this
to find:
"
an
sequence
related
tO).
FIND.
sequence:
find_name
people
TO
MOVE find_name
FIND EQ geop1e.lname
———·
Copyright (c)
you
an
within
is
successful or unsuccessful
on
represent
"Enter the
occurs
buffer.
data
(data to
conditionally
commands
If it
be indexed.
command
is executed.
1984
people.lname
GOTO no_match
-.——————
.. .
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-50
DataFlex
RECORDS
MANIPULATING
I*
STRING
START:
[FOUND]
l
pause
ma'í1list
CLEARSCREEN
CLEAR
mai11ist
INPUT
"Enter
FIND
User's
Manual
EXAMPLE:
CONFIGURATION
OPEN
2.0
GE
NAME
mai11ist
BY
//
//
//
//
BEGIN
"
to display:
configuration
//
starts
//
declare variable
//
opens
//
clear the
//
clear before
mail1ist
//
search
file
screen
mai1list,name
// get keyboard
INDEX.Z
PAUSE
for
FINDing
input
match
is set TRUE automatically by a
successful FIND operation
here
from
Commands
to the next END are
executed
only if the FIND was successful
FOUND
SHOWLN
mai71ist.address
SHOWLN
mai]1ist.cty
st_zip
END
//
//
//
//
//
IFINDERRI
SHOWLN "No
INPUT
[KEY.ESCAPE]
RETURN
"PRESS
****
ERROR
TRAP ****
is set TRUE automatically by an
unsuccessful FIND operation
The
only if the
is executed
next comand
FIND
attempt was unsuccessful (no match).
FINDERR
names
matching: " mai11ist.name
TO FIND
ANOTHER.
TO QUIT"
PAUSE
ABORT
GOTO START
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
RECORDS
MANIPULATING
Manual
D-51
=
_________
SAVE Command
DataFlex SAVE connand takes data in a record buffer and "saves"
on the comand
disk. The comnand can have mu1itip1e arguments
OPEN and relationships
are
exist, all files
multiple
line.
files
If
(see
related to the file being saved will be automatical1y ATTAMed
The
on
below)
and
it
saved.
FORMAT:
{f11ename_arg2
SAVE
f1iename_argl
SAVE
SAVE
inventory
client transaction
...
f11ename_argn}
EXAMPLES:
NOTE:
The
fi1ename(s)
OPEN command.
in the
system
command
must
previously
have
been
OPENed
with the
The action
placed
in
of the SAVE comnand
the buffer, and what
varies
on
how
has
based
happened
to
it
there.
has
it
been
arrived
buffer that has data moved into
...see below)
(window another fi1ek will simply move the data
into a newly created record on disk.
(or
An empty
from
any
data
once
CLEAR
source
the buffer
If a record is FOUND (past
modified (e.g.p by keyboard
altered data) will be SA\lEd
originally
stored.
it
from
and the data
in
is then
of FIND).
entry) then the buffer (containing the
back
was
to the same record in which
it
tense
it
of editing in
is important to remember that the process
Thereforep
occurs when data is moved to the record buffer.
made to the database
a SAVE comnand
on disk until
is
no changes-are
executed
is an
after the modification of the data in the buffer.
It
error to edit a record and not SAVE
NOTE:
DataFlex
It
it.
SAVERECORD
Command
SAVERECORD saves
ATTAM
fs executed
is the
argument
a
record
and
of the
from
its buffer to the disk. No automatic
only the file that
files are saved;
no related
command
is
saved.
FORMAT:
SAVERECORD
NOTE:
The
with the
fi1ename_arg
f1lename(s) in the
OPEN
command
must
previously
have
been
OPENed
command.
——
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
MANIPULATING
D-52
DataFlex 2.0 User's
RECORDS
Manual
—————
CLEAR
Command
CLEAR command
acts upon the record buffer of the filename
referenced in the comnand argument(s). Any data in the buffer
flushed by the execution of a CLEAR.
The
is
FORMAT:
CLEAR
f'l1ename_argl
{f11ename_arg2
CLEAR
CLEAR
myffle
myfi1e yourfi1e
...
f11ename_argn}
EXAMPLES:
NOTE:
The fi1ename(s)
OPEN ccmnand.
ourfile
in the
ccmnand
previously
must
have
been
OPENed
with the
should
be used
CLEAR command
at any time that an initialized
keyboard
For
examp7e9
entry has been
record buffer is required.
used
to create data in the buffer for a FINCh and no record is found
(FINDERR
is TRUE)g then a CLEAR would purge any entries that had been
made to the buffer before making
fresh entries in an attempt to
and FIND other records.
proceed
Iñ on the other hand, you w.ish to
de-active an active (FOUND) record and retain entered data in the
that.
buffer, a MOVE O TO RECNUM command will accomplish
The
if
DELETE
Cmmand
DELETE command
r«noves
an existing
record
be FOUND before
must
can be DELETEd.
a71
executecb
key
indexes
ccimand
for the
is
The
it
record
on-line
updated
to
key
remove
entries
the
data
base.
from
When the DELETE
A
record being deleted are
for the deleted record.
FORMAT:
DELETE
f'i1ename_arg
DELETE
names
{ff1ename_arg2
...
fi1ename_argn}
EXAMPLES:
NOTE:
notes
The f11ename(s)
OPEN command.
reminders
in the
command
must
previously
have
been
OPENed
wfth the
———————————
RELATE
Command
works
RELATE comnand
in conjunction with the FIND comand. After
record has been found with FINIL RELATE will find all related
For
examp1eg
a transaction
record is
records in the database.
found
and placed
in the bufferg the execution of a RELATE comnand
and place
record(s) in the database
could find a related master
(them)
in the buffer additlonally.
The
a
if
it
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
—
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
MANIPULATING
Manual
D-53
RECORDS
=======
FORMAT:
RELATE
f'j1ename_arg
EXAMPL ES :
FIND GE 'lnvt_ trans.posting
RELATE
1nvt_trans
The ff1ename(s)
OPEN command.
NOTE:
In the
//executed
command
must
f i rst
previously
have
OPENed
been
with the
The record buffer for the
be executed
A FIND must
before RELATE.
be "active"
fi1ename_
Files to be
arg must
for RELATE to function.
be OPENed prfor
must
used
to
as the argument(s) of the RELATE command
that are not OPENed are ignored
Related
the command executi on.
an
by the RELATE command.
In the case of a "chain" type relationship,
RELATE a
that is not OPENed precludes access to other
files
attempt to
files further
use of
established
The
ATTAQ1
file
up
the chain.
RELATE assumes
that
in FILEDEF between
have
the proper relationships
(among)
the files.
been
Command
the ATTACH
relationships have been established in FILEDEF,
provides the means of placing the data on which the
is desired
record. If
relationship
is based into a new database
to ATTAN them.
is not necessary
only to SAVE related recordm
is done automatica)jy in execution of the SAVE
since ATTAMment
be used
command.
only where further
Thereforep ATTAQI should
processing is required before the SAVE is done.
file
When
comnand
it
it
FORMAT:
m"uai
f11ename_
ATTAQI
transactions
arg
EXAMPLE:
NOTE:
The ff1ename(s)
OPEN command.
in the
command
must
previously
have
been
OPENed
with the
DataFlex
Upon execution of the ATTACH commancb
moves
the record number
into
or field data that is defined as the basis for thewhenrelationship
the convnand is
the new record. All related files that are open
executed
will have a relationship created.
command
record. That
only moves data into the new database
part of the
the entire new record, is not a permanent
database
to put the information on
until a SAVE command is executed
disk. ATTMXI moves data from "higher" to "lower" data files only
Brief1yg a "higher" file is one
within an application data structure.
(such
are
as "employer") which
related to many other
with records
records (such as "employee"L and a "lower" file is one which contains
The ATTACH
datá»
and
——————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/
16/84
MANIPULATING
D-54
DataF1ex
RECORDS
2.0
Manual
User's
———————
those
more
Step
-
These
terms
records which relate to the "higher" one.
are
discussed in the section of this manual on Fi1e Definition
Among
Data
Plan
the
Files.
the Relationships
many
fully
One
ZEROFILE
-
Command
destructive of data, and
Its effect is to permanently
may be useful to do this
in
erase
all data from a database
file.
It
order to remove experimental or sample data from a set of database
and having to redefine the
files (without erasing the files themselves
for a new period.
entire databaseR or to reinitialize a database
comiand
The ZEROFILE
should
be used
only
very
is potentially
with great caution.
FORMAT:
filename
ZEROFILE
NOTE:
The f11ename(s)
OPEN command.
in the
cammand
have
previously
must
OPENed
been
wIth the
Agaim improper
disastrous.
SYSTEM
use
Great
of this comand
caution is advised
on
valid. needed
in using this
data
can
command.
be
FILES
have
a file with only one
record to hold
It is frequently desirable to name
and addresm the last-used
invoice
today's dateg your company's
number,
information.
cumulative tota1m and other-system-oriented
This type of file is referred to as a SYSTEM FILE.
A system
DataFlex
just like any other
ff1e is deflnech created and changed
but system files can contain only one record.
f'[1é»
set the "MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RECORDS" in the
of FILEDEF to one (I) when the file is set
reads
and automatically
the
up.
DataFlex recognizes this parameterg
single record from this special type of file into a buffer without a
Any data
FIND opration.
in the systm file is then available in the
buffer with.out a disk access.
file,
To define a system
"SET SYSTEM PARAMETERS"
System
When used
system
example
Invoice
the
should
with
file
An
should
fijes
of
uses
a
the
not
have
ENTER
not be
system
date
any
indexes
comand, systm files must be
Included on the ENTER command
can be
file SYSFILE.
found
1984
Data
in the
DEMO
from
that file one be used
It Is recomended
as the
that File I, Field I be assigned
Field 2 be the date. Append other system
There
these
may be multiple
as needed.
Copyright (c)
since there is only
Access
as the
company
file
system
Corporation
system
name
fields
0PENedg
l
record.
but the
line.
files
file.
as
SYSFILE.
A1SOg
that Fi7e 19
to the end of
and
files.
05/16/84
========k==============--
D-55
-==========
===~~~~
"
."=======,"=
=="====".==
EÉE2ÉEÉE=Z
MANIPULATING
FILES
————————————
~
==============.====~~—==——————————————————————— —~"""—"""—
provides for the execution of operations that
These
at the operating system command level.
within a DataFlex conffguration file as
cocrmands
In that these
required.
are very powerfuC and can make
be used
with respect and
major alterations to a system they should
prior to the
care. Supportive operator prompting and verification
recommended.
are
execution of these comnands
The System
command
group
would
normally be done
commands
can be executed
of commands wihtin this group manipulates the operating
Filename
arguments
that are
in the sub-group
directory.
Those
double
quotation marks.
literals must be enclosed in singledata or elements
(string variables or
filenames that are referenced in
windows)
ASCII
do not require quotes.
A sub-group
system
""""""""
=
ERASEFILE
C=Iand
Deletes the file
system
directory.
named
in the
command
from
argument
the operating
FORMAT:
ERASEFILE
fi1ename_arg
ERASEFILE
"myfile.dat"
ERASEFILE
file_to_kí1l
EXAMPLES:
RENAME
Command
Changes
the
name
of
a
file
in the operating
system
directory.
FORMAT:
RENAME
fl1ename_argl
RENAME
fi1e_to_rename
RENAME
oldfi1e
fllename_arg2
TO
EXAMPLES:
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
TO
"TEMP.DAT"
TO n0wf11e
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
MANIPULATING
D-56
==
COPYFILE
DataFlex
FILES
2.0
User's
Manual
____"""_
Comand
Transfers data from one file to anothem
or transfers fi1e(s) from
device to another. "Wild card" or ambiguous
file name entries are
supported for the purposes
of this command so that groups
of files
be manipulated.
one
can
FORMAT:
COPYFILE
sourcef1le(s)
COPYFILE
"a: current.dat"
COPYFILE
"a: *,f1x"
COPYFILE
screen.6
destfi1es(s)
TO
EXAMPLES:
TO
TO
"b:history.dat"
"bT
'b: newstuf.txt'
TO
=
=
DIRECTORY
Convnand
Displays
directory
a
of the disk
FORMAT:
DIRECTORY
files
specified
in fi1espec_arg.
fi1espec_arg
EXAMPLES:
DIRECTORY
"c: *.dat"
DIRECTORY
screen_window.20
Comnand
FILELIST
The FILELIST
data
DataFlex
file
name
files.number
It
file
and
stored in a pre-defined
three variations on the
FORMAT
from
the
of current
NAME, DataF1ex
PATHNAME,
DISPLAY
read
the
can
The
number
FILELIST.CFG.
from
is
There
are
integer variable called FILENUMBER.
displays information
cormand
list
file
use
of the comand.
l:
TO str1ngl_arg
{string2_arg]
is the number of the desired fi1e9
stringl_arg is where the fijds user display name is stored
and/or displayed, and stringZ-arg Is where the file's DataF1ex
file name is displayed or stored.
FILELIST
Where
EXAMPLE
f11enum_arg
fi1enum_arg
l:
FILELIST
Puts
page
22
—"—————"""""
Copyright
(C)
TO
the file's
"screen",
screen.6 screen.7
user
display name for File 22 into Window
and its DataFlex
filename into Window 7.
"
1984
________—_+
Data
Access
Corporation
6 on
———===
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
MANIPULATING
Manual
D-57
FILES
— ——
FILELIST.CFG
NEXT comnand
and returns the next
scans
The
(the next larger number for an existing active file).
The value of FILENUMBER
is the
is returned in FILENUMBER.
To get a complete
point for the execution of the command.
FILENUMBER
(O).
to
zero
initialize
The FILELIST
ACTIVE
file
file
number
starting
FILELIST,
FORMAT
2:
FILELIST
EXAMPLE
NEXT
TO
strlngL-arg
{string2_arg}
2:
MOVE O TO FILEN%ER
REPEAT
NEXT TO
EQ O
FILELIST
FILENUMBER
UNTIL
1ist.2
11st.3
sequentially output the entire list of display
DataFlex file names for all active files to Window 2
Window
3 of Screen
list.
Would
The
FILELIST
PATHNAME
comand
file
DataFlex filename of the
FORMAT
and
and
(optionally)
by FILENUM.
3:
FILELIST
EXAMPLE
outputs the pathname
currently pointed to
names
and
PATHNAME
TO
stringl_arg
PATHNAME
TO
screen.l5
{string2_arg)
3:
FILELIST
screen.l6
— ——
SYSTEM
Command
command
to your operating
returns control of the computer
All files opened in the configuration will be closed in the
No CRT screen
"clean-up" is
process
of the executing the command.
be done
by other
must
performed
by SYSTEM,
so any cosmetic work
SYSTEM differs
from
commands.
the ABORT command in that ABORT will
Menu
is on the disk drivep while SYSTEM
return to the DataFlex
explicitly
exits to the operating system.
The
SYSTEM
systw.
if it
FORMAT:
SYSTEM
If DataF1ex is being run under control of a batch or submit
operating system f11eg SYSTEM will cause the next entry in the batch
to begin executing just as any other return to the operating
file
would
do.
system
If the "RETURN TO OPERATING SYSTEM" prompt which an
occurs
upon
use of the SYSTEM cormand
is confusing to operators,
explanatory prompt just before the SYSTEM command can help alleviate
such
confusion.
CAUTION:
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
———-——
Access
Corporation
————
05/16/84
DataF1ex
FILES
MANIPULATING
D-58
program
comand
It
Argument
name,
Manual
—————
———————
Comnand
The RUNPROGRAM
.CMD FILE).
the
User's
————
———————
RUNPROGRAM
2.0
have
can
Two
runs
an operating
two
arguments.
Argument
One
(.COM
program
Is the
or
program
line to pass to the program.
is returned to the operating
is the comand
execute6 control
has
systan level
After
system.
FORMAT:
RUNPROGRAM
prog_name.com_arg
RUNPROGRAM
"PIP"
RUNPROGRAM
screen.2 screen.3
RUNPROGRAM
"edit"
prog_arg
EXAMPLES:
"B:
=A:*.*"
prompt_input
Command
REGISTRATION
command
The REGISTRATION
will
number
license
of a DataFlex
can
be
used
in
a
retrieve the registered name and serial
place the data into variables that
and
configuration.
FORMAT:
REGISTRATION
str1ng_arg
REGISTRATION
1icensee_name
numer1c_arg
EXAMPLE:
seria1_number
cormand
to display the name of the application
of the REGISTRATION
is effective in identifying the
author (company
or individual)
for
software to the creator/ownem and is one of the main purposes
which
this comnand is provfded.
Use
— —————————
SYSDATE Comand
SYSDATE comand
retrieves date and time information from the
operating systam provided the date and time have been properly set in
The SYSDATE comand
stores the system date to
the operating system.
the first variable named after the coman6 the hour (in 24-hour
and the minutes
to the
format) to the second (optional) argument9
The date will
argument
a third
is specified in the cotmand.
third,
be returned as
and the second
two will
be returned in DATE formatg
The name DATE should
not be used, since that is a
two-digit numbers.
The
if
—————————————————————————_______========
——————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
MANIPULATING
Manual
User's
DataFlex reserved
FILES
D-59
——~———=~——~—
==",========".=~————————~———
word.
FORMAT:
{hour_arg} {m1nute_arg}
is a date variable, and
optional 2-digit numeric
SYSDATE
Where
{minute_arg}
are
{hour_arg}
variables.
and
command
returns the year in two digits (as in 12/24/44).
can be obtained
four-digit
format is desired (12/24/I944R
adding
the amount 693975 to the returned value.
The
it
If
a
by
EXAMPLE:
minute
TO sdate
SYSDATE sdate
hour
MOVE (sdate+693975)
All
the
MS-DOS-based
MP/M (BÉX)S
CP/M-86
1.0
do
which
and operating systems
systems
system
call are supported. CP/M 2.2
operating
105)
not
DATE
have
time
and
which
systems
are
supported are:
and MS-DOS,
as well as TurboDOS,
support
and
Among
operating
functions.
3.0, Concurrent CP/M, MP/M-86
DPC/OS 3.0, MS-DOS,
and NStar.
date
CP/M
——
—————————
————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
D-60
MANIPULATING
FILES
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
DataFiex
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
05/16/84
======————~~———~~——~—
EEEEEFFáEE
——————————
————————————"
—
DIRECT
INPUT
0"61
======
===t======
AND OUTPUT
—
"_————
~
========~——~————————————————~————
—
group
provides a means of reading data
Sequential I/O connand
from, and writing data to, physical input/output devices (such as
by,
printers) and disk files produced
or for further processing byp
CBASIC,
These
commands
etc.).
programs
other than DataFlex (WordStarp
Data
do not use "image"
formatting.
sent to files and devices from
in the
this command group must be formatted (where necessary)
etc.) of the
configuration to satisfy the requirements (delimiters,
program.
destination device or non-OataFlex
The
The
this group use an underline
first four commands of name.
This character is Integral
character (_) within the comand
name and cannot be emitted wfthout causing a compilewith the comand
time error.
NOTE:
————DIRECT_INPUT
CQmnand
specifies a disk file name or device from which sequenconfiguinput is to be received for processing by a DataFlex
The argument
for the cocmand is the name of the file or
ration.
dévicéo
or the name of a variable or wIndow which contains the desired
argument
is the literal name
file name or device designator. If the
should
be surrounded
by quotation
of the file or device &sigñátwt
should
marks
argument
marks.
a string
variab1ep
quotation
is
the
If
the
command
used.
be
opens
automatically
the
of
Execution
not
necessary
buffers and makes the file or device fully ready for input
be found
cannot
in the
operations.
If a specified file or deviceTRUE.
need
in
indicator is set
system the end-of-file
If there is message
can
the application to declare an error in this casé» an error
which
be established
is triggered by the state of the end-of-file
Indicator.
DIRECT_INPUT
tial
it
FORMAT:
DIRECT_INPUT
str1ng_arg
Where
string_arg contains
the
file
source
designator.
name
or
device
EXAMPLES:
DIRECT_INPUT
Open
a
file
"wsmerge.txt"
named
WSMERGE.TXT
"RDR:
DIRECT_INPUT
Open the port designated RDR:
"
for input
in the operating
system
for
input
INPUT screen.l
Evaluate the contents of
file or device identified
DIRECT
Window
#1
on
the
screen
and
open
the
thereby
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-62
DataFlex
AND OUTPUT
INPUT
User's
2.0
Manual
———————
DIRECT_0UTPUT
Command
a disk file or physical device to which
identifies
The
is to be sent from a DataFiex configuration.
comand
argument
is the name of the fije or device. Execution
buffers and makes the
automatically opens the necessary
of the comand
to
or device fully ready
for output operations.
If the argument
file command
should
be
is the literal name of the file or device,
the
argument
embedded
is the
in quotes
("). If, on the other hand, the
which
name of a variable
contains the file name or device designation,
should
quotes
not be used.
If a file or device 'Is specified in the
command
which
does
not exist in the system a new disk file will be
CAUTION:
created under the name specified in the command.
If the
by the
command
names
an existing
fi1e9 that file will be erased
DIRECT_0UTPUT
cormand,
with no warning
to the operator unless one is
explicitly
written into the configuration.
DIRECT_0UTPUT
sequential
data
for the
it
FORMAT:
DIRECT_0UTPUT
str1ng_arg
the file or device specified
string variable named STRING_ARG.
Opens
by
the contents of the
EXAMPLES:
"myfi1e.txt"
for output the file
DIRECT_OUTPUT
Opens
DIRECT_0UTPUT
Get name of
CL0SE_INPUT
screen.4
device or
& CL0SE_OUTPUT
file
named
MYFILE.TXT.
Window
from
or
file
which
Page
SCREEN.
or device opened by the
They
respectively.
operate
and require no argument,
file
device
on
Commands
These
two comands
simply close the
comands
AND DIRECT_0UTPUT
DIRECT_INPUT
any
4
may
be
opem
on
FORMAT:
CL0SE_INPUT
CLOSE_0UTPUT
———————————————
READ
(»nmand
READ comand
reads
sequential data from a file or device and
given in the argument
assigns data thus read to the variable name(s)
READ recognizes the
of the READ command.
coma (p) as the delimiting
elements»
and ignores
data
character between
comas which are consingle
tained wIthin double or single quotation marks.
If there are
be used
double
quotes
quotes
as
(") should
in embedded material
(')
single
there is need for double qUotesg
character.
the embedding
If
quotes
to attempt to
may be used
for embedding.
It is not recomended
element
embed
any single data
containing both types of characters.
The
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
DIRECT
Manual
INPUT
D-63
AND OUTPUT
EXAMPLE:
would
interpreted
be
l:
Ring
Mahoney
3:
Miami
4:
Florida
2:
ArnerM1ambF1or1da
and
Rfng,Mahoney
four
as
and
data
specifically:
elments,
Amer
while:
"Rfng»
would
interpreted
be
Miami
3:
Florida
is encountered
data
assigned
three data elements.
as
Mahoney
l:
Ring,
2:
The READ cotmand
given
ments
in
Arner%MiamiMorida
and
Mahoney
and
will read
the connandD
in the source
elements.
as
follows:
Arner
many data elements
as there are
arguunless the CR/LF end-of-record character
have
been
data
before all arguments
as
FORMAT:
READ
argumentl
READ
Read
under
an_e1ement
one element
argumentN
...
EXAMPLES:
variable
from
name
the current
input line
and
it
store
AN_ELEMENT.
name address
cIty state zip
under
in the record and store
the first data element
and assign
the variable name NAME, read the next element
it,to
and so on.
ADDRESSp the next to CITY,
READ
Read
it
the number of
in a record exceeds
execution will stop short of the end of
for which there is an
the recoi"d»
after reading the last data element
example
shown
argument
to. Thus, if the second comiand
to assign
above
run
were
against this data:
the number
If
arguments
in
of data
a READ
elements
command,
it
Data
Access.129th
Terr.,Mfami.FL»3315&(305)987-6543
first five elements (name, addresm cÍtyp statep zip) would
into DataFlex. The phone number would not be read (although a
read
READ command
succeeding
could, and would,
it). If the number of
READS for a record exceeds
the number of fields in the record, the
READS output null
exceeding
fields for the output record.
only the
be
read
———————————
Copyright (C) 1984 Data Access
——~
Corporation
05/16/84
D-64
DIRECT
Thus,
the
if
~~""
second
resultant
The
==================
example
were
against this
run
data:
Terr.gM1amfpFL
in DataFlex
data
above
Manual
======
""""
comand
Access.129th
Data
DataFlex 2.0 User's
AND OUTPUT
INPUT
========
=
would
be:
NAME:
Data
Access
ADDRESS:
129th
Terr.
CITY:
Miami
STATE:
FL
(blank)
ZIP:
~~——=========================
========"=
READLN Command
=
=
The
READLN command
(see
above), except
is similar to the READ cotmand
reads
all data from wherever
the comand
that
is invoked
to the end
of the record (defined by a carriage return (CR) character in the
source
data).
Like the READ commanch argument(s) set the name(s)
of
the variab1e(s) under which read data will be stored.
it
all data from
is issued with one argument,
line is stored under a single variable
When multiple
arguments
name.
as its
having the
uséd»
data
elements
will be stored sequentially under the argument
data
names,
is delimited by comas (as
provided that the source
CBASIC*,
custcx'narily is in sequential files created under MBASIC*,
WordStar*
MailMerge*),
Where
a READLN
source
command
the
or device on a
file command
argument
are
it
FORMAT:
READLN
argumentl
argument2
...
argumentN
EXAMPLE:
fnput_string
line of data and store ft under
INPUT_STRING
(regard1es5 of delimiters
line).
READLN
Read a
READLN
Read a
line of
variable
CITY.
The
same
address
data
name
NAMEg
name
and
so
city
and
the
state zip a/c
store the first
second
under
—=——
~~~— ~
Copyright
phone
data
ADDRESS9
be
the
e1went under
the third under
execute in exactly the
coímands:
C
the last command causes a READ
to the next 9 inclusive.
1984
from
the third
data
=====================================
=
(C)
within
may
A
B
READLN
Where
element
name
which
on.
multi-argument command READLN A B C would
fashion as the following group of READ
READ
READ
the varfable
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
DIRECT
Manual
"
INPUT
AND OUTPUT
D-65
——
on a source
line happens to exceed the
data elements
the "exceeding" data elements
in a READLN command,
for
will be stored under a variable together with the last element
(group
The variable
which
name for this last
there was an argument.
in the READLN command.
will be the last argument
of) data e1ement(s)
each
In this
pair of
sltuatiom
the (comma) delimiters between
"exceeding" data elwents will also be stored in the resultant data
element.
If the
number
number
of
of arguments
multi-argument READLN commands
elements.
constitutes one
Generai1y»
number
data
of
will
recorch
be
as
where
used
where:
a
fixed
Name.Address,Cfty.State,Z1p
represents a record.
under
the appropriate
READLN
It
would
be
represented
Name
The
READLN
variable
Address
which
command
would
be:
would
CIty State
and
nocessary
in this instance
by a delimiting
as
commm
SEQEOL
this
data in
ZIp
that
in:
any
empty
2nd Nat1ona7
Bank,gAnytown,Anystate,l2345
element
Where
is blank or non
the address
SEQEOF
read
names
data
eleent
be
applicable.
Predefined Indicators
DataFlex provides two predefined indicatorm SEQEOL (sequential end of
line) and SEQEOF (sequential end of fi1eL which can be used to
Both
control operation of READing and other configurations.
¶ndicators are set FALSE upon execution of a READ or READLN comandg
and are
reset TRUL respective1yp upon the READing of an end-of-line
character (), and upon the READing of an end-of-file
READLN
NOTE:
character ("Z).
will always read to, and including, the
character
next end-of-line character, but will not read an end-of-file
WITH the last
record if there is an EOL immediately ahead of it.
It
will have to do one more READLN (creating an empty record) to detect
READ
EOL
READ
wf11
EOF.
an
the
last
with
Similarly,
not
the
field
by a
will require an
the EOL is immediately preceded
coma;
These
EOL.
READLN)
READ
factors should
(or
to detect the
additional
be kept in mind
record
of READing configurations,
in the design
data.
the exact format of your source
counters and the like, as should
it
—============~~——~—————————"——
Access
1984 Data
(C)
Copyright
—"""—
Corporation
if
—-————-—..—
05/16/84
DIRECT
D-66
WRITE
INPUT
DataFlex
AND OUTPUT
User's
2.0
Manual
Command
sends
data
WRITE command
sequentially to the device or file name
Arguments
command.
to this comnand
given in a preceding DIRECT_OUTPUT
identify the variable names under which the data is found for output.
No carriage
be used
returns
can
with this cormand.
Multiple arguments
cormand,
by use of this
are
for which reason
delimiters
provided
or
as
to the comand
they must be added to the data in the argument
is desired to include quotation
below). If
1itBra1s (see examples
marks
quotes) in the literal, most non-OataF1ex
(", also called double
programs
permit the use of single quotes
(') as the embedding chardelimiting
This provision affords total flexibility in adding
acter.
characters to data being output.
The
it
FORMAT:
WRITE
Output
WRITE
argument
one data
argl
Write the
ARG2>
from
stored in the variable
elment
argN
element
arg2
...
data
first
and
so
variable
from
through
on
ARGUMENT.
ARGb
the
second
ARGn.
EXAMPLES:
WRITE
Output
"datadata"
the literal string
datadata
balance
is: " cust.ba1_due " as of " due_date
followed by the value of
is:
the literal Your balance
the variable cust.bal _due followed by the literal as of
followed by the value of the variable due_date.
WRITE
Output
"Your
It is important to note that all
for the output information must
Where
EXAMPLES:
FIRM.NAME
formatting
supplied
be
= Dewey9
WRITE
would
fim.name
output Dewey,
Cheatum
WRITE
would
rm fim.name
output "Dewey9
fn9
Cheatum
WRITE
tnr flm.name t",¥
output "Dewey9 Cheatum
would
=====."===—"===-======——==MMM——=:
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
-——
Cheatum
and
spacing
by
and
the
and
WRITE
punctuation
Command.
Howe
Howe
and
Howe"
and
Howe%
—~—————————
Corporation
05/16/84
2.0
DataF1ex
WRITELN
DIRECT
Manual
User's
INPUT
D-67
AND OUTPUT
Command
data
sequentially to the physical device or
commanck
a preceding DIRECT_OUTPUT
just as in
in
file
command.
Just like the WRITE command, WRITELN outputs data
the
under
the variables and/or literals specified in the command argument.
The difference
is that WRITELN outputs a carriage return (CR) after
data
on the command
line has been sent. This
for the last argument
programcharacter signifies the end of a record in many non-OataFlex
and devices, such
ming
languages
as WordStar*
Mailmerge*, CBASIC* and
mu1tip1e
arguments
WRITELN
MBASIC*.
on the command
can have
line MÁp
to include any needed
is necessary
just as with the WRITE command,
delimiting characters as literals in the command line.
The
command
WRITELN
name
WRITE
sends
specified
it
FORMAT:
WRITELN
Output
WRITELN
Output
ARGn,
EXAMPLES:
where
WRITELN
Would
argument
the contents of variable
argN
argl arg2
the contents...of ARGI,
the last followed by a
argl
argl
output
WRITELN
argl
Would
output
=
apples,
arg2
followed
ARGUMENT,
then
ARG2,
character.
= peaches,
and
and
(C)
1984
arg3
on
a
through
= pumpkin
pie
app1es
","
","
arg2
arg3
app1es,peaches,pumpkin
pie
———————————————_—————————'
———— ——_" " —_""
Copyright
so
by
Data
Access
Corporation
' _"' ==="
07/18/84
D-68
DIRECT
INPUT
__—_—————~~—
AND OUTPUT
DataF1ex
2.0
User's
Manual
—==========———~~~——~~~~==================.=====.
THIS
PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
—~~~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
l
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
————————
==========
USING
——————————
FUNCTION
——————————
FFFFFZ=---
KEYS
——————————
—————————————
~
set of system-independent function keys to perform
functions, as described in the section on
procedure. They are referred to as DataFlex Command
On terminals
Keys,
lacking function keysg the
or simply "F1ex-Keys'°.
On terminals
Flex-keys must be assigned
to control key sequences.
to the various function
having function keym they can be assigned
keys
In either casé» the name and function
available on the keyboard.
and applications.
of the key Is maintained over all systems
DataFlex
provides
a
and
numerous
entry
the SETSCREEn
search
is very important to note that the Flex-keys have NO Intrinsic
They
derive their various functions from the DataFlex
functions.
either from KEYPROC commands discussed
configuration which Is runn1ngg
in thfs section, or from the use of the ENTER or ENTERGROUP command
discussed
macros
respectively in other sections of this manual.
It
input-terminating
Flex-keys are divided up into two main groups:
The field
editing keys include
Flex-keys and field editing Flex-keys.
backspace,
the
keym
arrow
insert character, and delete characterg and
all have effects on the contents of a window or other means of
The input-terminating
keyboard
keys, on the other hand.
entry.
from
field to field, and any of them functions in the
control movement
manner
of the key to enter any characters which may have been
Flexentered into the active window at the time the input-terminating
Key is pressed.
The
THE
INPUT-TERMINATING
FLEX-KEYS
TNnT¢ÁTnf?
Fl!NcTTnN
KEY.RETURN
KEY.ESCAPE
RETURN OR ENTER
EXIT
THE CURRENT
KEY.FIELD
BACK
KEY.FIND
FIND
KEY.SFIND
SUPERFINO
KEY.SAVE
KEY.DELETE
SAVE A RECORD
DELETE A RECORD
KEY.CLEAR
KEY.NEXT
CLEAR THE FORM OR SCREEN
GO FORWARD ONE RECORD
KEY.PREVIOUS
KEY.UP
BACK UP ONE RECORD
UP ARROW
KEY.DOWN
KEY.USER
DOWN ARROW
FUNCTION
DETERMINED
KEY.HELP
DISPLAY
that
normally
the
under
When
ENTER
Note
the
field
edit
the
ACCEPT
macro
automatically endowed
list of the Flex-keys
Copyright
(C)
1984
keys
FUNCTION
UP ONE WINDOW OR FIELD
A RECORD
HELP
are
comand.
BY CONFIGURATOR
SCREEN
not listed
here
since they function
command
is uséd» all the Flex-keys
by the macro
with their customary
above).
ENTER macro
Where
the
is
Data
———————
Access
Corporation
are
functions
uséd»
it
(see
is
05/16/84
USING
E-2
FUNCTION
DataFlex 2.0 User's
KEYS
Manual
desirable to alter the default functions of the FlexENTER macro
is not useL the Flex-keys have no
effects at alb and they must be provided in the configuration by use
The effect(s)
of using
described below.
of either of the two methods
(a)
by two
different means:
the Flex-keys can be altered or extended
indicators which are automatica1ly controlled
use of the pre-defined
(b)
and
by use of the Flex-keys;
use of KEYPROC subroutines.
Keys.
sometimes
Where
THE
USER-DEFINED
still
the
FLEX-KEY
automatically to the User-Defined Flex-key.
function is assigned
key
is provided so that the configurator may have the option of
providing any chosen function to be available with a single keystroke.
Such
special function can be provided only through a Key Procedure
below)
(see
within one or more configurations.
No
The
USING
THE
FLEX
KEY
INDICATORS:
Flex-keys is used. the
time one of the field-terminating
predefined fndicator relating to that key is set TRUEp and all the
For
examp1ep
when the
other Flex-key indicators are set FALSE.
key
is used to terminate entry to a window9 the indicator
KEY.RETURN
These
fndicatorm which are listed abovep all
is set TRUE.
which
term
have
the
refers
followed by a distinguishing
prefix "KEY."
Subsequent
actions or branching
to the default function of the key.
by use of the reset indicators.
may be controlled
Each
EXAMPLE:
GETNAME:
[KEY.ESCAPE]
ACCEPT
ABORT
COMPANY.NAME
ACCEPT
ABORT
COMPANY.ADDRESS
[KEY.ESCAPE]
[KEY.FIELDJ
GOTO GETNAME
the configuration for input to the variable
with the 1abe7 GETNAME: at the beginning of the example.
The second
1ine9
beginning with the indicator reference [KEY.ESCAPEI
provides thatp if the ESCAPE key is pressed, execution of the function
key
is pressed, the
will cease (ABORT).
If other than theon ESCAPE
and execution goes
to open for input to the
input is accepted
The following
line, again beginning with
variable COMPANY.ADDRESS.
[KEY.ESCAPE],
provides the same ABORT result of use of the ESCAPE key.
The next
line (IKEY.FIELD])
provides that if the BACK FIELD key Is
used
during or after input, execution will return to the first step of
(GETNN\E:
this example
If neither key is pressed, execution goes on
following the example.
to other comands
This
example
opens
COMPANY.NAME,
).
USING
Using
KEY
the
relatively
PROCEDURES:
key
indicators
little
Copyrfght (c)
1984
inpUtg
Data
be practical
in configurations involving
involving a large
but in configurations
can
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
USING
Manual
FUNCTION
KEYS
E-3
——————
number
wIll normally be preferable
of ACCEPT or INPUT state|nentsp
Key procedures (activato standardize the actions of the Flex-keys.
command
KEYPROC)
by
means
use
provide
the
of programming
the
of
ted
function key effects uniformly across an entire configuration for
key
whenever
a particular
is used.
Like general-purpose subroutines
KEYPROC
GOSUB command
(see
in the chapter on Control Commands)»
subroutines must be terminated with either a RETURN command to resume
following the ACCEPT or
execution of the configuration at the comand
INPUT statement which
called the KEYPROC» or an ABORT command to
terminate exec'ution of the configuration.
it
FORMAT:
KEYPROC
f1ex_key
f1ex_key
is one of the Flex-key indicators listed above.
the Flex-key which relates to the indicator given in the connand
branch
argument
to the
is pressed, execution will automatica11y
KEYPROC subroutine.
Where
When
EXAMPLES:
KEYPROC KEY.ESCAPE
CLEARSCREEN
ABORT
use of the ESCAPE key to clear the
termínate execution of the configuration.
Causes
screen
and
KEYPROC KEY.CLEAR
CLEARFORM
RETURN
Causes
and return
use of the CLEAR ALL key to clear the form
to execution of the next command of the configuration.
be in effect
under
not
certain
is desired that a key procedure
If
indicator-driven
conditions during execution of a configuratiom
KEYPROC
be
subroutine to provide
included within the
conditionals can
the desired conditional effect.
it
EXAMPLE:
INOESCAPEI
KEYPROC
RETURN
KEY.ESCAPE
ABORT
illustrates
the provision that pressing the
will cause execution to ABORT unless the indicator
set TRUE, in which case execution RETURNS to the
next comnand in the configuration (the ESCAPE key is prevented
from
"working").
This
example
ESCAPE key
NOESCAPE
is
are
some other commands
that can ONLY be used within key
can alter
the place the key procedure
procedures. These connands
to do things like trap an error
returns to and allow key procedures
window:
and return to the original
There
===============——————~——————— —
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
~ ————————"_
————————
05/16/84
ENTAGAIN
Cocmand
ENTAGAIN
stands
place.
same
and
command
for enter again
same window
determines
procedure
to the
the
DataFlex
KEYS
FUNCTION
USING
E-4
and
ACCEPT
that there
ENTAGAIN
does
was
not
User's
2.0
Manual
make the key procedure return
that called it.
If a key
an error
can then
go back
to
will
use
it
arguments.
FORMAT:
ENTAGAIN
EXAMPLE:
KEY.ESCAPE
KEYPROC
ENTAGAIN
[NOESCAPEI
[NOESCAPE]
RETURN
ABORT
is provided
In this examp1eg
execution ABORT (first and last
indicator is set TRUE by action
uration. in which case execution
the ESCAPE key was pressed, and
came
beginning of the window
it
it
ENTERMODE
The
from.
Command:
command
establishes the begíning of a series of data
and serves
to set up the correct modes for the next few
command
should
always
be the
The ENTERMODE command
in
(see
when
is
the BACKFIELD
next cormand)
of ACCEPT comands
ENTERMODE
comnands
entry
commands.
,
that the ESCAPE key trigger an
lines). unless the NOESCAPE
of other parts of the configreturns to the place at which
the cursor goes back to the
a series
used:
BACKFIELD
first
Ccxnmand
The BACKFIELD
ACCEPT comand
comand
will
PREVIOUS
to
the
cause
key
procedure
to return to the
executed. This makes
one that was just
command
The BACKFIELD
will not
the cursor seem to back up one window.
ENTERMODE
A properly-placed
go back
past an ENTERMODE command.
command
should
be used
since otherwise the BACKFIELD command will go
back
necessary
as many command
lines as
to find an ACCEPT to
the
is
controlled by the status of
judiciously
in configurations
GOTCM
GOSUBs and the like.
conta1n'lng
since the comnand in
a GOTO to the previous ACCEPT comand, and this may
effect executes
seriously upset processing
occurs in a loop. The operator may
making
such
be prevented
from
an error by manipulation of arMnverse"
user-named
included within the KEYPROC
indicator (NOBACK, for example)
tCj disable the key at the appropriate
This
poInts in execution.
above
for the ESCAPE key.
technique is illustrated
execute.
indicators,
The
BACKFIELD
This
loops,
comand
command
can
be
should
be
used
if it
==—.====________________
Copyright (C) 1984 Data Access
____
Corporation
~
—~~_~ ====
05/16/84
FUNCTION
USING
Manual
User's
2.0
DataFlex
KEYS
E-5
———— —————————————————
— ——————————
EXAMPLE:
KEYPROC KEY.FIELD
BACKFIELD
RETURN
This example
(KEY.FIELD)
HELP
The
merely
key
to
defines the function
back
up
one
of the
BACK
WINDOW
window.
KEY:
key
is called
standard
keyboard.
The HELP
implemented
procedure
command
in
KEY.HELP
can
ENTER
and
is generally
be used
within
and ENTERGROUP.
a
assigned
to
"Q
on
the
and
standard key procedure
is
standard format for this
The
key
is:
KEYPROC KEY.HELP
HELP
ENTAGAIN
RETURN
HELP
Ccxnmand
comnand
help
will go to the next sequential page
with no arguments
after the currently displayed page and see if the word "HELP" is on
the pagename line ("l" line).
If so, that page will be displayed as a
help screen. Pressing the help key again will display the next help
screen
(if available). Pressing any other key will return to the
original page and window.
The
If
will
HELP
begin
the
command
help
the
————————
(C)
Copyright
is
used
screen
with an
sequence.
argument
of
a page
name,
that
page
————————-————
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
USING
E-6
FUNCTION
DataF1ex
KEYS
2.0 User's
========""====""=——————————————
Manual
———————————
EXAMPLE:
/SCREEN1
SCREEN
INPUT
NAME:
/SCREENIHELP
Please
HELP
enter your
Press
any
/SCREEN2
key
name
in the blank provided.
to continue
ADDRESS:
HELP
/SCREEN2HELP
Now9 please
Press
any
enter your
key
don't
you
license
Press
and
any
to continueg
address.
or
press
HELP
for
more
help
HELP
/SCREEN2HELP2
If
home
know
Copying
key
try getting
your home addressp
off of it.
the address
out your driver's
to continue
l*
============
Copyright (c)
——
1984
Data
——
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
——
==========
—
———
~~~~
~~————————————
—————————————————————————__==—=
———
EFZZE=====
MULTI-USER
Z"="=:
FUNCTIONS
_
"
—
——
This means multiple
provides true multi-user operation.
with simultaneous write privilege to the same record at the
time. This provides a transparent multi-user operation with data
No other microcomputer
product can
protection to the field level.
match
DataFlex in the multi-user environment.
DataFlex
users
inherent in the "traditional"
operations (record lock on each read)
Problems
_
same
of handling multi-user
by the following
illustrated
method
are
example:
say 20A0M but
only sells
a large number
of custaners9
locking on custaner records would
items. Traditional
a visible
lock, but if one of 10 inventory part records
unusable
with
the system would become virtually
was locked on READ,
DataElex
to
allows unlimited READ access
only two or three operators.
SAVES
changed
and RE-READs
a
the data when the operator
the database
record.
A company
has
10 different
produce
seldom
the record or systan is locked only for the time of the
are then done based on the freshg safe? data. And only
those
fields that have actually been changed are saved to the recorch
This type of multi-user is
thus preserving any other changes.
undetectable to the operator9 greatly in contrast to a readvirtually
time lock.
In DataF1ex,
SAVE.
Updates
are
of two basic types: transactional and
Multi-user updates
adds
are
generally numeric
replacement. Transactional updates
or
is based
record. Since the update
subtracts from totals in a master
be accurate.
on the
of totals will always
re-read (safe) data7 updates
Replacement
an address
updates, (changing
or credit limit) do not
but
do require that the
usually require multi-user interaction,
as
rewrite fields that were not changed
application not arbitrarily
methods
provide. DataFlex keeps track of which fields
traditional
changed
were
in order not to rewrite an old value over changes made by
subsequent
another
user
to the first user's READ.
Here
is
an
example
of
how
this
works:
have
the inventory part "ABC" on their screens. The
in stock (ID) and the description (WIDGET) are shown on each
User
screen.
l is invoicing the sale of one wIdget, while Userto 2 is
the description
invoicing a sale of two. User 3 is changing
GREEN".
"WIDGETp
All three users read their (identical)
screens, key
Let's say
their input, and then press "SAVE" within the same second.
of SAVES fell out as User l first, then User
that the actual sequence
3 last.
2, and User
Three
users
quantity
unchanged.
User
His sale
l's SAVE will re-read the record and find
of one widget will then be subtracted from the quantity in stock, and
the quantity in stock written back as 9.
it
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
SAVE
two»
2G
subtract
User
DataFlex
FUNCTIONS
MULTI-USER
E-8
.
then
will
write
and
2.0
take control, reread the record
back
the proper number (7).
User's
(9
Manual
in stock).
then
SAVE wflj
3$s
get control, reread the record (with 7 in
back
and write
All
correctly.
stock), ONLY update the description,
is imperceptible to any user.
this occurs with speed which typically
User
it
to transactionally-updated
to responsib]e9 thoroughlyusers. To make sure two users do not sell quantities in
excess
of the quantity in stock, the app7ication configuration should
be written
quantity in stock (and
to check for amount sold exceeding
declare an error while rejecting the sale).
In such
fields
trained
a system
should
be
replacement
very carefully
privilege
limited
the time a system or record is locked
foregoing provisions reduce
to the very brief interval actually required for the SAVEing of a
Since
record instead of the reading and entry speed of the operators.
does
one field
not interfere with another and transactional updates
optlma11y
are
handled, the statement "DataFlex provides transparent
multi-user protection to the field level" is amply justified.
The
UNDER
OPERATION
MULTI-USER
THE
ENTER
MACRO
operation is provided autanatica11y within the ENTER macro.
will only update
the database
if data in one or more
has been changed
windows
(unless the FQRCEF'UT QptiQn
is in effect).
A1SOp the actfve records are
reread from the disk BEFORE the save or
is desired to re-display the buffer data
delete procedures. If
be used
after REREAD but before SAVE. the ENTDISPLAY command should
During the save and delete procedure, only one
for the purpose.
and all
initiated
other updates
terminal will have write privilege,
is
until that update
during the processing interval will be delayed
fol'lowed when
done.
For
these
reasorm the following rules must be
using ENTER in a multi-user environment:
Multi-user
An
ENTRY
command
it
I) When in the ENTRY section. refer to the data windows
instead of the record bufferg since the record buffer is not
changed
until the record is SA\lEd.
When in a SAVE
refer to the record
or DELETE procedurep
since data in the record
buffer instead of the data windowsp
during a re-read.
buffer could have changed
2)
allow data entry of any kind within a SAVE or DELETE
since other users will be locked out of SAVE
operations while the first operator is in the procedure.
3) NEVER
procedure
MULTI-USER
C0~DS:
The fo71owing
There
is no
compatibi7ity7
Copyright
(C)
will only function in multi-user
providing them in single-user systems
since they have no effect in single-user
comands
ham
in
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
systems.
for
mode.
05/16/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
MULTI-USER
Manual
FUNCTIONS
E-9
——
Command
LOCK
comnand
wIll prevent other users from LOCking the databasep
Once
write privileges.
only one user at a time has database
until the
invoked, no other user may update the database
is complete. The LOCked condition should be
invoking user's procedure
comands
is truly
for which
kept in force for only those succeeding
required.
The
LOCK
so that
LOCK is
it
— —————————————
UNLOCK
Cand
state after a
restore the system to normal
is imperative that the system be UNLOCXed after
is issued.
The UNLOCK command
REREAD.
LOCK
or
or
LOCK
REREAD
REREAD
FOR EVERY
It
will
OR LOCK
THERE
a
MUST BE AN UNLOCXI
— —————————————
REREAD
Command
re-reads all of the
first LOCKs theSincesystemthisandis then
done
In a LOCked
the database.
Use
condltiom the resultant re-read records are "safe" for update.
(edits) to an active record
of this comnand requires that all updates
only be
buffer are done at one time, since the LOCked condition should
is required.
kept in force for those few commands for which
The REREAD command
ACTIVE
records in
it
from
a LOCK or
INKEY
ENTRY
the locked condition resulting
statements such as INPUT, ACCEPT,
in a configuration.
In
or
a REREACb data
NEVER be
should
entry
used
optionally be followed by a list of files to
of the command, only those files listed will be
data
among the open
files. Without the option, all open
for which there is data active in the buffer will be re-
The REREAD command
can
form
REREAD.
In this
REREAD
from
files
data
read.
IFMANGE
Command
it
multi-user environment
based
on
conditionally
The connand
window.
to do this
and the command
number
a window
In a
execute
has
may be
whether
is
desired to
there has
is to
certain
be
cotmands
in a
is followed by
the window
a change
IFCHANGE
IFCHANGE.
which
have
been
if
executed
changed.
EXAMPLE:
IFMANGE
form.l
the operator
If
The
If
IFQIANGE
the
execute
MOVE form.l
has changed
TO lnvt.id
window
one,
Copyright
it
to
INVT.ID
buffer.
can also respond
to change in the record
will only
is a file name» then the command after
since the last FIND.
the record buffer has been changed
comand
it
argument
if
MOVE
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
DataFlex
FUNCTIONS
MULTI-USER
E-lO
2.0
Manual
User's
— ———————————————————
—————————
Camnand
SETMANGE
The
SETQUNGE
altering
of the
command
It
any
data.
comand
IFMANGE
in the window without
creates a "change"
satisfies the conditions required for execution
unconditionally.
FORMAT:
SETQIANGE
DESPOOL
wIndow
Command
will cause the spooler to start printing
is provided in the operating system.
The DESPOOL comand
spoo'Áng
function
if
a
FORMAT:
DESPOOL
EXAMPLE
OF UPDATE
IN
MULTI-USER
ENVIRONMENT:
FIND INVT BY INDEX.I
DISPLAY
INVT.ID
TO FORM.I
TO FORM.2
INVT.PRICE
DISPLAY
Get
//
accept
ll
ACCEPT
FORM.I
ACCEPT
REREAD
FORM.2
IFMANGE
FORM.I
IFCMNGE
FORM.2
SAVE INVT
MOVE
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
data
multi-user update
changed
fields
TO INVT.PRICE
//
//
Access
to default
changes
for
// prepare
update
only
//
FORM.I
TO INVT.ID
MOVE FORM.2
UNLOCK
the record to update
display default data
//
save
and
the file
unlock
Corporation
———
05/16/84
"====
: :::::::::
————————."'.——
=="==================———————————
———
ez====
FIELDINDEX
=====
________
=
"
AND WINDOWINDEX
———————————~———————————~———_————=======———
and WINDOWINDEX
provide means of accessing and processing
of fields in a data file or of wIndows on a screen, affording
in both the writing and execution of configurations
greater efficiency
for sequentially accessing ranges of fields and windows.
FIELDINDEX
ranges
in screen
predefined variable which counts windows
fields in databases.
similarly counts
WINDOWINDEX
and FIELDINDEX
Where
start counting is controlled by the
(&)
placement
in the case
character which is appended,
of an ampersand
and in the case
of FIELDINDEX,
to a
to a window number,
of a window,
examp1e»
For
the current value of WINDOWINDEX is 3d
field number.
if
SALES.1&
means
"the third window after window SALES.IJ' or the fourth
window
in the PAGE named SALES.
If the value of WINDOWINDEX is
would
changed
refer to the next, or fifth, window in
to 4p SALES.I&
FIELDINDEX
equal
were
to I, EMPL0YEE.LNAME&
Likewise.
the PAGE.
The
would
refer to the first field after field EMPLOYEE.LNAME.
window
number.
by
be used
ampersand
cannot
as a fie7d number
or
itself
to an actual wIndow name or numbem or to an
It must be appended
actual field name (as defined in FILEDEF)
or number.
WINDOWINDEX
PAGEs,
image
is
a
and
FIELDINDEX
if
would
SHOW the contents of fields
following example
of the record currently in the buffer:
The
O
through
20
FROM O TO 20
FOR FIELDINDEX
SHOW EXAMPLE.RECNUM&
LOOP
The
FIELDINDEX
from
zero
initial FOR statement increments
through 20 with each repetition of the loop. The SHOW command
record from the EXAMPLE data file is
takes the whichever
currently in the buffer and shows RECNUM (the record number-always
the first9 or 0th. field in any record) and the 20
the presence
of
fields which follow it, on the screen, through
the & after the field name RECNUM. On the second pass.
RECNUM& evaluates as "the
first field after the record
number",
and so on through 20.
and WINDOWINDEX
to MOVE data, make
Caution: When using FIELDINDEX
is the
certain that the data type of the destination fields or windows
line to
name in the command
same as that of the field
(or window)
(RECNUM
example
which
above).
in the
is appended
the ampersand
and
check
FIELDINDEX
and WINDOWINDEX
the type of this data element
assume
that the destination windows
or fields will be of the same
a
exists between the data typem it will produce
type. If a mismatch
data
BAD FORMAT IN EXPRESSION
types are
error at run time. If source
(as when the field
mixed
referred to is RECNUM, a NUMERIC typeg and
those
use of one or more
of the typefollowing are ASCII fields),
The
changing
forms
the problem.
of the MOVE command will overcome
(MOVENUM, KK)VEINT»
and MOVESTR)
commands
described under Element
are
and should
be used
according to the data
Processing Commands,
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
type(s)
The
where
fields
of the destination
steps for using
windows
DataFlex
AND WINDOWINDEX
FIELDINDEX
E-12
WINDOWINDEX
Manual
User's
windows.
or
and
2.0
FIELDINDEX,
then, are:
at which the range of
l. Identffy the ffe1d.# or w1ndow.#
begins. You can start and stop
or fields you want to process
1ikeg
you
but you can't skip fields or windows;
processing
Write
the
window.#&,
2.
fie1d.#& or
Set
up a
whichever
3.
WINDOWINDEX,
command(s)
you
want
for either
and
or other counter to drive
is appropriateg through the
loop
FIELDINDEX
range
you
or
wish
to
process.
a page
we could have
(display screen) called SALES
In another examplm
as wIndows
displaying totals by
with the twelve calendar months on
month,
and two
for the entry of additive
at the bottom
entry windows
amounts
and of the number
of the month to which the entered amount is
numbers
shown
The month
on the screen
display below are
to be added.
used
by the system.
Likecue the
operator--they
not
to
are
strictly window numbers shown are merely
wise7
for explanatory purposes.
the
They
would
not normally be displayed on the screen:
it
/SALES
SALES
# MONTH
2
l
January
February
$
$
3
March
$
$
_
4
April
5
May
6
June
7
8
July
S
August
$
9
September
$
October
November
$
December
$
10
li
12
MONTH
$
$
#:
l*
_
.
.
$
.
ACCEPT SALES.13
CALC (SALES.13-1)
(window
_
_
._
_
._
._
._
._
._
._
_
_
.
.
.
(window
(window
2)
(window
(window
3)
4)
(window
(window
5)
6)
(window
7)
(window
(window
8)
9)
(window
10)
(window
li)
(window
AMOUNT TO ADD:
13)
l)
12)
$
.
(window
14)
_
TO WINDOWINDEX
ACCEPT SALES.14
CAl-C (SALES.14+SALES.I&)
TO SALES.I&
4
through
line accepts
the month number as shown on the screen
The second
line reduces
the entry (in the
of Page SALES.
The third
12)
by one
(making
line
the range O The last line takes the
accepts the additive amount to Window 14.
in the window
additive amount and adds
to the amount a7ready
which
is the month
specified by SALES.1&,
or one plus WINDOWINDEX.
number
entered in Window lZb and stores the new total back to the
window
for the specified month.
The
Window
first13
range
l -
li).
it
=== ===============
===
Copyright (C) 1984 Data
Access
Corporation
—
— 05/16/84
=—"====""=~=~—=—————————
—
~~~———~—~
" _ ~~—
E"13
——————————
——————————
——————
——————————
====
AND EXTENDING
MODIFYING
: EE::E::::
DATAFLEX
————————
——————————
___=~==~=_____
_ ____
NOTE:
and powerful features
of
This section describes some unusual
DataFlex. The vast majority of users will not have the need
here
The information
as a
Is Included
to make use of them.
matter of interest for the general user and to provide further
access
to the powerp flexibility and utilfty of DataFlex for
user
with specfal requirements.
the advanced
opportunity to
configurator the unusual
DataFlex offers the advanced
actually define new command words that become an integral part of the
the command
software syst«n--in effect» the ability to extend
language.
These
operations create macros that may be used for special
requirementm or to
types of functions to satisfy highly unusual
enable
impart his personal
a configurator
to distinctively
or company
"style" to the final application product.
framework
for the
Macros
can be thought
accept
User-defined macro comands
of as compile-time subroutines.
and textually
arguments
into the comnand
substitute the arguments
compiled
and
then
commands
model.
The resultant
are
included with the
The commands
provided
extended
"macros", and
with DataFlex
are
themselves
form
the basic
macros.
Using
a cormand
created through macro operations
rest of the program.
is exactly like using any other DataFlex command: the basic syntax is
a comnand
verb followed by one or more optional arguments.
be defined directly
or
within one or more configurations,
can
they can be added to FMACp the standard macro file which DataFlex
of all commands in a configuration at
refers to for the definition
compile time. Macros defined within a configuration will operate only
must
The definition
appear
within that configuration when executing.
Definithe defined macro is first used.
in the source code before'
will make the new macro
tions added to FMAC on the other hand,
under
available to every configuration which is compiled
it.
Macros
adding
to FMAC, the modified version of
FLEX.CFL
is the file
into the file "FLEX.CFL."
the
which
definition
of each
actually
for
compiler
refers
the
to
command
encounters
in a configuration as the configuration is being
supplied with DataFlex, is used from the
compiled. The PACK program,
operating system prompt to pack FMAC by the following comand:
If
a macro
FMAC must
is defined
be
it
by
re-packed
it
d:PACK d:FMAC
D: in both
where
drive on
found.
FLEX.CFL
command
which
will be written
is issued.
places
PACK.COM
shown
and
above
represents the logical
the (uncompiled) FMAC files are
to the default
drive
from
which
the
above
———————————————-———————————————————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
AND EXTENDING
MODIFYING
E-14
DATAFLEX
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
REPLACEMENT
simplest form of macro operation is replacement. Any consistent
string occurring in a configuration can be replaced by another string.
example,
For
a
you establish
while deffn1ng field names fn FILEOEF,
long, descriptive field name such as
"TRANSACTIM_FILE.LAST_PART_COST'4
tedious to type
you might find
that name into a configuration a number of times. By including the
in your program you can have the compiler
following macro definition
configuration everywhere
substitute the long name into the compüed
"LCOST"
(or any other short string that seems descriptive to
you typed
you while writing
the configuration):
The
if
it
FORMAT:
before_str1ng after_string
fREPLACE
EXAMPLE:
1cost transactfon_fl1e.1ast_part_cost
#REPLACE
(uncompiled) version of the configuration would
but as long as either FMAC. had the replacement
in it, or the configuration had the replacement cormiand in
configuration
before the first occurrence of LCOST g the compiled
FILE.LAST_PART_COST
TRANSACTION
would
have
substituted for each occurrence
Especially note the initial pound sign (S) on the
of I-COST.
symboL
That
and certain
command
others which will be illustraline.
the distinctive
syntax of macro operations.
ted be1owp comprise
Of coursep
the
source
I-COST in
always
have
it,
it
COMMAND DEFINITICN
Command
using sequences
definition
allows you to make up new cormands
When used
in a configuratiom
of existfng DataFlex commands.
your new
but
command
will
other command in DataF1exg
will look just like a anysequence
of other DataFlex comands.
in fact cause execution of
(instead of in
is defined In a configuration
Again, if the comand
FMAC.L
be defined before the connand
must
is first used in the
configuration.
it
it
FORMAT:
#C0RNAND
new_command_name
command
(existing)
additional
existing
{symbol
line
command
list}
lines
* 0g0000 00
#ENDC0MMAND
to check
optionally be followed by a list of symbols
given to the comand
in the configuration are of the
Sytnbol
checking is more thoroughly explained in and
correct type(s).
after the explanation of the #(ME(X comand, which uses the same
syntax. Do not type the {} braces; they only signify that the
connand
component
Is optional.
The command
may
whether
arguments
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16184
User's
2.0
DataFlex
MODIFYING
Manual
sign_on
CLEARSCREEN
SHOW
SHOW
SHOW
'
'
'
(C)
DATAFLEX
E-15
—
EXAMPLE:
KOMMAND
AND EXTENDING
EXAMPLE
1983
DATA
SHOW
#END(j0mAND
PRCGRAM'
ACCESS CORP'
is
defines a new commandg SIGN ON. Whenever
This
used
the five indented command lines above
in a configuration,
and
will be executed
in its place (it clears the screen
surrounded
by
in quotation marks,
displays the two-line banner
This is useful to
a couple of blank lines on the screen).
To do that we
the language.
save
typing but doesn't "expand"
have
within our new comnand.
to be able to use arguments
it
macro
,
that we wish to be able to insert the name OÍ the
for example
PROGRAM'
'EXAMPLE
shown
legend
(instead of the hard-coded
to the SIGN ON command written into
to sign on as an argument
The syntax for an argument
is an
the running configuration.
I and g after.it. The
exclamation point with an integer between
model
comand
will then textually substitute the first argument
a !1 appears
written after the command into the command model wherever
in itg the second argument
(if any) wherever !2 appears, and so on).
Suppose
program
above)
EXAMPLE:
#C0MMAND
s1gn_on
CLEARSCREEN
SHOW
SHOW
SHOW
'
'
'
(C)
1983
II DATA
ACCESS
CORP.'
SHOW
#ENDC0NIAND
used
"II"
The
fo1low1ng
could
the
above
use
of
would
SIGN
be
ON.
replaced
A use
by the
of this
argument
firstcommand
macro
new
be:
'ACCOUNTS
sign_on
"ACCOUNTS
PAYABLE
PAYABLE PROGRAM'
then
PROGRAM" would
be substituted
at the !1
be
can
position when the command was executed. Nine arguments
replaced in this manner (i.e. !1 !2 !3....!9). The symbol
that have beeñ passed to
"!0" is the total number of arguments
a macro
connand.
A macro
used
Macros
five
are
not subroutines.
each
timep
so
configuration will be expanded
times in a source
frequent use of a large macro can result in excessive mtmory consumed
by the executable configuration.
Generally, larger macros can be more
written as
simply installed and used within less file space
The exception to this guideline
is where the same macro
subroutines.
is required across a group of several configurations.
A WORD OF CAUTION:
if
——————
————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
MODIFYING
E-16
AND EXTENDING
DATAFLEX
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
be made anywhere
Replacements
can
macro
is a powerful tool.
The
and a macro
can even
call other macros.
within the expansion
and replace
is like the multiple search
substitution
for arguments
function found in some word processors. The following utilities
further enhance the utility of macros:
The
INCLUDE
FILES
You
keep
these
can
include
and subroutines
macros
in an external
at compile time with the #INCLUDE connand:
common
file
,
and
Sinclude filename
entire file "filename" will be included in the compilation process
One INCLUDEd
at the point(s) of the INCLUDE(s).
file can INCLUDEnot yet
(ASCII)
be source
format.
another file. INCLUDEd files should
The lines qjf the INCLUDEd
fi7e(s) will not
separately pre-compi1ed.
except
be displayed during compilatton,
for any #REM lines which the
file may contain.
The
COMPILE
TIME
VARIABLES
evaluate integer numbers
generally used for assigning
There
26 such
are
integer
sequential numbers to labels or variables.
an upper
case
letter is used, the value of the
variables (A..,Z).
If
a lower case
letter is usech
before use;
variable is incremented
unchanged.
The compile time variables
are
the value will remain
referenced with a preceding exclamation point "!". The value of the
variable in text form is substituted for the "lx" in the line output.
Macros
and configuration
and expressions at COMPILE
files
TIME
use and
can
which
are
if
The
value of
integer variable
any
can
be
set with the
#SET
command.
FORMAT:
#SET
The
"!".
ment.
uated
The
variab1e_7etter$
expression
by a
not be preceded
variable can be any letter (A...Z) and should
from
The "S" separates the variable
expression
the
arguletter
be any
The expression can
integer expression that can be evaland
can
compile
time,
at
itself contain integer variables.
include parentheses.
expressfon should
it
EXAMPLE:
#SET
SET
F$
(Ir-l)
the integer variable "F" to the value of the integer
Since
variable "r" minus one.
"r" is lower caseg It will
be automatically
incremented.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
not
05/16/84
DataFlex
MODIFYING
Manual
User's
2.0
AND
EXTENDING
E-17
DATAFLEX
—————
CONDITIONALS:
included or excluded
lines may be selectively
Portions of your source
These
be
can
from
configuration by use of #IF coímands.
the compiled
used
on the number
of
within a macro to modify its output depending
arguments
set the condition and an
or their type. The IF comiands
"#ENDIF"
terminates it. You may also have an "#ELSE" to change the
for every "#IF", but
sense
of the last IF. There must be an "#ENDIF"
is optional.
the "#ELSE"
FORMAT
#IF
expression
command
line to compile
command
line to compile
etc.
if
if
expression
expression
TRUE
line to compile
line to compile
If
expression
expression
FALSE
TRUE
#ELSE
comnand
command
etc.
if
FALSE
#ENDIF
the expression has a value other than zerop
be included in the compiled
configuration.
example:
For
command
lines will be included.
If
will
#IF
!0>0
SHOW 'THERE
#ELSE
SHOW 'NO
ARE
!0
the TRUE command lines
Otherwise, the FALSE
ARGUMENTS'
ARGUMENTS'
#ENDIF
generate only
This will
there are
If
we
could
use
an
false
any
arguments
one
and
compiled
the second
1ineg
the
SHOW
if
first
there
SHOhh
are
if
not.
debugging
statements in our configuration that
based
we could
on a single statementg
or excluded
integer variable "d" that would be true (l) for debug mode and
(O)
for runtime mode.
wanted
to have
be included
EXAMPLE:
D$ TRUE
command
#SET
l1nem generatfng value for testvar)
...(other
#IF
Id
SHOW 'TEST
VARIABLE='
testvar
Sendif
,
shows
to TRUE, followed by
the debug flag initialized
This example
th1ngsp
comnand
among
generate a
other
lines
which,
configuration
Where
the debug flag was set TRUE9
value for the variable TESTVAR.
"TEST
then, the value of TESTVAR will be displayed after the legend
VARIABLE
the #SET line can
=". When the configuration is debugged.
compj1edp
rewritten to set the debug flag FALSE, and when the file is
statements will not be included.
the lines triggering debugging
be
—
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
MODIFYING
E-18
AND
EXTENDING
DataFlex 2.0 User's
DATAFLEX
Manual
———————
The
other IF
#IFDEF
symbol
#IFTYPE
symbol
#IFCLASS
commands
symbol
are:
if
if
list)
if
if
list
list
(TRUE
the type
(TRUE
the class of
#IFSAME
symboll
You may
cormand.
check
the type and class
#(>tE(X
will generate an
of the
symbol
is not in
been
symbol
(TRUE
symbo12
has
(TRUE
list.
defined.)
class of
and
is in
symbol
is in
symbol
list.)
symbo?2.)
symboll is the
same
of an
error
with the "#MECK"
if the type or class
argument
message
as
FORMAT:
#QdECK
symbol
list
and an optional
#CHECX connand
type check line on the #C0NAND
line are both intended for error checking. An error will be generated
one of the type check
the type or class of symbol matches
characters in list (see symbol-checking characters below). An error
is the same type or class as the
the argument
will be generated
symbol-checking character in list.
The
if
if
=========================———~——~—~~~—~—~~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
——
~
——————————""""
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
MODIFYING
Manual
AND EXTENDING
DATAFLEX
E-19
~
eARAcTERs
SM3OL-MECKING
Meaning
Character
S
Types.
STRING
N
D
NUMBER
DATE
I
INTEGER
E
EXPRESSION
#
INDICATOR
NOT AN INDICATOR
X
GROUP OPTIONS
{}
GROUP INDICATORS
LABEL
O
El
L
[]
Classes.
C
CONSTANT
F
W
V
G
FILE
ELEMENT
WINDOW
IN MEMORY VARIABLE
GROUP ({options}
or [indicators])
Literal Content.
.
of
error will be generated
if the contents
do NOT
the variab1e(s) named in the argument
match
one of the strings
in quotes
entered in
the list.
An
"any""characters"
"in quotes"
Other.
ERROR
U
R
ERROR IF
ARGUMENT
.
%
NO MORE ARGUMENTS
SPECIAL,
changes
our
SIGNON
TYPED
UNTYPED
REQUIRED
constant number
to constant integer.
SPECIAL,
changes
all windows
to type string.
S
In
IF
(DEFINED)
T
examp1ep
the following
would
be
a
reasonable
symbol-
checking line:
EXAMPLE:
SIGNON GURA
A'CONAND
.
This would specify that
CAN'T
be
SIGNON
have
one
be
group, undefined or
a LABEL9
required argument
an indicator.
order of the type check characters has no significance.
the basic DataF1ex
don't include type checking in your macrom
comnands
will probably pick up any type errors.
The
The
best
example
Copyright (c)
of using
1984
Data
macros
Access
is the
FMAC
Corporation
If
that
you
file itself.
05/16/84
E-20
MODIFYING
AND EXTENDING
DataFlex 2.0 User's
DATAFLEX
Manual
—
— ——————————————————
TYPING
INTERNAL
OF SYMBOLS:
following information
internal workings
of the
DataFlex.
is intended for
processor
The
macro
those
and
interested in the
is not required to use
symbol,
whether
constant9 window or file, is REPLACED from its
symbolic name to one which 'Is meaningful to the DataFiex runtime
by a vertical
bar
can be identified
": in the
system These symbols
The next two
symbol.
the
characters
replaced
character
of
first
and the value of the symbol
represent the CLASS and TYPE of the symbol
field and/or file numbers follows
is a constant) or its window8
(if
Each
"
those4
it
EXAMPLES:
ICNO
means
NUMBER,
C0NSTANTg
ZERO.
means
means
lCS'USA'means
IWN3
means
WINDOW NUMBER
WINDOW, STRING9
INTEGER,
ONE
C0NSTANT7
lFD2gl
FIELD,
lWS2
ICI1
The following
symbols:
means
USA
WINDOW
C0NSTANTp
STRING,
WINDOW, NUMERIC9
are the type
DATE,
and
FILE
2.
NUMBER
FIELD
class characters
QURACTER
INTERPRETATION
C
CCNSTANT
TWO.
THREE
I
used
to identify
CLASSES:
y
VARIABLE
W
WINDOW
F
G
FIELD
GROUP
S
N
STRING
D
DATE
I
INTEGER
EXPRESSION
TYPES:
NUMBER
E
LABEL
GROUP OPTION
GROUP BOOLEAN
L
O
B
(INDICATOR)
configuratiort,
If you put the command "#N0ISY 99" at the top of your
at compile time0
all of the conversion will display on the screen
The option
together with the final output of your comand lines.
code
SNOISY
O will
cause
statments to
only your original source
disp1ay9
the
while #N0ISY l will cause everything to display except
intermediate code and expansions.
by the compiler with
file that is generated
rootname
plus the extension
of your configuration's
This is the internal DataFlex configuration code.
If you
There
is
name
made
".IC'°.
Copyright
a temporary
a
up
(C)
1984
Data
Access
CcÑporation
use
05/16/84
2.0
DataFlex
User's
MODIFYING
Manual
AND EXTENDING
DATAFLEX
E-21
————
#N0ISY
an error,
this file will not be deleted from your
inspected. Otherwisep
the file will be deleted
automatíca11y
The
upon
completion of a successful compilation.
general
format of the ",IC" file is as follows.
disk
99
and
or
can
have
be
FORMAT:
LINE_NUI¶3ER
INDx
Where
and CONAND
INDI
stands
IND2
IND3
COMMAND ARG1 ARG2
ARGy stands
number.
for indicator x,
is the internal command
for
argument
y»
the ".IC'° file is not generally used at the configuration
be of interest
and help in debugging
sometimes
can
level
difficult
command
numbers
The
the
is contained
Internal
configurations.
of
list
and library
on the Pascal
source
disk in the file called
Although
it
"COMMAND.DEF".
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
E-22
MODIFYING
AND EXTENDING
———————
2.0
User's
Manual
————————————
——-—————————————————————————————
THIS
Copyright (c)
Dataflex
DATAFLEX
1984
Data
PAGE
Access
INTENTIONALLY
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
05/16/84
"==_
_~"===="""""""""——~——~—~——
———————Tr
_
———————————
==========
ZZZZZzIzzz
————————
——————--,-
RESERVED
____
==========
——————————
~_____
————-—————
WORDS OF DATAFLEX
"""""
=
THE
RESERVED
WORDS OF DATAFLEX
the next page are those used by. and
DataFlex uses these words as corwnandm
system
ind1catorsp system procedures, options, and
recognize most of them.
The words
DataF1ex.
FA
_
on
built
system
so
on.
into,
variables,
You
will
into an alphabetical list as a convenient reference
are assembled
to words that must not be used in DataFlex configurations as
indicatorm variable names, field names, window namesp page namesy
usech
string.
If they aremeaning
file namesp or any other functional
and
DataFlex
is likely to mistake them for their reserved
something
execute
in no way similar to what you intended. The words
may.
they may be included
of course, be used as data within databases,
and they may be used
or report captions.
in
in images as screen
prompting
in quotes
(single or
strings or any other material enclosed
double)
They
may also be included
within any DataFlex
configuration.
by the
(material preceded
within connents
"//" comment character) in
configurations.
They
to DataFlex are words which
Unavoidably, many of the words reserved
be
very useful as variable names or for other prohibited uses.
The deliberate
use of small
differences will effectively
restore the
words
use of these
to you while at the same time avoiding use of the
actual word itself. For examp1ey
your configuration prints the run
date
at the top of a report, you may not bring the date into your
But
is entirely
report by use of a variable named DATE.
permissible to use the word within a longer variable namep such as
RUN_DATE
(note the use of underscore
to simulate a space for
readabi)ityp but to maintain continuity of the variable name string).
would
if
it
may wish
of the following page to keep where
to make a photocopy
may be referred
to readily while you are writing configurations.
Copying
is expressly prohibited under the terms of your
this manual
You
it
license
agreementp
except
for the above-described
use
of the following
page.
——————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
F-2
RESERVED
THE
ABORT
ACCEPT
ALL
AND
ANY
APPEND
AS
ASCII
ATTAM
AUTOFIND
AUTOPAGE
BACKFIELD
BEGIN
BLANKFORM
BREAK
BREAKINIT
BREAKPOINT
BY
CAl-C
CALCULATE
CAPSLOCK
(>ÍAIN
NARACTER
MECK
CLEAR
CLEARFORM
CLEARSCREEN
CLEARWARNING
CLEARXY
CL0SE_INPUT
CL0SE_OUTPUT
CMDLINE
COPYFILE
DATE
DEBUG
DELETE
DESPOOL
DIRECT_INPUT
DIRECT_OUTPUT
DIRECTORY
DISPLAY
DISPLAYONLY
END
END$OF$REP0RT
END.OF.REPORT
ENDGROUP
ENT$PERMISSIVE
ENTAGAIN
ENTDISPLAY
ENTER
ENTER.CLEAR
ENTER.DELETE
ENTER.EDIT
ENTER.EXIT
ENTER.SAVE
Copyright
(C)
DataFlex
WORDS OF DATAFLEX
RESERVED
ENTEREND
ENTERGROUP
ENTERMODE
ENTRY
EQ
ERASEFILE
ERR
ERRLINE
ERROR
FALSE
FIELDINDEX
FILELIST
FILENUMBER
FILL
FIND
FINDERR
FINDREQ
FLEXKEY
FL0AT$
FOR
FORCEPUT
FORMAT
FORMFEED
FOUND
FROM
GE
GOSUB
GOTO
GOTOXY
GROUP
GT
HEADER
HELP
IF
IFCHAMGE
IFNOT
IN
INCREMENT
INDEx.BATe
INDEX.1...IO
INDICATE
INDICATOR
INKEY
INPUT
INTEGER
KEY.CLEAR
KEY.DELETE
KEY.DOWN
KEY.ESCAPE
KEY.FIELD
KEY.FIND
KEY.HELP
KEY.NEXT
KEY.PREVIOUS
KEY.RETURN
1984
Data
Access
KORDS
2.0
User's
Manual
OF DATAFLEX
KEY.SAVE
KEY.SFIND
KEY.UP
KEY.USER
KEYCHECX
KEYPRESS
KEYPROC
LASTERR
LASTIF
LE
LEFT
LENGTH
LINECOUNT
LOCK
LOOP
LT
MATM
MEMAVAIL
MID
MOVE
MOVEINT
MOVENUM
MOVESTR
MULTIUSER
NAME
NE
NEWPAGE
NEXT
NOENTER
NOISY
NOPUT
NOT
NUMBER
NUMPAGE
NUMWINDOW
ON
OPEN
OR
OUTCLOSE
OUTFILE
OUTPUT
PAD
PAGE
PAGE.LINES
PAGEBREAK
PAGEC11ECX
PAGECOUNT
PAGEEND
PAGEFEED
PAGE1...255
PATHNAME
POINTS
POS
PRINT
QUIET
------
Corporation
RANGE
READ
READLN
RECCOUNT
RECNUM
REGISTRATION
RELATE
RENAME
REPEAT
REPORT
REPORTEND
REQUIRED
REREAD
RETAIN
RETAINALL
RETURN
RIGHT
RPT.anything
RUNPROGRAM
SAVE
SAVERECORD
SCREENEND
SECTION
SELECT
SEQEOF
SEQEOL
SETNANGE
SHOW
SHCMLN
SKIPFOUND
STATUS
STRING
STRLEN
STRMARK
SUBHEADER1...9
SUBTOTAL
SUBTOTALI...9
SUPPRESS
SYSDATE
SYSTEM
TERMCHAR
THRU
TO
TOTAL
TRIM
TRUE
UNLOCK
UNTIL
UPPERCASE
WHILE
WINDOWINDEX
WRITE
WRITELN
ZEROFILE
05/16/84
ARGUMENTS
FILES.
==========
~
AND COMMANDS
ZZFFZF±Z==
——————
FILE
NAME
AND EXTENSION
TYPES
of a "family" of operating
for the DataFlex user as a
single unified whole. The data file "rootname" (specified by the user
of a family of
in the FILEDEF routine) is common to all the m«nbers
denote
data
various
standard funcextensions
while
differing
files,
tions for each of the different
files.
Each
system
DataFlex
files
database
is actually composed
which
function with each other
following are the standard extensions and file names used by DataThe
The "*" indicates
india file required" for runtime.
CAPITAL
letters
cates a file required only at compile time. SOLID
Lower
case
denote
letters are
explicit
content (usually extensions).
any unique
string of
descriptive of a filename which may be virtually
as a file name
characters recognized by the CP/M operating system
element.
The
F1ex.
FILE
"r
NAME
—
rootname.DAT
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
*RAND
DataFlex
and
rootname.K??
rootname.DEF
*RAND
SECt
rootname.TAG
FILELIST.CFG
#SEQ
*RAND
TERMLIST.CFG
program.COM
RAND
PROG
program.CND
PROG
SEQ
PROG
module.ERL
program.OVF
*FLEX
#SEQ
config.FLX
config.FD
config.lC
config.RPT
SEQ
SEQ
data
data
(one
Contains file
file.database)
Dataflex index file (one for each index)
File definition
listing
Field tag names file
List of active file numbers and screen control
codes
for configured terminal
Available CRT configurations pre-coded
(CP/M
and MS-DOS systems)
Executable program
(CP/M-86
systems)
Executable program
module
MT+ library
Unlinked Pascal
Program
overlay ftle
configuration
Executable DataFlex
File definition
info for compiler
code
Intermediate DataFlex
file.
code
Source
for sample reports
Source
code
sample
screens
for
Source
code
for COMDEX show demo
config.FRM
SHOWDEMO
SEQ
SEQ
FLEX.CFL
FMAC
SRAND
SEQ
PACK.COM/CMD
PROG
ENTER
SEQ
command
Packed
macro
connand
Unpacked
macro
Program
to pack FMAC (command=PACK
List of the ENTER macro
REPORT
FLEX.COM/CMD
SEQ
*PROG
DataFlex
RUN.OVF
COMP.COM/CMD
*OVF
#PR0G
CCNP,C!VF
#OVF
READ.FLX
FLEX
NOTES:
definition
per
file
file
List of
the
REPORT
FMAC)
macro
runtime program
DataFlex runtime overlay
DataFlex compile program
DataF1ex
compile
overlay
Program
generator to read
file
file
sequential
files
reside on the logged-in disk drive.
files
ItS-bit versions do not haveg or use, COMP.OVF
In 16-bit versions, RUN.OVF is replace by RUN.OOI thru .004
.OVF
C¿pyright
(C)
and
1984
.FO
Data
must
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
F-4
FILESr
ARGUMENTS
DataFlex 2.0 User's
AND COMMANDS
==
——
PREDEFINED
The fo11lowing
are the
discussed
in sections
Manual
——————
ARGUMENTS
system
variables
they pertain:
predefined indicators
of the manual to which
and
INDICATORS:
ENTSPERMISSIVE
'
ERR
FINDERR
FOUND
KEY.CLEAR
KEY.DELETE
KEY.DOWN
KEY.ESCAPE
KEY.FIELD
KEY.FIND
KEY.HELP
KEY.NEXT
KEY.PREVIOUS
KEY.RETURN'
KEY.SAVE
KEY.SFIND
KEY.UP
KEY.USER
KEYPRESS
LASTIF
MULTIUSER
Set
PAGEBREAK
If new page, set
Sequential end of
Sequentfal end of
Triggers selection
SEQEOF
SEQEOL
SELECT
STATUS
SUBTOTAL1..9
SYSTEM
Disables resetting of FIND and AUTOFIND
Error indicator
Result of last FIND (opposite of FOUND)
Result of last FIND
Clear screen
Flex-key
Delete record Flex-key
Dom
arrow
Flex-key
Escape?
end function
Flex-key
Back
Field, window Flex-key
Find Flex-key
Help
Key Flex-key
Next
record Flex-key
Previous record Flex-key
Return/enter Flex-key
Save
record Flex-key
Super
Find
Flex-key
Up arrow
Flex-key
User-defined Flex-key
by
KEYCHECK,
most
Result of
Set
Shows
by
MULTIUSER
whether
if
key
recent
press
IF
test
system
option
by PAGEMECX
file
file
7ine
REPORT macro
named
Is ACTIVE
in
Breakpoint indicators
VARIABLES:
ERRLINE
FILENUMBER
FIELDINDEX
FLEXKEY
LASTERR
LINECOUNT
MEMAVAIL
NUMPAGE
NUMWINDOW
PAGECOUNT
PAGEEND
PAGEFEED
RECCOUNT
STRLEN
STRMARK
WINDOWINDEX
Configuration line number of last error
Number
of last DataF1ex
file for FILELIST
Indexed
addressing for fields
Number
of last Flex-key used
Number
of most recent error triggered
Output
line counter
Amount
of mmory
of available
Number
of pages
Number
of windows
Output page counter (set by PAGEMECX)
Printable lines per page
Action to take on page feed
Running
total of records selected in REPORT
String length
-String position marker
Indexed
addressing for wIndows
======_———————————————————————————————————————————
—
(C)
Access
1984 Data
05/16/84
Corporation
Copyright
User's
2.0
DataFlex
FILESg
Manual
ARGUMENTS
=
WINDOW FORMAT
AND COMMANDS
OPTIONS
AND ENTRY
brackets {} shown below are part of the comand
included with the desired option(s) when written
configurations.
The
be
FORMAT
WINDOW
*
*
*
ENTRY
syntax,
into
and
should
OPTIONS:
EFFECT
SYNTAX
OPTION
*
F-5
— ———————————
DECIMAL
{PQINTS=Q}
FILL
FLOATS
{FILL="*"}
Numeric
decimal
points
character
Fill
Floating "$" sign
Numeric
range
checking
Minus
sign on right
Space
suppression
RANGE
{FL0AT$}
{RANGE=l*l0}
SIGN ON RIGHT
SUPPRESS
{SIGNRT}
{SUPPRESS}
UPPERCASE
VALIDITY
{CAPSL0CK}
Force
upper
{eEcK="YlN"}
Valid
response
FIND
AUTOMATIC
POINTS
DECIMAL
MUTOFINW
{P0INTS=Q}
FIND
record automatically
Numeric
decimal
points
DISPLAY
ONLY
FIND REQUIRED
FORCE PUT
{DISPLAYONLY}
{FINDREQ}
{F0RCEPUT}
always
Cursor
skip window
Successful
FIND required
NO PUT
NO ENTER
RANGE álECXING
{N0PUT}
{NOENTER}
{RANGE=l¶l0}
Do NOT
No data
Numeric
REQUIRED
{REQUIRED}
case
checking
OPTIONS
ALWAYS
{RETAIN}
(RETAINALL}
FOUND
{SKIPF0UND}
RETAIN
RETAIN
SKIP
IF
{CAPSLOCX}
{NECX="YN"}
UPPER CASE
VALIDITY
*0ption
may
C(·'-riC:-)t
(C)
be
used
1984
by
Data
PRINT
Access
command
buffer uncondittona11y
put to the database
entry to window
range
checking
Required
entry.
clearablé
Retain window,
Retain window,
not c1earab1e
Skip
entry if record found
Update
Force
Valid
case
upper
response
checking
only.
Corporation
05/16/84
F-6
FILES9
ARGUMENTS
DataFlex
AND COMMANDS
User's
Manual
LIST
SYNTAX
COMAND
2.0
(do not type darts).
elements
indicate required substitutive
(do
elements
not type
{Brackets} indicate optional substitutive
where
{{ and }}).
they are shown below in double
brackets except
and
GROUPed indicatorsn
[Braces] enclose
are to be typed.
e1ement9
WindOWg
which
may be a database
"Arg" signifies an argument
variable.
or in-memory
Three
periods (...) indicate a non-specific quantity of the elements
which
appear
on either
side of the periods.
CONSOLE
I/O GROUP
CLEARSCREEN
<1ine>
CLEARXY
GOTOXY <1ine>
INKEY
INPUT
{'prompt'}
{colnmand}
KEYCHECK
{arg
SHOW
SHOWLN
krg
CONTROL
arg}
...
...
arg}
GROUP
ABORT
CLEARWARNING
CHAIN
"
{string
...
DEBUG
ERROR
string}"
GOTO <1abel>
GOSUB <1abel>
ON
ON
RETURN {1abeR
DATABASE
GROUP
ATTACH
CLEAR
DELETE
FIND
{label
{label
GOSUB
<1abel>
GOTO <1abel>
iuen
... 1abe1}
...
{filename 0.. filename}
filename}
{filename
...
M0DES=LT,LE,EQ,GE,GT
{INDEX.n}
OPEN
RELATE
SAVE
filename]
{filename
SAVERECORD
filename}
{filename
...
ZEROFILE
DEFINITION
...
GROUP
DATE
INDICATOR
INTEGER
date}
{date
... {indicator
indicator}
...
'Integer}
{integer
NUMBER
{number
STRING
{length}
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
...
...
number}
Corporation
07/18/84
FILES»
Manual
2.0 User's
DataF1ex
ARGUMENTS
AND COMMANDS
F-7
——————
ELEMENT
GROUP
PROCESSING
CALCWLATE}
to
INCREMENT
MOVE
ENTER
<1nteger>
TO
MOVEINT
MOVENUM
TO
TO
MOVESTR
TO
MACRO GROUP
ENDGROUP
ENTDISPLAY
ENTER
{filename
...
ENTEREND
ENTERGROUP
ENTRY
{window
FORMS GROUP
{TO
ACCEPT
AUTOPAGE
filename}
{options}}
}
BLANKFORM
BLANKFORM
{THRU
}
CLEARFORM
{THRU
}
CLEARFORM
{T0 }
{{optiorisñ
DISPLAY
FORMAT
NAME
OUTCLOSE
OUTFILE
OUTPUT
{windowname
...
windowname}
PAGE
{TO
PRINT
INDICATE
CROUP
IF
INDICATE
}
{NOT}
INDICATE
MODES:
{NOT)
INDICATE
{AND/OR
{NOT}
AS
LT,
LE.
EQ,
MATCH
GE, GT, NE, IN,
GROUP ANY/ALL
[indicator
ANY/ALL
[indicator
STATUS
TRUE
FALSE
INDICATE
INDICATE
indicator
indicator]
{indicator}]}
KEY GROUP
BACKFIELD
ENTAGAIN
ENTERMODE
KEYPROC
GROUP
MULTI-USER
DESPOOL
IFCHANGE
LOCK
REREAD
(compile, but
Copyright
(C)
1984
not
execute
under
single-user)
{filename
UNLOCK
do
...
———————
Access
Data
filename}
——————————————————
Corporation
07/18/84
F-8
FILES,
ARGUMENTS
DataFlex
AND COMMANDS
2.0
User's
Manual
————————
———————
REPORT
MACRO GROUP
FORMFEED
OUTPUT
SECTIONS:
SUBHEADER#,
HEADER,
<1ines>
{BY
BODY,
SUBTOTAL,
TOTAL
PAGEMECK
REPORT
file.fie1d
REPORTEND
SECTION
)
fi1e.fie1d}
{BREAK
fi1e.field
...
SEQUENTIAL
I/O GROUP
CLOSE INPUT
CL0SE_OUTPUT
DIRECT_INPUT
DIRECT_0UTPUT
{arg
{arg
READLN
{arg
WRITE
{arg
WRITELN
READ
STRING
arg}
... arg}
... arg}
... arg}
...
GROUP
APPEND
string}
{string
...
TO
TO
CHARACTER
CMDLINE
<1ength>
TO
LEFT
TO
LENGTH
<1ength>
TO
MID
<7ength>
TO
PAD
TO
IN
POS
RIGHT
TO <1ength>
TO
TRIM
UPPERCASE
ASCII
STRUCTURED CONTROL GROUP
END
BEGIN
-
TO
FOR FROM
UNTIL
REPEAT
END
WHILE
EQ, GE. GT
MODES:
LT9 LE,
SYSTEM
GROUP
COPYFILE
DIRECTORY
ERASEFILE
FILELIST
REGISTRATION
RENAME
TO
TO
RUNPROGRAM
SYSDATE
TO
LOOP
LOOP
{filename}
{program_arg}
{number}
SYSTEM
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
———
_~___~
F"9
——————————————
————————
—
"""""==".==",===="=========",====".===",
__
———————
==========
SPECIFICATIONS
===--=====
==========
_ ____~
—————————
Provided
by
DataF1ex:
File
File
·
Maintenance
(on
Update
(on
(on
Entry
Report Generation
Data
Query
Command
(on
line,
line,
line,
¶nteractive)
interactive)
interactive)
1inep
interactive)
language
Data
Base
Management
Pascal
Library (optional)
Program-independent
Microprocessor Environment:
Supported
Operating
8080.
Z-80,
8085
8086,
8088,
80186»
Systems:
CP/M,
etc.
80286
MP/M-86,
CP/M-86,
system
menu
etc.
MS-DOS,
PC-DOS,
3COM,
Novell Sharenet, PC-Net,
Te1evideo
Molecular N-Star»
Network.
Action DPC/OS, Omninet,
with Corvus
TurboOOS,
OMS Hi-Nét»
khmOST,
IBM "PC"
Requirements:
Transient
Program
(8
Area:
(16
CRT
60Ok
with addressable cursor
of disk storage
bit):
bit):
52k
lOOk
Purpose:
Development
Applications
Structure:
Extended
Data
Host
Relational
Independent
DBMS With
and
Utilities
language.
comand
Language:
Pasca1/MT+
(C)
Digital
required for execution
NOTE:
Many
themselves
DataF1ex
actually
DBMS
Files:
Maximum
data
elements
per
Maximum
indexes
per
file:
file:
_==_=_========================——~—
Copyright
Data
(NOt
configuration.)
utilities
DataFlex
are
configurations.
255
(8
(16
bit): 4 9
bit): "ad
Pius
1984
or
125
Maximum
(C)
Research)
Access
—
Corporation
one
hoc"
index.
——————————
——————-——
05/16/84
Maximum
elements
per
(8
(16
index:
bit):
bit):
Manua7
4
6
8 Megabytes
Maximum
File sIze:
Maximum
records
Maximum
record size:
65g536
file:
per
49Ó(jÓ
bytes to
Multi-1evel
B+
Indexing:
Data
2.0 User's
DataF7ex
SPECIFICATIONS
F-lO
*MEML
ISAM
Packe&
File type
fixed-length
random
access
fixed point.
Numeric
Type:
Packed
Numeric
precision:
4
places after
Numeric
range:
+
or - 99,999,999,999,999.9999
Maximum
data
sfmu1taneous1y:
files
Maximum
line length:
Maximum
argument
lines:
bit):
bit):
32AOO
255
80
size:
of
characters
windows:
32>000
configuration:
255
number
Maximum
pages
Maximum
number
of indicators:
89
Maximum
number
of variables:
32AOO
Maximum
INTEGER
Integer
range:
+
l89
Sub-category breakpoint levels:
9
(disk or
(plus
or -
pre-defined)
(*MEML)
32»767
terminal-independent
Protected
sourcep
semi-compiled.
——
———————
Copyright
38
residentj
mmory
Line- or comma-delimited
Device-independent.
files:
f't7e characteristics:
Command
(*MEML)
40
variables:
Flex-keys:
Sequential
files)
(*MEML)
characters
Maximum
per
point
only
at least 5
at least 10
(plus associated index
(8
(16
configuration
decimal
(*MEML)
Qpen
Maximum
BCD
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
—————————
05/16/84
2.0
DataF1ex
SPECIFICATIONS
Manual
User's
—
=."===
—————————————
~ — ———_~___—_""""""
Types
Types
of
of
F-ll
Text strings
arguments:
(bcd)
Numeric
Integer
Date
(extended
julian)
Mov«nent
& conversion
Indicators (conditionals)
Calculation
Control, unstructured
ControL Structured
Data
cotmands:
IMAGE
Data
forms
Entry
Reporting
Base
Data
Manipulation
String
Sequential I/O
Console
I/O
(terminal-independent)
Macro
pre-processor
Data
Data
Uti1itles:
Base
Base
Definition
recovery
installation
Terminal & system
Text editor
Program
generation
Query
Configurable
Configuration
Memory
1imfted, affected primarily
- the computer
and the memory
system
in
the configuration.
*MEML
(TPA)
MENU
compiler
by the available
memory
by the rest of
consumed
————
—————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
F-12
DataFlex 2.0 User's
SPECIFICATIONS
Manual
=======================================
===~
=""===~=~===="=============================
——~=======~~=========
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
=
Data
PAGE
~""
Access
INTENTIONALLY
==
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
======
""~=="====
05/16/84
""========
-———+—————
===~~~————————~~
""__
=ZEFÉ==
ERROR MESSAGES
COMPILER
TYPES
F"13
==""""===
~
_=~__=:
:::
OF ERRORS
those
time and RUN time:
It is important to distinguish
from
those
is compiled
actions and errors which occur when a program
which
compiler takes your
is run. The DataF1ex
occur when a program
and translates
code
into a "compiled" form
English command source
form
is not machine
to execute, This compiled
that is more efficient
language,
to DataFlex.
but an internal form unique
COWILE
it
(compilation) takes place, the compiler may run
this translation
this (s
doesn't know how to translate;
line which
into a comíand
Most
as
called a compile time error.
errors in the use of commandsp
at compile time, which
well as typographical errorsg are caught
guarantees
correct when
is syntactically
that your program
runs.
Other
the data
errors may be caused by the action of the operator,
by
which
or faulty
logic
the programmer.
is acted upon by the program.
These
program
is actually
flagged when the compiled
errors are usuaRy
For
this reason,
compile time errors and runtime
run
(runtime).
into separate groups. Be sure to look at the
errors are separated
an error!
correct table when trying to diagnose
When
it
it
CCNFJGURATION
SYNTAX
ERRORS
a DataF1ex
reserved word in a command line,
misspell or misuse
These
will get a syntax error when you compile the configuration.
Simply
to correct.
errors are the simplest to find and the easiest
make corrections
on the
indicated 1ine(s)» and
edit the configuration,
the
recompile. You may need to refer to the manual to determine
Pay particular
required syntax for the connand you are trying to use.
is
of the command and what type of argument
attention to the arguments
and legal to put in a particular
reasonab.le
position (é.g.o trying to
illegal and unreasonable).
move a new value into a constant is both
Most
syntax errors are caused by simple misspellings or typographical
Very
few syntax
or usage errors will occur at runtime. Those
errors.
which
and field-indexing,
which
do usually arise from
use of windowcan change
a variable's
type at runtime.
If
you
you
type of compile time error is the use of duplicate symbols.
two variables
or labelm you will get an
If
be uniquel
must
(DataFlex won't detect
error.
consistent
duplicate use of a variable if both uses are syntactically
You must
also
with each other, so this is not a total failsafe.)
words
words.
These
reserved
reserved
avoid the use of DataF1ex
Words
of DataFlex") canNOT be used
(listed in the section on "Reserved
IS legal to use symbol
for command
names.
substitution
as symbol
It
names.
This will not generate an error, but great care must be
exercised and this practice is not recommended.
If you use a comand
you will get an error when you then try to use that
name as a symbob
In summary,
when naming
command.
your filem pagesg variables and
are
names which
not reserved words.
labels, make sure to use unique
Another
you
same name for
use the
Each
label and symbol
————————————————————————
—————————
Copyright (C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
~
(COMP.COM)
completes
There
is a
The DataFlex compiler program
two
passes
through the source
each
process:
l) Initialization
Forms
3)
4)
Macro
Compile
four processes
class of errors
in
for
~_"_—0
PASS
ONE
> PASS
TWO
—————g
ERRORS:
INITIALIZATION
SOURCE
file.
1------->
2)
Manual
=
__________=—
__
~
2.0 User°s
DataFlex
ERROR MESSAGES
COMPILER
F-14
FILE
NOT FOUND
for correct
disk directory
Check
FORMS
ERRORS:
IMAGE
NOT FOUND
Check
that
desired begin
file
line of
with "l*".
first
file
name.
"/".
begins with
If
no
image
MACRO ERRORS:
'amount_m«nory_avai1ab1e'
MEMORY:
time a
is less than
of memory remaining available.
declared, see compiler option
Warning
updated
remaining
150
every
memory
MACRO BUFFER
Macros
as
SIZE
symbol
is encountered
Displays amount
kilobyte.
"Out
of Memory" error is
If
"M"
for possible fix.
if
new
one
EXCEEDED
in available buffer
defined are too large to
0therwisep
space.
Usually the result of a syntax error.
"M"
may permit compilation
with larger macro
compiler option
expansion
buffer.
151
fit
INCLUDE
FILE
NOT FOUND
Check
device directory
to
ensure
that the specified
exists.
152
UNEQUAL
Open
155
INDICATOR
file
PARENTHESES
IN EXPRESSION
and"c1ose
parentheses
not matched.
NOT RESOLVED:
used
has
Indicator
'symbol
not
been
TOO MANY INDICATORS
Maximum
of 3 indicators
per
_name'
defined.
Often
caused
by
m1sspe11ing.
155
156
CONDITIONALS
NO ACTIVE
A #ELSE appears
in
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
a macro
Access
line
exceeded.
wfthout
Corporation
a #IF
being
open.
06/08/84
2.0
DataFjex
User's
157
FORWARD REFERENCE:
(GOTO
Label
or
inconsistencies.
H1éo
'symbol
GOSUB)
NOT RESOLVED
name'
not found. Often caused by spelling
the
error is not apparent in the source
If
may be using an
one of the cotmands
check
whether
GOTO
GOSUB.
internal
159
F-15
—_—~ =————— ———~===================
=
~___________
ERROR MESSAGES
COMPILER
Manual
or
TOO MANY CONTROL BLOCKS
number
The maximum
of
control blocks which may be open is 20.
This error is triggered when there are more than 20 open at
one time.
Control blocks are created by IF statements and
among other things.
structured control commands,
160
TERMINATED
A
CONT'L
initializer.
LOOP
UNTIL
or
162
TYPE
BLOCX
Examples
(require
MECX
ERROR IN
comand
was
The
number
W/O
BEGIN
appears
without a preceding block
END (requires BEGIN
are
or WHILE),
REPEAT),
etc.
block terminator
control
of
REQUIRED
ARGUMENT
ARGUMENT:
issued with
fewer
the
than
minimum
required
arguments.
NOT ALLOWED
162
TYPE
CHECX
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
CONSTANT
162
TYPE
QIECX
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
DATE
162
TYPE
MEO
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
EXPRESSION
162
TYPE
(MECX
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
FILE
162
TYPE
CJ1EO
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
GP
162
TYPE
CHECK
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
GROUP NOT
ALLOWED
162
TYPE
C1IECX ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
INDICATOR
NOT ALLOWED
162
TYPE
eux
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
INTEGER
NOT ALLOWED
162
TYPE
auxx
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
INVALID
LITERAL
162
TYPE
NE(X
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
LABEL
162
TYPE
mEcx
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
MUST BE AN
162
TYPE
áiEcK
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
MUST BE DEFINED
162
TYPE
lMECX
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
NUNBER
NOT ALLOWED
162
TYPE
QIECX
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
OPTION
"{}"
162
TYPE
mEcK
ERROR
IN
ARGUMENT:
SHOULD
NOT BE DEFINED
162
STRING NOT ALLOWED
ERROR IN ARGUMENT:
TYPE MECK
A string,
variable. was used in a command
or string
does
etc.).
not deal with strings (uses numericsp
———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ELEMENT
INDICATOR
NOT ALLOWED
"Cl"
NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
INDICATOR
NOT ALLOWED
—
~ ~"""""""""""==——==—"—==——————
Corporation
which
— == = = ===
06/08/84
F-16
DataFlex
ERROR MESSAGES
COMPILER
2.0
User's
Manual
— ——————
— ————————
162
TYPE
ERROR IN
arguments
OECK
Multiple
or
one argument,
which
can handle
comands
in other
162
ARGUMENT:
TOO MANY ARGUMENTS
used
were
with a command which allows only
used
were
with a command
multiple arguments
only a certain number (see explanations of
sections of this manual).
VARIABLE
ERROR IN ARGUMENT:
TYPE mEcK
A variable
name was used
in
a command
NOT ALLOWED
which
cannot
deal
with
variables.
162
164
TYPE OEQ(
A window
ERROR
was
WINDOW NOT ALLOWED
IN ARGUMENT:
deal
used
in a command which cannot
with
windows.
name'
'symbol
COMMAND NOT FOUND:
A command
in the source
file is not present inNotFLEX.CFL
rePACKing
Misspellings frequently trigger this error.
FMAC after modifying
for new macros can trigger this error,
as a variable
use of a reserved word
as can
or other improper
FLEX.CFL
is not on the default
use.
This error occurs
drive.
it
if
170
TO ITSELF
REPLACE
CANNOT
is not valid.
Logic of replacement
reserved word(s) or syntax error(s).
COMPILE
ICODE
by
misuse
of
NOT FOUND
Intermediate code file from
Usually a failure of hardware
full condition is a frequent
101
caused
ERRORS
TIME
FILE
Often
NUNBER EXPECTED
expected
A numeric
pass
of compilter
or operating systan.
cause
of this error.
first
but not found.
ICODE
error
not found.
disk
A
in the
cormiand
sequence.
102
LINE
OUT OF SEQUENCE
code
inconsistency.
NUK3ER
Interna)
103
104
105
VARIABLE
TYPE
ILLEGAL
Compiler
type check
DUPLICATE
Same
VARIABLE
variable
ERROR
IN
compiler conf7ict
FILE
WRITING
.FLX
system
error
Operating
107
ERROR
IN
CLOSING
.FLX
system
Operating
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
a
user-defined
macro.
ICODE.
DEFINED
defined twice
NOT FOUND
TYPE/CLASS
Internal
106
of the
Error in
as
different
.
caused
by
a
types.
Coding
error.
coding error.
(Disk or Directory
Full).
(Disk or Directory
Full).
FILE
error
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
108
OPEN
109
UNEQUAL
End
an
expression not found.
PARENTHESES
of
expression not found.
an
ARGUMENT
Ill
INVALID
112
INVALID
ENTRY OR FORM COMMAND
Check
options
for validity
Internal
compiler conflict.
"{}"
122
LINE
F-17
———————————
—————-——
EXPECTED
PARENTHESIS
Start of
ERROR MESSAGES
COMPILER
Manual
===—=========——————————————
Unresolved
and
symbol
encountered.
spelling.
TOO LCNG
The maximum
This error
line length allowed is 255 characters.
Check
for omission
is triggered by any line longer than that.
feeds
from
the source
of carriage return/line
file.
———
———————————————
——
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
———————————
—
06/08/84
F-18
COMPILER
DataF1ex
ERROR MESSAGES
2.0 User's
Manual
————
THIS
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
Access
Corporation
LEFT
BLANK
06/08/84
————————————————
—————————
TEEEa===-—————
RUNTIA
ERRORS
— ——————~—~~——
F"19
—————
::::::::::
AND DIAGNOSIS
——————————
-————-
~
TYPES
OF ERRORS
errors are those which occur when you are actually running a
(as opposed
Compiler errors are
configuration
to compiling it).
Runtime
discussed in the preceding section of this manual.
errors can
made
be the result
the specifications
of a fault in a file definition,
in the installation
of Dataf1e: u configuration of your operating
from
system,
or operator actionsI but most runtime errors result When a
this
condition which has to be corrected in the configuration.
is the case, corrective action usually includes the same steps
make
edit the configuration,
required to correct compiler errors:
Other
and recompile the configuration.
steps (discussed
corrections,
further at several points below in this section) may be required in
addition tOf or instead of, these steps.
Runtime
ERROR CLASSIFICATIONS:
RUNTIME
errors are discussed in this section in the following groups.
in the numerical
dealing with a particular errom find
and review
to
the discussions under the c1assification(s)
than
under
be
discussed
more
is assigned. A given error may
where
classification
the error may be triggered by more than one
Runtime
it
are
If youbelow
list
which
one
cause.
it
OP:
MH:
LID:
ERROR
#
OPERATING
OPERATOR ERRORS
MEDIA AND HARDWARE
DISK
LIMITATION,
ERRORS
MEMORY
CONFIGURATION
L/M:
L/C:
CE:
LIMITATION,
LIMITATION,
CONFIGURATION
SU:
MU:
SET UP ERROR
ERROR
MULTIUSER
ERROR
CLASSIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM
READING
ERRORS:
UNWRITTEN
l
2
OPERATING
3
CANNOT
SYSTEM
DATA
(SYSTEM)
MH
NH
ERROR
4
5
CURRENT EXTENT
EXTENT
(SYSTEM)
SEEK TO UNWRITTEN
FULL)
DIRECTORY
OVERFLOW (DISK
6
SEEK
CLOSE
FULL)
PAST
END OF DISK
(DISK
1984
Data
Corporation
m
PH
LID
LID
==== ==
Copyright (c)
Access
06/08/84'
F-20
ERRORS
RUNTIME
DataF)ex
AND DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION
DATAFLEX
II
12
ERRORS:
+++ OUT OF MEMORY +++
NUNBER TOO LARGE FOR FIELD
OUT OF RANGE
WINDOW NUDER
13
14
ON THIS
AN ENTRY IS REQUIRED
PLEASE
ENTER A NUNBER
15
16
INVALID
PLEASE
17
18
NUMERIC
ENTRY IS OUT OF RANGE
OPEN SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS
CAN'T
19
20
MULTIUSER
TIME OUT (BUSY
READ ERROR ON INDEX FILE,
21
WRITE
22
INDEX
Z3
25
INDEX FILE
RECORD NOT
26
28
ERROR ON INDEX
FILE
DAMAGED,
WINDOW
FULL,
FOUND
FILE
TOO LONG)
REINDEX
FILE
FILE
REINDEX
SIZE
EXCEEDS DEFINED
30
CONFIGURATION
32
CAN'T
41
42
FIND
FIND
43
49
CAN'T
51
(OPERAND)
BAD FORMAT IN EXPRESSION
(OPERATOR)
BAD FORMAT OF EXPRESSIÓN
NO RECORD IN MEMORY TO DELETE
52
71
IN
FILE
FILE
NOT FOUND
OUTPUT FILE
OP
OP
OP
CE
CE
m
L/C
OP
OP,
MU
CE
CE,
N
OP,
CE
CE,
PH,
SU, MU
L/D,BUY
EXCEEDED
CE
OP,
CE
SU,
MU
CE
SU,
MU
74
75
76
CAN'T
FIELD
(.DAT)
OPEN DATA FILE
NUMBER OUT OF RANGE
77
78
FIELD
CAN'T
NUMBER
79
80
FIELD
CAN'T
CAN'T
NOT INDEXED,
CLOSE DATA FILE
81
82
RECORD NU*ER
RECORD
EDITED
83
85
TYPE
86
87
RELATED
FIELDS
ARE NOT THE SAME LENGTH
RECORD
PATH TO THIS
NO SUPERFINO
CE
OP
INVALID
OP
OP
88
ISAM
UPDATE
SU,
CE
FIND
CONFIGURATION
FILE
NOT FOUND
CAN'T
OPEN C0NFIGURATION!PROGRAM
97
MULTIPLE
GOSUB'S
OPERATOR
ERROR
1984
Data
CE
WITHOUT
NUR'BER
CE
PS
92
96
(C)
OP,
CE
PLEASE
Copyright
MU
BY THIS
AS
90
91
lOó
MH,
m, MU
m, m
USED
NECX
ERROR, ASCII
NOT LINKED
TO PROGRAM
INTEGER
MU
FILE
OUT OF RANGE
NOT SAVED
RECORD
DATAFLEX
CE
OUT OF RANGE
RECORD ZERO OF DATA
FILE
NAME
ENTER A VALID
ATTEMPT TO PUT INTO
LID
CE
NOT OPEN
FILE
FIELD
NUKEIER OUT OF RANGE
QPEN "FILELIST.CFG"
CAN'T
72
73
LID
b'H
OP
OP
BEGINNING
OF FILE
END OF FILE
OPEN INDEX FILE
LIMITATION
DEMO VERSION
CE
OP
OP
N,
31
OPEN
OP.
CE
6'H,
FILE
CLOSE INDEX FILE
CAN'T
DUPLICATE
RECORDS NOT ALLOWED
READ CONFIGURATION
FILE
CAN'T
PAST
Manual
L/M,CE
ALLOCATION
ENTRY FOR THIS WINDOW
ENTER A VALID
DATE (MM/DD/YY)
PAST
User's
CLASSIFICATION
ERROR S
10
2.0
ID
CCNSTANT
RETURN
FILE
MACRO COkNAND
OP,
OP,
SU,
SU,
CE
CE
CE
OP
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
2.0
ERRORS
RUNTIME
Manual
User's
AND DIAGNOSIS
ERRORS
OPERATOR
OP:
F-21
—————
=
DataFlex
is a simple mistake by the operator.
errors directly and gives you the capacity for
Most
of these error"s»
providing additional checks where required.
unlike the other runtime errorsp do not call for any corrections in
configurations or systan setup. The most correction that is likely to
be needed
in those cases where the error
is operator instruction
The fo11ow1ng
the purpose.
message
sufficient
for
is
not
are
itself be generated
by an operator in a properly written
can
that
errors
configuration.
The most
comnon
error
handles
many operator
ERROR
Number
li:
NUMBER
TOO LARGE
ERROR
13:
AN ENIRY
is too large for
IS
ALLOCATION
FOR FIELD
a data
field
REQUIRED
ON THIS
Operator attempted to return past
ERROR
PLEASE
14:
window
A NUMBER
ENTER
Entry of letters
WINDOW
a "REQUIRED"
("O", lower
"L"p
case
etc.)
in
a
numeric-typed
window
ERROR
INVALID
15:
ENTRY
FOR THIS
WINDOW
made
in
to CHECK or format specification
Entry does not conform
Some means
for determining what is acceptable
the configuration.
(Help
prompt»
custom
be provided for the operator
must
screen,
error message)
ERROR
16:
Improper
ERROR
PLEASE
NUMERIC
17:
A VALID
ENTER
DATE
(MM/DD/YY)
date format or value
ENTRY
IS
OUT OF RANGE
Entry does not conform
to "RANGE" in entry option made in the
Some means
for determining what is acceptable must
configuration.
custom
be provided for the operator (Help
error
screen, promptp
message)
DUPLICATE
RECORDS NOT ALLOWED IN
ERROR 28:
records
An attempt was made to enter two
ERROR 41:
FIND
PAST
BEGINNING
FILE
with the
FIND
PAST
record find
ERROR 71:
Delete
ERROR 87:
NO RECORD
key
pressed
END OF FILE
attempted
at
IN
of
end
PATH TO THIS
NO SUPERFINO
from
this window;
INVALID
FILE
1984
Data
file
RECORD
main
file
name
has
does
not
relate to
NAME
formatted or too long
Copyright (c)
file
MEMORY TO DELETE
with no record found
Cánft superfind
this field
ERROR 88:
A badly
key
OF FILE
Previous record find attempted at beginning of
ERROR 42:
Next
same
Access
file
Corporation
been
entered
06/08/84
RUNTIME
F-22
ERRORS
PLEASE ENTER
ERROR 90:
No record
is found
ERROR
FILE
CONFIGURATION
92:
RECORD
a "FINDREQ";
A VALID
with
2.0
DataF1ex
AND DIAGNOSIS
User's
ID
FIND
press
NOT FOUND
Operator entered a configuration file name that is not
the indicated disk (also see Error 96).
MEDIA
kSi:
Manual
AND HARDWARE
found
on
ERRORS
disk media or operating
the filing system.
If a program
which
is usually (but
stops working,
was
A
some sort of hardware
not absolutely always)
or media problem.
which
problem
does
not happen consistently under exactly the same
problem.
always
a hardware
conditions is almost
If you are having
all of your system diagnostics
you should run
this type of prob1«m
also test other software which uses similar
several times. You should
malfunction, the data recovery utiliresources. After any hardware
(see
be used
the section on "Utilities").
ties REINDEX and FREL should
If
there is
system,
a
problem
with your
equipment,
up in
suddenly
show
will usually
itworking
properly
it
r
which
result in physical
refer to problems
corruption of the data on your d1Skg not operator or program
error.
There
two primary causes
are
disk media defects and
for these errors:
There
probability
that
power
failure.
is a good statistical
is equally true that you
eventually you will have a media failure.
It
DataF1ex
keeps
Wi17
have
all of your data current on
power
failures.
and operating
disk in case of power fai1ure9 but different equipment
have
systems
different capacities for coping with this probWn. Some
equipment
can
the power goes
destroy an entfre disk
poorly designed
no effect.
out. at the
with almost
wrong
time, while others handle
almost
Probably the worst case is when a systan makes sma1b
Some power
undetectable errors on the disk after a power failure.
"flickers"
or "spikes" can cause data errors which are unnoticed at
the time they occur. After a power fai1ureg flicker or spike, or a
media
use the data
recovery utilities FREL and
error, you should
REINDEX
to ascertain the extent of data corruption and re-establish
data
integrity.
It is most important to MAINTAIN RECENT BACKUPS to
guard
against these data killers. If you rely heavily on your systam
supply
power
to prevent power
you should
consider an uninterruptible
failure problems.
Media
and
hardware
errors
it
DATA
RECOVERY
TEWNIQUES:
WHY WOULD YOU NEED TO
if
RECOVER
DATA?
media
configuration
failure and sometimes
to power problems,
necessary
may become
to restore the Integrity of your data.
errors.
on several levels.
This recovery may be necessary
If you have a
corrupted disk directory9 you will need to recover all of the ffles on
there
recovery).
a disk (primary data
If only one file is corrupted,
data
are
specific methods
for recovering one file (secondary
recovery).
Due
it
consider whether
Before you start any kind of data recovery you should
backups,
made proper
may be
It is worthwhile. Assumingback you have
ups and bring those files up to date by
sfmpler to restore your
maríua17y
re-inputtfng data!
it
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
PRIMARY
User's
2.0
DATA
RUNTIRE
Manual
DIRECTORY
CORRUPTED
RECOVERY:
F-23
AND DIAGNOSIS
ERRORS
and data
media
If the directory on your disk is corrupted (see
errorsk you will need to restore the integrity of the disk before you
start on the individual data files. You should
first make ANOTHER
backup
of your entire disk drive and then reformat the disk according
Next,
verify the disk drive to
instructions.
to the operating system
media
make
no
Fjna1]y»
restore the fields from
are
there
errors.
sure
data
examine
You should
backup.
all
files for correctness and
your
ALL
proceed
on
with secondary
files.
file recovery
SECCNDARY
DATA
CORRUPTED
RECOVERY:
FILE
use both
the FREL
the integrity of any file is suspect. you should
the REINDEX utilities on each file. The FREL utility will restore
the internal list of deleted records in the .DAT file and the REINDEX
If there are any bad or duplicate
utility will recreate the indexes.
After this procedure, it's
records in the file, they will be removed.
idea
a good
to use QUERY to look at the data in the files.
If
and
If the recovery programs cannot recover the badly damaged data.
usually better to restore the backup files than to try further
of good back upsl
the importance
recovery. Let us emphasize
Common
errors associated with
SYSTEM
STOPS
OR "LOCKS
probably
available)
Most
BOOS
a
UP"
power
media
and
hardware
at random times
flicker or spike!
failures
(Also
check
it
is
are:
memory
Read/Write
Bad Sector; I/O Error;
Error
not
errors are returned directly from the operating syst«n,
from
system
The
wording
from
may vary
to system.
DataFlex.
exact
This type of error is caused by an unrecoverable hardware
or media
do is to reformat and restore your
The
data
thing
to
error.
first
from
backup.
should be
frequent1yp your hardware
this happens
If
examined.
If you use floppy diskm you should consider another
Error:
These
brand.
3, 4
with the operating
errors generally indicate problems
Power
failure is
system's directory structure of the disk drive.
had other
you have
a common cause
of directory corruption.
If
media
errorm they can show up later as directory problems.
be reformatted and the data
Generally the disk should
recovery
techniques used. (See also Disk Limitations)
ERRORS
These
I,
ERRORS
20,
2,
21.
22,
26
corrupted index fi1é»
Error 21
of errors as above.
The data
by a disk
condition.
mcovery
full
repeated1yg
there
utilities should be sufficient. the If this happens
may be a subtle problem
with
operating system or equipment.
If you are on a multiuser system, make sure that you fo?1ow the
multiuser checklist below.
Errors 20. 22 and
generally caused
can also be caused
Copyright (c)
1984
26
by
Data
caused
are
the
same
Access
by
a
types
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
AND DIAGNOSIS
ERRORS
RUNTIME
F-24
2.0
User's
Manual
———————
———————
RECORD NUPBER OUT OF RANGE
record
number
out of range error ocurrs when saving a recordg
You should
use FREL and
indicates a corrupted data
81:
ERROR
If
it
a
REINDEX
Configuration file (.FRM)
or the file is damaged.
CAN'T
ERROR 32:
The disk is
ERRORS
78,
FILE
READ CONFIGURATION
CAN'T
ERROR 30:
file.
file.
the
on
OPEN
full
OUTPUT
the
or
is not
compiled
a
DataF1ex
configuration
FILE
file
name
is improper.
80
Directory
is
(above)
damaged.
LIMITATIONS
DISK
LID:
In partíconfiguration takes up disk space.
systam you will probably
a floppy-disk-based
You may run
into this at any time
run
into disk full conditions.
whether
creating, editing, or compiling any type of file. The error
code
for a full disk depends on what type of file you are processing.
from
(The
the same
error when you are running DataFlex is different
EDITOR.)
using
you will
either
when you are
any Caseg
In
the
error
have
to reorganize the files on your disks or get more storage space.
Additiona11y? be aware that the last edit or addition you attempted
Note
that there are TWO ways to
properly.
was probably not saved
up your disk:
the storage can be used up;
or (2) the directory
(l)
(number
of files) can be filled úPa Both of these conditions are
remove
you must
treated in the same way;
files from your disk.
fi1eg
Each
cu1am
if
and
using
program
you are
fill
The
ERROR
DIRECTORY
5:
Directory
ERROR
6:
Disk
ERROR
SEEK
PAST
used
WRITE
full
OVERFLOW
are
(DISK
returned for disk
full.
FULL)
files) full.
of
(number
space
21:
Disk
codes
runtime error
fo11owing
END OF DISK
(DISK
FULL)
up.
ERROR ON DISK
while trying
to
FILE
expand
32: CAN'T OPEN OUTPUT FILE
Disk directory full while trying
index
file.
ERROR
to
open
an
output
file.
compiler needs disk space on the logged-in drive to store
the
created during the compile process. Typica?1yp
needed
space
is approximately the size of the configuration source
for the compiler to write its
file, If there is not enough 2 space occur
temporary
during compilation.
files, Errors l or will
NOTE:
The
temporary
files
—————-—-.-,-—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
.
2.0
DataF1ex
User's
RUNTIIE
Manual
ERRORS
——————————————————————————
——
F-25
AND DIAGNOSIS
——————————
MEMORY LIMITATIONS
L/M:
capacity to relate many data files and have many pages
is possible for a configuration to simply run out of
There
memory).
two
RAM (random-access
are
factors at work here: the
(TPA,
amount
for Transient Program
of memory available to a program
Area)
and the size of the program
also
or configuration.
It isCompile
time
during the compile phase.
possible to run out of mmory
from
minimum
memory
runtime minimum mmory. Minimum
is different
find out how much m«nory
compile manory is 1000 bytes. You should
AFTER the oPerating system
has available
system
is
your
to the program
loaded.
With
DataF1exrs
of screenm
it
with a 64-kilobyte Z80 processor can have from 42
typical computer
58K of TPA.
a minimum
In B-bit systems,
of 52k TPA is required to
run
DataFlex. On a 16-bit system you must have a minimum TPA of
128 kilobytes
has
lOOk.
of hardware
This means that If your computer
enough
34K» you
do NOT have
system
RAM and
consumes
operating
your
Note
that operating systans that
manory
to run DataFlex properly.
floppy-based
control hard disk drives take more memory than comparable
RAM that
system
example,
For
systems,
a 16-bit
with 128K of hardware
DataFlex
runs
successfully with floppies may not be able to run
DataFlex
a hard
disk driva is installed unless more RAM memory is
The more
also added to handle the larger hard disk driver program.
you have,
memory
the larger the configuration you can hand1ep up to a
On a 16-bit
system,
of a maximum
DataFlex will take advantage
point.
of DataFlex are
of about 192K of TPA, so the maximum capabilities
RAM.
of
Further expansion
likely to be realized with 256K of hardware
RAM would
probably yield no benefits to running DataFlex.
A
to
if
DataF1ex
maintains an internal predefined variable
is running0
called MEMAVAIL, which will return the amount of unused memory
memory
usage
available dynamically (the value changes whenever
and
after DataF1ex
changes). This amount is what remains
your
configuration are loaded. If you run the following test program it
free memory as of the time you run
will show you your systemG
it
When
it:
l*
SHOWLN MEMAVAIL
SYSTEM
number
is above
displayed should NEVER be below WJ)ÓÓp and
maximum
3L1O(L your available memory is greater than DataF1exIs
below
10.000
A result
indicates that
capability to utilize manory.
and operating system
as configured do riot have
your computer
TPA available
to run DataFlex.
sufficient
if it
The
large configuration that may
If you are working with a particularly
incorporate the procedure
available TPA, you should
close to exceeding
shown
above
at certain points in the configuration so you can keep
IMPORTANT
NOTE:
DataFlex
TPA availability.
track of remaining
requires some manory to be available while running. The amount of
memory
required at runtime is AT LEAST 2pÓÓÓ and can be as high as
5,000
if you are using very large data fi1esp so when MEMAVAIL is
"
————
",=========
Copyright
(C)
1984
—
Data
Access
~~~~~
Corporation
be
06/08/84
ERRORS
RUNTIME
F-26
AND
DIAGNOSIS
DataFlex
User's
2.0
Manual
— ,_===r'm
virtual
of trouble at run
the possibility
certainty when MEMAVAIL declines below
HOW BIG
MUST
below
MEMAVAIL
and
time exists,
2.000.
57Ó()Óp
is
a
BE?
amount
of memory that must be available to run a particular
(a)
configuration is the greater of:
the largest index for the data
image
in
fi1e(s) used by the configuration;
or (b) the largest screen
the configuration.
The
image
screen
is about 2AOO bytem so the largest data file
The minimum
memory
requirwent
usually the limiting factor.
formula based on the information
can be estimated with the following
returned when an index is created in FILEDEF or REINDEX:
A typical
index
is
(512+KEYSIZE)*(LEVELS+1)
Is the size in bytes of the key being
the number of ISAM levels required.
KEYSIZE
Where
and LEVELS
is
indexed
ONLY when
by the ISAM module
be computed
the
take careful note when these numbers are
AUTODEF,
of index creation in FILEDEF,
or
REINDEX.
The
of levels is based on the key size and the
So
maximum
number
of records you define in FILEDEF or AUTODEF.
if you
only has 1,000 with data in
define a file for 30AOO records and
them.
against
This precaution guards
you may be wasting memory!
running out of memory halfway through entering the data to a file,
since the maximum memory is used even when the actual data and index
files are still small.
that LEVELS
index is created,
displayed at the
Note
can
so
end
number
it
WHAT USES
MEMORY?
Most
of the resources available in DataFlex (or any other language)
but
consume
some memoryp
consume
there are two areas that typically
windows.
and screen
image
Generally
your work area: open data
you will
a data
you can do without opening
in an application,
The following
memory.
save
table should
help you
significant
and therefore
where
what
determine
you should
look should
uses
memory
files
if
you
have
to
THE
it.
conserve
file
FOLLOWING
FIGURES
8-Bit
ARE
IN
BYTES.
16-Bit
COMMANDS
Indicators
Each
string
Free
II
II
Each
Each
10
Free
10
LO
10
Each
Each
Each
Each
comnand
line
variable
numeric
variable
integer variable
string constant
numeric
constant
expression
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
commands
- included in
Actual string length + 2
- pre-allocated
Actual string length
String
Corporation
length
+
l
(compacted)
07/18/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
RUNTIME
Manual
8-Bit
SCREEN IMAGES
Overhead
li
(unbuffered)
0verhead(buffered)
window
Each
subtotal
Each
range
check
Each
DATA
FILES
Overhead
(PER
page
window
check
string
Actual string
Each
BATCH index
ON-LINE
index
buffer
size
size
+
ID
20
length
li
+
l
FILE)
OPEN
field
Record
11
Actual
Actual
10
20
Each
Each
16-Bit
PAGE)
(PER
Each
F-27
AND DIAGNOSIS
ERRORS
120
180
8
128
170
10
(Number
(actual)
runs
a configuration
out
more
configurations but
command
(see
the section on
If
or
of 1eve1s)*512
length (per FILEDEF)
Record
of
still
memoryy
run
as
"Controlling
it
divided up into
with the CHAIN
Execution Sequence").
can
though
be
two
one
OF OUT OF MEMORY
INDICATIONS
10 (DataFlex out of memory)
Recursion stack overflow (PASCAL error)
OUT OF MEMORY (compile time)
up'
systems
may 'lock
In some cases,
or
ERROR
drop
to the operating
system
Final note: There are no "secrets"
so
they wouldn't be secret;
distributor
for one.
werep
for getting
doMt
please
Designing a configuration necessarily involves specifying limits
Examples
of these limits are:
capacities.
the application's
Maximum
number
of
records
Field lengths
Window
lengths
in
there
or
+
LIMITATIONS
CONFIGURATION
L/C:
If
more
memory.
ask your
dealer
a
on
file
Frequently, configuration limitation
errors are triggered by errors on
the part of the operator, such as entering a number that is too large
by mistake.
as an
In such Casesg the resultant overflow error serves
the capacities are not
automatic form of range verification.
If
which
however,
specified thoughtfully,
they may hamper the purposes
to serve. If field sizes must be
the configuration was designed
changed
(or new fields added, making the record larger) after there is
data
in the file, the file definition may still be changed without the
be written
to a
requirement to rekey the data. First, the data should
QUERY
then
new disk file in READ format using
the DataFlex
utility,
back
changed,
and then
into the
the data reread
the file definition
READ
restructured file with a configuration built using the DataFlex
utility.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Accc55
Corporation
07/18/84
RUNTIME
F-28
following
limitations:
The
ERRORS
errors
NLM3ER
DataFlex
AND DIAGNOSIS
those
are
TOO LARGE
frequently
most
FOR FIELD
caused
2.0
by
User's
Manual
configuration
ALLOCATION
II:
This is usually caused by the operator entering too large a number
field is just not big
0therwise9 a numeric
in a data window.
enough
to hold the required value. You may have to change the
number.
file definition to allow the field to hold a larger
ERROR
FULL,
INDEX FILE
ERROR Z3:
In FILEDEF and AUTODEF
records that could be
EXCEEDS
SIZE
DEFINED
asked
for the maximum
number
of
this number is greatly
in a file.
If
To
exceedech
you will
get Error 23.
fix this, simply re-enter
and change
FILEDEF
the maximum number of records. You will then
have
for the file using REINDEX.
to rebuild ali indexes
CE:
you
are
ERRORS
CONFIGURATION
which
is possible to use comands
program
or configuration, which make
no sense
syntactically
correct but
or cause errors when
a
the progam is run. These are generally cases where the operation of
may be
command
is not fully understood
It
or is applied improperly.
the
necessary
to put in special "debugging" statements to determine
while
is running. Sti16 the most important
state of the program
step is to read the manual carefully and review the sample configuraprovidecL Due to DataF1ex's great f1exibi1ityp
tions and programs
configuration errors can appear to be other types of errors.
In
it
any
are
it
DATA
CONSISTENCY
operation of the
consistency errors are those caused by improper
necessary
applicátíÓn and its failure to do the checks
to guarantee
An example
data
of this would be the deletion of a
consistency.
customer
customer
in
while there are still transactions for that
In transactional
another data file related to the custcmer
file. from
deleting such
is necessary
to prevent the user
environments
records. One way to do this is to keep a counter of transactions
posted
to a record and only allow deletion when that counter is zero.
Data
it
related error is allowing the user to change the primary key of an
active record. It is best to use record number relationships as well
you want
as data
relationships
to allow the user to change key
is normal and acceptable to
data. Noto that in some applications
must
check
have
for this
sc) the application
"null" relationships,
QUERY can be a valuable tool
for inspecting files and
condition.
should
uncovered.
problem
Once
a check
a
is
diagnosing data problems.
happening
from
be put into the application
again.
to prevent
A
if
it
it
consistency errors
incorrect totals or data
related.
Data
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
usually at issue when reports have
show the "wrong" records
entry screens
are
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
ERRORS
RUNTII¶Z
Manual
F-29
AND DIAGNOSIS
.
The
following
ERROR
IQ:
New
typically
errors
on
NLNBER
ERROR 12:
Window
WINDOW
number
TOO LARGE
of
print
ERROR IB:
DataF}ex
Otherwise, out of
SETSCREEn.
run
does
window
index
redefine field
field;
19:
a
This is usually caused by improper
out of range.
Recount
and/or twporari1y
indexing.
your windows
is running.
value to the screen while the program
CAN'T
OPEN SYSTEM
cannot
establish
FILE
COMMUNICATIONS
multiuser operating systm
Check
tions.
your instal1at1on notes for information
your particular operating system.
ERROR
for
OUT OF RANGE
NURER
the
ALLOCATION
FOR FIELD
into the allocated
fit
not
larger value.
use
l6-bitp
above.
see
ERROR
Number
li:
errors:
OUT OF MEMORY -F++
+++
installation
memoryg
configuration
from
arise
TIME
MULTIUSER
OUT
(BUSY
communica-
relating
to
TOO LONG)
is in a LOCKED state for too long.
Multiuser time out. The systan
does
an
Check
a LOCK or REREAD without
that none of your programs
On a
UNLOCK.
is possible to get this error
very busy system
occasionally through no fault of the configuration.
it
25,
4b 42
FIND errors--FIND
ERRORS
the
To determine
what
connand
was unsuccessful.
is. temporarily print the value of the record buffer to
Also with error 25p be
directly before the FIND.
the screen
conscious of the record numbem which must be part of the key if
included in the index for a FIND EQUAL.
problem
:Ir
ERROR 28:
A SAVE
DUPLICATE
was done
already in the
RECORDS
on a record
database.
If
file.
ERROR 31:
NOT ALLOWED
C(NFIGURATION
FILE
IN
.
FILE
a
that matches
try reindexing the
key
having a unique
unexp1ainab1é»
key
NOT FOUND
Configuration file not found. This is caused by an attempt to
load
This can also be caused
a configuration
that does not exist.
by an improper
menu configuration
or an error in a "CHAIN"
statement.
ERROR 32:
CAN'T
OPEN
If the OUTFILE
file, you will
or a bad file
ERROR 51:
BAD
CUTPUT
FILE
or DIRECT_0UTPUT
get an error 32.
connand
This
cannot
can
name.
FORMAT
IN
EXPRESSION
be
create the output
by disk
full
caused
(OPERAND)
when
argument
the expression evaluator runs across an improper
Most
you will get an error 51.
is expecting an argument9
expression errors are not reported until runtime. Example:
a data
you may have
consistency error
(1+*2). If unexp1ainab1e9
(see
above).
If
it
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
~~
ERROR 52:
If
-,
at
— ———————
OF EXPRESSION
FORMAT
BAD
(OPERATOR)
the expression evaluator runs across an
is expecting a functiom
*, or l) when
(1=2)
runtime. Example:
improper
it
NO RECORD IN
a DELETE comand
the DBMS WoMt know
71.
DELETE must
be
ERROR 71:
If
ERRORS
73.
Manual
User's
2.0
DataF1ex
AND DIAGNOSIS
ERRORS
RUNTIME
F-30
76,
function Ob
get error
will
52
MEMORY TO DELETE
against
is issued
what
used
FIELD
77:
you
an INACTIVE
record bufferp
record to delete and will report error
with a "FOUND" record.
OUT OF RANGE
NUmER
by improper
use of
This is generated
Field number out of range.
Carefully check the index values and make sure
field indexing.
This can also be caused by using an old
they are in range.
configuration with a modified file definition.
ERROR 79:
FIELD
NOT
Field not Indexed
inactive index or
ERROR 82:
INDEXED,
on FIND.
FIND BY THIS
CAN'T
has
A FIND comand
a non-indexed
been
issued
on
an
field.
RECORD NOT SAVED
EDITED
This error indicates misuse of the database.
If an active record
is edited (MOVEd to) and not SAVEdr you will get an error 82 and
be
so this errcjr should
the record wIll be lost from the index9
database
but
as
application,
in
in
only
corrected not
your
your
well.
After an error 82 has occurrech the file must be reindexed.
MOVE to an active record without
Never
a SAVE!
ERROR 83:
TYPE
Type
check
CHECK
ERROR,
ASCII
USED
AS NUMBER
This often arises from use of an old
error.
whose
configuration with a database
file definition has
Update
the configuration to take into account
modified.
revised file structure.
ERROR 86:
Related
RELATED
ERROR 96:
CAN'T
ARE NOT THE
FIELDS
fields MUST
your file definitions
be
been
the
SAME LENGTH
exactly the same length
for all files involved.
OPEN CONFIGURATION/PROGRAM
and
type.
Check
FILE
Configuration/program file not found. This is usually triggered
be
by a QIAIN
file cannot
or RUNPROGRAM cormand whose target
and make sure
of files concerned
found. Review drive assignments
they are correct in the comand, This is often occurs in MENU
because
of incomplete drive designation in action specifications.
RETURN
ERROR 97:
MULTIPLE
GOSUB'S
WITHOUT
For
GOSUB
every
or use of a KEYPROC. there must be a RETURN.
Also
get Error 97.
not, after 20 GOSUBS, you
your KEYPROC
is called from within a subroutine. you must RETURN to within that
will
if
If
subroutine.
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
RUNTIKE
Manual
User's
2.0
DataFlex
ERRORS
F-31
AND DIAGNOSIS
— —————————————
—————————
—
SU:
UP ERRORS
SET
of the
associated with installation
of the required files or the data
some
files that are required to be on
files on your system.
the default drive and other files that reside on the drive specified
Refer
by the configuration.
"File Name and Extension
to the appendix
Types"
for more information on the types and locations of files. The
in)
followfng files are ABSOLUTELY required on the default (logged
drive:
refer to
or the
Set
up
DataFlex
errors
AT
TIMES:
FILELIST.CFG
AT
ALL
system
placement
There
are
(current terminal configuration
location/names of active data
RUN TIME:
RUN.OVF
(B-bit
FLEXERRS.
DAT
and
files)
file)
files)
runtime overlay
overlay
runtime
(l6-bit messages)
RUN.OO?
AT
problems
(Error
TIME:
COWILE
(B-bit compile overlay file)
(Compiler connand
file)
file--one for
(File definition
COW.OVF
FLEX.CFL
*,FD
SETSCREEN:
WHEN RUNNING
TERML IST.CFG
DataFiex will not
running SETSCREEn.
INSTALLATION
(List
if
run
you
of terminal
have
and
codes
not activated
each
file)
data
number)
your serial
FILELIST.CFG
by
ORDER
copies of
disks contain mu1t1p1e
These
set up DataFlex properly to run on
depending
on the sequence
in which the
floppy or hard disk systems
disks are copied. If you don't copy the disks down in the proper (A.
Bp C) sequenca,
you wi)l
get set up errors.
The DataFiex distribution
and MENU.DAT.
FILELIST.CFG
The
following
errors
coímonly
arise
from
improper
set
up:
CAN'T
OPEN INDEX FILE
ERROR 43:
The index
information is kept in a
The indexes
have
the "ROOT"
separate file from the actual
with a ".K?"
data.
file nameThese
extension, where "?" is the index number.
files must reside
data
on the same drive as the
file (see Error 75).
FILE
NOT OPEN
has been
a DBMS
is used before
by a
be caused
72.
can
This
also
error
diskp
get an
in which case you should
ERROR 72:
it
file
If
OPENed,
file 75not
error
CAN'T
ERROR 74:
FILELIST.CFG
OPEN
must
———
————-——
Copyright
(C)
Data
will
on
get
the
first.
"FILELIST.CFG"
be
present
on
the
logged
Access
in disk drive.
—————————
—
1984
you
being
Corporation
06/08/84
RUNTIME
F-32
ERRORS
2.0
DataFlex
AND DIAGNOSIS
User's
Manual
————————————
——————————————
FILE
(.DAT)
name contained in FILELIST.CFG
appended
".DAT"
"ROOT NAME" has
for
to
the
root name in FILEDEF corresponds
CAN'T
ERROR 75:
The data
OPEN DATA
can't be found. The
Make
the OPEN.
sure
with the actual name and
in your operating system's
file
that
drive of the
directory.
ERRORS
92,
it
data
file
as
shown
96
Configuration/program
a MAIN
or
found. Review
by
not
filecomand
This is usually triggered
target file cannot be
and make
of files concerned
sure
This can be caused by incorrect
found.
RUNPROGRAM
whose
drive assignments
they are correct in the ccmnand.
order.
installation
MU:
If
you
before
are
you
MULTIUSER
ERRORS
should
you
running DataFlex mu1t1user7
experience any data related problems.
this
scan
check
list
Option I of SETSCREEn must be
I) Is multiuser set in SETSCREEn?
For Option 2,
"Pre-a11ocate data fi1es'4
set to Multiuser.
provided on loose sheets
instructions
refer to the installation
for your particular computer
or operating systan.
2)
Is the data
multiple
by
3)
Have
Each
ences
4)
updated
For
a data
set to reread?
file to be FILEDEF.
must
be set to re-read,
true in
users,
file
it
followed each step of the installation
different.
multiuser version is a
taken
are
in the installation
into account
instructions?
you
little
These
differ-
instructions.
signs on
Is your DataFlex a multiuser version? When DataF1ex
wIll show you the
after the systan has been booted,
multiuser operating system that your copy of DataFlex is to
Make sure
(or is compatible with)
this matches
operate on.
your
operating system.
signs on "single user" or with an
If
incompatible operating syst«n, you will need to order a
different version of DataFlex. Contact your dealer.
it
it
5)
Most
multiuser
Is the operating system configured correctly?
operating systws require you to set "sysgen" parameters
enabled
and the disk volumes
to be
indicating compatibility
understand
Make sure
shared.
you
all of these options in your
operating systan and have set them correctly.
The following
systems:
are indications
I) Corrupted index
Operating system
2)
3)
4)
files.
error:
of improperly configured multiuser
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
IN
FILE/DRIVE
update
can
a data
one user
Errors 18, 19. 2b 22, 78, 80.
Only
file.
Corporation
USE
or
RIO
(read
only)
06/08/84
DataFlex
THE
utility
AUTODEF.
REINDEX,
singla
THE
mode.
user
DATAFLEX
F-33
DataFlex except QUERY (FILEDEF,
are
intended for operation only in
off the
sure that all other users are logged
Make
any
utilities.
FLEX-KEYS
DataF1ex
function keys
in running configurations.
The
REINDEX,
(FILEDEG
utilitiesse.
AND DIAGNOSIS
programs
in
QUERY, FREL)
before using
computer
ERRORS
UTILITIES
DATAFLEX
All of the
RUNTIME
Manual
User's
2.0
Editor and
are active only in the DataFlex
These
keys
are
not active in the DataFlex
QUERY,
FREL)
AUTODEF.
unless specified
otherwl
ERROR MESSAGES
CUSTOM
DataFlex provides the opportunity for the user to create new error
to be triggered by conditions defined by the configurati on.
are
defined using error numbers above IÓÓ? as
error messages
described in the explanation of the ERROR command in the manual
The
section on "Controlling Execution Sequence'G
facility which
(a ljataF1ex
having
configuration and database
provides this capability
"FLEXERRS")
also provides the capability to reword the
the rootname
Thi s
above.
messages
given in the standard errors discussed
which
might
of messages
capability would permit the substitution
the
context of the particular appl ication which you are
better
runningp
in rewording the standard
but this caution must be observed
above:
the message substituted will be
DataFlex errors discussed
shown
every
time that particular error 'is triggered in any
in
configuration being run on the same disk as the file FLEXERRS.DAT
made.
which
were
This may cause an out-of-context
error
the change(s)
message
in a configuration for which the message was not
to appear
i ntended.
messages
New
fit
variable LASTERR and the predefined
which
to provide "chain" messages
will
and
information (either automatic or operatoroffer
above
event
one of the standard errors
is triggered.
selected) in the
ERR is TRUE when
any error
is triggered, and
(standard or custom)
command
remai ns TRUE until
a CLEARWARNING
is executed.
If an error at
a particular
point in a configuration has a predictable origin, a help
provided based on the status of the
message
or execution branch can behand,
ERR indicator.
on the other
the triggering of one or more
If,
standard errors has consistent impl1cations throughout a particular
based
IF commands
(IF LASTERR
on the value of LASTERR
configuration,
number),
EQ some particular
prompting
can
cause
the
appropriate
error
recovery from the error.
or execution branching to assist in efficient
Finally.
argument
the predefined
ERR can both
helpful prompting
be
system
used
it
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
"""""" """""""""==,""=".""==""""""===="""""""
06/08/84
Corporation
F-34
RUNTIME
ERRORS
AND DIAGNOSIS
———————
THIS
PAGE
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
—————————————————
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
————
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
===—_"_======="""——————
F"35
—
_
————
'
========
GLOSSARY
=====
=====—=
~
==========
—————————————
"__—___——_
———————
—
——
——
APPLICATION
task, or set of tasks, to be
typically
through configurations
A
such
as
performed
(or
Database
management
DataF1ex.
but
Accounts
Receivable
in itse16
described
as
database
one
management
by a computerp
programs)
and a language,
application
properly be
app1lcation.
is not
billing
an
may
AUTODEF.COM
The
in DataFlex for quick and easy file creation.
as well as build
set up the file definition
data
entry configuration file which can either be customed1tedp
as-is for execution.
or compiled
program
AUTODEF will
B+
or
B*
TREE
and
A
fast
value
BATlM
a
used
of searching
method
efficient
by DataFlex.
UPDATING
The technique
of updating files
to on-line or real-time
operator input.
opposed
from
a
updates
a
data
file
for
transaction file
at the time of
a key
as
BIT
smallest unit of information used
unit of a byte. Eight bits = l byte
The
RECORD
An area
BUFFER.
a computer.
four bits
=
A subI nibble.
that is devoted
to the current record.
in the file;
information is:
(first)
then
(last) on the screen or in the
in the buffer;
of
REMEMBER?
(second)
by
and
(RAM)
mcmory
data
or
window.
BYTE
Eight bits (usually
unit of information
MAIN
or
representing
which
can
be
The
a character).
handled
by a DBMS.
smallest
álAINING
Moving
from
one
program
or
program
module
to another without
operator intervention.
COMMAND ACTION
Those
comands
operator during
with the program
CONMAND GROUP
The sections
invoked
action.
when
The
or controls used/invoked by the user or
The soft keystroke commands
data
entry.
set
SETSCREE.COM.
enter or report configuration which are
a corresponding cotmand
operator performs
operator key strokes are set with the SETSCREEN
of
an
the
program.
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
t
F-36
2.0
DataF\ex
GLOSSARY
User's
Manual
———————
———
——————
—
COMMAND LINE
An expression
from
typically
MENU
by
these
in
can
(DOS),
the operating system
are
issued
Usually these
DataF1ex
In DataFlex 2.0
applicatfon.
from
configuration comnand lines.
string executable
the CP/M prompt
a completed
be executed
by
A>.
CON:
which
designation of the output port of the computer
comunicates with the systanG console, or screen.
Customary
CONFIGURATION
A logical
programs
CONFIGURATOR
Person
and values whicM
connands
to perform a task (see
Configurations are to DataFlex what
computer
languages.
to traditional
asssembly
executi
Application
upon
are
who
writes
DataF1ex
of
on,
cause
above)
.
DataF1ex
conf igurations.
DataF1ex
DAC
Corporati
Access
Data
on,
the publi
sher
of DataFlex.
DATA
real world information contained in the files of the
Usua11y
the smallest unit is a field Crf a record in
Data
formatted
a file.
is usually stored as one of two typesg
word
DBMSq$ deal
and unf ormatted.
in formatted data. whereas
example)
deal
unformatted
data.
in
(for
processors
The
Database.
DATA
DICTIONARY
in a
catalog of all data elements
defínitiom
format, and source. In
Definitions co]1ectively.
A
DATA
(OSO)
STRUCTURE DIAGRAM
The logical
structure
relationships
DATA
TYPES
In
of the
DataFlex, four
data
nUmericp
a)phanumeric»
of the
files
database
and
their
giving their
the File
database
DataF1exp
the
showing
design
data.
types are recognized.
fnteger and date.
They
are
DATABASE
data
that can
computerized collection of stored operat1ona7
The
app) ications.
needs
users
multiple
of
the
or
serve
make up an app1icat1on
in DataFlex. In
collective
files that
the two forms are referred to with the same term.
this manuab
between
Some authors mean other things and make
a distinction
A
them.
DBMS
Data
Stand
Base
arid
Traditionally
Higher level language
System.
Management
alone;
(2)
classes:
sub-set.
two
"===================.========————————————~———~——————————
Access
(C)
1984 Data
Corporation
Copyright
(l)
——————
06/08/84
F-37
GLOSSARY
Manual
User's
2.0
DataFlex
="========
~~~——————
EDITOR
handles unformatted data which is typically
A text
program.
file handler. A word
or
processor incorporates a powerful EDITOR.
which
A program
document
a
source
ELEMENT
by a data
smallest discrete unit of data handled
In a mailing 1istp for example,
a data
systan.
Also referred to
might be first name? or ZIP code.
The
management
element
as
"field".
ERGONOMICS
The
for
study
or
human
use
science of human
such
as chairs
factors
and
of devices
design
in the
computer
moni
tors.
" EXTENSION
part of the directory file
to 3 characters)» often used
See ROOTNAME and FILE
function.
extensions are used for specific
That
.DAT
= Data
= Index
.Kn
,FD
file
file
= File definition
program
= Compiled
,FLX
.FRM
.TAG
(n=#)
file
to the right of the dot
to classify files by type or
below.
In DataF1exp
name
(up
meanings:
= Source
.CFG
.RPT
= Database
= System
= Source
for data entry
field names
information fije
code
for repQrts
code
FIELD
sub-unit of a database
called "data element".
A
record.
The
information
unit.
Also
FILE
basic unit of information stored on a disk drive which can
Each
by a computer's operating system.
file on a
ROOTNAME and EXTENSION)
name (see
disk drive has a unique
and by users
which
in the
is found both by the computer
The source
operating system's directory of files on a drive.
code
for a configuration is typically contained in a FILEg as
Database
version is contained in another FILE.
its compiled
data
is contained in another FILEp and index data for that
FILE
is contained in yet another FILE.
The
found
be
INDEX
A
table containing orderM information on records or
and their
locations.
in a database
data
elements
INDEX
FILE
a B+
DataF1ex,
In
data
the
file
data
in order
ISAM
by
file
a key
containing information about a
of selected data ehments within
file.
ISAM
Sequential Access Method.
data
sequential
with
file whose
primary key values.
Indexed
a
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
An
access
contents
method
are
ordered
associated
by
~~
06/08/84
DataFlex
GLOSSARY
F-38
2.0
User's
Manual
————————
———
JULIAN
DATE
A numeric
by DataFlex to
conversion of dates used internally
rapid9 accurate calculations of dates and calendar
time Intervals.
It is a form of the number that represents
date is
the number of days from the year Zero to whatever
method
The original
processed.
being
was developed
in the
and contrary to popular
Sca1igem
by Joseph
16th
Century
assumptionp
its name derives from Scaliger's father? Ju1ius?
and not from
Julius Caesar or another calendar named after9
facilitate
decreed
and
him.
by,
KEY
field or portions of
that records in a database.
The
LOGGED-IN
LOGICAL
DEVICE
The default
and
programs
used
to uniquely identify
device that the operating
A:
(typically
logical
data
record
a
system
load
wilt
).
from
DEVICE
A peripheral
oUtPutg
by
or
data
inputp
the convention of one
or storage device addressed
three letters and a colon. Ccmmon
examples:
B:
The
CON:
LST:
The
The
"B" floppy or hard
or screen
RDR:
The
listing
punched
PUN:
The
paper
disk drive
conso1ep
devicep
or printer
tape or card reader
tape or card punch
LST:
Customary
communicates
/
MENU
MENUDEF.FLX
MENUDEF in
menus,
which
program
an interactive
creates
prompts
query
to the operator, and issues
MENUDEF
is
systan and DataFlex comands.
DataFlex is
issues
itself
operating
entirely menu-driven.
DIS
SYSTEM)
(OPERATING
The disk operating
ONLINE
which
designation of the output port of the computer
LiST
drive, or printer.
with the systemG
systm
UPDATE
Updating
information
operator input.
(DOS).
in the files/database
at the time of
QUERY
information from
function of searching for and retrieving
based
on
criteria
according to operator-specified
In DataF1exg
logical operators such as less than or equal to.
which
be
(QIJERY.COM)
can
program
a user
friendly interactive
used
to generate reports and report configurations.
The
a database
RECORD
A
Copyright
sub-unit of
(C)
1984
Data
a data
Access
file,
in turn divided into fields.
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
2.0
User's
GLOSSARY
Manual
F-39
/ A RELATIONSHIPS
logical the
RELATE
records of one data file to the records in
one or more
pairs of fields contain
IDENTICAL
data
in both files. In DataFlex relations are
Refer to the File
defined using the FILEDEF program.
Definition section of this manual.
another
by
having
ROOTNAME
That part of the directory file name to the left of the dot
(up to 8 charactersL
typically
entirely under the user's
related "families" of files.
discretion to use in identifying
rootname
a common
identifies
the various data
In DataF1exp
See
files which together constitute a single database.
EXTENSION
and
FILE
above.
SELECTION
retrieving information
operators for selectively
Used
base
in combinatiom they can perform
file.
the function of ranging»
(i.e. greater than x & less than y).
The
from
1oglca1
a data
"
SETSCREEN
insta11atlon procedure required when installing
Interactive
DataFlex, by means of which DataFlex is provided with the
specific sc'reen control codes for the computer
or terminal on
which
DataFlex is to be run.
An
TPA
That
area
of the computer's memory
Transient Program Area.
and data
which
after the DOS or
is available to hold programs
On B-bit CP/M
and running.
is loaded
disk operating system
requires a minimum of 52K of IPA, and LOOK
systms, DataFlex
for l6-bit systws.
USER
/
OPERATOR
The final
user
or operator of a designed
A non-technical
entry clerk.
systm.
computer
Typically
user.
the
data
The
posItion in which information (data) is displayed
during ENTER or in a report.
WINDOW
screen
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
on
the
06/08/84
F-40
GLOSSARY
DataFlex
2.0
User's
Manual
—
THIS
PAGE
Data
————————
Access
Corporation
—————————
Copyright (c)
1984
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
06/08184
F—41
_———_———===
---------—---==========
====
--—-—----
TABLE
OF ASCII
=====
sÉ!!EéFáé=
CODES
==========
-----—---------—----—-—-----—CTRL
HR
-
DECIMAL
HEX
l
CHR
DECIMAL
HEX
V
086
56
W
087
57
088
58
NR
HEX
l
043
2B
l
044
2C
l
045
2D
I
X
DECIMAL
=============
- —-
---
r
e
NUL
000
00
l
A
SQH
001
Dl
l
El
STX
002
02
l
C
ETX
003
03
l
046
2E
l
Y
089
59
D
EDT
004
04
}
/
047
2F
l
Z
090
5A
E
ENQ
005
05
l
O
048
30
l
091
SB
F
ACK
006
06
l
I
049
31
;
092
5C
G
BEL
007
07
l
2
050
32
:
[
\
]
H
ElS
008
08
l
3
051
33
l
"
094
+
,
.
I
HT
009
09
l
4
052
34
l
J
LF
010
DA
l
5
053
35
l
K
VT
OIl
OB
}
6
054
36
:
L
FF
012
DC
l
7
055
37
l
M
CR
013
OD
l
8
056
38
l
N
SO
014
DE
l
9
057
39
O
SI
015
OF
l
:
058
P
OLE
016
10
:
059
Q
DCl
017
R
DC2
018
II
l
;
<
12
l
S
DC3
019
13
:
_"
093
.
5D
5E
095
5F
096
60
a
b
097
61
098
62
C
d
099
63
l
lOó
64
3A
l
e
l
102
66
060
3C
l
f
l0l
65
3E3
g
103
67
=
061
3D
l
h
104
68
>
062
3E
:
i
105
69
jk
106
6A
107
6B
T
DC4
020
14
l
?
063
3F
l
U
NAK
021
15
l
e
064
40
l
V
SYN
022
16
l
A
065
41
l
l
108
6C
W
ETB
023
17
l
B
066
42
:
m
109
6D
X
CAN
024
18
l
C
067
43
l
n
110
6E
Y
EM
025
19
l
D
068
44
l
o
Z
SUB
026
IA
l
E
069
45
:
P
Ill
6F
[
ESC
027
IB
l
F
070
46
:
q
113
71
\
FS
028
lC
l
G
071
47
l
r
114
72
]
GS
029
ID
l
H
072
48
l
S
115
73
"
RS
030
IE
l
I
073
49
l
t
116
74
_
112
70
US
031
IF
l
J
074
4A
l
u
117
75
SP
032
20
l
K
075
4B
l
V
118
76
!
033
21
l
L
076
4C
l
W
119
77
"
034
22
l
M
077
4D
l
X
120
78
#
035
23
:
N
078
4E
l
y
121
79
S
036
24
l
O
079
4F
l
122
7A
%
037
25
:
P
080
50
l
Z
{
123
7B
&
038
26
l
Q
081
51
l
l
124
7C
'
039
27
:
R
122
52
;
}
125
7D
(
040
28
l
S
lZ3
53
l
"
126
7E
)
041
29
l
T
124
54
l
DEL
127
7F
*
042
2A
l
U
125
55
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
___,_______________________,________=========
Access
Corporation
============
06/08/84
F-42
TABLE
OF ASCII
THIS
DataFlex
CODES
PAGE
—
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
LEFT
INTENTIONALLY
Corporati
2.0
User's
Manual
BLANK
———————————
on
06/08/84
F 43
—~———————~—————————————=====~—————="
——
——————
======
———————
INDEX
==========
_________
! Exclamation poiñt»
# Pound
sigm Macro
$ Dollar
sign
~
——
Macro
command
argument
marker,
====
==========
"""""
"""""""""""""""""==="""."=
marker»
E-15
E-14
E-16
time variable identifier,
question actuatorg B-55
Print format optiom D-7
Window
formatting character7 B-18
Percent sigño Window formatting characterp
Compile
Menu
system
%
& Ampersand
FIELDINDEX
WINDOWINDEX
f
drivem E-ll
driver, E-ll
Quotation mark
delimiter,
D-62
Data
C-4
() Parentheses,,
Expression eva1uatorp
* Asterisk, Expression eva]uator9 C-4
C-4
eva1uatot"»
+ Plus, Expression
Dash,
Expression
evaluatom C-4
-.BAD. Retndex
option, B-42
Decimal
point, Data window characterg B-16
.
Screen
terminating ctiaracterj B-2p B-l5»
/* Slash
/
Data
window
charactem B-16
Expression
evaluator, C-4
B-30
Pagename
identifierí,
C-32
Report
section delimiter,
O Zero, Window
formatting charactem B-18
< Less
than, Expression eva1uaton C-4
C-4
> Greater tham Expression eva1uator?
e
C-38
B-30
"
file
Window
Data
name
suppressom
C-58
formatting character9 B-18
Brackets. Indicatom D-19
[] Underscore,
Command
name characterg
_{} Braces
C-19
ENTRY Format
option delimiting,
Option
de1imitingp D-6
l Bar, Symbol
replacement
identifier.
-
A
D-61
E-20
-
ABORT
Comman6
Report
ACCEPT,
Access
D-34
while
Command,
runningg
B-18,
C-43
D-l
controL Systemp B-54
Addition - Expression, C-4
ALL Indicator
conjoinem D-22
Ampersand
FIELDINDEX
driver, E-ll
driver, E-ll
Indicator conjoiner, D-22
WINDOWINDEX
AND
———————
———————————————
Data
(C)
1984
Access
Copyright
Corporation
07/10/84
DataF1ex
INDEX
F-44
2.0
User's
Manual
D-22
ANY Indicator
conjoiner,
D-16
Command,
APPEND,
Application
B-51
DataF1exg
from
earlier
Creating, A-7g B-l
Customizing, B-ll
Structure9 C-87
Transporting, C-67
Conversion
Argument
C-l
Filename, C-6
Indicator8 C-7
Types,
C-l
C1assesg
Arguments
E-15
commands,
Macro
F-4
Predefinedg
ASCII
Codes,
F-41
Command,
D-13
Data
type, B-22
ASCII
Data
B-3p
typep
B-16
comparison,
- Indicate
D-53
ATTAQI,
Command,
D-22
AS
Errors,
AUTOFIND,
EN7RY
AUT0PAGEp
Command,
C-19
optfom
C-2l, D-3
Format
B+ ISAM,
BACKFIELD,
BACK
B-24
Command,
WINDOW,
Symbol
Barp
BASIC,
Data,
BLOCKS
Body,
Body
B
-
E-4
Flex-key,
replacement
B-LL
identifier,
A-37,
B-37
E-20
D-61
Basic operations in DataF1exp
Batch
Executing DataF1ex
file,
D-35
BEGIN
END, Command,
D-3
BLANKFORM,
Blank
A-26
B-25
B-L,
A-7p
B-26
AUT0DEF9
A-l9p
options,
System
Auto-return,
A-5
from9
D-57
Command,
suppress, Print
AND LOOPS,
RESIDENT
section,
format optiom
Report
REPORT
Format
option,
Macro,
C-33
C-32
option delimiting
de1imiting» D-6
- Indicator defining, D-19
Brackets,
C-34
Breakpoints, Subtotalling,
BREAK Subtotal controller,
C-34
D-43
Bright screen
attribute,
D-45
Buffer, Record,
Bufferingp Index, D-47
Braces,
ENTRY
Braces
Option
D-7
D-35
=========_————
————————————
Copyright (C) 1984 Data
C-19
———————
Access
Corporation
07/10/84
2.0
DataFlex
INDEX
Manual
User's
C
Cp Window
formatting
Command,
C-14
CALC,
CALCULATE
Cotamañd»
-
B-18
character,
C-14
B-37
A-23.
F1ex-KeyD
Capacities
DataFlex,
System,
F-45
F-9
F-9
Capitalization
B-30
in configurations.
CAPSLOCK
option. C-19
option, D-6
lock, Window formatting
Upper
and lower, B-30
ENTRY
Format
Caps
Case,
CHAIN,
Format
B-31L
Command,
Changing
data. A-38
CX4ARACTER, Command,
MECK,
D-14
command,
Macro
B-18
D-32
formatting.
Window
Characters,
option.
B-18
E-18
CHECK=
ENTRY
option,
Format
C-19
D-6
option,
Format
CLEAR
D-52
C-19
Command,
F1ex-Keyp
CLEARFORM,
Command.
D-3
CLEARSCREEN,
Command,
D-42
CLEARWARNING,
Command.
D-34
Command,
D-41
CLEARXY,
CLEAR ALL.
F1ex-Keyg
A-l9,
Clear screen,
CLEAR SPace
CL0SE_INPUT.
CLOSEJJUTPUT,
CMDLINE,
A-2%
A-36,
B-ll
A-36. D-3
Flex-key. A-24,
BACK,
Command,
Command,
Command,
D-17.
B-36
D-62
D-62
D-32
Codes
ASCII,
F-41
Lead-in, A-28
Positioning9 Cursor, A-31
Terminal
controb A-29, A-33
COM/CMD
Comma
Data
Window
files,
A-34
D-62
delimiter.
formatting character,
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
B-18
Corporation
06/08/84
C)ataF1ex
INDEX
F-46
Command
D-34
ABORT,
ACCEPT,
B-l8,
2.0
User°s
Manual
———
———
———————
D-l
D-16
APPEND,
D-13
ASCII,
D-53
ATTACH,
D-3
AUT0PAGEg
C-21.
BACKFIELD,
E-4
END, D-35
BEGIN
BLANKFORM,
D-3
C-14
CALC,
CALCULATE,
C-14
B-33,
D-32
CHAIM.
CHARACTER,
D-14
D-52
CLEAR,
CLEARFORM,
D-3
CLEARSCREEN,
D-42
CLEARWARNING,
D-34
CLEARXY,
D-41
D-62
CLOSE INPUT,
D-62
CLOSE OUTPUT,
CMDLINE,
D-17,
COPYFILE.
D-32
D-56
C-lO
DATE,
DEBUG,
DELETE,
D-33
D-52
E-8
mU1ti-user7
Under
E-lO
DESPOOL,
D-56
DIRECTORY,
DIRECT_INPUT,
D-61
DIRECT_0UTPUT,
D-62
D-2
DISPLAY,
D-8
ENDGROUP,
(WHILE),
END
D-37'
E-4
ENTAGAIN,
ENTDISPLAY,
C-18
ENTER,
ENTEREND,
ENTERGROUP,
D-8
C-26,
C-22
D-8
ENTERMODE,
E-4
ENTRY,
C-19,
D-8
Under
ERASEFILL
muÍti-userg
E-8
D-55
ERROR, D-33
D-56
FILELIST,
D-57
FILELIST
NEXT.
FILELIST
PATHNAME,
D-57
D-48
FIND,
FORMAT, D-6
FORMFEECb C-43
FROM
TO LOOP,
FOR
-
GOSUB,
GOTO,
Copyright
D-30
-
D-37
D-29
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
INDEX
Manual
F-47
"""""""
=
Command
(continued)
GOTOXY.
D-41
HELP,
E-5
IFCHANGE,
INCREMENT,
E-9
INDICATE,
INDICATOR,
D-22
INKEY,
INPUT,
INTEGER,
C-L4
D-19
C-l2,
D-43
D-40
C-ll
D-42
KEYCHECK,
KEYPROC,
E-2
D-ll
LEFT.
LENGTH.
D-15
B-30
Line length.
LOCK,
LOOP
LOOP
E-9
FROM
TO),
(FOR
(REPEAT)»
D-36
E-14
command,
-
Macro
length.
Maximum
line
MID.
D-13
MOVE,
D-37
C-21
C-13
C-13
C-13
MOVEINT,
MOVENUM,
C-13
MOVESTR,
D-5
NAME, B-16,
NUMBER,
C-lO
ON GOSUB, D-31
ON GOTO. D-30
OPEN,
D-47
OUTCLOSE,
OUTFILE,
OUTPUT,
PAD,
D-4
D-4
B-16,
PAGE,
B-16,
PAGEHECK.
POS,
D-5
D-lS
D-l
C-43
D-14
PRINT,
READ,
C-38,
B-l8,
READLN,
D-64
REGISTRATION,
D-58
RELATE,
D-52
RENAME,
REPEAT
REPEAT
D-55
LOOP,
UNTIL,
REREAD,
E-9
REPORTEND.
RUNPROGRAM,
SAVE,
D-51
C-24,
(C)
D-31
D-58
mu1tj-user9
SAVERECORD,
Copyright
D-36
D-35
C-33
RETURN,
C-22,
RIGHT,
D-12
Under
D-7
D-62
E-8
D-51
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-48
2.0
User's
Manual
———
Command
(continued)
SCREENMODE,
D-43
SETa1ANGEg
E-lO
SHOW, D-39
SHOWLN, D-40
STRING,
C-9
SUBTOTAL,
C-38
SYSDATE,
SYSTEM.
D-58
D-57
D-16
TRIM,
UNLOCK,
E-9
(REPEAT),
UNTIL
UPPERCASE.
D-17
D-35
WHILE
END, D-37
- D-66
WRITE,
WRITELN,
D-67
ZEROFILE,
D-54
Commands
Configuratiom B-30
Input/Outputp
ControK D-29
Creating new, E-13
Console
Databasep
D-45
DataF1exp
B-19
C-9
Definition,
Key,
E-l
List by groups,
Modifying, E-13
E-7
Multl-ljser,
Operating system,
FLEX,
D-39
F-6
A-34
B-33
Sequential Input/0utpUtp
String manipulation. D-ll
Structured Controb D-35
Syntaxg
F-6
System,
D-55
Commas,
EmbeddecL
D-61
B-18
Comparisom
Modes
D-25
IFJ
Indicatorg D-21
DataFlex
2.0
Compatibility,
to earlier versions,
Compilation
Compile
time options, B-3ln D-3M E-20
Compile
E-16
time variab1és»
Condltionals in, E-17
Configuration, A-7, B-8» B-29, B-31
Error list, F-14
Files, F-31
Intermedicate code, E-20
Replacements
with, E-14
Compiler, A-8
COMPILER
Copyright
ERROR MESSAGES,
(C)
1984
Data
B-51
F-13
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
INDEX
Manual
——
Conditionalm
CONDITIONAL
Compile
EXECUTION.
E-17
D-19
D-20
Indicatorp
Condition setting,
Configuration
Commands,
time,
F-49
B-30
Compilation, A-7, B-8,
Creation, A-41. B-29
Errors, F-28
B-29,
B-31
A-28
F1ex-KBys,
Function keys,
Multifile,
READ,
8-44,
A-28
C-69
B-46
E-14
iño
Replacements
Running,
B-8, B-29,, B-33
Samples,
C-69
B-29
file,
Source
TerminaL A-25
Terminatloñ» D-34
Transporting, C-67
Configurations
Creatiom B-35
Editing, B-35
Errorm F-27
Configuration limitation,
Conjoiners, Indicatom D-22
Console
Input/Output, Commandm D-39
Constant
Dateg
C-6
Numeric,
C-3
C-2
String,
Control
D-29
Commands,
D-39
Screem
EXECUTION
CONTROLLING
Conversiom
COPYFILE,
Copying.
D-29
verslorm
A-8ó
B-51
D-56
Command,
Files, D-56
Corruptiom Data,
Creating record
ENTER
SEQUENCE,
earlier
DataFlex
Sequence,
F-23
C-27
Procedure, D-46
Creation, Configurations,
B-35
Cursor
Manipulatfon, A-37
Positioning, Codes, A-31
Customizing. Application, B-ll
Copyright (c)
_
1984
Data
———————————
Access
Corporation
——
06/08/84
F-50
DataF1ex
INDEX
"
Dashp
Window
formatting
Data
BASIC,
D-61
Conversion
from
earlier
D-61
A-46,
D-61
MailMerge,
B-18
character,
DataFlex,
B-51
7anguages,
B-21
Record9
Recovery9
D-61
B-44,
Other
F-22
Security9 B-54
Space
requirementm
Structurep B-18
Types,
B-3, B-22
Window,
D-l
Window
formatting,
Database
Commandsg
B-25g
B-22g
B-18,
C-58
D-6
D-45
B-259
D-56
File definition,
A-42
File number.
DATAFLEX
-
B-21
Exportingg D-61
Field, B-21
Importing, B-44,
Indexing. B-23
Database
Manual
B-44
Elements,,
FILES,
User's
F-23
Corruptiom
DBASEII,
D
2.0
files,
C-47
Maximum
UTILITIES,
number
of records,
C-58
B-35
consistencyg Error59
delimiter
' Quotation mark9 O-62
Data
F-28
Data
Comma,
D-62
Quotation
Data
DATA
mark,
D-62
Nameg
element,,
ENTRY,
B-26
C-15
Data
type
B-22
ASCII,
DATE,
B-22,
C-79
NUMERIC,
B-22
Referencing
characterp B-2
pointp B-16
.
Decimal
point, B-16
Diagonal, B-16
Slash, B-16
Data
Data
windows.
B-16
window
Decimal
DATE
Command.
C-lO
Constant,
C-6
Data
type9
B-3,
Julian, C-79
Variable,
Copyright (c)
B-16.
B-2Z,
Data
Access
C-79
C-5
1984
Corporation
07/18/84
User's
2.0
DataFlex
INDEX
Manual
F-51
Dates
C-5
Calcuíat'lona,
C~5
Euro-datep
Julian,
Other
DBASEII,
B-l6, C-5
centuries. B-l6.
Data,
B-22
B-44
D-33
DEBUG» Command,
Debugging,
WIth
Decimal
places
compile time conditionals,
option, C-19
option, D-6
pointp Data window character,
ENTRY
E-17
Format
Format
Decimal
B-16
C-9
DATA ELEMENTS,
C-9
Commands.
F-35
Termm
DECLARING
Definitiom
Definitiorm
Definition of
A-16
- operatcm
terms
DELETE
D-52
Command,
Under
E-8
multi-user,
C-64
Index9
Record,
D-52
DELete
CHARacter,
DELete
RECord,
Flex-key, A-24, B-36
A-2b B-37
F1ex-Keyp
Deleting file, C-66.
Deleting record, B-43
D-55
C-28
ENTER Sequence,
D-46
Procedure,
DATABASES,
DESIGNING
DESPOOL,
Chapter,
E-lO
Commanb
Destructive backspace,
B-21
A-29
D-61
Devices, Input/Output,
Diagonal
Data
charactem B-16
B-30
identifien
C-32
section delimiter.
window
Pagename
Report
A-lO
System,
Diagram,
attributep
Dim screen
DIRECTORY,
Command,
DIRECT_INPUT,
D-43'
D-56
Command,
DIRECT_0UTPUT,
CONTROL
DIRECT
Command,
OF DATA
DIRECT
CONTROL
OF THE
DIRECT
INPUT
D-61
Errors,
F-24
Command,
DISPLAYONLY,
Division
ENTRY
D-l
CONSOLE,
AND OUTPUT,
A-34
Disk drive,
Disk
limitation,
DISPLAY,
D-61
D-62
ENTRY,
D-39
D-2
Format
C-4
option,
C-19
- Expression,
=======
Copyright (c)
——————————————-————-——————
—
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
07/18/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-52
2.0
User's
Manual
—————
Dollar sign
E-16
Compile
time variable identifiem
Floating, B-18
Menu system
question actuatorg B-55
Print format option, D-7
Window
formatting characterp B-18
Down
B-36
F1ex-Keyg
Arrow,
Duplicate
Record,
B-27,
B-24,
C-55
B-42,
C-83
Records,
~ E
Editingp A-38
Configurations,
-
B-35
Database,
A-38
Menu,
B-54
Record,
A-38
Editing
record
ENTER Sequence,
D-46
Procedure,
C-27
A-7, B-l,
Flex-Keyst B-35
Function keys,
B-35
EDITOR,
B-35
Element
Mameg
B-21
Datag
B-21
Chapter, C-l
ELEMENTS
OF CONFIGURATIONS,
command,
E-17
ELSE,
Macro
Embedded,
B-18
Commas,
END$0F$REPORT,
Predefined
Predefined
END.OF.REPORT,
ENDCONAMD,
Macro
ENDGROUP,
command9
Macro
Ending
session,
command,
C-43
E-17
A-38
D-37
Command,
END (WHILE),
ENT$PERMISSIVE,
Predefined
ENTAGAINp
C-43
procedure?
E-14
D-8
Command,
ENDIF,
procedure,
indicator,
C-28
E-4
Commarich
ENTDISPLAY
C-26.
Command,
Under
ENTER
Command,
Macrog
D-8
multi-user,
E-8
C-18
C-15
of operation. C-27
Structure, C-17
Under
multi-user, E-8
ENTER.CLEAR,
User-Defined procedurm
Sequence
C-24
ENTER.DELETE
User-Defined procedure,
Under
mu1tf-user>
C-24
E-8
ENTER.EDIT,
User-Oeffned
procedure9
C-24
ENTER.EXIT,
User-Oefined
procedure,
C-24
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
2.0
DataF1ex
INDEX
Manual
User's
F-53
ENTER.SAVE
User-Defined procedureg
Under
mu1ti-usem E-8
C-22
Command,
ENTEREND,
ENTERGROUP
D-8
Command,
Macro,
C-24
D-8
ENTERMODE,
D-8
Command,
ENTRY
Command,
C-19,
Flex-keys.
E-4
D-8
E-8
multi-user,
Format
optfons9 C-19
C-70
B-99
New record. A-38,
Entry/Editing
Terminatiom A-38
E-8
Under
multi-user,
Entry screem Image, A-20v B-l.
C-19
ENTRY Section, ENTER Macro.
Under
B-15
EQ
modé,
Find
D-48
D-25
mode,
IF Comparison
Indicator comparison
ERASEFILE.
ERR,
modep
Predefined indicator?
Command,
ERROR,
D-21
D-55
Command,
F-33
D-33
Errors
B-26
AUTODEF,
Compile
timep
B-31
Configuration, F-28
F-27
Configuration limitatiom
Conversion, Earlier versions of
Data
consistencyg F-28
F-24
Disk
limitation,
Full disk, F-24
Media
and
Set
uPg
F-25
F-31
F-13
Error list
Compilation.
Runtime.
B-52
F-22
Hardware,
1imitatiom
Mu]tiuserg F-32
Operator, F-21
Memory
Types,
DataF1exp
F-14
F-19
Error messages
Clearing, D-34
Custom,
Types,
D-33.
F-33
F-19
ESCape.
Flex-key, A-l9, A-38, B-37
Euro-date optioñ» C-5
Exclamation
point, Macro argument
D-57
Exiting to operating system,
Exporting, Data, D-61
Expressiom C-4
Expression
evaluatiom Operators,
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
markem
E-15
C-4
Corporation
06/08/84
F-54
DataFlex
INDEX
~
Facilities
of DataFlex, Diagram
FALSE
IF Result, D-24
FALSE
Indicator conditiom D-19
Field
B-27.
Index,
LengtM
F ~
A-13
C-55
A-42b
Name,
B-26
C-54
C-55
numberp
Record
Relationships among, C-50
C-53
Specifications,
Subtota11ing breakpoint, C-34
FIELDINDEX,
Predefined variab1e9 E-ll
FIELDINDEX
AND WINDOWINDEX,
Chapter, E-ll
Field name, RECNUM, E-ll
FILEDEF,
A-9, C-47g D-45
Abort, C-67
earlier versions,,
Converting datap DataFlex
Create/Edit Fields, C-60
Create/Edft indexes, C-63
.DEF fi1e9 C-67
Create
from
definition
C-66
image,
from
Create
screen
definition
Erase
Set
B-51
file.C-56C-66
data
Escaping
Set
Manual
B-22
Overlapping,
Save
User's
B-21
Data,
Print
2.0
frQm,p
C-65
file definition, C-67
deffnition/Exit,
file inactive, C-66
parameters/namesp
file Command,
D-56
FILELIST»
FILELIST
NEXT,
FILELIST
PATHNAME,
Filename
Argumentg
Command.
C-66
D-57
Commanch
D-57
C-6
Conventionsp
F-3
C-58
Database.
Extensionsg
F-3
C-57
Rootnameg
FILENUMBER,
Predefined variable,
D-57
Files
*.CMD,
B-42,
D-58
*.C0M,
D-58
*.DAT,
A-6
*.DEFg
C-67
*.BAD,
B-43
*.FD, A-8, B-51
*.FLX, A-6, B-31
*.FRM,
*.IC,
*.Kx,
*.PRN,
*.RPTí
*.TAG,
B-27,
B-51
E-20
A-CH
A-8
B-39
B-51
A-6,
C-61
_______~____~
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
=
06/08/84
DataF1ex
INDEX
Manual
User's
2.0
F-55
=========—————————————
———————————————————
=============—_—————————————————————
.CÓM/CMD,
A-34
AUTODEF.COM,
B-l,
COMP.COM,
A-8,
COMP.OVF,
A-8
Compilation,
Configuration,
Copying, D-56
Created
B-31
F-31
A-6
READ,
by
B-49
C-72
CUSTOMER.DAT,
CUSTOMER.FRM,
CVTFORM.COM,
C-73
B-51
CVTFRM.COM,
A-8
CVTRPT.COM,
Other
Datm
A-8,
B-51
D-61
languages,
B-25?
Database,
B-25
E-21
COMMAND.DEF,
D-56
Closing, D-62
C-47,
C-72
Definition,
Importing, B-44
Maximum
number
of records,
Opening,
A-27,
C-58
D-61
Relationships among, C-48
DataFlex supplied, A-34, B-35
Names and types, F-3
Deleting, D-55
EDITOR.COM,
A-7, B-I, B-35
FILEDEF.COM,
A-9
A-5.
FILELIST.CFG,
FLEX.CFL,
A-8,
FLEX.COM,
A-6
FLEXERRS.DAT,
D-33,
FLEXERRS.FLX,
F-33
FMAC,
D-39,
D-56
E-13
F-33
E-13
A-9,
FREL.COM,
A-7, B-39
Intermediate COdeg
INVOICE.FRM,
INVT.DAT,
E-20
C-87
C-83
E-7
Lockingg
E-13
PACking,
Macro,
MENU.DAT,
A-7
MENU.FLX,
A-7
MENUDEF.FLX,
B-53
PACK.COM,
PEOPLE,
Program,
QLJERY.COM,
A-41
B-44
READ.FLX,
RUN.OVF,
A-6
Runtimep
Sample,
F-31
A-36
SETSCREE.COM.
SYSFILE,
System,
D-39
D-54
D-54
TERMLIST.CFG,
VENDOR.DAT,
Vendor
E-13
A-9,
B-2
A-34
A-5
C-78
master,
A-36
=====—————————————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
INDEX
F-56
Manual
——————————————
FILES
AND C0MMANDSy
ARGUMENTS
Appendix,
F-3
File definition
F-27
Changing.
C-47
Databaseg
DEFINITION
FILE
C-47
(FILEDEFR
File manipulatiom D-4(L D-55
A-42
File numbem Database,
FILL=7
Print format option, D-7
FIND
D-48
Command,
A-20,
Flex-key,
A-37,
A-36,
B-lO,
B-37
D-48
Mode,
FINDERR,
D-249
Predefined indicator,
Finding, Index, D-48
Finding record, B-lO, C-70
D-49
D-46
Procedureg
C-55
Speed,
ENTRY
FINDREQ,
Reindex
FLEX,
option,
Format
C-19
B-42
option,
Flex-key
CLEAR,
CLEAR
BACK,
RECord,
DELete
A-24,
B-36
A-24,
B-36
B-37
A-22,
B-36
A-l9, A-38,
Arrow9
ESCape.
A-20.
FIND,
B-37
A-37,
A-36,
B-l0g
B-37
E-I
Function definition,
A-23
HELP,
INSert MARacter,
Left arrow. A-24,
NEXT
B-37
A-jg, a-36. B-ll
á4ARacter,
DELete
'
B-ll.
B-37
C-19
all,
SPace
clear
Down
A-37,
A-23,
CALCu1até»
A-32
printing,
Assignments
BACK WINDOW,
RECord,
A-24,
B-36
B-36
A-37,
A-22,
B-lCh
B-38
Predefined 1ndicatorY E-l
PREVious
RETURN,
RECord,
A-l9,
Right arrow,
A-22,
A-37,
B-35
B-lCh
B-38
A-37,
B-36
A-24.
A-38.
A-22.
SAVE RECord.
SUPERFINO,
A-21,
B-38
B-37
B-36
Up Arrow.
B-37
USER,
User-defined,
Flex-keys
A-24
Assignments
printing.
Configuration, A-28
Description, A-36
EDITOR,
B-35
ENTERGROUP
Summary9
When
Macro,
D-8
A-18
activep
Copyright
A-33
(C)
F-33
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
2.0
User's
FLEXERRS.DAT,
D-33,
FLEXERRS.FLXo
F-33
DataFlex
INDEX
Manual
F-33
Operating system command,
Print format option,
Floating, Dollar, B-18
B-33
FLEX
D-7
FL0AT$,
FMAC, A-9
ENTRY
FORCEPUT,
FORMAT,
Command,
F-57
optiom
Format
D-6
C-19
Formatting
Image,
Window,
FORMATTING
B-15
B-18
WITH
Format
options
ENTRY,
C-l9,
B-18.
Window,
IMAGES,
B-15
F-5
F-5
Command,
C-43
FORMFEED,
commands,
Forms
D-I
TO
LOOP,
FOR
FROM
-
-
-
FREL.COM,
D-24,
D-49
B-43
A-7
Full disk, Errors, F-24
F]ex-KeyD
Function definition,
Function keys
Configuration, A-28
EDITOR.
D-37
Command,
Predefined indicator,
B-39
FRee List
program,
Indications of need to usep
A-7
FREe List
uti)1ty,
FOUND,
E-l
B-35
-
G
-
GE
Find
IF
D-48
mode,
mode,
Comparison
Indicator comparison
Getting started, A-33
GLOSSARY,
mQdep
D-21
F-35
GOSUB, Command,
GOTO, Command,
GOTOXY,
D-25
D-30
D-29
D-41
Command,
C-4
F-6
Greater tham Expression,
Groupm
GROUP
Command
Indicator
(list),
conjoiner,
D-22
GT
Find
D-48
mode,
mode,
Comparison
Indicator comparison
IF
D-25
modm
=
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
D-21
"""""""""
Corporation
"
""""""""
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-58
H
section. REPORT
Height, Terminal, A-29
Header
Macro.
2.0
User's
Manual
-
C-32
HELP
E-5
A-23
Command,
Flex-key,
E-5
Pagenamep
B-19
HELP Option, PAGE,
A-29,
D-43
High
intensity,
HOW TO WRITE A CONFIGURATION,
Chapter,
%
I
B-29
_
IF
D-25
Modes,
E-17
Comparisom
Macro
Test,
command,
D-24
E-9
IFCHANGE,
Command,
E-18
IFCLASS,
Macro
command,
E-18
Macro
commanch
IFDEF,
command,
E-18
IFSAMG
Macro
IFTYPE,
IF
command,
Macro
E-18
Result
FALSE,
TRUE»
D-24
D-24
Image
.
Entry screen,
From
dBASE
Formattingp
B-I5.
Report, B-L
Image
section
Pages,
ENTER
A-20g
II,
B-15
B-L B-l5g
C-66
B-45
B-30
B-15
C-18
Macrop
REPORT
Macro,
Importing, Data,
C-32
B-449
D-61
IN
IF
Comparison
mode,
comparison
Indicator
D-25
mode,
D-21
command,
E-16
Macro
Command,
C-14
INCREMENT,
INCLUDEp
Index
BatcM B-39
Bufferlngg D-47
Delete, B-42, C-64
Fiekh B-279 C-55
Finding, D-48
Main,
C-56
Multi-segment,
Number,
C-83
D-48
On-line, B-39
Sequential
Indexed
Access
Metho6
B-24
———————————
'
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
'
Manual
INDEX
——————————————————
Non-OataFlex
B-39,
C-71
Indexesp
Index1ngp
files,
data
B-47
F-59
—
B-23
Data,
A-37,
B-24
Key,
REPORT Macro,
C-39
B-24,
C-54
Segments,
Space
INDICATE7
C-55
requirementsp
D-22
Commaríd,
Indicator
C-7
Argument,
Command,
D-19
C-12,
Modes,
D-21
Condition sett1n>
Conjoiners, D-22
Predefined
D-20
Comparisom
FINDERR,
D-49
FOUND.
D-49
SELECT.
C-38
Indlcatorm D-19
Conditions, D-19
Predefined. D-24.
INKEY,
INPUT.
D-26,
Command,
D-43
Command,
D-40
F-4
Input/Output. Devices, D-61
INSert MARacter, Flex-key,
Installation
DataF1ex,
A-25
A-25
DATAFLEX,
Command,
C-ll
INTEGER,
Compilatiom
Intermedicate codep
In stringsg D-18
Julian,
Dates,
Key
Commandm
B-l6,
E-20
-
J
-
-
K
-
C-5
E-l
Indexing.
A-37,
B-24
Predefined indicatorj
KEY.keyname,
Command,
KEYCHECK.
KEYPRESS
B-36
F-31
Program A-33
Termindk A-5.
INSTALLING
A-24g
E"l
D-42
Predefined indicator.
D-24
E-2
KEYPROC,
Command,
Key procedures, E-2
———
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-60
2.0
User's
Manual
———————————
~
L
"
D-29
Labeb
LASTERR,
LASTIF,
Predefined variab1ep
Predefined ind1cator9
F-33
D-26
LE
Find
IF
mode,
D-48
Comparison
mode,
D-25
modep
Indicator comparison
Lead-in Codem A-28
LEFT,
Command,
D-ll
F}ex-Key9
Left arrowg
LENGTH
Command,
Field,
A-24,,
D-15
Record,
B-22,
C-58
tham Expression.
Line
1ength9
Recorch
Logged-in
C-4
B-30
Command,
E-9
Command,
LOCK,
Locking
E-7
Fi1esg
E-7
A-34
disk dr1ve9
Looping, Report, C-44
D-35
TO),
(FOR
FROM
(REPEAT),
Commancb
LOOP
LOOP
A-29,
Low intensity,
LT
modep
D-48
Find
IF
B-36
B-22
Less
Loops,
D-21
Comparison
modep
comparison
Indicator
D-37
Command,
D-36
D-43
D-25
mode,
D-21
Macro
C-15
ENTER,
Sequence
of operatiom
Structurep C-17
C-27
C-31
C-31
Structure,
Vs.
-
E-8
mU1t1-userp
Under
ENTERGROUP,
D-8
Operations, E-13
REPORT.
M
E-15
sUbroutinep
Macros
Adding,
Changing?
A-9
Copyright (c)
A-9
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
INDEX
Manual
———————————
F-61
—————
Macro
ccmmand
CHECK,
E-18
COMMAND, E-14
ELSE,
E-17
ENDCOMMAND,
E-17
ENDIF,
E-14
l
7
IF
g
IFCLASS,
E-18
IFDEF*
E-18
IFSAME.
E-18
IFTYPE,
INCLUDE,
E-18
E-16
REPLACE,
E-14
SET,
Macro
E-16
# Pound
marker,
command
A-46,
D-61
MallMerge,
Data.
MANIPULATING
DATA ELEMENTS,
FILES,
Chaptem
MANIPULATING
RECORDS,
MANIPULATING
STRINGS)
MANIPULATING
ManuaL
Organization
MATCH
IF Comparison
Indicator
Maximumm
Maximum
Maximum
MEMAVAIL,
Memory*
sigm
Chapter,
Chapterp
E-14
C-13
D-55
D-45
Chapter, D-ll
ob A-l
D-25
modep
comparison
D-21
modm
F-9
Specificatiorm
line length. Commanch C-21
number
of records, Database
Predefined variable, F-25
Available, Determining, F-25
F-25
Requ1rementsp
Memory
1imitat1om Errorm
files.
A-27o
C-58
F-25
Menu
A-35
Configuratiom
Default, B-56
Masterg
Sub-menu,
A-34
B-56
MENU.FLX,
A-35
Menu system,
A-7, A-35. B-33
Menu creation and maintenance,
D-13
MID,
Command,
sign on right,
Find, D-48
Minus
Mode,
Modes9
Print
B-53
format option,
D-7
Comparison
IF, D-25
Indicator,
D-21
MODIFYING
AND EXTENDING
C-13
MOVE. Command,
MOVEINT,
Commandg
DATAFLEX,
Chapter.
E-13
C-13
MOVENUM,
MOVESTR.
Command,
C-13
Command,
C-13
C-83
Multi-segment, Index,
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-62
2.0
User's
Manual
—————————
Multi-User
E-7
Commandsg
ENTER
Méthod
under,
Macro
E-8
E-7
of operation,
C-59
Reread,
E-8
Write privi1egeg
MULTI-USER
FUNCTI0NSg
Chapter,
Multi-ljser operation, E-7
Multi-User system option, A-27,
Multiplicatiom
Expre5sionr C-4
Mu1tiuser9
Errors. F-32
MULTIUSER,
Predefined indicatorj
E-7
E-7
D-24
"
N ~
NAME
Command,
B-lS, D-5
Data
e1ementg
B-26
E1ement8
B-2L C-7
A-43.
Field,
B-26,
C-7
D-5
Windows,
NE
"
IF
Comparison
modep
D-25
D-21
modeg
Indicator comparison
NEWPAGE, Predefined procedure, C-43
NEXT RECord,
Flex-key, A-22, A-37g B-lCh
NOENTER,
ENTRY Format
optiom C-19
E-20
NOISY
O compile time optiom
E-20
NOISY
compile
optiom
time
l
E-20
NOISY 99 compile time optiom
B-47
Non-OataF1ex
data
fi1es7 Indexes9
NOPUT,
ENTRY Format
option, C-19
B-38
NOT
IF Test reversing, D-26
Indicator reversing9 D-19
Notational conventionsy A-2
NOT Indicator
conjoiner, D-22
NUMBER
Command,
Indexg
Record,
C-lO
D-48
A-38.
B-2l.
B-24
Numeric
Constantp
C-3
Data
B-22
C-3
type.
Variable,
NUMERIC
Data
type, B-3,
B-16
<
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataF1ex
User's
2.0
INDEX
Manual
F-63
—————
O
-
-
D-31
ON GQSUB, Command,
D-30
ON GOTO, Command,
Command,
D-47
OPEN,
system
A-34
Operating
Commands,
Exit to» D-57
F-9
Requirements,
TUTORIAL,
OPERATING
A-33
Chapterv
A-5
ORIENTATION,
Chapter,
GUIDE,
Chapter, A-15
Operators, Expression evaluatiom
Operator abort, REPORT MacroD C-43
Options
OPERATIONAL
OPERATOR'S
tímep
Compile
C-4
B-31
Formatting. F-5
Window
formattjngD B-18,
Organization of data, B-21
ENTRY
OF THIS
ORGANIZATION
OR Indicator
OUTCLOSIZ,
Chapter, A-l
MANUAL.
D-22
D-4
D-4
Command,
Command,
F-5
conjoiner,
Command,
OUTFILE,
OUTPUT
D-(Jp
B-16,
D-5
devices. D-4
Output
destination, REPORT
Output
options, QUERY, A-45
Overlapping fields, C-54
To
Macro,
C-42
— P —
Packing
PACK
PAD,
macro
utility,
Command,
files,
E-13
A-9
D-15
PAGE
B-lCj D-l
Command,
HELP Option, B-19
RESIDENT
Option, B-19
PAGEBREAK,
PAGEOECK,
PAGEEND,
PAGEFEED,
C-43,
Predefined indicator,
Command,
D-24
C-43
Predefined variab}eg
Predefined variable,
B-2, B-l5. B-30
C-41
C-41
PAGENAME,
HELP,
E-5
Slash.
Identifier,
8-15. B-30
controb REPORT Macro,
Parentheses, Expressiom C-4
Pagename
Pages,
Page
B-30
Imagep
Passwords,
C-41
B-54
Configuration fi1eg
PEOPLE Entry
screen. B-2
Percent sigm Window formatting
PEOPLE.FRM
El-7
charactem
—-———————————————————————————————
———————
Copyright (C) 1984 Data Access Corporation
C-38
06/08/84
F-64
DataFlex
INDEX
2.0
User's
Manual
———————
P0INTS=
ENTRY
option,
Format
C-19
Format
option, D-6
D-14
P0S9 Command,
A-31
Codesn
Positioningp Cursoru
C-27
Post-Entry sectiom ENTER Macro,
Pound
sigm Macro command marker, E-14
Pre-ENTER
section, ENTER Macrog C-18
Predefined
F-4
Arguments,
Indicators, D-24, D-26.
Variables, C-41, F-4
Predefined indicator
ENT$PERMISSIVE.
ERR,
F-4
C-28
F-33
Flex-key,, E-l
E-l
KEY.keyname,
D-26
LASTIFg
PAGEBREAK.
C-43
SEQEOF,
SEQEOL.
D-65
D-63.
STATUS9
D-27
D-65
Predefined
procedure
END$0F$REPORT,
C-43
C-43
END.OF.REPORT,
NEWPAGE,
C-43
Predefined variable
FIELDINDEX,
E-ll
D-57
FILENUMBER,
F-33
LASTERR,
F-25
MEMAVAIL,
PAGEEND,
PAGEFEED,
C-41
C-41
RECNUM, C-55
WINDOWINDEX,
RECord,
PREVious
PRINT,
Program
Command,
QUERY,
E-ll
Flex-key,
B-l8. C-32,
A-229
A-37,
C-38,
Chapter, B-l
Run time,
REPORT
Prompting, Operator,
-
QUERYING
THE
REPORT
Reindex
Quotation
markp
Report
Macro9
DATABASE.
QLJERY Program,
A-8
Questfonsp
Operator
QUOTED
Q
C-39
-
A-41
Program A-6
Relation to
QUIET,
B-38
A-6
REINDEX,
A-7
PROGRAMMING TUTORIAL,
QtjERY9
B-JÁ9
D-7
runtimep
optlom
Data
format,
C-31
Chapterp
A-41
Menu
system
B-55
B-42
delimiter,
D-62
A-46
——————————————————————————————
—————————————
Copyright (C) 1984 Data Access Corporation
—————————
—
06/08/84
DataFlex
User's
2.0
INDEX
Manual
-
R
F-65
-
RANGE=
ENTRY
D-6
B-43
option,
of
Re-use
@áCéY
READ
Command,
C-19
option.
Format
Format
D-62
B-49
by,
Files created
Command,
D-64
READLN,
B-44
READ'Program,
READ Report
format, A-45
A-8
READ
Utility.
RECNUM
Field nameg E-ll
Predefined variab1ep
C-55
Record
D-45
Buffer,
Dátáo
B-21
Delete, D-52
Duplicate,
Length,
Locking.
Number,
B-24,
B-27o
B-22»
E-7
C-58
A-38.
B-2l.'
C-55
B-24,
C-51
C-55
Selection,
Records
C-83
Duplicate,
Record
number
Field, C-55
Data9
F-22
Recovery,
Command,
REGISTRATION,
D-58
Reindex
Indications of need tOp B-39
In submit
procedure, B-41
Program,
A-7, B-39
RELATE
Command,
REPORT
D-52
Database
files,
Subtotal section,
Relationships among
C-48
C-50
Field,
RENAME,
Commanch
D-55
REPEAT
LOOP,
Command.
D-36
UNTIL,
Macro
Command,
commanch
D-35
E-14
REPEAT
REPLACE,
C-35
-
im Configuratiom
with, Compilation,
Replacements
Replacements
Copyright
(C)
1984
Data
Access
E-14
E-14
Corporation
06/08/84
OataFlex
INDEX
F-66
2.0
User's
Nlanua1
Repor"L
Image,
B-L B-15
C-44
LoQp1ngp
C-31
Macro,,
Reporting withoútv
Structure. C-31
Multiple copies, C-44
C-45
A-43
Query9
Running
total, C-38
Subtota17ing, C-34
Tota11ing, C-34
C-33
REPORTEND,
Command.
REPORTING
AND OUTPUT,
Chapter,
REPORT Macro
C-31
C-39
Indexíng$
Operator abort, C-43
Output destination, C-42
Page
controb C-41
Relation to QUERY, C-31
Selection, C-38
REQUIRED,
ENTRY Format
Qption,
Requiranents
Memory,
C-L9
F-25
F-9
System,
TPA,
F-25
REREAD
E-9
Commamb
C-59
Mujti-User,
words,
F-l
WORDS OF DATAFLEX,
Reserved
RESERVED
RESIDENT
PAGE,
Appendix,
F-l
Option
B-19
C-33
Report,
ENTRY
RETAIN,
Format
ENTRY
RETAINALL,
optiom C-19
option, C-19
Format
RETURN
Commancb
Flex-key.
RIGHT»
C-2b C-bC
A-l9, A-37,
Commañd»
D-12
F1ex-Keyg
Right arrow,
Running,
Configuratiom
Running
totañ REP0RT9
RUNPROGRANb
Command,
D-31
B-35
A-24,
B-8»
B-36
B-33
C-38
D-58
Runtime
Error
Files,
list,
F-31
RUNTIME
ERRORS
Runtime
system.
F-19
AND DIAGNOSIS,
A-6.
Appendix,
F-19
B-33
———————————————————————————————————————————————————————————
Access
1984 Data
07/18/84
Corporation
Copyright (c)
DataFlex 2.0 User's
INDEX
Manual
and
Sample
conffgurations
SAVE
Command,
D-51
REPORT
datap
C-69
C-35
Subtotal section,
E-8
mu1t1-useí>
Under
SAVERECORD,
Command,
record.
Flex-key,
-
C-69
Chapter,
APPLICATIONS.
SAMPLE
S
F-67
D-51
A-38
Save
A-38,
A-22,
B-37
C-55
Speed,
Scanning
database,
A-37
Screen,
Control, D-39
D-43
SCREENMODE,
Command,
Data,
SecUrjtyg
B-54
Indexing. B-24, C-54
SELECT,
Predefined jndicatorp
Selection
Segmentm
QUERY,
Recorch
A-44
C-55
REPORT
Macro,
C-55
Speed,
Semi-colon
C-38
C-38
command
line concatenatom B-30
Predefined indicator, D-24, D-65
SEQEOL,
Predefined indicator, D-24, D-63,
Sequential Input/0utputg Commands, D-61
SEQEOF,
command,
SET.
Macro
SETCHANGE,
Command,
SETSCREE.COM.
A-25,
A-25,
SETSCREEn,
up,
Errors,
SHOW, Command,
Command,
SHOWLN,
Set
"
E-16
E-lO
A-33.
A-33,
F-31
D-39
D-39
D-39
A-36,
D-40
format option, D-7
Databasep
Sizeg
Increasing, C-58
SKIPFOUND,
ENTRY Format
option,
Print
SIGNRT,
Slash
Data
window
C-32
file
Source
Creation,
READ.
Space
Data,
C-19
B-16
character.
B-30
Pagename
identifier,
Report
section delimiter,
Sort, QUERY, A-44
Spaces
D-65
B-29
B-44
im D-18
requirements
A-27,
B-22»
B-25»
data, B-43
Indexing, C-55
Space
suppression, Window
C-58
Deleted
formatting
option,
B-18
—
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
2.0
DataF1ex
INDEX
F-68
User's
Manual
———
——— ————————
F-9
SPECIFICATIONS,
F-9
DataFlex,
C-53
Fie1ch
F-9
Maximumsp
Speed
Save
C-55
recordg
Finding
C-55
recordg
Seiectiorg C-55
Predefined indicatorg
STATUS,
D-27
STRING
C-9
Command,
Constantj C-2
Variab]e9 C-2
Strings, D-18
String manipulation,
Structure
Application, C-87
Data,
Commands,
D-ll
B-18
Commandm
Structured Control,
D-35
B-56
Sub-menus.
Subheader
section, REPORT Macrog C-32
from,
fi1ep Executing DataF1ex
Subroutine. D-29
SUBmit
E-15
Vs.
macrog
Command,
SUBTOTAL,
D-57
C-38
Subtota11íng
Breakpointsó C-34
Report, C-34
Subtotal section, REPORT Macrog C-32
Subtraction, Expressiom C-4
SUPERFINO,
Flex-key, A-2l, B-38
SUPPRESS,
Print format option, D-7
Symbol-checking
characters, E-19
Symbols
Classes,
Types,
Syñtáx>
E-20
E-20
Command"~
SYSDATE,
SYSFILE,
Command,
D-54
F-6
D-58
System
Access
control,
Capacities, F-9
Command,
B-54
D-57
D-55
Commandsg
D-54
Fi1eSg
F-9
Requirementm
System
checkout, A-33
options
Auto-return, A-l99 A-26
Multi-User, A-279 E-7
System
=
————————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
'
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
Manual
User's
2.0
F-69
~ T ~
OF ASCII
TABLE
CODES,
TPA,
TRUE
C-32
F-25
Requirements,
Transporting
Application,
Configuration,
TRIM,
TRUE,
F-41
Appendix,
Terminal
Configuratiom A-25
Height, A-29
Insta11atioñ» A-5g A-25
Width, A-29
Terminals, Predefined, A-25
Terminal
control COCiéSf A-29
Terminal
A-29
in1tializat1on,
Termination
Configuration, D-34
A-38
Entry/Editíng,
F-35
Termm
Definitiorm
Test, IF, D-24
Tota)1ing, Report, C-34
Totals, QUERY, A-44
Total section, REPORT Macro.
Command,
C-67
C-67
D-16
IF Result,
D-24
Indicator condition,
D-19
Types
Data.
B-22
B-3,
-
U
UnderscoreD
Command
name
UNLOCK,
Command,
E-9
charactem
UNTIL
D-35
C-19
(REPEAT),
Command,
database,
A-38,
Updating
UPPERCASE
D-61
0~17
Commancb
ENTRY Format
option, C-19
option, D-6
Up Arrow,
Flex-key, B-36
USER,
Flex-key, B-37
A-24
User-defined, F1ex-Keyp
User-Defined procedure
Format
ENTER.CLEAR.
C-24
ENTER.DELETE,
C-24
E-8
mU1ti-userD
Under
ENTER.EDIT.
C-24
ENTER.EXIT,
C-24
ENTER.SAVE,
C-24
Under
muiti-userj
USING FUNCTION
KEYS,
Utilities,
DataF1exg
Copyright
E-8
Chapter, E-l
B-35
F-33
(C)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
06/08/84
DataFlex
INDEX
F-70
2.0 User's
Manual
————————————
-
y
-
-
W
-
Validation
ENTRY
option,
Format
option,
Format
C-19
D-6
Variable
C-5
Date,
C-3
Numericg
C-2
String,
Variables,
Predefined, C-4L
END,
WHILE
Width,
Command,
Terminal, A-29
Window
Datap
F-4
D-37
D-l
B-18
OPtiOnsg
Format
WINDOWINDEX,
Predefined variab1e9
A-37,
Windows,
B-l, B-2, B-15
B-16
ASCII
type7
DATE
Name9
type,
E-ll
B-16
D-5
NUMERIC.
B-16
typeg
formatting
Characterm B-18
Window
B-LB.
Data,
D-6
B-l8, D-6
Window
formatting character
% Percent sign, C-38
Percent sigm C-38
Reserved,
WorcL~
F-l
OPtiOnSg
WRITE,
Command,
WRITELNp
D-66
Command,
D-67
Multi-User,
Write privilege,
E-8
~ Z _
Window
Zero7
formatting charactem
D-54
ZER0FILE9
Command,
Window
Zero
formatting Qptfong
Zero
fi1L
suppressg
Copyright
(C)
Window
1984
Data
formatting
Access
B-18
B-18
opt1org
Corporation
B-18
06/08/84
DataFlex 2.0 User's
.
OPEN
MANIPULATING
Manual
RECORDS
D-47
—
_
Command
OPEN command
makes
all database
files associated with a file
"df_fi1ename" (data and key files) available for DataFlex operations.
(See
for information on df_fi1ename).
the FILEDEF documentation
SpecÍfica11yg when a file is OPENed, the referenced data fi1e9 and all
buffer space is automatica11y
associated key index files are openedg
allocated in memory» and upon completion of the OPEN operation, all
files are available for on-line processing.
An
OPEN
and
be executed
must
by
be addressed
can
be at the beginning of the configuration
before the files associated with the df_fi1ename
other commands.
should
command(s)
The
FORMAT:
OPEN f'ile_name_arg
{fndex.n}
Where
OPEN is the command,
"fi1e_name_arg" is the "SHORT
NAME"
of the
to be OPENed, and
(created in FILEDEF)
be
represents the number of an index that may optimally
file
loaded
into
records in
a memory
a
"buffer"
to
speed
sequential
access
n
to
file.
EXAMPLE:
OPEN
inventory
OPEN
personnel
index.2
above,
the "index.2" option after the
In the second example
df_fi1ename "personnel" elects to load the second index for that
database
file into a memory buffer.
when
optional index buffering only provides a speed improvement
Random
the access to records is sequential, as in a report.
operations, such as transaction entry to non-sequential records, will
not
benefit from buffering.
The
usefulness of the index buffering option is, as with most other
The number
of the index is established
options, subject to tradeoffs.
as previously
created in the FILEDEF funcin the index definitions
record locations required by FIND
tion.
If the option is se1ectedp
and other accessing
operations are read directly from the computer's
active m«nory (RAM) rather than via a separate (slower) disk access
and file-read
operation.
The
tradeoff when using record buffering is the sacrifice of a portion
of the computer's RAM that is consumed by this process. The overall
number
of files openéd» RAM capacity of
size of your configuration,
determines
how much RAM is available
and so on,
computerp
your
over
and above
what
basic
is required to carry out the application's
the
index-buffering option is
functionm and will dictate whether
worthwh11e9
or even possible.
The
————
Copyright (c)
1984
Data
Access
Corporation
05/16/84
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE BREAKING
THE SEAL ON THE DISKETTE ENVELOPE
DataFlex Registration: What, Why and How
marks
which permanently
Registration is an easy, simple procedure
your copy of
also
documents
company's.
that you have rights
It
DataFlex as exclusively yours or your
DataFlex
When you start the enclosed
software, it will display the
to use DataFlex.
legend
side of this document.
shown
the
reverse
on
"TEMPORARY REGISTRATION"
display
is also illustrated on
sign-on
This
the
chosen
After registration,
will
name.
your
the reverse side of this document.
First the
returned
License
and
Agreement"
be signed
attached
must
"Limited Use Software
register
license
We
Data
Access
to
cannot
without this
Corporation.
your
The Agreement
describes
and
do
Agreement.
with your DataFlex
may not
what you may
and
its
documentation.
software
If
the terms
the envelope
back to your
of the agreement
containing the
dealer
and
to you,
are unacceptable
disks.
Take
the envelope,
request a refund.
DO NOT BREAK THE SEAL on
and these papers
documentation,
If,
sign and date the Agreement.
as we hope, all is agreeable,
Turn it over and referring
to the instructions on the back of this page, carefully
out the "Registration Request".
After you have done this, you may want to make and keep a copy of the Registration
Request
and License
When everything is complete,
Agreement
place
for your records.
Agreement
only the Registration Request/License
in the provided return envelope and
mail it back to us. We will get back to you with your registration code.
fill
If both
out,
With
for
have
have
they
the
will
Registration
be returned
Request
to you
and
the License
processing
without
Agreement
your
are
not completely
request.
filled
registration
these papers,
each single-key
is an appliqué
There
you will also find a sheet of keycap appliqués.
command
(Fiex-Key) in DataFlex as well as some others.
After you
handy
installed DataFlex, you will find these appliqués
for marking the keys you
selected (with the SETSCREE
program)
for each of these functions.
Please
turn this page over for registration instructions.
How to fill out the Registration Request
Registration Request on the
registered.
your copy of DataFlex
the
license
to
or individual) of
The
name
tion
are up to you.
can not be changed
If
next page is the way you tell us in what name you W31lt
The registered
be the owner
(a company
name should
DataFlex.
Capitalization and punctuation of the
use
these factors
are important to you, be very careful. A registrais
done.
once it
Please be careful to also enter the correct
address.
We have to mail
your registration
is used to mail product update
code back to you.
In addition, your registered
address
notices,
technical bulletins and similar material to you.
After you
on with a
have
screen
run SETSCREE
similar to the
install DataFlex
to
one shown
drive=a:
default
OS: (name of your operating
This
program
licensed
to:
Number:
S«iaí
2.1/ DataFlex
Copyright (C) 1984,
All rights reserved
If your
and
you
sign-on
may
in acquiring
a
Data
on
below.
your
system,
DataFlex will
sign
system)
TEMPORARY REGISTRATXON
#### (your seria! number)
Corporatioü, Miami Florida
Access
*DEMO VERSION*,
registration procedure.
full-function DataFlex license.
displays
ignore
the
company
Your
name
dealer
registration does
will be happy to
not apply
tíssist you
When we receive
your filled out Registration Request, we will use the exact name you
entered
This will enable you to replace
on the top line to generate
a unique
access code.
the DataFiex TEMPORARY REGISTRATION sign-on
with the name from your Regiscomplete
You will receive
tration Request.
instructions for installing your registration
had
requested
code
number.
with
registration for "ACME Manufacturyou
name
your
and
and
system
operating
CP/M
was
ing"
your serial number was 25897, after
your
installation your sign-on would look like the following.
If
drive=a:
default
os: cp/m
single user
This
program
licensed
to:
Number:
Serial
DataFlex
Copyright (C) 1984,
All rights reserved.
ACME
25897
Manufacturing
2.1/
Data
Access
Corporation, Miami Florida
DataFlex Registration Request
THE EXACT "REGISTRATION
ENTER
j
LJÁ_I_LJ_LJ_J-J_J
l
l
I
l
I
l
!
!
l
!
I
I
l
BELOW:
BOXES
IN THE
NAME"
i
I
I
I
l
l
!
i
!
!
l
i
I
I
!
(letter, space, comma, etc.) in each box. Any character that you
only one character
is allowed.
Do not exceed the number
keyboard
of boxes provided
type
on your
can
be
used,
but each letter
lower
and
blank).
Upper
boxes
(leave
may
letters
case
excess
For clarity, please place an "X" beneath
any letter
must be distinctly one or the other.
lower
is
be
to
case.
that
Place
diskettes.
number
The DataFlex serial
master
can be found on your DataFlex
license
type is Full Development
you have both a Runtime and a Development
you have only the Runtime disk.
It is Runtime
if
if
Please
License
NOTE:
We
your DataFlex
enter
Type:
Demo
will
enter
Full
licenses
your
serial
Development
do not receive
access code
System
DataFlex
Purchased
Your
Name
Your
Company
disk.
here:
License
your dealer.
Runtime
License
Access Codes
- contact
here:
(leave
the following
Please complete
Computer
Manufacturer
Model
Operating
number
Your
information
about
your
system:
Serial
#
8-Bit
Rev.
blank)
16-Bit
or
From
Addressl
Address2
City
State/Prov
Zip/Postai
Country
Phone
is:
Single
My
computer
For
Floppy Disk
what applications do you
Multi-user
Hard Disk
User
plan
Telex
# Terminals
to use DataFlex?
you using DataFlex in your own business?
Developing
applications for another business?
Do you use an outside
consultant/programmer?
Are
Code
(Y/N)
(Y/N)
(Y/N)
PLEASE
FORM
TO DATA ACCESS
RETURN THE COMPLETED
CORPORATION. A
COPY
OF IT, WITH YOUR ACCESS
CODE,
BE
WILL
RETURNED TO YOU UPON
OF
LICENSE.
PLEASE
BE
VERIFICATION
YOUR
CERTAIN TO COMPLETE
THE
ON
SIDE.
REMEMBER,
DEMO
LICENSES
DO NOT
AGREEMENT
THE OTHER
RECEIVE AN ACCESS CODE.
Limited Use Software License Agreement
a
Corporation (DAC),
Florida, USA corporation, does hereby grant to
license
personal,
to use the following
non-transferable, and non-exclusive
computer
software programs (singularly or collectively referred to as "software") under
the following terms and conditions.
Data
Access
LICENSEE
DataFlex
DataFlex 2.i
Software:
Solely
a
for
Serial
Number:
use on Computer
,
separate
Limited Use Software License Agreement
must be executed
for each software product licensed.)
(A
and
Serial
#
DataFlex Registration
Request
The software is furnished to LICENSEE
for use on the single computer
specified
l.
LICENSEE
above and may be used only on that computer.
and LICENSEE'S
employees
and agents
and will not distribute or
will protect the confidentiality of the Software
otherwise
make available the Software
or documentation,
or any portion thereof, in any
form to any third party. Title to and ownership
of the Software and the documentation
shall at all times remain
in DAC.
warranties with respect to the Software are made by DAC. DAC DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL MEET SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS OF LICENSEE.
DAC SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES OF MERFOR
OR FITNESS
A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
CHANTABILITY
DAC SPECIFIDENIES
FOR
OR
CALLY
ANY LIABILITY
INCIDENTAL
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
2.
No
Éicezse gr: znted h.erezmder,
and the SQftw2re,
mzy not be
LICENSEE
the
the
consent
prior
without
written
or transferred
of DAC
the instaÉIation
except
location upon notice to DAC and
may change
that LICENSEE
dealer.
Nc) right to reproduce
in whole or in part, is granted
or copy any documentation,
LICENSEE.
to
3.
Thií:
(ígIee=.e2t,
assigned
the
by
LICENSEE acknowledges
that it is receiving only a limited license to use the
related
and that DAC retains
and
documentation
Software
title to ail Software and
LICENSEE
acknowledges
has
&cumentation.
that DAC
a valuable proprietary interest
and
in the Software and documentation
that unauthorized disclosure,
transfer, or
copying of the Software is a violation of Federal law.
4.
LICENSEE
Name
Authorized
Signature
Signets
typed
or
printed
'
name
Date
.
D
.
.
m
m
m
Back Space
Back Window
Help!
Supe'"nd
:":
f"2
-q——
Print Screen
Cursor
4;; d'Z'h""'
Calculate
4i·-l4:
Delete Record
Cursor Left
"
1
f.7
:
Cursor Pad Flex-keys""
Function Pad Flex-keys'"
f"1
^
0
f-8
Cursor
Down
End
Up
t¢tU·|"ev'ousReco'd
"3
2
l
PgDn
i
Clear Window
DataFlex
is a Registered
f"9
Trademark,
f·1o
and Flex-key
g"
Save Record
is a Trademark
of Data Access
Insert
Character
Corporation.
¿j
Cursor
Right
Next Record
Delete
Character
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Modify Date : 2016:06:21 10:21:21-07:00 Create Date : 2016:06:21 10:21:21-07:00 Metadata Date : 2016:06:21 10:21:21-07:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:608feca0-0fd2-914a-8211-419c320c3205 Instance ID : uuid:9575b216-66bc-2a42-85bb-b5f4aa3695e5 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Count : 366EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools